diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/12693.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12693.txt | 16103 |
1 files changed, 16103 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/12693.txt b/old/12693.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1b17449 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12693.txt @@ -0,0 +1,16103 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Principal Navigations, Voyages, +Traffiques, and Discoveries of The English Nation, Vol. 11, by Richard +Hakluyt, Edited by Edmund Goldsmid + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: The Principal Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques, and Discoveries of +The English Nation, Vol. 11 + +Author: Richard Hakluyt + +Release Date: June 23, 2004 [eBook #12693] + +Language: English, Latin, Spanish, and Italian + +Character set encoding: US-ASCII + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS, +VOYAGES, TRAFFIQUES, AND DISCOVERIES OF THE ENGLISH NATION, VOL. 11*** + + +E-text prepared by Karl Hagen and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed +Proofreading Team from images generously made available by the Canadian +Institute for Historical Microreproductions + + + +** Transcriber's Notes ** + +The printed edition from which this e-text has been produced retains the +spelling and abbreviations of Hakluyt's 16th-century original. In this +version, the spelling has been retained, but the following manuscript +abbreviations have been silently expanded: + +- vowels with macrons = vowel + 'n' or 'm' +- q; = -que (in the Latin) +- y'e = the; y't = that; w't = with + +This edition contains footnotes and two types of sidenotes. Most footnotes +are added by the editor. They follow modern (19th-century) spelling +conventions. Those that don't are Hakluyt's (and are not always +systematically marked as such by the editor). The sidenotes are Hakluyt's +own. Summarizing sidenotes are labelled [Sidenote: ] and placed before the +sentence to which they apply. Sidenotes that are keyed with a symbol are +labeled [Marginal note: ] and placed at the point of the symbol, except in +poetry, where they are placed at a convenient point. Additional notes on +corrections, etc. are signed 'KTH' + +** End Transcriber's Notes ** + + + + + +THE PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS, VOYAGES, TRAFFIQUES AND DISCOVERIES +OF THE ENGLISH NATION, VOLUME XI + +AFRICA + +Collected by + +RICHARD HAKLUYT, PREACHER. + +AND + +Edited by + +EDMUND GOLDSMID, F.R.H.S. + + + + + + + +Nauigations, Voyages, Traffiques, and Discoueries + +OF THE + +ENGLISH NATION IN AFRICA. + + * * * * * + +The voyage of Henrie Eatle of Derbie, after Duke of Hereford, and lastly + Henry the fourth King of England, to Tunis in Barbarie, with an army of + Englishmen mitten by Polidore Virgill. pag. 1389. + +Franci interim per inducias nacti ocium, ac simul Genuensium precibus +defatigati, bellum in Afros, qui omnem oram insulasque Italiae latiocinijs +infestas reddebant, suscipiunt. Richardus quoque rex Angliae rogatus +auxilium, mittit Henricum comitem Derbiensem cum electa Anglicae pubis manu +ad id bellum faciendum. Igitur Franci Anglique viribus et animis +consociatis in Africam traijciunt, qui vbi littus attigere, eatenus a +Barbaris descensione prohibiti sunt, quoad Anglorum sagittariorum virtute +factum est, vt aditus pateret: in terram egressi recta Tunetam vrbem regiam +petunt, ac obsident. Barbari timore affecti de pace ad eos legates mittunt, +quam nostris dare placuit, vt soluta certa pecuniae summa ab omni deinceps +Italiae, Galliaeque ora mamis abstinerent. Ita peractis rebus post paucos +menses, quam eo itum erat, domum repediatum est. + + +The same in English. + +The French in the meane season hauing gotten some leasure by meanes of +their truce, and being sollicited and vrged by the intreaties of the +Genuois vndertooke to wage warre against the Moores, who robbed and spoyled +all the coasts of Italy, and of the Ilandes adiacent. Likewise Richard the +second, king of England, being sued vnto for ayde, sent Henry the Earle of +Derbie with a choice armie of English souldiers vnto the same warfare. +Wherefore the English and French, with forces and mindes vnited, sayled +ouer into Africa, who when they approached vnto the shore were repelled by +the Barbarians from landing, vntill such time as they had passage made them +by the valour of the English archers. Thus hauing landed their forces, they +foorthwith marched vnto the royall citie of Tunis, and besieged it. Whereat +the Barbarians being dismayed, sent Ambassadours vnto our Christian +Chieftaines to treat of peace, which our men graunted vnto them, vpon +condition that they should pay a certaine summe of money, and that they +should from thencefoorth abstaine from piracies vpon all the coasts of +Italy and France. And so hauing dispatched their businesse, within a fewe +moneths after their departure they returned home. + + +This Historie is somewhat otherwise recorded by Froysard and Holenshed in + manner following, pag 473. + +In the thirteenth yeere of the reigne of King Richard the second, the +Christians tooke in hand a iourney against the Saracens of Barbarie through +sute of the Genouois, so that there went a great number of Lords, Knights, +and Gentlemen of France and England, the Duke of Burbon being their +Generall. Out of England there went Iohn de Beaufort bastarde sonne to the +Duke of Lancaster (as Froysard hath noted) also Sir Iohn Russell, Sir Iohn +Butler, Sir Iohn Harecourt and others. They set forwarde in the latter ende +of the thirteenth yeere of the Kings reigne, and came to Genoa, where they +remayned not verie long, but that the gallies and other vessels of the +Genouois were ready to passe them ouer into Barbarie. And so about midsomer +in the begining of the foureteenth yere of this kings reigne the whole army +being embarked, sailed forth to the coast of Barbary, where neere to the +city of Africa they landed: [Sidenote: The Chronicles of Genoa] at which +instant the English archers (as the Chronicles of Genoa write) stood all +the company in good stead with their long bowes, beating backe the enemies +from the shore, which came downe to resist their landing. After they had +got to land, they inuironed the city of Africa (called by the Moores +Mahdia) with a strong siege: but at length, constrained with the +intemperancy of the scalding ayre in that hot countrey, breeding in the +army sundry diseases, they fell to a composition vpon certaine articles to +be performed in the behalfe of the Saracens: and so 61 dayes after their +arriuall there they tooke the seas againe, and returned home, as in the +histories of France and Genoa is likewise expressed. Where, by Polidore +Virgil it may seeme, that the lord Henry of Lancaster earle of Derbie +should be generall of the English men, that (as before you heard) went into +Barbary with the French men and Genouois. + + * * * * * + +The memorable victories in diuers parts of Italie of Iohn Hawkwood English + man in the reigne of Richard the second, briefly recorded by M. Camden. + +Ad alteram ripam fluuij Colne oppositus est Sibble Heningham, locus +natalis, vt accepi, Ioannis Hawkwoodi (Itali Aucuthum corrupte vocant) quem +illi tantopere ob virtutem militarem suspexerunt, vt Senatus Florentinus +propter insignia merita equestri statua et tumuli honore in eximiae +fortitudinis, fideique testimonium ornauit. Res eius gestas Itali pleno ore +praedicant; Et Paulus Iouius in elogijs celebrat: sat mihi sit Iulij +Feroldi tetrastichon adijcere. + + Hawkoode Angloram decus, et decus addite genti + Italicae, Italico presidiumque solo, + Vt tumuli quondam Florentia, sic simulachri + Virtutem Ionius donat honore tuam. + +William Thomas in his Historie of the common wealthes of Italy, maketh +honorable mention of him twise, to wit, in the commonwealth of Florentia +and Ferrara. + + * * * * * + +The Epitaph of the valiant Esquire M. Peter Read in the south Ile of Saint + Peters Church in the citie of Norwich, which was knighted by Charles the + fift at the winning of Tunis in the yeere of our Lord 1538. + +Here vnder lieth the corpes of Peter Reade Esquire, who hath worthily +serued, not onely his Prince and Countrey, but also the Emperour Charles +the fift, both at his conquest of Barbarie, and at his siege at Tunis, and +also in other places. Who had giuen him by the sayd Emperour for his +valiant deedes the order of Barbary. Who dyed the 29 day of December, in +the yeere of our Lord God 1566. + + * * * * * + +The voyage of Sir Thomas Chaloner to Alger with Charles the fift 1541, + drawen out of his booke De Republica instauranda. + +Thomas Chalonerus patria Londinensis, studio Cantabrigensis, educatione +aulicus, religione pius, vereque Christianus fuit. Itaque cum iuuenilem +aetatem, mentemque suam humanioribus studijs roborasset, Domino Henrico +Kneuetto a potentissimo rege Henrico eius nominis octauo ad Carolum quintum +imperatorem transmisso legato, vna cum illo profectus est, tanquam +familiaris amicus, vel eidem, a consilijs. Quo quidem tempore Carolo quinto +nauali certamine a Genua et Corsica in Algyram in Africa contra Turcas +classem soluente ac hostiliter proficiscente, ornatissimo illo Kneuetto +legato regis, Thoma Chalonero, Henrico Knolleo, et Henrico Isamo, +illustribus viris eundem in illa expeditione suapte sponte sequentibus, +pariterque militantibus, mirifice vitam suam Chalonerus tutatus est. Nam +triremi illa, in qua fuerat, vel scopulis allisa, vel grauissimis pro +cellis conquassata, naufragus cum se diu natatu defendisset, deficientibus +viribus, brachijs manibusque languidis ac quasi eneruatis, prehensa +dentibus cum maxima difficultate rudenti, quae ex altera triremi iam +propinqua tum fuerat eiecta, non sine dentium aliquorum iactura sese tandem +recuperauit, ac domum integer relapsus est. + + +The same in English. + +Thomas Chaloner was by birth a Londiner, by studie a Cantabrigian, by +education a Courtier, by religion a deuout and true Christian. Therefore +after he had confirmed his youth and minde in the studies of good learning, +when Sir Henry Kneuet was sent ambassadour from the mighty Prince Henry the +8. to the Emperour Charles the fift, he went with him as his familiar +friend, or as one of his Councell. At which time the said Charles the 5. +passing ouer from Genoa and Corsica to Alger in Africa in warlike sort, +with a mighty army by sea, that honourable Kneuet the kings ambassadour, +Thomas Chaloner, Henry Knolles, and Henry Isham, right worthy persons, of +their owne accord accompanied him in that expedition, and serued him in +that warre, wherin Thomas Chaloner escaped most wonderfully with his life. +For the galley wherein he was, being either dashed against the rockes, or +shaken with mighty stormes, and so cast away, after he had saued himselfe a +long while by swimming, when his strength failed him, his armes and hands +being faint and weary, with great difficulty laying hold with his teeth on +a cable, which was cast out of the next gally, not without breaking and +losse of certaine of his teeth, at length recouered himselfe, and returned +home into his countrey in safety. + + * * * * * + +The woorthy enterprise of Iohn Foxe an Englishman in deliuering 266. +Christians out of the captiuitie of the Turkes at Alexandria, the 3 of +Ianuarie 1577. + +Among our Merchants here in England, it is a common voiage to traffike into +Spaine: whereunto a ship, being called The three halfe Moones, manned with +38. men, and well fensed with munitions, the better to encounter their +enemies withall, and hauing wind and tide, set from Portsmouth, 1563. and +bended her iourney toward Siuill a citie in Spaine, intending there to +traffique with them. [Sidenote: Iohn Foxe taken 1563.] And felling neere +the Streights, they perceiued themselues to be beset round with eight +gallies of the Turkes, in such wise, that there was no way for them to flie +or escape away, but that either they must yeeld or els be sunke. Which the +owner perceiuing, manfully encouraged his company, exhorting them valiantly +to shew their manhood, shewing them that God was their God, and not their +enemies, requesting them also not to faint in seeing such a heape of their +enemies ready to deuour them; putting them in mind also, that if it were +Gods pleasure to giue them into their enemies hands, it was not they that +ought to shew one displeasant looke or countenance there against; but to +take it patiently, and not to prescribe a day and time for their +deliuerance, as the citizens of Bethulia did, but to put themselues vnder +his mercy. And againe, if it were his mind and good will to shew his mighty +power by them, if their enemies were ten times so many, they were not able +to stand in their hands; putting them likewise in mind of the old and +ancient woorthinesse of their countreymen, who in the hardest extremities +haue alwayes most preuailed and gone away conquerors, yea, and where it +hath bene almost impossible. Such (quoth he) hath bene the valiantnesse of +our countreymen, and such hath bene the mightie power of our God. + +With other like incouragements, exhorting them to behaue themselues +manfully, they fell all on their knees making their prayers briefly vnto +God: who being all risen vp againe perceiued their enemies by their signes +and defiances bent to the spoyle, whose mercy was nothing els but crueltie, +whereupon euery man tooke him to his weapon. + +Then stood vp one Groue the master, being a comely man, with his sword and +target, holding them vp in defiance agaynst his enemies. So likewise stood +vp the Owner, the Masters mate, Boateswaine, Purser, and euery man well +appointed. Nowe likewise sounded vp the drums, trumpets and flutes, which +would haue encouraged any man, had he neuer so litle heart or courage in +him. + +Then taketh him to his charge Iohn Foxe the gunner in the disposing of his +pieces in order to the best effect, and sending his bullets towards the +Turkes, who likewise bestowed their pieces thrise as fast toward the +Christians. But shortly they drew neere, so that the bowmen fel to their +charge in sending forth their arrowes so thicke amongst the Gallies, and +also in doubling their shot so sore vpon the gallies, that there was twise +so many of the Turkes slaine, as the number of the Christians were in all. +But the Turks discharged twise as fast against the Christians, and so long, +that the ship was very sore stricken and bruised vnder water. Which the +Turkes perceiuing, made the more haste to come aboord the Shippe: which ere +they could doe, many a Turke bought it deerely with the losse of their +liues. Yet was all in vaine, and boorded they were, where they found so +hote a skirmish, that it had bene better they had not medled with the +feast. For the Englishmen shewed themselues men in deed, in working +manfully with their browne bils and halbardes: where the owner, master, +boateswaine, and their company stoode to it so lustily, that the Turkes +were halfe dismaied. [Sidenote: The valour and death of their Boatswaine.] +But chiefly the boateswaine shewed himself valiant aboue the rest: for he +fared amongst the Turkes like a wood Lion: for there was none of them that +either could or durst stand in his face, till at the last there came a shot +from the Turkes, which brake his whistle asunder, and smote him on the +brest, so that he fell downe, bidding them farewell, and to be of good +comfort, encouraging them likewise to winne praise by death, rather then to +liue captiues in misery and shame. Which they hearing, in deed intended to +haue done, as it appeared by their skirmish: but the prease and store of +the Turkes was so great, that they were not able long to endure, but were +so ouerpressed, that they could not wield their weapons: by reason whereof, +they must needs be taken, which none of them intended to haue bene, but +rather to haue died: except onely the masters mate, who shrunke from the +skirmish, like a notable coward, esteeming neither the valure of his name, +nor accounting of the present example of his fellowes, nor hauing respect +to the miseries, whereunto he should be put. But in fine, so it was, that +the Turks were victors, whereof they had no great cause to reioyce, or +triumph. Then would it haue grieued any hard heart to see these Infidels so +violently intreating the Christians, not hauing any respect of their +manhood which they had tasted of, nor yet respecting their owne state, how +they might haue met with such a bootie, as might haue giuen them the +ouerthrow; but no remorse hereof, or any thing els doth bridle their fierce +and tirannous dealing, but that the Christians must needs to the gallies, +to serue in new offices: and they were no sooner in them, but their +garments were pulled ouer their eares, and torne from their backes, and +they set to the oares. + +I will make no mention of their miseries, being now vnder their enemies +raging stripes. I thinke there is no man wil iudge their fare good, or +their bodies vnloden of stripes, and not pestered with too much heate, and +also with too much cold: but I will goe to my purpose, which is, to shew +the ende of those, being in meere miserie, which continually doe call on +God with a steadfast hope that he will deliuer them, and with a sure faith +that he can doe it. + +Nigh to the citie of Alexandria, being a hauen towne, and vnder the +dominion of the Turkes, there is a roade, being made very fensible with +strong wals, whereinto the Turkes doe customably bring their gallies on +shoare euery yeere, in the winter season, and there doe trimme them, and +lay them vp against the spring time. In which road there is a prison, +wherein the captiues and such prisoners as serue in the gallies, are put +for all that time, vntill the seas be calme and passable for the gallies, +euery prisoner being most grieuously laden with irons on their legges, to +their great paine, and sore disabling of them to any labour taking. +[Sidenote: The Englishmen carried prisoners vnto an Hauen nere Alexandria.] +Into which prison were these Christians put, and fast warded all the Winter +season. But ere it was long, the Master and the Owner, by meanes of +friends, were redeemed: the rest abiding still by the miserie, while that +they were all (through reason of their ill vsage and worse fare, miserably +starued) sauing one Iohn Fox, who (as some men can abide harder and more +miserie, then other some can, so can some likewise make more shift, and +worke more deuises to helpe their state and liuing, then other some can +doe) being somewhat skilfull in the craft of a Barbour, by reason thereof +made great shift in helping his fare now and then with a good meale. +Insomuch, til at the last, God sent him fauour in the sight of the keeper +of the prison, so that he had leaue to goe in and out to the road, at his +pleasure, paying a certaine stipend vnto the keeper, and wearing a locke +about his leg: which libertie likewise, sixe more had vpon like sufferance: +who by reason of their long imprisonment, not being feared or suspected to +start aside, or that they would worke the Turkes any mischiefe, had +libertie to go in and out at the sayd road, in such maner, as this Iohn Fox +did, with irons on their legs, and to returne againe at night. + +In the yeere of our Lord 1577. in the Winter season, the gallies happily +comming to their accustomed harborow, and being discharged of all their +mastes, sailes, and other such furnitures, as vnto gallies doe appertaine, +and all the Masters and mariners of them being then nested in their owne +homes: there remained in the prison of the said road two hundred threescore +and eight Christian prisoners, who had bene taken by the Turks force, and +were of sixteen sundry nations. Among which there were three Englishmen, +whereof one was named Iohn Foxe of Woodbridge in Suffolke, the other +William Wickney of Portsmouth, in the Countie of Southampton, and the third +Robert Moore of Harwich in the Countie of Essex. Which Iohn Fox hauing bene +thirteene or fourteene yeres vnder their gentle entreatance, and being too +too weary thereof, minding his escape, weighed with himselfe by what meanes +it might be brought to passe: and continually pondering with himself +thereof, tooke a good heart vnto him, in hope that God would not be alwayes +scourging his children, and neuer ceassed to pray him to further his +pretended enterprise, if that it should redound to his glory. + +Not farre from the road, and somewhat from thence, at one side of the +Citie, there was a certaine victualling house, which one Peter Vnticaro had +hired, paying also a certaine fee vnto the keeper of the road. This Peter +Vnticaro was a Spaniard borne, and a Christian, and had bene prisoner about +thirtie yeeres, and neuer practised any meanes to escape, but kept himselfe +quiet without touch or suspect of any conspiracie: vntill that nowe this +John Foxe vsing much thither, they brake one to another their mindes, +concerning the restraint of their libertie and imprisonment. So that this +Iohn Fox at length opening vnto this Vnticaro the deuise which he would +faine put in practise, made priuie one more to this their intent. Which +three debated of this matter at such times as they could compasse to meete +together: insomuch, that at seuen weekes ende they had sufficiently +concluded how the matter should be, if it pleased God to farther them +thereto: who making fiue more priuie to this their deuise, whom they +thought they might safely trust, determined in three nights after to +accomplish their deliberate purpose. Whereupon the same Iohn Fox, and Peter +Vnticaro, and the other sixe appointed to meete all together in the prison +the next day, being the last day of December: where this Iohn Fox certified +the rest of the prisoners, what their intent and deuise was, and how and +when they minded to bring their purpose to passe: who thereunto perswaded +them without much a doe to further their deuise. Which the same Iohn Fox +seeing, deliuered vnto them a sort of files, which he had gathered together +for this purpose, by the meanes of Peter Vnticaro, charging them that euery +man should be readie discharged of his yrons by eight of the clocke on the +the next day at night. + +[Sidenote: Januarie.] On the next day at night, this said Iohn Fox, and his +sixe other companions, being all come to the house of Peter Vnticaro, +passing the time away in mirth for feare of suspect, till the night came +on, so that it was time for them to put in practise their deuise, sent +Peter Vnticaro to the master of the roade, in the name of one of the +Masters of the citie, with whom this keeper was acquainted, and at whose +request he also would come at the first: who desired him to take the paines +to meete him there, promising him, that he would bring him backe againe. +The keeper agreed to goe with him, willing the warders not to barre the +gate, saying, that he would not stay long, but would come againe with all +speede. + +In the meane season, the other seuen had prouided them of such weapons, as +they could get in that house: and Iohn Fox tooke him to an olde rustie +sword blade, without either hilt or pomell, which he made to serue his +turne, in bending the hand ende of the sword, in steed of a pomell, and the +other had got such spits and glaiues as they found in the house. + +The keeper now being come vnto the house, and perceiuing no light, nor +hearing any noyse, straight way suspected the matter: and returning +backward, Iohn Fox standing behind the corner of the house, stepped foorth +vnto him: who perceiuing it to be Iohn Fox, saide, O Fox, what haue I +deserued of thee, that thou shouldest seeke my death? Thou villaine (quoth +Fox) hast bene a bloodsucker of many a Christians blood, and now thou shalt +know what thou hast deserued at my handes: wherewith he lift vp his bright +shining sword of tenne yeeres rust, and stroke him so maine a blowe, as +therewithall his head claue a sunder, so that he fell starke dead to the +ground. Whereupon Peter Vnticaro went in, and certified the rest how the +case stood with the keeper: who came presently foorth, and some with their +spits ranne him through, and the other with their glaiues hewed him in +sunder, cut off his head, and mangled him so, that no man should discerne +what he was. + +Then marched they toward the roade, whereinto they entered softly, where +were six warders, whom one of them asked, saying, who was there? quoth Fox +and his company, all friendes. Which when they were all within, proued +contrary: for, quoth Fox, my masters, here is not to euery man a man, +wherefore looke you play your parts. Who so behaued themselues in deede, +that they had dispatched these sixe quickly. Then Iohn Fox intending not to +be barred of his enterprise, and minding to worke surely in that which he +went about, barred the gate surely, and planted a Canon against it. + +Then entred they into the Gailers lodge, where they found the keyes of the +fortresse and prison by his bed side, and there had they all better +weapons. In this chamber was a chest, wherein was a rich treasure, and all +in duckats, which this Peter Vnticaro, and two more, opening, staffed +themselues so full as they could, betweene their shirts and their skinne: +which Iohn Fox would not once touch, and sayde, that it was his and their +libertie which he sought for, to the honour of his God, and not to make a +marte of the wicked treasure of the Infidels. Yet did these words sinke +nothing into their stomakes, they did it for a good intent: so did Saul +saue the fattest Oxen, to offer vnto the Lord, and they to serue their owne +turnes. But neither did Saul scape the wrath of God therefore, neither had +these that thing which they desired so, and did thirst after. Such is Gods +iustice. He that they put their trust in, to deliuer them from the +tyrannous hands of their enemies, he (I say) could supply their want of +necessaries. + +Nowe these eight being armed with such weapons as they thought well of, +thinking themselues sufficient champions to encounter a stronger enemie, +and coming vnto the prison, Fox opened the gates and doores thereof, and +called forth all the prisoners, whom he set, some to ramming vp the gate, +some to the dressing vp of a certaine gallie, which was the best in all the +roade, and was called the captaine of Alexandria, whereinto some caried +mastes, sailes, oares, and other such furniture as doth belong vnto a +gallie. + +At the prison were certaine warders, whom Iohn Fox and his companie slewe: +in the killing of whom, there were eight more of the Turkes, which +perceiued them, and got them to the toppe of the prison: vnto whom Iohn +Fox, and his company, were faine to come by ladders, where they found a hot +skirmish. For some of them were there slaine, some wounded, and some but +scarred, and not hurt. As Iohn Fox was thrise shot through his apparell, +and not hurt. Peter Vnticaro, and the other two, that had armed them with +the duckats, were slaine, as not able to weild themselues, being so +pestered with the weight and vneasie carying of the wicked and prophane +treasure: and also diuerse Christians were aswell hurt about that skirmish, +as Turkes slaine. + +Amongst the Turkes was one thrust thorowe, who (let vs not say that it was +ill fortune) fell off from the toppe of the prison wall, and made such a +lowing, that the inhabitants thereabout (as here and there scattering +stoode a house or two) came and dawed [Footnote: To awaken: here to bring +back to his senses. I know of no other instance where it bears just this +meaning. "The other side from whence the morning daws." (_Polyolbion +X._)] him, so that they vnderstood the case, how that the prisoners were +paying their ransomes: wherewith they raised both Alexandria which lay on +the west side of the roade, and a Castle which was at the Cities end, next +to the roade, and also an other Fortresse which lay on the Northside of the +roade: so that nowe they had no way to escape, but one, which by mans +reason (the two holdes lying so vpon the mouth of the roade) might seeme +impossible to be a way for them. So was the red sea impossible for the +Israelites to passe through, the hils and rockes lay so on the one side, +and their enemies compassed on the other. So was it impossible, that the +wals of Iericho should fall downe, being neither vndermined, nor yet rammed +at with engines, nor yet any mans wisedome, pollicie, or helpe set or put +thereunto. Such impossibilities can our God make possible. He that helde +the Lyons iawes from renting Daniel asunder, yea, or yet from once touching +him to his hurt: can not he hold the roring cannons of this hellish force? +He that kept the fiers rage in the hot burning Ouen, from the three +children, that praised his name, can not he keepe the fiers flaming blastes +from among his elect? + +Now is the road fraught with lustie souldiers, laborers, and mariners, who +are faine to stand to their tackling, in setting to euery man his hand, +some to the carying in of victuals, some munitions, some oares, and some +one thing, some another, but most are keeping their enemie from the wall of +the road. But to be short, there was no time mispent, no man idle, nor any +mans labour ill bestowed, or in vaine. So that in short time, this gally +was ready trimmed vp. Whereinto euery man leaped in all haste, hoyssing vp +the sayles lustily, yeelding themselues to his mercie and grace, in whose +hands are both winde and weather. + +Now is this gally on flote, and out of the safetie of the roade: now haue +the two Castles full power vpon the gally, now is there no remedy but to +sinke: how can it be auoided? The canons let flie from both sides, and the +gally is euen in the middest, and betweene them both. What man can deuise +to saue it? there is no man, but would thinke it must needes be sunke. + +There was not one of them that feared the shotte, which went thundring +round about their eares, nor yet were once scarred or touched, with fiue +and forty shot, which came from the Castles. Here did God hold foorth his +buckler, he shieldeth now this gally, and hath tried their faith to the +vttermost. Now commeth his speciall helpe: yea, euen when man thinks them +past all helpe then commeth he himselfe downe from heauen with his mightie +power, then is his present remedie most readie prest. For they saile away, +being not once touched with the glaunce of a shot, and are quickly out of +the Turkish canons reach. Then might they see them comming downe by heapes +to the water side, in companies like vnto swarmes of bees, making shew to +come after them with gallies, in bustling themselues to dresse vp the +gallies, which would be a swift peece of worke for them to doe, for that +they had neither oares, mastes, sailes, gables, nor any thing else ready in +any gally. But yet they are carrying them into them, some into one gally, +and some into another, so that, being such a confusion amongst them, +without any certaine guide, it were a thing impossible to ouertake them: +beside that, there was no man that would take charge of a gally, the +weather was so rough, and there was such an amasednes amongst them. And +verely I thinke their God was amased thereat: it could not be but he must +blush for shame, he can speake neuer a word for dulnes, much lease can he +helpe them in such an extremitie. Well, howsoeuer it is, he is very much to +blame, to suffer them to receiue such a gibe. But howsoeuer their God +behaued himselfe, our God shewed himselfe a God indeede, and that he was +the onely liuing God: for the seas were swift vnder his faithfull, which +made the enemies agast to behold them, a skilfuller Pilot leades them, and +their mariners bestirre them lustily: but the Turkes had neither mariners, +Pilot, nor any skilfull Master, that was in a readinesse at this pinch. + +When the Christians were safe out of the enemies coast, Iohn Fox called to +them all, willing them to be thankfull vnto almighty God for their +deliuerie, and most humbly to fall downe vpon their knees, beseeching him +to aide them vnto their friends land, and not to bring them into an other +daunger, sith hee had most mightily deliuered them from so great a +thraldome and bondage. + +Thus when euery man had made his petition, they fell straight way to their +labour with the oares, in helping one another, when they were wearied, and +with great labour striuing to come to some Christian land, as neere as they +could gesse by the starres. But the windes were so diuers, one while +driuing them this way, that they were now in a newe maze, thinking that God +had forsaken them, and left them to a greater danger. And forasmuch as +there were no victuals now left in the gally, it might haue beene a cause +to them (if they had beene the Israelites) to haue murmured against their +God: but they knew how that their God, who had deliuered them out of +AEgypt, was such a louing and mercifull God, as that hee would not suffer +them to be confounded, in whom he had wrought so great a wonder: but what +calamitie soeuer they sustained, they knew it was but for their further +triall, and also (in putting them in mind of their farther miserie) to +cause them not to triumph and glory in themselues therefore. [Sidenote: +Extremity of famine.] Hauing (I say) no victuals in the galley, it might +seeme that one miserie continually fel vpon an others neck: but to be +briefe, the famine grew to be so great, that in 28 dayes, wherein they +were on the sea, there died eight persons, to the astonishment of all the +rest. + +So it fell out, that vpon the 29 day, after they set from Alexandria, they +fell on the Isle of Candie, and landed at Gallipoli, where they were made +much of by the Abbot and Monks there, who caused them to stay there, while +they were well refreshed and eased. [Sidenote: John Fox his sword kept as a +monument in Gallipoli.] They kept there the sworde, wherewith Iohn Fox had +killed the keeper, esteeming it as a most precious iewell, and hung it vp +for a monument. + +When they thought good, hauing leaue to depart from thence, they sayled +along the coast, till they arriued at Tarento, where they solde their +gallie, and deuided it, euery man hauing a part thereof. The Turkes +receiuing so shamefull a foile at their hand, pursued the Christians, and +scoured the seas, where they could imagine that they had bent their course. +And the Christians had departed from thence on the one day in the morning, +and seuen gallies of the Turkes came thither that night, as it was +certified by those who followed Fox, and his companie, fearing least they +should haue bene met with. And then they came a foote to Naples, where they +departed a sunder, euery man taking him to his next way home. From whence +Iohn Fox tooke his iourney vnto Rome, where he was well entertayned of an +Englishman, who presented his worthy deede vnto the Pope, who rewarded him +liberally, and gaue him his letters vnto the king of Spaine, where he was +very well entertained of him there, who for this his most worthy enterprise +gaue him in fee twenty pence a day. From whence, being desirous to come +into his owne countrie, he came thither at such time as he conueniently +could, which was in the yeere of our Lorde God, 1579. Who being come into +England, went vnto the Court, and shewed all his trauell vnto the Councell: +who considering of the state of this man, in that hee had spent and lost a +great part of his youth in thraldome and bondage, extended to him their +liberalitie, to helpe to maintaine him now in age, to their right honour, +and to the incouragement of all true hearted Christians. + + * * * * * + +The copie of the certificate for Iohn Fox, and his companie, made by the + Prior, and the brethren of Gallipoli, where they first landed. + +We the Prior, and Fathers of the Couent of the Amerciates, of the city of +Gallipoli, of the order of Preachers doe testifie, that vpon the 29 of +Ianuary last past, 1577, there came into the said citie a certaine gally +from Alexandria, taken from the Turkes, with two hundreth fiftie and eight +Christians, whereof was principal Master Iohn Fox, an Englishman, a gunner, +and one of the chiefest that did accomplish that great worke, whereby so +many Christians haue recouered their liberties. In token and remembrance +whereof, vpon our earnest request to the same Iohn Fox, he hath left here +an olde sworde, wherewith he slewe the keeper of the prison: which sword we +doe as a monument and memoriall of so worthy a deede, hang vp in the chiefe +place of our Couent house. And for because all things aforesaid, are such +as we will testifie to be true, as they are orderly passed, and haue +therefore good credite, that so much as is aboue expressed is true, and for +the more faith thereof, we the Prior, and Fathers aforesaide, haue ratified +and subscribed these presents. Geuen in Gallipoly, the third of Februarie +1577. + + I Frier Vincent Barba, Prior of the same place, confirme the premisses, + as they are aboue written. + I Frier Albert Damaro, of Gallipoly, Subprior, confirme as much. + I Frier Anthony Celleler of Gallipoly, confirme as aforesaid. + I Frier Bartlemew of Gallipoly, confirme as aboue said. + I Frier Francis of Gallipoly, confirme as much. + + * * * * * + +The Bishop of Rome his letters in the behalfe of Iohn Fox. + +Be it knowen vnto all men, to whom this writing shall come, that the +bringer hereof Iohn Fox Englishman, a Gunner, after he had serued captiue +in the Turkes gallies, by the space of foureteene yeeres, at length, +thorough God his helpe, taking good opportunitie, the third of Ianuarie +last past, slew the keeper of the prison, (whom he first stroke on the +face) together with four and twentie other Turkes, by the assistance of his +fellow prisoners: and with 266. Christians (of whose libertie he was the +author) launched from Alexandria, and from thence arriued first at +Gallipoly in Candie, and afterwardes at Tarento in Apulia: the written +testimony and credite of which things, as also of others, the same Iohn Fox +hath in publike tables from Naples. + +Vpon Easter eue he came to Rome, and is now determined to take his iourney +to the Spanish Court, hoping there to obtaine some reliefe toward his +liuing: wherefore the poore distressed man humbly beseecheth, and we in his +behalfe do in the bowels of Christ, desire you, that taking compassion of +his former captiuitie, and present penurie, you doe not onely suffer him +freely to passe throughout all your cities and townes, but also succour him +with your charitable almes, the reward whereof you shall hereafter most +assuredly receiue, which we hope you will afford to him, whom with tender +affection of pitie wee commende vnto you. At Rome, the 20 of Aprill 1577. + + Thomas Grolos Englishman Bishop of Astraphen. + Richard Silleum Prior Angliae. + Andreas Ludouicus Register to our Soueraigne Lord the Pope, which for + the greater credit of the premises, haue set my seale to these + presents. At Rome, the day and yeere aboue written. + Mauricius Clement the gouernour and keeper of the English Hospitall in + the citie. + + * * * * * + +The King of Spaine his letters to the Lieutenant, for the placing of Iohn + Fox in the office of a Gunner. + +To the illustrious Prince, Vespasian Gonsaga Colonna, our Lieutenant and +Captaine Generall of our Realme of Valentia. Hauing consideration, that +Iohn Fox Englishman hath serued vs, and was one of the most principall, +which tooke away from the Turkes a certaine gallie, which they haue brought +to Tarento, wherein were two hundred, fiftie, and eight Christian captiues: +we licence him to practise, and giue him the office of a Gunner, and haue +ordained, that he goe to our said Realme, there to serue in the said office +in the Gallies, which by our commandement are lately made. And we doe +commaund, that you cause to be payed to him eight ducats pay a moneth, for +the time that he shall serue in the saide Gallies as a Gunner, or till we +can otherwise prouide for him, the saide eight duckats monethly of the +money which is already of our prouision, present and to come, and to haue +regarde of those which come with him. From Escuriall the tenth of August, +1577. + + I the King, + Iuan del Gado. + +And vnder that a confirmation of the Councell. + + * * * * * + +The voyage made to Tripolis in Barbarie, in the yeere 1583. with a ship + called the Iesus, wherein the aduentures and distresses of some + Englishmen are truely reported, and other necessary circumstances + obserued. Written by Thomas Sanders. + +This voyage was set foorth by the right worshipfull sir Edward Osborne +knight, chiefe merchant of all the Turkish company, and one master Richard +Staper, the ship being of the burden of one hundred tunnes, called the +Iesus, she was builded at Farmne a riuer by Portsmouth. The owners were +master Thomas Thomson, Nicholas Carnaby, and Iohn Gilman. The master was +one Aches Hellier of Black-wall, and his Mate was one Richard Morris of +that place: their Pilot was one Anthonie Ierado a Frenchman, of the +prouince of Marseils: the purser was one William Thomson our owners sonne: +the merchants factors were Romane Sonnings a Frenchman, and Richard Skegs +seruant vnto the said master Staper. The owners were bound vnto the +marchants by charter partie therevpon, in one thousand markes, that the +said ship by Gods permission should goe for Tripolis in Barbarie, that is +to say, first from Portsmouth to Newhauen in Normandie, from thence to S. +Lucar, otherwise called Saint Lucas, in Andeluzia, and from thence to +Tripolie, which is in the East part of Africa, and so to returne vnto +London. [Sidenote: Man doth purpose, and God doth dispose.] But here ought +euery man to note and consider the workes of our God, that many times what +man doth determine God doth disappoint. The said master hauing some +occasion to goe to Farmne, tooke with him the Pilot and the Purser, and +returning againe by meanes of a perrie of winde, the boat wherein they +were, was drowned, with the said master, the purser, and all the company: +onely the said Pilot by experience in swimming saued himselfe: these were +the beginnings of our sorrowes. [Sidenote: A new master chosen.] After +which the said masters mate would not proceed in that voiage, and the owner +hearing of this misfortune, and the unwillingnesse of the masters mate, did +send downe one Richard Deimond, and shipped him for master, who did chuse +for his Mate one Andrew Dier, and so the said ship departed on her voiage +accordingly: that is to say, about the 16. of October, in An. 1583. she +made saile from Portsmouth, [Sidenote: The new master died.] and the 18 day +then next following she arriued at Newhauen, where our saide last master +Deimond by a surfeit died. The factors then appointed the said Andrew Dier, +being then masters mate, to be their master for that voiage, who did chuse +to be his Mates the two quarter masters of the same ship, to wit, Peter +Austine, and Shillabey, and for Purser was shipped one Richard Burges. +Afterward about the 8. day of Nouember we made saile forthward, and by +force of weather we were driuen backe againe into Portesmouth, where we +renued our victuals and other necessaries, and then the winde came faire. +About the 29. day then next following we departed thence, and the first day +of December by meanes of a contrarie winde, we were driuen to Plimmouth. +The 18. day then next following, we made foorthward againe, and by force of +weather we were driuen to Falmouth, where we remained vntill the first day +of Ianuary: at which time the winde comming faire, we departed thence, and +about the 20. day of the said moneth we arriued safely at S. Lucar. +[Sidenote: The Iesus arriued in Tripolis.] And about the 9. day of March +next following, we made saile from thence, and about the 18. day of the +same moneth we came to Tripolis in Barbarie, where we were verie well +intertained by the king of that countrey, and also of the commons. The +commodities of that place are sweete oiles: the king there is a merchant, +and the rather (willing to preferre himselfe before his commons) requested +our said factors to traffique with him, and promised them that if they +would take his oiles at his owne price, they should pay no maner of +custome, and they tooke of him certaine tunnes of oile: and afterwarde +perceiuing that they might haue farre better cheape notwithstanding the +custome free, they desired the king to licence them to take the oiles at +the pleasure of his commons, for that his price did exceede theirs: +whereunto the king would not agree, but was rather contended to abate his +price, insomuch that the factors bought all their oyles of the king custome +free, and so laded the same aboord. + +[Sidenote: Another ship of Bristow came to Tripolis.] In the meane time +there came to that place one Miles Dickenson in a ship of Bristow, who +together with our said Factors tooke a house to themselues there. Our +French Factor Romane Sonnings desired to buy a commodity in the market, and +wanting money, desired the saide Miles Dickenson to lend him an hundred +Chikinoes vntill he came to his lodging, which he did, and afterward the +same Sonnings mette with Miles Dickenson in the streete, and deliuered him +money bound vp in a napkin: saying, master Dickenson there is the money I +borrowed of you, and so thanked him for the same: hee doubted nothing lesse +then falshoode, which is seldome knowne among marchants, and specially +being together in one house, and is the more detestable betweene +Christians, they being in Turkie among the heathen. The said Dickenson did +not tell the money presently, vntill he came to his lodging, and then +finding nine Chikinoes lacking of his hundred, which was about three +pounds, for that euery Chikino is woorth seuen shillings of English money, +he came to the sayde Romane Sonnings and deliuered him his handkerchiefe, +and asked him howe many Chikinoes hee had deliuered him! Sonnings answered, +an hundred: Dickenson, said no: and so they protested and swore on both +parts. But in the ende the said Romane Sonnings did sweare deepely with +detestable othes and curses, and prayed God that he might shewe his workes +on him, that other might take ensample thereby, and that he might be hanged +like a dogge, and neuer come into England againe, if he did not deliuer +vnto the sayde Dickenson an hundred Chikinoes. And here beholde a notable +example of all blasphemers, curses and swearers, how God rewarded him +accordingly: for many times it cometh to passe, that God sheweth his +miracles vpon such monstrous blasphemers, to the ensample of others, as +nowe hereafter you shall heare what befell to this Romane Sonnings. + +There was a man in the said towne a pledge, whose name was Patrone Norado, +who the yere before had done this Sonnings some pleasure there. The +foresaid Patrone Norado was indebted vnto a Turke of that towne in the +summe of foure hundred and fiftie crownes, for certain goods sent by him +into Christendome in a ship of his owne, and by his owne brother, and +himselfe remained in Tripolis as pledge vntill his said brothers returne: +and, as the report went there, after his brothers arriual into +Christendome, he came among lewde companie, and lost his brothers said ship +and goods at dice, and neuer returned vnto him againe. + +[Sidenote: A conspiracie practiced by the French Factor, to deceiue a +Turkish marchant of 450 crowns.] The said Patrone Norado being voyde of all +hope, and finding now opportunitie, consulted with the said Sonnings for to +swimme a seaboorde the Islands, and the ship being then out of danger, +should take him in (as after was confessed) and so to goe to Tolan in the +prouince of Marseilis with this Patrone Norado, and there to take in his +lading. + +The shippe being readie the first day of May, and hauing her sayles all +aboorde, our sayde Factors did take their leaue of the king, who very +courteously bidde them farwell, and when they came aboorde, they commanded +the Master and the companie hastily to get out the ship: the Master +answered that it was vnpossible, for that the winde was contrary and +ouer-blowed. And he required vs vpon forfeiture of our bandes, that we +should doe our endeuour to get her foorth. Then went wee to warpe out the +shippe, and presently the king sent a boate aboord of vs, with three men in +her, commaunding the saide Sonnings to come a shoare: at whose coming, the +king demaunded of him custome for the oyles: Sonnings answered him that his +highnesse had promised to deliuer them custome free. But notwithstanding +the king weighed not his said promise, and as an infidell that hath not the +feare of God before his eyes, nor regarde of his worde, albeit he was a +king, hee caused the sayde Sonnings to pay the custome to the vttermost +penie. And afterwarde willed him to make haste away, saying, that the +Ianizaries would haue the oyle ashoare againe. + +These Ianizaries are souldiers there vnder the great Turke, and their power +is aboue the Kings. And so the saide Factor departed from the king, and +came to the waterside, and called for a boate to come aboorde, and he +brought with him the foresaid Patrone Norado. [Sidenote: The beginning of +their troubles, and occasion of all their miserie.] The companie +inquisitiue to know what man that was, Sonnings answered, that he was his +countrymen, a passenger: I pray God said the companie, that we come not +into trouble by this man. Then said Sonnings angerly, what haue you to do +with any matters of mine? if any thing chance otherwise then well, I must +answer for all. + +Now the Turke vnto whom this Patrone Norado was indebted, missing him +(supposed him to be aboorde of our shippe) presently went vnto the King, +and tolde him that hee thought that his pledge Patrone Norado was aboord of +the English ship, whereupon the King presently sent a boat aboord of vs, +with three men in her commanding the said Sonnings to come a shoare, and +not speaking any thing as touching the man, he saide that he would come +presently in his owne boate, but as soone as they were gone, he willed vs +to warp foorth the ship, and saide that he would see the knaues hanged +before he would goe a shoare. And when the king sawe that he came not a +shoare, but still continued warping away the shippe, he straight commaunded +the gunner of the bulwarke next vnto vs, to shoote three shootes without +ball. Then we came all to the said Sonnings, and asked of him what the +matter was that we were shot at, he said that it was the Ianizaries who +would haue the oyle a shoare againe, and willed vs to make haste away, and +after that he had discharged three shots without ball, he commaunded all +the gunners in the towne to doe their indeuour to sinke vs, but the Turkish +gunners could not once strike vs, wherefore the king sent presently to the +Banio: (this Banio is the prison whereas all the captiues lay at night) and +promised if that there were any that could either sinke vs, or else cause +vs to come in againe, he should haue a hundred crownes, and his libertie. +With that came foorth a Spaniard called Sebastian, which had bene an olde +seruitor in Flanders, and he said, that vpon the performance of that +promise, hee would vndertake either to sinke vs, or to cause vs to come in +againe, and therto he would gage his life, and at the first shotte he split +our rudders head in pieces, and the second shotte he shotte vs vnder the +water, and the third shotte he shotte vs through our foremast with a +Coluering shot, and thus he hauing rent both our rudder and maste, and shot +vs vnder water, we were inforced to goe in againe. + +This Sebastian for all his diligence herein, had neither his liberty, nor +an hundred crownes, so promised by the said king, but after his seruice +done was committed againe to prison, whereby may appeare the regard that +the Turke or infidell hath of his worde, although he be able to performe +it, yea more, though he be a king. + +Then, our merchants seeing no remedie, they together with fiue of our +companie went a shoare, and then they ceased shooting: they shot vnto vs in +the whole, nine and thirtie shootes, without the hurt of any man. + +And when our marchants came a shoare, the King commaunded presently that +they with the rest of our companie that were with them, should be cheined +foure and foure, to a hundred waight of yron, and when we came in with the +ship, there came presently aboue an hundred Turks aboord of vs, and they +searched vs, and stript our very clothes from our backes, and brake open +our chests, and made a spoyle of all that we had: and the Christian +caitifes likewise, that came a boord of vs made spoyle of our goods, and +vsed vs as ill as the Turkes did. And our masters mate hauing a Geneua +Bible in his hand, there came the kings chiefe gunner, and tooke it out +from him, who shewed me of it, and I hauing the language, went presently to +the kings treasurer, and tolde him of it, saying, that sith it was the will +of God that we should fall into their handes, yet that they should grant us +to vse our consciences to our owne discretion, as they suffered the +Spaniards and other nations to vse theirs, and he graunted vs: then I told +him that the maister gunner had taken away a Bible from one of our men: the +Treasurer went presently and commaunded him to deliuer vp the Bible againe, +which he did: and within a litle after he tooke it from the man againe, and +I shewed the Treasurer of it, and presently he commaunded him to deliuer it +againe: saying, thou villaine, wilt thou turne to Christianitie againe? for +he was a Renegado, which is one that first was a Christian, and afterwards +becommeth a Turke, and so he deliuered me the Bible the second time. And +then I hauing it in my hand, the gunner came to me, and spake these wordes, +saying, thou dogge, I wil haue the booke in despight of thee, and tooke it +from me, saying: If thou tell the kings treasurer of it any more, by +Mahomet I will be reuenged of thee. Notwithstanding I went the third time +vnto the kings Treasurer, and tolde him of it, and he came with me, saying +thus unto the gunner: by the head of the great Turke, if thou take it from +him againe, thou shalt haue an hundred bastonadoes. And foorthwith he +deliuered me the booke, saying, he had not the value of a pin of the spoyle +of the ship, which was the better for him, as hereafter you shall heare: +for there was none, neither Christian nor Turke that tooke the value of a +peniworth of our goods from vs, but perished both bodie and goods within +seuenteene moneths following, as hereafter shall plainely appeare. + +Then came the Guardian Basha, which is the keeper of the kings captiues, to +fetch vs all a shoare, and then I remembring the miserable estate of poore +distressed captiues, in the time of their bondage to those infidels, went +to mine owne chest, and tooke out thereof a iarre of oyle, and filled a +basket full of white Ruske to carie a shoare with me, but before I came to +the Banio, the Turkish boyes had taken away almost all my bread, and the +keeper saide, deliuer me the iarre of oyle, and when thou commest to the +Banio thou shalt haue it againe, but I neuer had it of him any more. + +But when I came to the Banio, and sawe our Marchants and all the rest of +our company in chaines, and we all ready to receiue the same reward, what +heart in the world is there so hard, but would haue pitied our cause, +hearing or seeing the lamentable greeting there was betwixt vs: all this +happened the first of May 1584. + +[Sidenote: The Englishmen arraigned.] And the second day of the same +moneth, the King with all his counsell sate in Judgment vpon vs. The first +that were had forth to be arraigned, were the Factors, and the Masters, and +the King asked them wherefore they came not a shoare when he sent for them. +And Romaine Sonnings answered, that though he were king on shoare, and +might commaunde there, so was hee as touching those that were vnder him: +and therefore said, if any offence be, the fault is wholly in my selfe, and +in no other. Then foorthwith the king gaue iudgement, that the saide +Romaine Sonnings should be hanged ouer the Northeast bulwarke: from whence +he conueyed the forenamed Patrone Norado, and then he called for our Master +Andrew Dier, and vsed fewe wordes to him, and so condemned him to be hanged +ouer the walles of the Westermost bulwarke. + +Then fell our other Factor (named Richard Skegs) vpon his knees before the +king, and said, I beseech your highnesse either to pardon our Master, or +else suffer me to die for him, for he is ignorant of this cause. And then +the people of that countrey fauouring the said Richard Skegs besought the +king to pardon them both. So then the king spake these wordes: Beholde for +thy sake, I pardon the Master. Then presently the Turkes shouted, and +cried, saying: Away with the Master from the presence of the king. And then +he came into the Banio whereas we were, and tolde vs what had happened, and +we all reioyced at the good hap of master Skegs, that hee was saued, and +our Master for his sake. + +[Sidenote: Master Dier condemned to be hanged ouer a bulwarke.] But +afterward our ioy was turned to double sorrow, for in the meane time the +kings minde was altered: for that one of his counsell had aduised him, that +vnlesse the Master died also, by the lawe they could not confiscate the +ship nor goods, neither captive any of the men: whereupon the king sent for +our Master againe, and gaue him another iudgement after his pardon for one +cause, which was that hee should be hanged. Here all true Christians may +see what trust a Christian man may put in an infidels promise, who being a +King pardoned a man nowe, as you haue heard, and within an houre after +hanged him for the same cause before a whole multitude: and also promised +our Factors their oyles custome free, and at their going away made them pay +the vttermost penie for the custome thereof. + +[Sidenote: A Frenshman turned Turke, in hope of his life, and afterwards +was hanged.] And when that Romaine Sonnings saw no remedy but that he +should die, he protested to turne Turke, hoping thereby to haue saued his +life. Then said the Turke, if thou wilt turne Turke, speake the words that +thereunto belong: and he did so. Then saide they vnto him, Now thou shalt +die in the faithe of a Turke, and so hee did, as the Turkes reported that +were at his execution. And the forenamed Patrone Norado, whereas before he +had libertie and did nothing he then was condemned slaue perpetuall, except +there were paiment made of the foresaid summe of money. + +Then the king condemned all vs, who were in number sixe and twentie, of the +which, two were hanged (as you haue heard) and one died the first day wee +came on shoare, by the visitation of Almightie God: and the other three and +twentie he condemned slaues perpetually vnto the great Turke, and the ship +and goods were confiscated to the vse of the great Turke: and then we all +fell downe vpon our knees, giuing God thankes for this sorrowfull +visitation, and giuing our selues wholy to the Almightie power of God, vnto +whom all secrets are knowen, that he of his goodnesse would vouchsafe to +looke vpon vs. + +Here may all true Christian hearts see the wonderfull workes of God shewed +vpon such infidels, blasphemers, whoremasters, and renegate Christians, and +so you shall reade in the ende of this booke, of the like vpon the +vnfaithfull king and all his children, and of as many as tooke any portion +of the said goods. + +[Sidenote: Euery fiue men allowed but two pence of bread a day.] But first +to shewe our miserable bondage and slauerie, and vnto what small pittance +and allowance wee were tied, for euery fiue men had allowance but fiue +aspers of bread in a day, which is but two pence English: and our lodging +was to lye on the bare boards, with a very simple cape to couer vs, wee +were also forceably and most violently shauen, head and beard, and within +three dayes after, I and six more of my fellowes, together with fourescore +Italians and Spaniards were sent foorth in a Galeot to take a Greekish +Carmosell, which came into Africa to steale Negroes, and went out of +Tripolis vnto that place, which was two hundred and fourtie leagues thence, +but wee were chained three and three to an oare, and wee rowed naked aboue +the girdle, and the Boteswaine of the Galley walked abaft the maste, and +his Mate afore the maste, and eche of them a bulls pissell dried in their +handes, and when their diuelish choller rose, they would strike the +Christians for no cause: and they allowed vs but halfe a pound of bread a +man in a day without any other kinde of sustenance, water excepted. And +when we came to the place whereas wee saw the Carmosell, we were not +suffered to haue neither needle, bodkin, knife, or any other weapon about +vs, nor at any other time in the night, vpon paine of one hundred +bastonadoes: wee were then also cruelly manackled in such sort, that we +could not put our handes the length of one foote asunder the one from the +other, and euery night they searched our chaines three times, to see if +they were fast riueted: Wee continued fight with the Carmosell three +houres, and then wee tooke it, and lost but two of our men in that fight, +but there were slaine of the Greekes fiue, and foureteene were cruelly +hurt, and they that were sound, were presently made slaues and chained to +the oares: and within fifteene dayes after we returned againe into +Tripolis, and then wee were put to all maner of slauerie. [Sidenote: The +Turkes builded a church.] I was put to hewe stones, and other to cary +stones, and some to draw the Cart with earth, and some to make morter, and +some to draw stones, (for at that time the Turkes builded a church:) And +thus we were put to all kinde of slauerie that was to be done. And in the +time of our being there, the Moores that are the husbandmen of the countrey +rebelled against the king, because he would haue constrained them to pay +greater tribute then heretofore they had done, so that the Souldiours of +Tripolis marched foorth of the towne to haue ioyned battell against the +Moores for their rebellion, and the King sent with them foure pieces of +Ordinance, which were drawen by the captiues twenty miles into the Country +after them, and at the sight thereof the Moores fled and then the Captaines +returned backe againe. Then I and certaine Christians more were sent twelue +miles into the countrey with a Cart to lode timber, and we returned againe +the same day. + +[Sidenote: The Christians sent 3. times a weeke 30 miles to fetch wood.] +Nowe the king had 18. captiues, which three times a weeke went to fetch +wood thirtie miles from the towne: and on a time he appointed me for one of +the 18. and wee departed at eight of the clocke in the night, and vpon the +way as wee rode vpon the camels, I demaunded of one of our company, who did +direct vs the way? he sayd, that there was a Moore in our company which was +our guide: and I demavnded of them how Tripolis and the wood bare one of +the other? and hee said, East Northeast and West Southwest. And at midnight +or neere thereabouts, as I was riding vpon my camel, I fell asleepe, and +the guide and all the rest rode away from me, not thinking but I had bene +among them. When I awoke, and finding my selfe alone durst not call nor +hallow for feare least the wilde Moores should heare me, because they holde +this opinion, that in killing a Christian they do God good seruice: and +musing with my selfe what were best for me to do, if I should goe foorth, +and the wilde Moores should hap to meete with mee, they would kill mee: and +on the other side, if I should returne backe to Tripolis without any wood +or company, I should be most miserably vsed: therefore of two euils, rather +I had to goe foorth to the loosing of my life, then to turne backe and +trust to their mercie, fearing to bee vsed as before I had seene others: +for vnderstanding by some of my company before, howe Tripolis and the saide +wood did lie one off another, by the North starre I went forth at +aduenture, and as God would haue it, I came right to the place where they +were, euen about an houre before day: there altogether wee rested and gaue +our camels prouender, and assoone as the day appeared, we rode all into the +wood: and I seeing no wood there, but a sticke here and a sticke there, +about the bignesse of a mans arme growing in the sand, it caused mee to +maruile how so many camels should be loden in that place. The wood was +Iuniper, we needed no axe nor edge toole to cut it, but pluckt it vp by +strength of hands rootes and all, which a man might easily do, and so +gathered it together, a little at one place and so at another, and laded +our camels, and came home about seuen of the clocke that night following: +because I fell lame, and my camel was tired, I left my wood in the way. + +[Sidenote: Eighteene captiues run away from Tripolis.] There was in +Tripolis that time a Venetian, whose name was Benedetto Venetiano, and +seuenteene captiues more of his company, which ranne away from Tripolis in +a boate, and came in sight of an Island called Malta, which lieth fourtie +leagues from Tripolis right North, and being within a mile of the shoare, +and very faire weather, one of their company said, In dispetto de Dio +adesso venio a pilliar terra, which is as much to say: In the despite of +God I shall now fetch the shoare, [Sidenote: The iudgement of God vpon +blasphemers.] and presently there arose a mighty storme, with thunder and +raine and the wind at North, their boate being very small, so that they +were inforced to beare vp roome, and to sheare right afore the winde ouer +against the coast of Barbarie from whence they came, and rowing vp and +downe the coast, their victuals being spent, the 21. day after their +departure they were inforced through the want of food to come ashoare, +thinking to haue stolne some sheepe: but the Moores of the country very +craftily perceiuing their intent, gathered together a threescore horsemen, +and hid themselues behinde a sandie hill, and when the Christians were come +all a shoare, and past vp halfe a mile into the countrey, the Moores rode +betwixt them and their boate, and some of them pursued the Christians, and +so they were all taken and brought to Tripolis, from whence they had before +escaped: and presently the king commaunded that the foresaide Benedetto +with one more of his company should lose their eares, and the rest should +be most cruelly beaten, which was presenly done. [Sidenote: The Greene +Dragon.] This king had a sonne which was a ruler in an Island called Gerbi, +whereunto arriued an English shippe called the Greene Dragon, of the which +was Master one M. Blonket, who hauing a very vnhappy boy in that shippe, +and vnderstanding that whosoeuer would turne Turke should be well +enterteined of the kings sonne, this boy did runne a shoare, and +voluntarily turned Turke. Shortly after the kings sonne came to Tripolis to +visite his father, and seeing our company, hee greatly fancied Richard +Burges our Purser, and Iames Smith: they were both yong men, therefore he +was very desirous to haue them to turne Turkes, but they would not yeeld to +his desire, saying: We are your fathers slaues, and as slaues wee will +serue him. Then his father the king sent for them, and asked them if they +would turne Turkes? And they saide: If it please your highnesse, Christians +we were borne, and so we will remaine, beseeched the king that they might +not bee inforced thereunto. [Sidenote: The Kings sonne had a captiue that +was sonne to one of the Queenes Maiesties guard, that was forced to turne +Turke.] The king had there before in his hosue a sonne of a yeoman of our +Queenes guard, whom the kings sonne had inforced to turne Turke, his name +was Iohn Nelson: him the king caused to be brought to these yong men, and +thea said vnto them: Wil not you beare this your countreymen company, and +be Turke as hee is? And they saide, that they would not yeeld thereunto +during life. But it fell out, that within a moneth after, the kings sonne +went home to Gerbi againe, being sixe score miles from Tripolis, and +carried our two foresaid yong men with him, which were Richard Burges, and +Iames Smith: and after their departure from vs, they sent vs a letter, +signifying that there was no violence shewed vnto them as yet, but within +three dayes after they were violently vsed, for that the kings sonne +demaunded of them againe, if that they would turne Turke? Then answered +Richard Burges, a Christian I am, and so I will remaine. Then the kings +sonne very angerly said vnto him: By Mahomet thou shall presently be made +Turke. Then called he for his men, and commaunded them to make him Turke, +and they did so, and circumcised him, and would haue had him speake the +wordes that thereunto belonged, but he answered them stoutly that he would +not: and although they had put on him the habite of a Turke, yet sayd he, A +Christian I was borne, and so I will remaine, though you force me to doe +otherwise. + +And then he called for the other, and commaunded him to be made Turke +perforce also: but he was very strong, for it was so much as eight of the +kings sonnes men could doe to holde him, so in the ende they circumcised +him, and made him Turke. Now to passe ouer a little, and so to shewe the +maner of our deliuerance out of that miserable captiuitie. + +[Sidenote: The first motion for those Engmens deliuerie.] In May aforesaid, +shortly after our apprehension, I wrote a letter into England vnto my +father dwelling in Tauistoke in Deuonshire, signifying vnto him the whole +estate of our calamities: and I wrote also to Constantinople, to the +English Embassadour, both which letters were faithfully deliuered. But when +my father had receiued my letter, and vnderstood the trueth of our mishap, +and the occasion thereof, and what had happened to the offenders, he +certified the right honourable the earle of Bedford thereof, who in short +space acquainted her highnesse with the whole cause thereof, and her +Maiestie like a most mercifull princesse tendering her Subiects, presently +tooke order for our deliuerance. Whereupon the right worshipful sir Edward +Osborne knight directed his letters with all speed to the English +Embassadour in Constantinople, to procure our deliuery: and he obtained the +great Turkes Commission, and sent it foorthwith to Tripolis, by one Master +Edward Barton, together with a Iustice of the great Turkes, and one +souldiour, and another Turke, and a Greeke which was his interpretour, +which could speake besides Greeke, Turkish, Italian, Spanish and English. +And when they came to Tripolis, they, were well interteined. And the first +night they did lie in a Captaines house in the towne: all our company that +were in Tripolis came that night for ioy to Master Barton and the other +Commissioners to see them. Then master Barton said vnto vs, welcome my good +countreymen, and louingly interteined vs, and at our departure from him, he +gaue vs two shillings, and said, Serue God, for to morrow I hope you shall +be as free as euer you were; We all gaue him thankes and so departed. + +The next day in the morning very early, the King hauing intelligence of +their comming, sent word to the keeper, that none of the Englishmen +(meaning our company) should goe to worke. Then he sent for Master Barton +and the other Commissioners, and demaunded of the saide Master Barton his +message: the Iustice answered, that the great Turke his Souereigne had sent +them vnto him, signifying that he was informed that a certaine English +shippe, called the Iesus, was by him the saide king confiscated, about +twelue months since, and nowe my saide Souereigne hath here sent his +especiall commission by vs vnto you, for the deliuerance of the saide +shippe and goods, and also the free libertie and deliuerance of the +Englishmen of the same shippe, whom you haue taken and kept in captiuitie. +[Sidenote: The Englishmen released.] And further the same Iustice saide, I +am authorized by my said soueraigne the great Turke to see it done: And +therefore I commaund you by vertue of this commission, presently to make +restitution of the premisses or the value thereof: and so did the Justices +deliuer vnto the King the great Turkes commission to the effect aforesaide, +which commission the king with all obedience receiued: and after the +perusing of the same, he foorthwith commanded all the English captiues to +be brought before him, and then willed the keeper to strike off all our +yrons, which done, the king said, You Englishmen, for that you did offend +the lawes of this place, by the same lawes therefore some of your company +were condemned to die as you knowe, and you to bee perpetuall captiues +during your liues: notwithstanding; seeing it hath pleased my soueraigne +lord the great Turke to pardon your said offences, and to giue you your +freedome and libertie, beholde, here I make deliuery of you to this English +Gentleman: so hee deliuered vs all that were there, being thirteene in +number, to Master Barton, who required also those two yong men which the +Kings sonne had taken with him. Then the king answered that it was against +their lawe to deliuer them, for that they were turned Turkes: and touching +the ship and goods, the king said, that he had solde her, but would make +restitution of the value, and as much of the goods as came vnto his hands, +and so the king arose and went to dinner, and commaunded a Iew to goe with +Master Barton and the other commissioners, to shew them their lodging, +which was a house prouided and appointed them by the said king. And because +I had the Italian and Spanish tongues, by which their most trafique in that +countrey is, Master Barton made me his Cater to buy his victuals for him +and his company, and deliuered me money needfull for the same. Thus were +wee set at libertie the 28. day of April, 1585. + +[Sidenote: The plagues and punishments that happened to the King and his +people.] Nowe to returne to the kings plagues and punishments, which +Almighty God at his will and pleasure sendeth vpon men in the sight of the +world, and likewise of the plagues that befell his children and others +aforesaide. First when we were made bondmen, being the second day of May +1584. the king had 300. captiues, and before the moneth was expired, there +died of them of the plague 150. [Sidenote: The king lost 150. camels taken +by the wilde Moores.] And whereas they were 26. men of our company, of whom +two were hanged, and one died the same day that wee were made bondslaues: +that present moneth there died nine more of our company of the plague, and +other two were forced to turne Turkes as before is rehearsed: and on the +fourth day of June next following the king lost 150 camels, which were +taken from him by the wilde Moores: and on the 28. day of the saide moneth +of Iune, one Geffrey Maltese, a renegado of Malta, ranne away to his +countrey, and stole a Brigandine which the king had builded for to take the +Christians withall, and carried with him twelue Christians more which were +the kings captiues. Afterward about the tenth day of Iuly next following, +the king road foorth vpon the greatest and fairest mare that might be +seene, as white as any swanne: hee had not ridden fourtie paces from his +house, but on a sudden the same mare fell downe vnder him starke dead, and +I with sixe more were commaunded to burie her, skinne, shoes and all, which +we did. And about three moneths after our deliuerie, Master Barton, with +all his residue of his company departed from Tripoli to Zante, in a +vessell, called a Settea, of one Marcus Segoorus, who dwelt in Zante, and +after our arriuall at Zante we remained fifteene dayes there aboorde our +vessell, before wee could haue Platego, (that is, leaue to come a shoare) +because the plague was in that place, from whence wee came: and about three +dayes after we came a shoare, thither came another Settea of Marseils bound +for Constantinople. [Sidenote: Two Englishmen shipped to Constantinople +with M. Barton.] Then did Master Barton, and his company, with two more of +our company, shippe themselues as passengers in the same Settea, and went +to Constantinople. But the other nine of vs, that remained in Zante, about +three moneths after, shipt our selues in a ship of the said Marcus +Segoorus, which came to Zante, and was bound for England. [The souldiers of +Tripolis kil the king.] In which three moneths, the souldiers of Tripolie +killed the said king. And then the kings sonne, according to the custome +there, went to Constantinople, to surrender vp all his fathers treasure, +goods, captiues, and concubines, vnto the great Turke, and tooke with him +our saide Purser Richard Burges, and Iames Smith, and also the other two +Englishmen, which he the said kings sonne had inforced to become Turkes, as +is aforesayd. And they the said Englishmen finding now some opportunitie, +concluded with the Christian captiues which were going with them vnto +Constantinople, being in number about one hundred and fiftie, to kill the +kings sonne, and all the Turkes which were aboorde of the Galley, and +priuily the saide Englishmen conueyed vnto the saide Christian captiues, +weapons for that purposes. And when they came into the maine Sea, towards +Constantinople (vpon the faithfull promise of the sayde Christian captiues) +these foure Englishmen lept suddenly into the Crossia, that is, in the +middest of the Galley, where the canon lieth, and with their swordes +drawne, did fight against all the foresaid Turkes, and for want of helpe of +the saide Christian captiues, who falsly brake their promises, the said +Master Blonkets boy was killed, and the sayde Iames Smith, and our Pursser +Richard Surges, and the other Englishman, were taken and bound into +chaines, to be hanged at their arriual in Constantinople: and as the Lordes +will was, about two dayes after, passing through the gulfe of Venice, at an +Island called Cephalonia, they met with two of the duke of Venice his +Gallies, [Marginal Note: Two Gallies of Venice tooke the King of Tripolie +his galley, and killed the kings sonne, and all the Turkes in it, and +released all the Christians being in number 150.] which tooke that Galley, +and killed the kings sonne, and his mother, and all the Turkes that were +there, in number 150. and they saued the Christian captiues, and would haue +killed the two Englishmen because they were circumcised, and become Turkes, +had not the other Christian captiues excused them, saying, that they were +inforced to be Turkes, by the kings sonne, and shewed the Venetians also, +how they did enterprise at sea to fight against all the Turks, and that +their two fellowes were slaine in that fight. Then the Venetians saued +them, and they, with all the residue of the said captiues, had their +libertie, which were in number 150. or thereabouts, and the said Gallie, +and all the Turkes treasure was confiscated to the vse of the state of +Venice. And from thence our two Englishmen traueiled homeward by land, and +in this meane time we had one more of our company, which died in Zante, and +afterward the other eight shipped themselues at Zante, in a shippe of the +said Marcus Segorus, which was bound for England: and before we departed +thence, there arriued the Assension, and the George Bonauenture of London +in Cephalonia, in a harbour there, called Arrogostoria, whose Marchants +agreed with the Marchants of our shippe, and so laded all the marchandise +of our shippe into the said ships of London, who tooke vs eight in as +passengers, and so we came home, and within two moneths after our arriuall +at London, our said Purser Richard Surges, and his fellow came home also: +for the which we are bound to praise Almightie God, during our liues, and +as duetie bindeth vs, to pray for the preseruation of our most gracious +Queene, for the great care her Maiestie had ouer vs, her poore Subjects, in +seeking and procuring of our deliuerance aforesaide: and also for her +honourable priuie Counsell, and I especiall for the prosperitie and good +estate of the house of the late deceased, the right honourable the Earle of +Bedford, whose honour I must confesse, most diligently at the suite of my +father now departed, traueiled herein: for the which I rest continually +bounden to him, whose soule I doubt not, but is already in the heauens in +ioy, with the Almightie, vnto which place he vouchsafe to bring vs all, +that for our sinnes suffered most vile and shameful death vpon the Crosse, +there to liue perpetually world without ende, Amen. + + * * * * * + +The Queenes letters to the Turke 1584. for the restitution of the shippe + called the Iesus, and the English captiues detained in Tripolie in + Barbarie, and for certaine other prisoners in Argier. + +ELIZABETHA, Dei ter maxhni et vnici coeli terraeque conditoris gratia, +Angliae, Franciae, et Hiberniae Regina, fidei Christianae contra omnes +omnium inter Christianos degentium, Christique nomen falso profitentium +idololatrias, inuistissima et potentissima defensatrix: augustissimo, +inuictissimoque principi, Zultan Murad Can, Musulmanici regni dominatori +potentissimo, imperijque Orientis Monarchae, supra omnes soli et supremo +salutem, et multos cum summa rerum optimarum affluentia foelices et +fortunatos annos. + +Augustissime et potentissime Imperator, biennio iam peracto, ad Caesaream +vestram Maiestatem scripsimus, vt dilectus noster famulus Guilielmus +Harebornus, vir ornatissimus pro legato nostro Constantinopoli, alijsque +Musulmanici imperij ditionibus, sublimi vestra authoritate reciperetur: +simul etiam Angli subditi nostri commercium et mercaturam, in omnibus illis +prouincijs exerceant, non minus libere quam Galli, Poloni, Veneti, Germani, +caeterique vestri confoederati, qui varias Orientis partes peragrant, +operam nauantes, vt mutuis commercijs coniungatur Oriens, cum Occidente. + +Quae priuilegia, cum nostris subditis Anglis inuictissima vestra Maiestas +literis et diplomate suo liberalissime indulserit, facere non potuimus, +quin quas maximas animus noster capere potest gratias, eo nomine ageremus: +sperantes fore, vt haec instituta commerciorum ratio maximas vtilitates, et +commoda vtrinque, tam in imperij vestri ditiones, quam regni nostri +prouincias secum adferat. + +Id vt plane fiat, cum nuper subditi nostri nonnulli Tripoli in Barbaria et +Argellae ab eius loci incolis voluntatem vestram forte nescientibus male +habiti fuerint, et immaniter diuexati, Caesaream vestram Maiestatem +beneuole rogamus, vt per Legatum nostrum eorum causam cognoscas, et +postremo earum prouinciarum proregibus ac praefectis imperes, vt nostri +libere in illis locis, sine vi aut iniuria deinceps versari, et negotia +gerere possint. + +Et nos omni opera vicissim studebimus ea omnia praestare, quae Imperatoriae +vestrae Maiestati vllo pacto grata fore intelligemus: quam Deus vnicus +mundi conditor optimus maximus diutissime incolumem et florentem seruet. +Datae in palatio nostro Londini, quinto die Mensis Septembris: anno IESV +CHRISTI Seruatoris nostri, 1584. Regni vero nostri vicessimo sexto. + + +The same in English. + +Elizabeth, by the grace of the most high God, and onely maker of heauen and +earth, of England, France and Ireland Queene, and of the Christian faith, +against all the Idolaters and false professors of the Name of CHRIST +dwelling among the Christians, most inuincible and puissant defender: to +the most valiant and invincible Prince, Zultan Murad Can, the most mightie +ruler of the kingdome of Musulman, and of the East Empire the onely and +highest Monarch aboue all, health and many happy and fortunate yeres, with +great aboundance of the best things. + +Most noble and puissant Emperour, about two yeeres nowe passed, wee wrote +vnto your Imperiall Maiestie, that our welbeloued seruant, William +Hareborne, a man of great reputation and honour, might be receiued vnder +your high authoritie, for our Ambassadour in Constantinople, and other +places, vnder the obedience of your Empire of Musulman: And also that the +Englishmen, being our Subiects, might exercise entercourse and marchandize +in all those Prouinces, no lesse freely then the French, Polonians, +Venetians, Germanes, and other your confederats, which traueile through +diuers of the East parts: endeuouring that by mutuall trafique, the East +may be ioyned and knit to the West. + +Which priuileges, when as your most puissant Maiestie, by your letters and +vnder your dispensation most liberally and fauourably granted to our +Subiects of England, wee could no lesse doe, but in that respect giue you +as great thankes, as our heart could conceiue, trusting that it wil come to +passe, that this order of trafique, so well ordeined, will bring with it +selfe most great profits and commodities to both sides, as well to the +parties subiect to your Empire, as to the Prouinces of our kingdome. Which +thing that it may be done in plaine and effectuall maner, whereas some of +our Subiects of late at Tripolis in Barbarie, and at Argier, were by the +inhabitants of those places (being perhaps ignorant of your pleasure) euill +intreated and grieuously vexed, wee doe friendly and louingly desire your +Imperial Maiestie, that you will vnderstand their causes by our +Ambassadour, and afterward giue commaundement to the Lieutenants and +Presidents of those Prouinces, that our people may henceforth freely, +without any violence, or iniurie, traueile, and do their businesse in those +places. + +And we againe with all endeuour, shall studie to performe all those things, +which we shall in any wise vnderstand to be acceptable to your Imperiall +Maiestie, which God, the onely maker of the world, most best and most +great, long keepe in health, and flourishing. Given in our pallaice at +London, the fift day of the moneth of September, in the yeere of IESVS +CHRIST our Saviour, 1534. And of our raigne, the 26. + + * * * * * + +The Turkes letter to the King of Tripolis in Barbarie, commanding the + restitution of an English ship, called the Iesus, with the men, and + goods, sent from Constantinople, by Mahomet Beg, a Iustice of the Great + Turkes, and an English Gentleman, called Master Edward Barton. Anno 1584. + +Honourable, and worthy Bassa Romadan Beglerbeg, most wise and prudent Iudge +of the West Tripolis, wee wish the ende of all thy enterprises happie, and +prosperous. By these our highnesse letters, wee certifie thee, that the +right honourable, William Hareborne, Ambassadour in our most famous Porch, +for the most excellent Queenes Maiestie of England, in person, and by +letters hath certified our highnesse, that a certaine shippe, with all her +furniture, and artillerie, worth two thousand duckets, arriuing in the port +of Tripolis, and discharged of her lading and marchandize, paide our +custome according to order, and againe, the marchants laded their shippe +with oyle, which by constraint they were inforced to buy of you and hauing +answered in like maner the custome for the same, determined to depart: a +Frenchman assistant to the Marchant, vnknowen to the Englishmen, caried +away with him another Frenchman indebted to a certaine Moore in foure +hundred duckets, and by force caused the Englishmen, and shippe to depart: +who neither suspecting fraude, nor deceite, hoised sailes. In the meane +time, this man, whose debter the Frenchman had stollen away, went to the +Bassa with the supplication, by whose meanes, and force of the Castle, the +Englishmen were constrained to returne into the port, where the Frenchman, +author of the euill, with the Master of the ship an Englishman, innocent of +the crime were hanged, and sixe and twentie Englishmen, cast into prison, +of whom through famine, thirst, and stinke of the prison, eleuen died, and +the rest like to die. Further, it was signified to our Maiestie also, that +the marchandise and other goods, with the shippe, were worth 7600. duckets: +which things if they be so, this is our commandemeht, which was granted and +giuen by our Maiestie, that the English shippe, and all the marchandize, +and whatsoeuer else taken away bee wholy restored, and that the Englishmen +be let goe free, and suffered to returne into their countrey. Wherefore +when this our commaundement shall come vnto thee, wee straightly commaund, +that the foresaid businesse be diligently looked vnto, and discharged. And +if it be so, that a Frenchman, and no Englishman hath done this craft, and +wickednesse vnknowen to the Englishmen, and as authour of the wickednesse +is punished, and that the Englishmen committed nothing against the peace +and league, or their articles: also if they payd custome according to +order, it is against law, custome of Countreys, and their priuilege, to +hinder or hurt them. Neither is it meete, their shippe, marchandise, and +all their goods taken, should be withholden. We will therefore, that the +English shippe, marchandize, and all other their goods, without exception, +be restored to the Englishmen: also that the men bee let goe free, and if +they will, let none hinder them, to returne peaceably into their Countrey: +do not commit, that they another time complaine of this matter, and how +this businesse is dispatched, certifie vs at our most famous porche. + +Dated in the Citie of Constantinople, in the 992. yeere of Mahomet, and in +the ende of the moneth of October; and in the yeere of IESVS 1584. + + * * * * * + +A letter of Master William Hareborne, the English Ambassadour, Ligier in + Constantinople, to the Bassa Romadan, the Beglerbeg of Tripolis in + Barbarie, for the restoring of an English shippe called the Iesus, with + the goods, and men, detained as slaues, Anno 1585. + +Molto magnifico Signor, + +Noi ha stato significato per diuerse lettere di quanto ha passato circa +diuina naue nostra chiamata Iesus, sopra il quale in agiuto di Ricciardo +Skegs, vno de gli nostri mercanti di essa gia morto, veniua vn certo +Francese per sopra cargo, chiamato Romano Sonings, il quale per non esser +ben portato secondo che doueua, volendo importer seco vn altro Francese +debitore a certi vostri sensa pagarcene, per giusticia era appiccato col +patron Inglese Andre Dier, che come simplice credendo al detto Francese, +senza auedercene de la sua ria malitia non retornaua, quando da vostra +magnifica Signoria gli era mandato. La morte del detto tristo Francese +approuiamo como cosa benfatta. [Sidenote: Edoardo Barton et Mahumed Beg.] +Ma al contrario, doue lei ha confiscato la detta naue e mercantia en essa, +et fatto sciaui li marinari, como cosa molto contraria a li priuilegij dal +Gran Signor quattro anni passati concessi, et da noi confirmati di parte de +la Serenissima Magesta d'Ingilterra nostra patrona, e molto contraria a la +liga del detto Gran Signor, il quale essendo dal sopra detto apieno +informato, noi ha conceduto il suo regale mandamento di restitutione, la +qual mandiamo a vostra magnifica Signoria col presente portator Edoardo +Barton, nostro Secretario, et Mahumed Beg, droguemano di sua porta excelsa, +con altre lettere del excellentissimo Vizir, et inuictissimo capitan di +mar: chiedendo, tanto di parte del Gran Signor, quanto di sua Serenissima +Magesta di V. S. M. che gli huomini, oglij, naue col fornimento, danare, et +tutti altri beni qualconque, da lei et per vestro ordine da gli nostri +tolti siano resi a questo mio Secretario liberamente senza empacho alcuno, +como il Gran Signor da sua gratia noi ha conceduto, specialmente per esser +detti oglij comprati per ordine di sua Serenissima Magesta, per prouisione +della Corte sua. Il qual non facendo, protestiamo per questa nostra al +incontra di esso tutti futuri danni che puono succedere per questa cagione, +como authore di quelli, contrario a la Santa liga giurata de li duoi Rei, +patroni nostri, como per li priuilegij, che lei mostrera il nostra, consta: +per obseruatione de gli quali noi stiamo di fermo en questa excelsa Porta. +Et cosi responderete nel alro mondo al solo Iddio, et qua al Gran Signor +questo massimo peccato commesso da lei al incontra di tanti poueracchi, che +per questa crudelta sono in parte morti, in parti retenuti da esso en duro +cattiuerio. Al contrario, piacendo lei euitar questo incommodo et +restarcene en gratia del Signor Iddio, et li nostri patroni, +amicheuolmente, (como conuien a par vostro di mostrarsi prudente +gouernatore, et fidel seruitor al patrono) ad impirete questa nostra +guistissima domanda, per poter resultarui a grand honore et commodo per la +tratta di marchantia, che faronno a laduenire li nostri in quella vostra +prouincia. Li quali generalmente, tanto quelli, como tutti altri che nel +mar riscontrarete, siano, secondo che manda il Grand Signor, de vostra +Signoria magnifica amicheuolmente recolti et receunti: Et noi non +mancharemo al debito di ottimo amico en qualconche occurenza vostra, +piacendo lei amicitia nostra como desideramo. Il Signor Iddio lei conceda +(adimpiendo questa nostra giusta rechiesta, per cauar noi di piu futura +fatica in questo negocio, et lei di disgratia) ogni vera felicita, et +supremo honore. Data in Palazzo nostro che fu da Rapamat appresso Pera di +15. di Genero 1585. + +Il Ambassiatore de la Majesta Serenissima d'Ingilterra, amico de vostra +Signoria magnifica, piacendo lei. + + +The same in English. + +Right honourable Lord, it hath bene signified vnto vs by diuers letters, +what hath fallen out, concerning a certaine shippe of ours, called the +Iesus, into which, fore the helpe of Richard Skegs, one of our Marchants in +the same, nowe deceased, there was admitted a certaine Frenchman called +Romaine Sonnings, which for his ill behauiour, according to his deserts, +seeking to cary away with him another Frenchman, which was indebted to +certaine of your people, without paying his creditours, was hanged by +sentence of iustice, together with Andrew Dier, the master of the said +ship, who simply and without fraude, giuing credite to the said Frenchman, +without any knowledge of his euil fact, did not returne when hee was +commaunded, by your honourable Lordship. The death of the said lewde +Frenchman we approue as a thing well done, but contrarywise, whereas your +Lordship hath confiscated the said ship with the goods therein, and hath +made slaues of the Mariners, as a thing altogether contrary to the +priuileges of the Grand Signior, granted foure yeeres since, and confirmed +by vs on the behalfe of the most excellent the Queenes Maiestie of England +our Mystresse, and altogether contrary to the league of the saide Grand +Signior, who being fully informed of the aforesaid cause, hath granted vnto +vs his royall commandement of restitution, which we send vnto your +honourable Lordship, by the present bearer Edward Barton our Secretaire, +and Mahomet Beg, one of the Iustices of his stately Court, with other +letters of the most excellent Admirall, and most valiant Captaine of the +Sea, requiring your honourable Lordship, as well on the behalfe of the +Grand Signior, as of the Queenes most excellent Maiestie, my Mystresse, +that the men, oyles, shippe, furniture, money, and all other goods +whatsoeuer, by your Lordship, and your order taken from our men, be +restored vnto this my Secretary freely, without delay, as the Grand Signior +of his goodnesse hath graunted vnto vs, especially in regard that the same +oyles were bought by the commaundement of our Queenes most excellent +Maiestie, for the prouision of her Court. Which if you performe not, wee +protest by these our leters against you, that you are the cause of all the +inconueniences which may ensue vpon this occasion, as the authour thereof, +contrary to the holy league sworne by both our Princes, as by the +priuileges, which this our seruant will shewe you, may appeare. For the +seeing of which league performed, wee remaine here as Ligier in this +stately Court. And by this meanes you shall answere in another world vnto +God alone, and in this world vnto the Grand Signior, for this hainous sinne +committed by you against so many poore soules, which by this your cruelty +are in part dead, and in part detained by you in most miserable captiuitie. +Contrarywise, if it shall please you to auoyd this mischiefe, and to +remaine in the fauour of Almighty God, and of our Princes, you shall +friendly fulfill this our iust demaund (as it behooueth you to shew your +selfe a prudent Gouernour, and faithfull seruant vnto your Lord) and the +same may turne to your great honour, and profite, by the trade of +marchandize, which our men in time to come, may vse in that gouernment of +yours: which generally, as well those poore men, as all others, which you +shall meete at the sea, ought to be according to the commandement of the +Grand Signior, friendly entertained and receiued of your honourable +Lordship, and we will not faile in the dueties of a speciall friend, +whensoeuer you shall haue occasion to vse vs, as we desire. Almighty God +grant vnto your Lordship (in the fulfilling of this our iust request, +whereby wee may be deliuered from further trouble in this matter, and your +selfe from further displeasure) all true felicitie, and increase of honour. + +Giuen in our Pallace from Rapamat in Pera, the 15 of Ianuarie 1585. + + * * * * * + +The voyage passed by sea into Aegypt, by Iohn Euesham Gentleman. Anno 1586. + +The 5 of December 1586 we departed from Grauesend in the Tiger of London, +wherein was Master vnder God for the voyage Robert Rickman, and the 21. day +at night we came to the Isle of Wight: departing from thence in the morning +following we had a faire winde, so that on the 27 day wee came in sight of +the rocke of Lisbone, and so sayling along we came in sight of the South +Cape, the 29 of the same, and on the morrowe with a Westerly winde we +entered the straights: and the second of Ianuary being as high as Cape de +Gate, we departed from our fleete towards Argier. And the 4 day we arriued +at the port of Argier aforesaid, where we staied till the first of March. +[Sidenote: Tunis.] At which time we set saile towardes a place called +Tunis, to the Eastward of Argier 100 leagues, where we arriued the 8 of the +same. This Tunis is a small citie vp 12 miles from the sea, and at the port +or rode where shipping doe ride, is a castle or fort called Goletta, +sometimes in the handes of the Christians, but now of the Turkes; at which +place we remained till the third of Aprill: at which time wee set saile +towardes Alexandria, and hauing sometime faire windes, sometime contrary, +we passed on the 12 day betweene Sicilia and Malta (where neere adioyning +hath beene the fort and holde of the knights of the Rhodes) and so the 19 +day we fell with the Isle of Candy, and from thence to Alexandria, where we +arriued the 27 of April, and there continued till the 5 of October. + +[Sidenote: The description of Alexandria.] The said citie of Alexandria is +an old thing decayed or ruinated, hauing bene a faire and great citie neere +two miles in length, being all vauted vnderneath for prouision of fresh +water, which water commeth thither but once euery yeere, out of one of the +foure riuers of paradise (as it is termed) called Nilus, which in September +floweth neere eighteene foote vpright higher then his accustomed manner, +and so the banke being cut, as it were a sluce, about thirty miles from +Alexandria, at a towne called Rossetto, it doth so come to the saide Citie, +with such aboundance, that barkes of twelue tunne doe come vpon the said +water, which water doth fill all the vaults, cesternes, and wels in the +said Citie, with very good water, and doth so continue good, till the next +yeere following: for they haue there very litle raine or none at all, yet +have they exceeding great dewes. Also they haue very good corne, and very +plentifull; all the Countrey is very hot, especially in the moneths of +August, September, and October. Also within the saide Citie there is a +pillar of Marble, called by the Turkes, King Pharaoes needle, and it is +foure square, euery square is twelue foote, and it is in height 90 foote. +Also there is without the wals of the said Citie, about twentie score +paces, another marble pillar, being round, called Pompey his pillar: this +pillar standeth vpon a great square stone, euery square is fifteene foote, +and the same stone is fifteene foote high, and the compasse of the pillar +is 37 foote, and the height of it is 101 feete, which is a wonder to thinke +how euer it was possible to set the said pillar vpon the said square stone. +The port of the said Citie is strongly fortified with two strong Castles, +and one other Castle within the citie, being all very well planted with +munition: [Sidenote: Cayro.] and there is to the Eastward of this Citie, +about three dayes iourney the citie of Grand Cayro, otherwise called +Memphis: it hath in it by report of the registers bookes which we did see, +to the number of 2400 Churches, and is wonderfully populous, and is one +dayes iourney about the wals, which was iourneyed by one of our Mariners +for triall thereof. Also neere to the saide citie there is a place called +the Pyramides, being as I may well terme it, one of the nine wonders of the +world: that is, seuen seuerall places of flint and marble stone, foure +square, the wals thereof are seuen yards thicke in those places that we did +see: the squarenes is in length about twentie score euery square, being +built as it were a pointed diamond, broad at the foote, and small or narrow +at the toppe: the heigth of them, to our judgement, doth surmount twise the +heighth of Paules steeple: within the said Pyramides, no man doth know what +there is, for that they haue no entrance but in the one of them, there is a +hole where the wall is broken, and so we went in there, hauing torch light +with vs, for that it hath no light to it, and within the same, is as it +were a great hall, in the which there is a costly tombe, which tombe they +say, was made for kinq Pharao in his life time, but he was not buried +there, being drowned in the red sea: also there are certaine vauts or +dungeons, which goe downe verie deepe vnder those Pyramides with faire +staires, but no man dare venter to goe downe into them, by reason that they +can cary no light with them, for the dampe of the earth doth put out the +light: the red sea is but three dayes iourney from this place, and +Ierusalem about seuen dayes iourney from thence: but to returne to Cayro. +There is a Castle wherein is the house that Pharaoes wiues were kept in, +and in the Pallace or Court thereof stande 55 marble pillars, in such +order, as our Exchange standeth in London: the said pillars are in beigth +60 foote: and in compasse 14 foote: also in the said Citie is the castle +were Joseph was in prison, where to this day they put in rich men, when the +king would haue any summe of money of them: there are seuen gates to the +sayd prison, and it goeth neere fiftie yardes downe right: also, the water +that serueth this castle, commeth out of the foresaide riuer of Nilus, vpon +a wall made with arches, fiue miles long, and it is twelue foote thicke. +Also there are in old Cayro two Monasteries, the one called S. Georges, the +other S. Maries: and in the Courts where the Churches be, was the house of +king Pharao. In this Citie is great store of marchandize, especially +pepper, and nutmegs, which come thither by land, out of the East India: and +it is very plentifull of all maner of victuals, especially of bread, +rootes, and hearbes: to the Eastwards of Cayro, there is a Well, fiue miles +off called Matria, and as they say, when the Virgin Marie fled from +Bethleem, and came into AEgypt, and being there, had neither water, nor any +other thing to sustaine them, by the prouidence of God, an Angell came from +heauen, and strake the ground with his wings, where presently issued out a +fountaine of water: and the wall did open where the Israelites did hide +themselues, which fountains or well is walled foure square till this day. +[Sidenote: Carthage.] Also we were at an old Citie, all ruinated and +destroyed, called in olde time, the great Citie of Carthage where Hannibal +and Queene Dido dwelt: this Citie was but narrow, but was very long: for +there was, and is yet to bee seene, one streete three mile long, to which +Citie fresh water was brought vpon arches (as afore) aboue 25 miles, of +which arches some are standing to this day. [Sidenote: Argier.] Also we +were at diuers other places on the coast, as we came from Cayro, but of +other antiquities we saw but few. The towne of Argier which was our first +and last part, within the streights standeth vpon the side of an hill, +close vpon the sea shore: it is very strong both by sea and land, and it is +very well victualed with all manner of fruites bread and fish good store, +and very cheape. It is inhabited with Turkes, Moores, and Iewes, and so are +Alexandria and Cayro. In this towne are a great number of Christian +captiues, whereof there are of Englishmen onely fifteene, from which port +we set sayle towardes England, the seuenth of Ianuarie, Anno 1587, and the +30 day of the sayd moneth, we arriued at Dartmouth on the coast of England. + + * * * * * + +The second voyage of M. Laurence Aldersey, to the Cities of Alexandria, and + Cayro in Aegypt. Anno 1586. + +I Embarked my selfe at Bristoll, in the Hercules, a good ship of London, +and set saile the 21 day of Februarie, about ten of the clocke in the +morning, hauing a merry winde: but the 23 day, there arose a very great +storme, and in the mids of it we descried a small boate of the burden of +ten tunnes, with foure men in her, in very great danger, who called a maine +for our helpe. Whereupon our Master made towards them, and tooke them into +our ship, and let the boate, which was laden with timber, and appertained +to Chepstow, to runne a drift. The same night about midnight arose another +great storme, but the winde was large with vs, vntill the 27 of the same +moneth, which grew then somewhat contrary: yet notwithstanding we held on +our course, and the tenth day of March, we described a saile about Cape +Sprat, which is a little on this side the streight of Gibraltare, but we +spake not with her. The next day we described twelue saile more, with whom +we thought to haue spoken, to haue learned what they were, but they made +very fast away, and we gaue them ouer. + +Thursday the 16 of March, we had sight of the streights, and of the coast +of Barbary. The 18 day we passed them, and sailed towards Patras. Vpon the +23 of March, we met with the Centurion of London which came from Genoa, by +whom we sent letters to England, and the foure men also which we tooke in, +vpon the coast of England, before-mentioned. + +The 29th of March we came to Goleta a small Iland, and had sight of two +shippes, which we iudged to be of England. + +Tuesday the fourth of April, we were before Malta, and being there +becalmed, our Maister caused the two ship boates to be had out, and they +towed the ship, till we were out of sight of the Castle of Malta. The 9 day +of April we came to Zante, and being before the towne, William Aldridge, +seruant to Master Thomas Cordall of London, came aboord us, with whom our +Master and twelue more of our company, thought to haue gone on shoare: but +they could not be permitted: so we all came aboard againe, and went to +Patras, where we arriued vpon good Friday, and lay there with good +enterteinement at the English house, where was the Consull Master Grimes, +Ralph Ashley, and Iohn Doddington, who very kindly went with vs, and shewed +vs the pleasures of the towne. + +They brought vs to the house of the Cady, who was made then to vnderstand +of the 20 Turks that wee had aboard, which were to goe to Constantinople, +being redeemed out of captiuitie, by sir Francis Drake in the West Indies, +and brought with him into England, and by order of the Queenes Maiestie +sent now into their Countrey. Whereupon the Cady commanded them to be +brought before him, that he might see them: and when, he had talked with +them, and vnderstood howe strangely they were deliuered, he marueiled much, +and admired the Queenes Maistie of England, who being but a woman, is +notwithstanding of such power and renowne amongst all the princes of +Christendome, with many other honourable wordes of commending her Maiestie. +So he tooke the names of those 20 Turkes, and recorded them in their great +bookes, to remaine in perpetuall memory. After this, our foresaid +countreyman brought mee to the Chappel of S. Andrew where his tombe or +sepulchre is, and the boord vpon which he was beheaded, which boord is now +so rotten, that if any man offer to cut it, it falleth to powder, yet I +brought some of it away with me. + +Vpon Tuesday in Easter weeke, wee set out towards Zante againe, and the 24. +of April with much adoe, wee were all permitted to come on shoare, and I +was caried to the English house in Zante, where I was very well +entertained. The commodities of Zante are Currants and oyle: the situation +of the Towne is vnder a very great hill, vpon which standeth a very strong +Castle, which commaundeth the Towne. At Zante wee tooke in a Captaine and +16. souldiers, with other passengers. Wee departed from Zante vpon Tuesday +the 15. of April, and the next day we ankered at a small Iland, called +Striualia, which is desolate of people, sauing a fewe religious men, who +entertained vs well, without taking any money: but of courtesie we bestowed +somewhat vpon them for their maintenance, and then they gaue vs a couple of +leane sheepe, which we caried aboord. The last day of Aprill, wee arriued +at Candie, at a Castle, called Sowday, where wee set the Captaine, +Souldiers, and Mariners ashoare, which wee tooke in at Zante, with all +their carriage. + +[Sidenote: The Islands of Milo, in olde time called Sporades.] The second +day of May wee set saile againe, and the fourth day came to the Islands of +Milo, where we ankered, and found the people there very courteous, and +tooke in such necessaries as we wanted. The Islands are in my iudgement a +hundred in number, and all within the compasse of a hundred miles. + +The 11. day, the Chaus, which is the greatest man there in authoritie, for +certaine offences done in a little Chappell by the water side, which they +saide one of our shippe had done, and imputed it to mee, because I was +seene goe into it three dayes before, came to vs, and made much a doe, so +that we were faine to come out of our shippe armed: but by three pieces of +golde the brabling was ended, and we came to our shippe. This day wee also +set saile, and the next day passed by the Castle of Serpeto, which is an +old ruinated thing, and standeth vnder a hils side. + +The 13. day we passed by the Island of Paris, and the Island of the bankes +of Helicon, and the Island called Ditter, where are many boares, and the +women bee witches. The same day also wee passed by the Castle of Timo, +standing vpon a very high mountaine, and neere vnto it is the Island of +Diana. + +The 15. of May, wee came to Sio, where I stayed thirtie and three dayes. In +it is a very proper Towne, after the building of that Countrey, and the +people are civil: and while we were here there came in sixe Gallies, which +had bene at Alexandria, and one of them which was the Admiral, had a Prince +of the Moores prisoner, whom they tooke about Alexandria, and they meant to +present him to the Turke. The towne standeth in a valley, and a long the +water side pleasantly. There are about 26. winde-mils about it, and the +commodities of it are cotton wooll, cotton yarne, mastike, and some other +drugs. + +As we remained at Sio, there grew a great controuersie betweene the +mariners of the Hercules, and the Greekes of the towne of Sio, about the +bringing home of the Turkes, which the Greekes took in ill part, and the +boyes cried out, Viue el Re Philippe: whereupon our men beate the boyes, +and threwe stones, and so a broile beganne, and some of our men were hurt: +but the Greekes were fetcht out of their houses, and manacled together with +yrons, and threatned to the Gallies: about fortie of them were sent to the +prison, and what became of them when we were gone, we know not, for we went +thence within two dayes after, which was the 19. of Iune. + +The 20. day wee passed by the Island of Singonina, an Island risen by the +casting of stones in that place: the substance of the ground there is +brimstone, and burneth sometimes so much that it bloweth vp the rockes. + +The 24. of Iune wee came to Cyprus, and had sight in the way of the +aforesaide sixe Gallies, that came from Alexandria, one whereof came vnto +vs, and required a present for himselfe, and for two of the other Gallies, +which we for quietnesse sake gaue them. + +The 27. of Iune, wee came to Tripolie, where I stayed till the fift of +Iuly, and then tooke passage in a smal barke called a Caramusalin, which +was a passage boat, and was bound for Bichieri, thirteene miles on this +side Alexandria, which boate was fraighted with Turkes, Moores, and Iewes. + +The 20. day of Iuly, this barke which I passed in ranne vpon a rocke, and +was in very great danger, so that we all began some to be ready to swimme, +some to leape into the shippe boate, but it pleased God to set vs quickly +off the rocke, and without much harme. + +[Sidenote: The English house in Alexandria.] The 28. of Iuly I came to +Bichieri, where I was well entertained of a Iewe which was the Customer +there, giuing me Muskadine, and drinking water himselfe: hauing broken my +fast with him, he prouided mee a Camell for my carriage, and a Mule for mee +to ride vpon, and a Moore to runne by me to the City of Alexandria, who had +charge to see mee safe in the English house, whether I came, but found no +Englishmen there: but then my guide brought me aboord a ship of Alderman +Martins, called the Tyger of London, where I was well receiued of the +Master of the said ship, whose name was Thomas Rickman, and of all the +company. + +The said Master hauing made me good cheere, and made me also to drinke of +the water of Nilus, hauing the keyes of the English house, went thither +with me himselfe, and appointed mee a faire chamber, and left a man with me +to prouide me all things that I needed, and euery day came himselfe to me, +and caried me into the City, and shewed me the monuments thereof, which be +these. + +[Sidenote: The monuments of Alexandria.] Hee brought mee first to Pompey +his pillar, which is a mighty thing of gray marble, and all of one stone, +in height by estimation about 52. yards, and the compasse about sixe +fadome. + +The City hath three gates, one called the gate of Barbaria, the other of +Merina, and the thirde of Rossetto. + +He brought me to a stone in the streete of the Citie, whereupon S. Marke +was beheaded: to the place where S. Katerine died, hauing there hid +herselfe, because she would not marry: also to the Bath of S. Katerine. + +I sawe there also Pharaos needle, which is a thing in height almost equall +with Pompeys pillar, and is in compasse fiue fadome, and a halfe, and all +of one stone. + +I was brought also to a most braue and daintie Bath, where we washed our +selues: the Bath being of marble, and of very curious workemanship. + +The Citie standeth vpon great arches, or vawtes, like vnto Churches, with +mightie pillars of marble, to holde vp the foundation: which arches are +built to receiue the water of the riuer of Nilus, which is for the vse of +the Citie. It hath three Castles, and an hundred Churches: but the part +that is destroyed of it, is sixe time more then that part which standeth. + +The last day of Iuly, I departed from Alexandria towards Cayro in a passage +boate, wherein first I went to Rossetto, standing by the riuer side, hauing +13. or 14. great churches in it, their building there is of stone and +bricke, but as for lodging, there is little, except we bring it with vs. + +From Rosetto wee passed along the riuer of Nilus, which is so famous in the +world, twise as broad as the Thames at London: on both sides grow date +trees in great abundance. The people be rude, insomuch that a man cannot +traueile without a Ianizary to conduct him. + +[Sidenote: The Turkes Lent.] The time that I stayed in AEgypt, was the +Turkes and Moores Lent, in all which time they burne lamps in their +churches, as many as may hang in them: their Lent endureth 40. dayes, and +they haue three Lents in the yere: during which time they neither eate nor +drinke in the day time, but all the night they do nothing else. + +Betwixt Rossetto and Cayro there are along the water side three hundred +cities and townes, and the length of the way is not aboue three hundred +miles. + +To this famous Citie of Cayro I came the fift day of August, where I found +M. William Alday, and William Caesar, who intertained me in very good sort. +M. Caesar brought mee to see the Pyramides which are three in number, one +whereof king Pharao made for his owne tombe, the tombe it selfe is almost +in the top of it: the monuments bee high and in forme 4. square, and euery +of the squares is as long as a man may shoote a rouing arrowe, and as high +as a Church, I sawe also the ruines of the Citie of Memphis hard by those +Pyramides. + +The house of Ioseph is yet standing in Cayro, which is a sumptuous thing, +hauing a place to walke in of 56. mighty pillars, all gilt with gold, but I +saw it not, being then lame. + +The 11. day of August the lande was cut at Cayro, to let in the water of +the riuer of Nilus, which was done with great ioy and triumph. + +The 12. of August I set from Cayro towards Alexandria againe, and came +thither the 14. of August The 26. day there was kept a great feast of the +Turkes and Moores, which lasted two dayes, and for a day they neuer ceased +shooting off of great Ordinance. + +[Sidenote: The English Consul at Argier.] From Alexandria I sailed to +Argier, where I lay with M. Typton Consull of the English nation, who vsed +me most kindly, and at his owne charge. Hee brought mee to the kings Court, +and into the presence of the King, to see him, and the maners of the Court: +the King doeth onely beare the name of a king, but the greatest gouernment +is in the hands of the souldiers. + +The king of Potanca is prisoner in Argier, who comming to Constantinople, +to acknowledge a duety to the great Turke, was betrayed by his owne nephew, +who wrote to the Turke, that he went onely as a spy, by that meanes to get +his kingdome. I heard at Argier of seuen Gallies that were at that time +cast away at a towne called Formentera: three of them were of Argier, the +other foure were the Christians. + +We found here 13. Englishmen, which were by force of weather put into the +bay of Tunis, where they were very ill vsed by the Moores, who forced them +to leaue their barke: whereupon they went to the Councell of Argier, to +require a redresse and remedy for the iniurie. They were all belonging to +the shippe called the Golden Noble of London, whereof Master Birde is +owner. The Master was Stephen Haselwood, and the Captaine Edmond Bence. + +The thirde day of December, the pinnesse called the Mooneshine of London, +came to Argier with a prize, which they tooke vpon the coast of Spaine, +laden with sugar, hides, and ginger: the pinnesse also belonging to the +Golden Noble: and at Argier they made sale both of shippe and goods, where +wee left them at our comming away, which was the seuenth day of Ianuarie, +and the first day of February, I landed at Dartmouth, and the seuenth day +came to London, with humble thankes to Almightie God, for my safe arriuall. + + * * * * * + +A letter of the English Ambassadour to M. Haruie Millers, appointing him + Consull for the English nation in Alexandria, Cairo, and other places of + Egypt. + +Hauing to appoint our Consull in Cayro, Alexandria, Egypt, and other parts +adiacent, for the safe protection of body and goods of her Maiesties +subiects; being well perswaded of your sufficient abilitie; in her +Maiesties name I doe elect and make choise of you, good friend Haruie +Millers, to execute the same worshipfull office, as shall be required for +her Maiesties better seruice, the commodity of her subiects, and my +contentation: hauing and enioying for merit of your trauell in the premises +the like remuneration incident to the rest of ours in such office in other +parts of this Empire. Requiring you (all other affaires set aside) to +repaire thither with expedition, and attend vpon this your charge, which +the Almighty grant you well to accomplish. For the due execution whereof, +wee heerewith send you the Grand Signiors Patent of priuilege with ours, +and what els is needfull therefore, in so ample maner, as any other Consull +whosoeuer doeth or may enioy the same. In ayd whereof, according to my +bounden duety to her Maiesty our most gracious Mistresse, I will be ready +alwayes to employ my selfe to the generall benefit of her Maiesties +subiects, for your maintenance in all iust causes incident to the same. And +thus eftsoones requiring and commanding you as aboue sayd, to performe my +request, I bid you most heartily well to fare, and desire God to blesse +you. From my mansion Rapamat night Pera this 25 of April 1583. + + * * * * * + +A letter to the right honourable William Hareborne her Majesties + Ambassadour with the Grand Signior from Alger. + +Right honorable, we haue receiued your honors letters dated in +Constantinople the 5. of Nouember, and accordingly deliuered that inclosed +to the king of this place, requiring of him, according as you did command +vs in her Maiesties name, that he would vouchsafe to giue order to all his +Captaines and Raies that none of them should meddle with our English +shippes comming or going to or from these parts, for that they haue order +not to passe by the Christian coast, but vpon the coast of Barbary, and +shewing him of the charter giuen by the Grand Signior, requiring him in +like case that for the better fulfilling of the amity, friendship and holy +league betweene the Grand Signior and her Maiesty, he would giue us fiue or +six safe-conducts for our ships, that meeting with any of his gallies or +galliots, they might not meddle with them neither shoot at them: who made +me answere he would neither giue me any safe conduct nor commission to his +men of war not to meddle with them, for that he trusted to take some of +them this yere, and made good account thereof. In like maner I spake to the +chiefe of the Ianisers and the Leuents, who made me answere, the best hope +they had this yere was to take some of them, and although they haue the +Grand Signiors commandement we care not therefore: for we will by policy, +or one meanes or other prouoke them to shoot some ordinance, which if they +do but one piece, the peace is broken, and they be good prizes. And some of +them say further, we care not for his safe-conduct, for if they shew it vs, +we will conuey it away, we are sure the dogs cannot be beleeued against vs. +The premisses considered, your honour is with all speed to procure the +Grand Signior his fauorable letters directed to Hazan, the Cady, Captaines, +Ianisers, and Leuents, and another like to Romadan Bassa, king of Tripolis, +commanding them in no maner whatsoeuer to deale with our English ships +bound into those parts or returning thence with their commodities, although +they should shoot one at another: for when our ships shall meet them, for +that, as your honor is aduertised, the gallies of Carthagena, Florence, +Sicilia and Malta haue made a league to take all our ships comming in or +going out of the Grand Signiors dominions, therefore if they meet with any +of these gallies of Alger or Tripolis, thinking they be of them, and not +knowing them a far off, they may shoot at them, which if therefore they +should make them prizes, were against Gods lawes, the Grand Signior his +league, all reason and conscience, considering that all the world doth know +that Marchants ships laden with marchandise do not seeke to fight with men +of warre, but contrariwise to defend themselues from them, when they would +do them harme. Wherefore if your honour do not get out two letters of the +Grand Signior as aforesayd, and send them hither with all speed by some one +of your gentlemen accompanied with a chaus of the Court, or some other of +the Grand Signiors servants, it is impossible that our English ships can +escape freely from these or the Christians: for either they must of force +go on the Christian coast, and so fall into their hands, or els on this +coast, and fall into the kings of this towne, or Tripolis, their hands +which if they should, will neuer be recouered. And if your honor cannot +obtaine this thing, I beseech your honour in the behalfe of all the English +marchants (who sent me hither to follow such order as your honour should +giue me) to certifie her Maiesty, to the end that they may be commanded to +leaue off traffique, and not to lose their goods, and her poore subiects +the Mariners. And thus humbly taking my leaue, I desist from troubling your +honor. From Algier the tenth of February 1583. + + * * * * * + +A letter of M. Harborne to Mustapha, challenging him for his dishonest + dealing in translating of three of the Grand Signior his commandements. + +Domine Mustapha, nescimus quid sibi velit, cum nobis mandata ad finem +vtilem concessa perperam reddas, quae male scripta, plus damni, quam +vtilitatis adferant: quemadmodum constat ex tribus receptis mandatis, in +quibus summum aut principale deest aut aufertur. In posterum noli ita +nobiscum agere. Ita enim ludibrio erimus omnibus in nostrum et tuum +dedecus. Cum nos multarum actionum spem Turcice scriptarum in tua prudentia +reponimus, ita prouidere debes, vt non eueniant huiusmodi mala. Quocirca +deinceps cum mandatum aut scriptum aliquod accipias, verbum ad verbum +conuertatur in Latinum sermonem, ne damnum insequatur. Nosti multos habere +nos inimicos conatibus nostris inuidentes, quorum malitiae vestrae est +prudentiae aduersari. Hi nostri, Secretarius et minimus interpres ex nostra +parte dicent in tribus illis receptis mandatis errata. Vt deinceps similes +errores non eueniant precamur. Ista emendes, et caetera Serenissimae regiae +Maiestatis negocia, vti decet vestrae conditionis hominem, melius cures. +Nam vnicuique suo officio strenue est laborandum vt debito tramite omnia +succedant: quod spero te facturum. Bene vale. + + * * * * * + +The Pasport in Italian granted to Thomas Shingleton Englishman, by the king + of Algier. 1583. + +Noi Assan Basha Vicere et lochotenente e capitan della iurisditione de +Algier doniamo e concediamo libero saluo condutto a Thomas Shingleton +mercadante, che possi con suo vassello e marinare de che natione se siano, +e mercadantia di qual si voglia natione, andare et venire, e negotiari, e +contrattare liberamente in questa citta de Algier et altri locha de la +nostra iurisditione cosi di ponente comi di Leuante: et cosi anchora +commandiamo al capitan di maare di Algier et d'altri lochi de nostra +iurisditione, Rais de Vasselli et Capitani de Leuante, et altri capitani di +vasselli tanto grossi como picholi, si comnanda a qual si voglia, che +truando il sopradetto Thomas Shingleton Inglese nelli mari di Genua, +Francia Napoli, Calabria, e Sardigna con suo vassello e mercantia, et +homini de che nationi si siano, non gli debba molestare, ne piggliare, ne +toccare cosa de nessuna manero tanto di denare, como di qual si voglia +altra robba, sotto la pena e disgratia di perdir la vita et la robba: Et +per quanto hauete a caro la gratia del Gran Signor nostro patrone Soltan +Murates Ottomano, lo lasciarete andare per suo camino senza dargli nessuno +impedimento. Dato in Algieri in nostro regio Palazzo, sigillato del nostro +reggio sigillo, e fermato della gran ferma, et scritto del nostro reggio +Secretario, il di 23 de Ienaro, 1583. + + +The same in English. + +We Assan Bassha Viceroy and lieutenant, and captaine of the iurisdiction of +Algier, giue and grant free safeconduct to Thomas Singleton marchant, that +with his ship and mariners, of what nation soeuer they be, and with his +marchandize of what countrey soeuer, he may go and come, and trade and +traffique freely in this city of Algier, and other places of our +iurisdiction, as well of the West as of the East. And in like sort we +further command the captaine of the sea of Algier, and other places of our +iurisdiction, the Reiz of vessels and captaines of the Leuant, and other +captaines of vessels aswell great as small, whosoeuer they be, we do +command them, that finding the forsayd Thomas Shingleton Englishman in the +seas of Genua, France, Naples, Calabria, and Sardinia, with his ship and +merchandize, and men of what nation soeuer they be, that they molest them +not, neither take nor touch any kind of thing of theirs, neither money nor +any other kind of goods, vnder paine and peril of loosing of their liues +and goods: and as you make account of the fauour of the Grand Signor our +lord Sultan Murates Hottoman, so see you let him passe on his way without +any maner of impediment. Dated at Alger in our kingly palace, signed with +our princely Signet, and sealed with our great seale, and writen by our +Secretarie of estate, the 23. of Ianuarie, 1583. + + * * * * * + +A letter written in Spanish by Sir Edward Osborne, to the king of Alger, + the 20. of Iuly, 1584 in the behalfe of certeine English captiues there + detained. + +Muy alto y poderoso Rey, + +Sea seruida vostra alteza. Como la muy alta y potentissima magestad del +Gran Sennor tiene hecho articulos de priuilegios con la Serenissima +Magestad de nuestra Reyna d'Inglatierra, para los vassalos della poder +libremente yr y boluer, y tratar por mar y tierra en los dominios de su +potentissima Magestad, Como a la clara paresce por los dichos articulos, de +che embiamos el tractado al Senor Iuan Tipton nuestro commissario, para le +muestrar a vostra Alteza. Contra el tenor de los quales articulos por dos +galeras de su ciudad de Alger ha sido hechado al fondo en la mar vn des +nuestros nauios que venia de Patras, que es en la Morea, cargado de +corintes y otras mercaderias, que alla se compraron, y las mas de la gente +del la matados y ahogados en la mar, y el resto est an detenidos por +esclauos: cosa muy contraria a los dichos articulas y priuilegios. Que es +occasion, que por esto supplicamos a vostra Alteza muy humilmente, que, +pues que la potentissimo magestad del grand Sennor es seruida nos +fauorescer por los dichos articulos, tambien sea seruida vostra Alteza +assistimos en ellos, otorgandonos por vostra autoridad su auida y fauor, +segun que esperamos, para que puedan estar libres, y boluer para aca +aquellos pobres hombres ansi hechos esclauos, como dicho es. Y ansi mismo, +que mande vostra Alteza dar orden a los capitanes, maestres y gente de las +galeras, que nos dexen de aqui adelante hazer nuestro trafico con seys naos +cada anno para Turquia a los dominios del Gran Sennor a paz y a saluo, por +no cotrariar a los dichos nuestros priuilegios, Lleuando cada vna de +nuestras dichas naos pot se conoscer vn saluo condutto de su alta et +potentissima magestad. Y con esta vostra tan senallada merced y fauor que +en esso reciberemos, quedaremos nosotros con grandissima obligation a +vostra Alteza de seruir la por ello, segun que el dicho Sennor Iuan Tipton, +a quien nos reportamos de todo lo demas, mejor informira vostra Alteza: +Cuya serenissima persona y estado supplicamos y pidimos a Dios omnipotente +prosperu y accrescente con toda felicitad y honra. Del la ciuidad de +Londres a los veynte dias de Iulio del mil y quinientos y ocbenta y quatro +annos. + +Al seruitio de vuestra Alteza per y en hombre de todos los tratantes en +Tutquia, lo el Mayor de Londres, + +Edward Osborne. + + +The same in English. + +Right high and mightie king, + +May it please your highnesse to vnderstand, that the most high and most +mightie maiestie of the Grand Signor hath confirmed certaine articles of +priuileges with the most excellent maiestie of our Queene of England, that +her subjects may freely go and come, and traffique by sea and land in the +dominions of his most mighty maiesty, as appeareth more at large by the +said articles, whereof we haue sent the copy vnto M. Iohn Tipton our +Commissarie to shew the same vnto your highnes. [Sidenote: An English ship +sunke by two gallies of Alger.] Against the tenor of which articles, one of +our ships which came from Patras which is in Morea, laden with corants and +other merchandizes which were bought in those parts, was sunke by 2. +gallies of your citie of Alger, and the greatest number of the men thereof +were slain and drowned in the sea, the residue being detained as slaues: An +acte very contrary to the meaning of the aforesaid articles and priuileges: +which is the occasion that by these presents we beseech your highnesse very +humbly that since it hath pleased the most mightie maiestie of the Grand +Signor to fauour vs with the sayd priuileges, it would please your +Highnesse in like maner to assist vs in the same, graunting vs by your +authoritie, your ayde and fauour, according as our hope is that these poore +men so detained in captiuitie, as is aforesaid, may be set at libertie, and +returne into their countrey. And likewise that your highnesse would send to +giue order to the captaines, masters and people of your gallies, that from +hencefoorth they would suffer vs to vse our traffique with sixe ships +yerely into Turkie vnto the dominions of the Grand Signor in peace and +safetie, that they do not withstand those our said priuileges, euery one of +our foresaid ships carying with them a passeport of his most high and most +mightie maiestie to be knowen by. And for that your so singular fauour and +curtesie which in so doing we shall receiue, we on our part with all +bounden duetie vnto your highnesse, will seeke to honour you in that +behalfe, according as the sayd Master Iohn Tipton (to whom wee referre our +selues touching all other circumstances) shall more at large informe your +highnesse, whose most excellent person and estate, we pray and beseech +Almighty God to prosper and increase with all felicitie and honour. From +the Citie of London, the 20. of Iuly, 1584. + +At the seruice of your highnesse, for and in the name of our whole company +trading into Turkie, I Maior of London. Edward Osburne. + + * * * * * + +Notes concerning the trade of Alger. + +The money that is coined in Alger is a piece of gold called Asiano, and +Doublaes, and two Doublaes make an Asiano, but the Doubla is most vsed, for +all things be sold by Doublaes, which Doubla is fiftie of their Aspers +there. + +The Asper there is not so good by halfe and more, as that in +Constantinople; for the Chekin of gold of the Turkes made at Constantinople +is at Alger worth an 150 Aspers, and at Constantinople, it is but 66. +Aspers. + +The pistolet and roials of plate are most currant there. + +The said pistolet goeth for 130. Aspers there: and the piece of 4 roials +goeth for 40 Aspers, but oftentimes is sold for more, as men need them to +carie vp into Turkie. + +Their Asianos and Doublaes are pieces of course gold, worth here but 40. s. +the ounce, so the same is currant in no place of Turkie out of the kingdom +of Alger, neither the Aspers, for that they be lesse then others be, for +they coine them in Alger. + +The custome to the king is inward 10. per centum, to the Turke, to be paid +of the commoditie it selfe, or as it shall be rated. + +There is another custome to the Ermine, of one and an halfe per centum, +which is to the Iustice of the Christians: the goods for this custome are +rated as they are for the kings custome. + +Hauing paid custome inwards, you pay none outwards for any commoditie that +you doe lade, more then a reward to the gate keepers. + +The waight there is called a Cantare for fine wares, as mettals refined, +and spices &c. which is here 120. li. subtil. + +Mettall not refined, as lead, iron, and such grosse wares, are sold by a +great Cartare, which is halfe as big againe: so it is 180. li. subtil of +ours here. + +The measure of corne is by a measure called a Curtia, which is about 4. +bushels of our measure, and corne is plentiful there and good cheape, +except when there hapneth a very dry yeere. + +The surest lodging for a Christian there is in a Iewes house: for if he +haue any hurt, the Iew and his goods shall make it good, so the Iew taketh +great care of the Christian and his goods that lieth in his house, for +feare of punishment. + +An Englishman called Thomas Williams, which is M. Iohn Tiptons man, lieth +about trade of merchandize in the streete called The Soca of the Iewes. + + * * * * * + +Notes concerning the trade in Alexandria. + +Alexandria in Egypt is a free port, and when a man commeth within the +castles, presently the Ermyn sends aboord to haue one come and speake with +him to know what goods are aboord: and then hee will set guards aboord the +ship to see all the goods discharged. And then from the Ermin you goe to +the Bye, [Marginal note: This is another officer.] onely for that he will +inquire newes of you, and so from thence to the Consuls house where you +lie. The Venetians haue a Consul themselues. But all other nations goe to +the French nations Consul, who will giue you a chamber for your selues +apart, if you will so haue it. + +The customs inward of all commodities are ten in the hundred, and the +custome is paid in wares also that you buy: for the same wares in barter +you pay also ten in the hundred, at the lading of the wares. [Marginal +note: Other smal customs you pay besides, which may be at two in the +hundred: and for Consulage you pay two in the hundred.] But if you sell for +mony, you pay no more custome but the ten aforesaid, and one and a halfe in +the hundred, which is for the custome of the goods you lade for the sayd +mony, for more custome you pay not. But for all the money you bring thither +you pay nothing for the custome of the same. And if you sell your wares for +mony, and with the same money buy wares, you pay but two in the hundred for +the custome thereof. And if you steale any custome, if it be taken, you pay +double custome for that you steale. + +The weight of Alexandria is called Pois Forforeine, which is a kintal in +that place, which maketh at Marseils 109. li. of Marseils waight, at 15 +ounces the pound, which is 103. li. of 16. ounces to the li. There is +another waight called Pois Gerrin, which is 150. li. of Marseils waight, by +which are sold all things to eate: but spice is sold by the former waight. + +From Alexandria to Cairo is three daies journey, but you must take a +Ianissarie with you: and to go vp thither by water it is 8. dayes journey. +Roials of Spaine are currant mony there, and are the best money you can +cary. And 4. roials are worth 13. Medins, and 2. Medins, are 3. Aspers. +Pistolets and crownes of France and Dollers will goe, but of all Roials are +best. + +Rice is not permitted to goe out of the land, but is kept for a victuall. +But with a present to the Bye and Ermine some may passe. + +All sortes of spices be garbled after the bargaine is made, and they be +Moores which you deale withall, which be good people and not ill disposed. +And after you be searched and haue leaue to passe, you must presently +depart out of the port, and if you doe not, they will search you againe. +And you must depart in the day, for in the night the castles will not +suffer you to depart. The duetie to the Consul is 2 in the hundred, for his +aide, and meate, and drinke and all. And the port of Alexandria is good +when one is within it with good ankers and cables. Silver is better currant +then gold in Alexandria, but both are good. + +Commonly the Carauans come thither in October from Mecca to Cairo, and from +thence to Alexandria, where the merchants be that buy the spices, and +therefore the spices are brought most to Alexandria, where each Christian +nation remaineth at the Consuls houses. Yet oftentimes the Christians go vp +to Cairo to buy drugs and other commodities there, as they see cause. And +the commodities there vendible are all sorts of kersies, but the most part +blewes, and of clothes all colours except mingled colours and blacks. +Pepper is usually sold for 24. ducats the quintal, Ginger for 14. ducats. +You most take canuas to make bags to put your commoditie in from +Alexandria, for there is none. There is also fine flaxe, and good store of +Buffe hides. + + * * * * * + +A letter of the English ambassador to M. Edward Barton. + +Master Barton I send you 3. commandements in Turkish, with a copy thereof +in English, to the ende our ships might not come in danger of breach of +league, if they should shoote at the gallies of those of Algier, Tunis, and +Tripolis in the West: which after you haue shewed the Bassas, receiue +againe into your hands, and see them registred, and then deliuer one of +them to our friend M. Tipton, and the like you are to do with the priuilege +which you cary with you, and see them iointly registered in the Cadies +booke, deliuering the copy of the said priuilege sealed by the Cadi, also +to the sayd our friend M. Tipton, taking a note of his hand for the receipt +thereof, and for deliuerie at all times to vs or our assignes. And require +them in her maiesties and the grand Signors name, that they will haue our +ships passing too and fro vnder licence and safeconduct for recommended in +friendly maner. Touching your proceedings in Tripolis with Romadan, as I +haue not receiued any aduise thereof, since your departure, so must I leaue +you to God and my former direction. The ship patronised of Hassan Rayes, +which you wrote to be ours, prooued to be a Catalonian. As for ours, by +report of that Hassan and other Iewes in his ship, it was affirmed to be +sold to the Malteses, which with the rest you are to receiue there. And +hauing ended these affaires and registred our priuilege, and these three +commandements, in Tripolis, Tunis, and Alger, I pray you make speedy +returne, and for that which may be recouered, make ouer the same either to +Richard Rowed for Patrasso in Morea, or otherwise hither to Iohn Bate in +the surest maner you may, if the registring of that your priuilege and +these commandements will not suffer you in person to returne with the same. +From my mansion Rapamat in Pera this 24. of Iune 1584. + + * * * * * + +The commaundement obtained of the Grand Signior by her Maiesties ambassador + M. Wil. Hareborne, for the quiet passing of her subiects to and from his + dominions, sent in An. 1584 to the Viceroyes of Algier, Tunis, and + Tripolis in Barbary. + +To our Beglerbeg of Algier. + +We certifie thee by this our commandement, that the right honorable Will. +Hareborne ambassador to the Queenes maiestie of England hath signified vnto +vs, that the ships of that countrey in their comming and returning to and +from our Empire, on the one part of the Seas haue the Spaniards, +Florentines, Sicilians, and Malteses, on the other part our countreis +committed to your charge: which abouesaid Christians will not quietly +suffer their egresse and regresse, into, and out of our dominions, but doe +take and make the men captiues, and forfeit the shippes and goods, as the +last yeere the Maltese did one, which they tooke at Gerbi, and to that end +do continually lie in wait for them to their destruction, whereupon they +are constrained to stand to their defence at any such time as they might +meet with them. Wherefore considering by this means they must stand vpon +their guard, when they shall see any gallie afarre off, whereby if meeting +with any of your gallies and not knowing them, in their defence they do +shoot at them, and yet after when they doe certainly know them, do not +shoote any more, but require to passe peaceably on their voiage, which you +would deny, saying, the peace is broken because you haue shot at vs, and so +make prize of them contrary to our priuileges, and against reason: for the +preuenting of which inconuenience the said ambassadour hath required this +our commaundement. We therefore command thee, that vpon sight hereof thou +doe not permit any such matter in any sort whatsoeuer, but suffer the sayd +Englishmen to passe in peace according to the tenour of our commandement +giuen, without any disturbance or let by any meanes vpon the way, although +that meeting with thy gallies, and not knowing them afarre off, they taking +them for enemies should shoote at them, yet shall you not suffer them to +hurt them therefore, but quietly to passe. Wherefore looke thou that they +may haue right, according to our priuilege giuen them, and finding any that +absenteth himself, and wil not obey this our commandement, presently +certify vs to our porch, that we may giue order for his punishment, and +with reverence giue faithfull credite to this our commandement, which +hauing read, thou shalt againe returne it vnto them that present it. From +our palace in Constantinople, the 1. of Iune 1584. + + * * * * * + +A letter of the honorable M. Wil. Hareborne her maiesties ambass. with the + grand Signior to M. Tipton, appointing him Consul of the English in + Algier, Tunis, and Tripolis of Barbarie. + +Master Tipton, I haue receiued among others, yours of the 10. of Nouember +1584. by Soliman Sorda, certifying the receipt of mine of the 24. of Iune +1584. with the 3. commandements, which not being registred, let it now be +done. Where you write the force of the priuilege to be broken by our ships +in shooting, and therefore be lawfully taken, you are deceiued, for of +those taken in then, hath the grand Signior now deliuered vs free, Wil. +Moore, and Rob. Rawlings, and further promised the rest in like case, +wheresoeuer they be, and that hereafter no violence shalbe shewed, +considering ours be merchants ships which go peaceably in their voiage, and +were ignorant of the orders of Algier, neither knew afar off, whether they +were friends or the Christians gallies in league with vs, of whom they most +doubted, who not suffring our ships to come into these parts, wil make +prize of the goods and captiue the men, so as they are not to let them come +nigh them: and since ours haue not done contrary to the articles of the +same priuilege, wherein is no order for Algier prescribed vs, as both by +the originall now sent vs, and also by the copy now sent you from London +you may perceiue, they according to right are as abouesaid to be set free, +and their goods restored, which if it be not there accomplished as the +grand Signior hath now commanded, and most faithfully promised, neither yet +in case of their denial, those offenders punished here, and our injuries +redressed, we are to demand our Congie, and command our merchants her +maiesties subiects, to end their traffike here, which in our countrey +commodities is prooued and found by the great Signior to be so beneficial +to his countries as we are assured so well thereof, as also for the honor +which his ancestors neuer had of friendship with so mighty a prince as is +her maiesty, he wil not but maintaine the faith promised her, and the +intercourse in due force. And where you say that the grand Signor his +letters, in the behalf of the French, were no more accepted there, then of +a mean man, nor tooke no place, that is not material to vs, our letters are +after another sort much more effectuall. For our case and theirs be found +far different, in that they be not onely now out of fauour with him, but +also the commodities which they bring hither, as sugar, paper, bracelets, +ropes of bast, almonds, &c., all which may be here wel spared, and we +contrarily so wel esteemed, as he neuer denied vs any thing since our +comming demanded, which neither their ambassador, nor the Venetian could +haue here, and therefore we rest perswaded, knowing the wisdom of the +Beglebeg, who is aduised by his friends from hence, of this our credite +with his master, he wil so respect his commandements, as to accomplish the +tenor thereof according to our desire. And where you say that the Ianizers +rule all there, I know right wel that if things be not done as the grand +Signior commandeth, his lieutenant must answer it. And therefore I am fully +perswaded if he doe what he may they dare not resist him, for if they +should, those rebels should not be vnpunished of the grand Signior. And +though they speake their pleasures among themselues there, yet they be not +so brutish, but they wel consider that their master the grand Signior may +not be gainsaid or mocked of any. For vpon his word dependeth the life or +death euen of the chiefest, as I have seene since my comming hither. So +whatsoever these Ianizaries say, they will be better aduised in their +deedes then to withstand their Viceroy, if he himselfe wil vse his lawfull +power, which if hee doe not, hee cannot purge himselfe here of their euill +proceedings against the grand Signiors friends: for the feet may not rule +the bodie, but contrarywise, the head, the feete, and all the rest of the +members. And for that neither for feare, affection or otherwise you omit as +a faithfull true subiect to her maiestie to do your dutie, I do by my +warrant going herewith charge you, and in her maiesties name, to the +vttermost to vse your good and faithfull endeuour, as becommeth a true +subiect, and in all things that may concerne her maiesties good seuice, +assisting the Chaus with the rest of our messengers in counsel, trauel, and +what els shall be thought requisite for your good discharge of your duetie. +And to the end you may boldly proceed herein as also for the good opinion +sir Edward Osborne and the company haue of you, and I no lesse perswaded of +youre wisedome, vpright dealing, and good experience in those parts, do +send you herewith the grand Signiors and our patents for exercising the +office of Consul there, in Tripolis and Tunis: by virtue of which +authoritie you may without feare proceed as the office doeth chalenge in +defence of our priuilege, to redresse all iniuries offred our nation. Which +if you cannot get reformed there of the Beglerbies vpon your complaint, I +thereof aduertised, shal doe it here, and to the vttermost maintaine you in +al rightful causes whatsoeuer, doubt you not. And hereafter according to +your aduise, I wil and doe giue our ships order not to fight with any +gallies of Alger, but to hoise out their skiffe and go aboord to shew them +their safeconduct, and to present the captain with a garment, and you there +in such like case are to take order that they do not forceably take any +thing from them. [Sidenote: The Inuentorie of our ships and goods sunke and +taken by the gallies of Alger.] Nothing doubting but the Viceroy (whose +friendship in her maiesties behalfe I desire) will not onely performe the +same your iust request, and according to right, restore to libertie our men +since the priuilege taken, but also cause those that tooke and sunke our +ships to answere the value, which I haue set down truly, and rather with +the least in the Inuentorie translated into Turkish, whereof the inclosed +is the copy in English, which I send to the end you may be the better +informed of my demand by this our Chaus Mahomet, with whom in all things +you are to conferre of matters expedient, for the honor of her maiesties +countrey, and the commoditie, and libertie of poore captiues, which if the +Viceroy do wel consider, according to his wisdome, as the grand Signior +doeth thereof, he shal wel perceiue it not onely a great honour to his +master as aforesaid, to continue this amitie with her maiestie, but chiefly +to the whole estate of his kingdom exceeding profitable, which by this +means shall be abundantly serued with the chiefest commodities they want, +with many other things of more importance to the grand Signior his +contentation, not herein to be mentioned. For I know the Viceroies +experienced wisdom can wel consider thereof, in such sort as he wil not +deny to accomplish his masters commandement, and our earnest request in so +small a matter as this we require, whereof I expect no refusall: for +thereby he shall increase his honor with the grand Signior, be in credite +with her maiestie, be void of trouble which hereafter by future suite +against him may happen, and his gallies free of such doubtful issue as +doeth chance, fighting with our ships. Which, as it is well knowen to all +the world, haue so great hearts as neuer cowardly to yeeld to their +enemies. And that therefore in that respect (after the prouerbe, like +esteeme of their like) they are the more of such a valiant prince as is +their Viceroy and his couragious souldiers to be in all friendship +cherished and better esteemed. If the captaine Bassa had bene returned from +Capha, I would in like maner haue procured his letters, which for that he +is not, I doubt nothing but that the grand Signiors will suffise. Thus +commending your selfe and these proceedings to the almighty his merciful +direction, I bid you most heartily wel to fare. From my mansion Rapamat +nigh Pera, this 30. of March, 1585. + + * * * * * + +Series vel registrum valoris nauium, bonorum, et hominum per triremes + Argerienses ereptorum, vna cum captiuorum hominum nominibus, Beglerbego + Argeriensi Hassano. + +1 Salomon de Plimmouth habuit 36. homines, onerata cum sale, onere +trecentorum doliorum, valore Florenorum 5600. + +2 Elizabetha de Garnesey cum decem hominibus Anglis, reliquis Britonibus, +valore Florenorum 2000. + +3 Maria Martin de London onere centum et triginta doliorum, rectore Thoma +More cum triginta quinque hominibus, reuertens de Patrasso cum mandato +Caesareo, valore Florenorum 1400. + +4 Elizabeth Stokes de London, rectore Dauid Fillie de London, Patrassum +veniens cum mandato Caesareo: huius praecipuus valor erat in talleris +numeratis, quos habuit Richardus Gibben, qui adduxit etiam Serenissimae +Reginae: maiestatis literas Caesari et oratori. Valor reliquus in mercibus +vna cum superiori in talleris, effecit Florenorum 21500. + +5 Nicolaus de London, rectore Thoma Forster, onerata cum vuis siccis, +valore Florenorum 4800. + + +In tempore Romadan Beglerbegi Argirae spoliatae et ereptae naues, merces, + et homines. + +1 Iudith de London, rectore Iacobo Beare, cum hominibus 24. valore +Florenorum 3100. + +2 Iesus de London, rectore Andraea Dier, cum 21. hominibus. Valorem huius +et 14. homines, reliquis mortuis, reddidit Romadan Bassa Tripolitanus +Secretario legati, Edwardo Barten, valore Florenorum 9000. + + +Nomina hominum mancipatorum et viuentium tunc temporis, quando Caesar + illustrissimus, et dominus Orator Chauseum Mahumetem miserunt Algiram. + +1 Ante foedus initum in naue Peter de Bristow. Iohn Winter, Robert Barton. + +2 In naue Swallow de London. Rich. Crawford, Anthony Eluers, Wil. Rainolds. + +Post foedus initum in naue Britona. Iames Yoong. + +1 In naue Rabnet de Hampton. Thomas Lisney. + +1 In naue Salomon. Iohn Tracie, Wil. Griffith, Wil. Cocke. + +1 In naue Elizabeth. Iohn Woodward, Giles Naper, Leonard Iames, Oliuer +Dallimore, and Richard Maunsell. + +2 In naue Maria Martin. Thomas Moore, Wil. White, Wil. Palmer, Nich. Long, +Peter March, Rich. Haslewood, Wil. Dewly, Wil. Cowel, Iohn Franke, Henry +Parker, Iohn Cauendish, Moises Robinson, Iames Sotherich, Henry Howel, +Nich. Smith, Henry Ragster, Rich. Dauison, Rich. Palmer. + +3 In naue Elizabeth Stokes. Dauid Fillie, Walter Street, Laurence Wilkins, +Morgan Dauis, Iohn Quinte, Ambrose Harison, Iohn Peterson, Tristram Vois, +Roger Ribbe. + +4 In naue Nicholas, Thomas Forster rector nauis et eius nautae. + + * * * * * + +To Assan Aga, Eunuch and Treasurer to Hassan Bassa king of Alger, which + Assan Aga was the sonne of Fran. Rowlie of Bristow merchant, taken in the + Swalow. + +I receiued your letters of Will. Hamor gentleman my seruant very +thankfully, aswel for the feruant faith that by his report I heare you haue +in our lord Iesus Christ, by whose onely merits and bloodshedding, you +together with vs and all other good Christians so truly beleeuing, shalbe +saued, as also for your faithfull obedience like a true subiect to her +Maiestie, naturally louing your countrey and countreymen, declared in your +fauourable furtherance of the said Wil. Hamore, procuring their redemption. +Of which your good and vertuous actions, as I reioice to vnderstand, so wil +I impart the same to your singuler commendation, both to our mistresse her +Maiestie, and her most honorable counsellors the nobilitie of England, to +whom assure your selfe the report shalbe very welcome. And now this second +time I am inforced by duetie to God and her maiesty, as also by the smal +regard your master had of the Grand Signors former commandements, to +complaine vnto him, though not so vehemently as I had occasion by his most +vnworthy answer. But I hope, and the rather by your means, he will not +contrary this second commandement, threatning him, not obseruing the same, +losse of office and life. The due execution whereof by your vertuous and +careful industry procured, wil manifest to all the world, especially to her +maiesty, and me her ambassador, your true Christian mind and English heart, +intentiuely bent to Gods honor, and the libertie of the poore men, for +which I trust you be ordained another Ioseph, to folow his example in true +pietie, in such sort that notwithstanding your body be subiect to Turkish +thraldom, yet your vertuous mind free from those vices, next vnder God +addict to the good seruice of your liege Lady and soueraigne princes, her +most excellent maiesty, wil continually seeke by all good meanes to +manifest the same in this and the like faithful seruice to your singuler +commendation, wherby both my selfe and others in that place hauing found +you in all good offices faithfully affectionated, may in like case performe +the like towards you, when and where you may haue occasion to vse me: which +as I for my part do assuredly promise, and wil no lesse faithfully +performe: so accordingly I expect herein, and hereafter the like of you, +whom most heartily saluted I commend to the diuine tuition and holy +direction. From my house Rapamar, this 28. of June 1586. + +Your louing and good friend her Maiesties Ambassador with the Grand Signor, + +Wil. Hareborne. + + * * * * * + +The originall of the first voyage for traffique into the kingdom of Marocco + in Barbarie, begun in the yeere 1551. with a tall ship called the Lion of + London, whereof went as captaine Master Thomas Windam, as appeareth by + this extract of a letter of Iames Aldaie, to the worshipfull master + Michael Locke, which Aldaie professeth himselfe to haue bene the first + inuentor of this trade. + +Worshipful Sir, hauing lately bene acquainted with your intent to prosecute +the olde intermitted discouerie for Catai, if therein with my knowledge, +trauell or industrie I may doe you seruice, I am readie to doe it and +therein to aduenture my life to the vttermost point. Trueth it is, that I +haue bene by some men (not my friends) euill spoken of at London, saying +that although I be a man of knowledge in the Arte of Nauigation and +Cosmographie, and that I haue bene the inuentor of some voyages that be now +growen to great effect; yet say they maliciously and without iust cause, +that I haue not bene willing at any season to proceed in those voyages that +I haue taken in hand, taking example especially of two voyages. The one was +when I was master in the great Barke Aucher of the Leuant, in which voyage +I went not, but the causes they did not know of my let from the same, nor +of the other. But first the very trueth is, that I was from the same voyage +letted by the Princes letters, which my Master Sebastian Gabota had +obtained for that purpose, to my great griefe. And as touching the second +voyage which I inuented for the trade of Barbarie, the liuing God knoweth +that I say most true, that when the great sweate was, (whereon the chiefe +of those with whom I ioyned in that voyage died, that is to say, Sir Iohn +Lutterell, Iohn Fletcher, Henry Ostrich and others) I my selfe was also +taken with the same sweate in London, and after it, whether with euill diet +in keeping, or how I know not, I was cast into such an extreame feuer, as I +was neither able to ride nor goe: and the shippe being at Portesmouth, +Thomas Windam had her away from thence, before I was able to stand vpon my +legges, by whom I lost at that instant fourescore pound. Besides I was +appointed by them that died (if they had liued) to haue had the whole +gouernment both of shippe and goods, because I was to them the sole +inuenter of that trade. + +In the first voyage to Barbary there were two Moores, being noblemen, +whereof one was of the Kings blood, conuayed by the said Master Thomas +Windham into their Countrey out of England, + +Yours humble at your commandement, + +Iames Alday. + + * * * * * + +The second voyage to Barbary in the yeere 1552. Set foorth by the right + worshipfull Sir Iohn Yorke, Sir William Gerard, Sir Thomas Wroth, Master + Frances Lambert, Master Cole and others; Written by the relation of + Master Iames Thomas then Page to Master Thomas Windham chiefe Captaine of + this voyage. + +The shippes that went on this voyage were three, whereof two were of the +Riuer of Thames, That is to say, the Lyon of London, whereof Master Thomas +Windham was Captaine and part owner, of about an hundred and fiftie tonnes: +The other was the Buttolfe about fourescore tunnes, and a Portugall Carauel +bought of certaine Portugals in Newport in Wales, and fraightened for this +voyage, of summe sixtie tunnes. The number of men in the Fleete were an +hundred and twentie. The Master of the Lyon was one Iohn Kerry of Mynhed in +Somersetshire, his Mate was Dauid Landman. The chiefe Captaine of this +small Fleete was Master Thomas Windham a Norffolke gentlemen borne, but +dwelling at Marshfield-parke in Somerset shire. This Fleete departed out of +King-rode neere Bristoll about the beginning of May 1552. being on a Munday +in the morning: and the Munday fortnight next ensuing in the euening came +to an ancker at their first port in the roade of Zafia, or Asafi on the +coast of Barbarie, standing in 32. degrees of latitude, and there put on +land part of our Marchandise to be conueied by land to the citie of +Marocco: which being done, and hauing refreshed our selues with victuals +and water, we went to the second port called Santa Cruz, where we +discharged the rest of our goods, being good quantitie of linnen and +woollen cloth, corall, amber, Iet, and diuers other things well accepted of +the Moores. In which road we found a French ship, which not knowing whether +it were warre or peace betweene England and France, drewe her selfe as +neere vnder the towne wals as she could possible, crauing aide of the towne +for her defence, if need were, which in deed seeing vs draw neere, shot at +vs a piece from the wals, which came ouer the Lion our Admirall, between +the maine mast and her foremast. [Sidenote: The English were at Santa Cruz +the yere before being 1551.] Whereupon we comming to an anker, presently +came a pinnes aboord vs to know what we were, who vnderstanding that we had +bene there the yere before, and came with the good leaue of their king in +marchant wise, were fully satisfied, and gaue vs good leaue to bring our +goods peaceably on shore, where the Viceroy, whose name was Sibill Manache, +within short time after came to visite vs, and vsed vs with all curtesie. +But by diuers occasions we spent here very neere three moneths before we +could get in our lading, which was Sugar, Dates, Almonds, and Malassos or +sugar Syrrope. And for all our being here in the heate of the Sommer, yet +none of our company perished by sicknesse. Our ships being laden, we drew +into the Sea for a Westerne wind for England. But being at sea, a great +leake fell vpon the Lion, so that we were driuen to Lancerota, and +Forteuentura, where, betweene the two Ilands, we came to a road, whence wee +put on land out of our sayd ship 70. chests of Sugar vpon Lancerota, with +some dozen or sixteene of our company, where the inhabitants supposing we +had made a wrongfull prize of our carauell, suddenly came with force vpon +our people, among whom I my selfe was one, tooke vs prisoners, and spoiled +the sugars: which thing being perceiued from our ships, they manned out +three boates, thinking to rescue vs, and draue the Spaniards to flight, +whereof they slew eighteene, and tooke their gouernour of the Iland +prisoner, who was a very aged gentleman about 70 yeeres of age. But chasing +the enemies so farre, for our recouerie, as pouder and arrowes wanted, the +Spaniardes perceiuing this, returned, and in our mens retire they slew sixe +of them. Then a Parle grew, in the which it was agreed, that we the +prisoners should be by them restored, and they receiue their olde +gouernour, giuing vs a testimonie vnder his and their hands, what damages +wee had there receiued, the which damages were here restored, and made good +by the king of Spaine his marchants vpon our returne into England. After +wee had searched and mended our leake, being returned aboord, we came vnder +saile, and as wee were going to the sea on the one side of the Iland, the +Cacafuego and other ships of the king of Portugals Armada entered at the +other, and came to anker in the road from whence we were but newly +departed, and shot off their great ordinance in our hearing. And here by +the way it is to bee vnderstood that the Portugals were much offended with +this our new trade into Barbarie, and both in our voiage the yeere before, +as also in this they gaue out in England by their marchants, that if they +tooke vs in those partes, they would vse vs as their mortall enemies, with +great threates and menaces. But by God and good prouidence wee escaped +their hands. From this Iland shaping our coast for England, we were seuen +or eight weekes before we could reach the coast of England. The first port +wee entered into was the hauen of Plimmouth, from whence within short time +wee came into the Thames, and landed our marchandise at London, about the +ende of the moneth of October, 1552. + + * * * * * + +A voiage made out of England vnto Guinea and Benin in Affrike, at the + charges of certaine marchants Aduenturers of the Citie of London, in the + yeere of our Lord 1553. + +I was desired by certaine of my friends to make some mention of this +Voiage, that some memorie thereof might remaine to our posteritie, if +either iniquitie of time consuming all things, or ignorance creeping in by +barbarousness and contempt of knowledge should hereafter bury in obliuion +so woorthie attempts, so much the greatlier to bee esteemed, as before +neuer enterprised by Englishmen, or at the least so frequented, as at this +present they are, and may bee, to the great commoditie of our marchants, if +the same be not hindered by the ambition of such, as for the conquering of +fortie or fiftie miles here and there, and erecting of certaine fortresses, +thinke to be Lordes of half the world, enuying that other should enioy the +commodities, which they themselues cannot wholly possesse. And although +such as haue bene at charges in the discouering and conquering of such +landes ought by good reason to haue certaine priuileges, preheminences, and +tributes for the same, yet (to speake vnder correction) it may seeme +somewhat rigorous, and agaynst good reason and conscience, or rather +agaynst the charitie that ought to be among Christian men, that such as +inuade the dominions of other should not permit other friendly to vse the +trade of marchandise in places neerer, or seldome frequented of them, +whereby their trade is not hindered in such places, where they themselues +haue at their owne election appointed the Martes of their traffike. But +forasmuch as at this present it is not my intent to accuse or defend, +approoue or improoue, I will cease to speake any further hereof, and +proceed to the description of the first voyage, as briefly and faithfully +as I was aduertised of the same, by the information of such credible +persons, as made diligent inquisition to know the trueth thereof, as much +as shall be requisite, omitting to speake of many particular things, not +greatly necessarie to be knowen: which neuerthelesse, with also the exact +course of the navigation, shall be more fully declared in the second +voiage. And if herein fauour or friendship shall perhaps cause some to +thinke that some haue bene sharply touched, let them lay apart fauour and +friendship, and giue place to trueth, that honest men may receiue prayse +for well doing, and lewd persons reproch, as the iust stipend of their +euill desertes, whereby other may be deterred to doe the like, and vertuous +men encouraged to proceed in honest attempts. + +But that these voyages may be more plainly vnderstood of all men, I haue +thought good for this purpose, before I intreat hereof, to make a briefe +description of Africa, being that great part of the world, on whose West +side beginneth the coast of Guinea at Cabo Verde, about twelue degrees in +latitude, on this side the Equinoctiall line, and two degrees in longitude +from the measuring line, so running from the North to the South, and by +East in some places, within 5, 4, and 3 degrees and a halfe vnto the +Equinoctiall, and so foorth in maner directly East and by North, for the +space of 36 degrees or thereabout, in longitude from the West to the East, +as shall more plainly appeare in the description of the second voyage. + + +A briefe description of Afrike gathered by Richard Eden. + +In Africa the lesse are these kingdoms: the kingdom of Tunis and +Constantina, which is at this day under Tunis, and also the region of +Bugia, Tripoli, and Ezzah. This part of Afrike is very barren by reason of +the great deserts, as the deserts of Numidia and Barca. The principall +ports of the kingdome of Tunis are these: Goletta, Bizerta, Potofarnia, +Bona, and Stora. The chiefe cities of Tunis are Constantina and Bona, with +diuers other. Vnder this kingdom are many Ilands, as Zerbi, Lampadola, +Pantalarea, Limoso, Beit, Gamelaro, and Malta, where at this present is the +great master of the Rhodes. Vnder the South of this kingdom are the great +deserts of Lybia. All the nations in this Africa the lesse are of the sect +of Mahomet, and a rusticall people, liuing scattred in villages. The best +of this part of Afrike is Barbaria lying on the coast of the sea +Mediterraneum. + +Mauritania (now called Barbaria) is diuided into two parts, as Mauritania +Tingitana, and Caesariensis. Mauritania Tingitania is now called the +kingdom of Fes, and the kingdom of Marocco. The principall citie of Fes +is called Fessa: and the chiefe citie of Marocco is named Marocco. + +Mauritania Caesariensis is at this day called the kingdom of Tremisen, with +also the citie called Tremisen or Telensin. This region is full of deserts, +and reacheth to the Sea Mediterraneum, to the citie of Oram, with the port +of Mersalquiber. The kingdom of Fes reacheth vnto the Ocean Sea, from the +West to the citie of Argilla: and the port of the sayd kingdom is called +Sala. + +The kingdom of Marocco is also extended aboue the Ocean Sea, vnto the citie +of Azamor and Azafi, which are vpon the Ocean Sea, toward the West of the +sayd kingdom. Nere Mauritania Tingitana (that is to say, by the two +kingdoms of Fes, and Marocco) are in the Sea, the Ilands of Canarie, called +in old time, The fortunate Ilands. Toward the south of this region is the +kingdom of Guinea, with Senega, Ialofo, Gambra, and many other regions of +the Blacke Moores, called Aethiopians or Negros all which are watered with +the riuer Negro, called in old time Niger. In the sayd regions are no +cities, but onely certaine lowe cottages made of boughes of trees, +plastered with chalke, and couered with strawe. In these regions are also +very great deserts. + +The kingdom of Marocco hath vnder it these seuen kingdoms: Hea, Sus, +Guzula, the territorie of Marrocca, Duccala, Hazchora, and Tedle. The +kingdom of Fes hath as many: as Fes, Temesne, Azgar, Elabath, Errif, Garet, +and Elcair. The kingdom of Tremisen hath these regions: Tremisen, Tenez, +and Elgazair, all which are Machometists. But all the regions of Guinea are +pure Gentiles, and idolatrous, without profession of any religion, or other +knowledge of God, then by the law of nature. + +Africa the great is one of the three parts of the world, knowen in old +time, and seuered from Asia, on the East by the riuer Nilus, on the West +from Europe by the pillars of Hercules. The hither part is now called +Barbarie, and the people Moores. The inner part is called Lybia and +Aethiopia. Afrike the lesse is in this wise bounded: On the West it hath +Numidia; On the East Cyrenaica: On the North, the sea called Mediterraneum. +In this countrey was the noble city of Carthage. + +In the East side of Afrike beneath the red sea, dwelleth the great and +mighty Emperour and Christian king Prester Iohn, well knowen to the +Portugales in their voyages to Calicut. His dominions reach very farre on +euery side: and hath vnder him many other Kings both christian and heathen +that pay him tribute. This mightie prince is called Dauid the Emperour of +Aethiopia. Some write that the king of Portugall sendeth him yeerely eight +ships laden with marchandize. His kingdom confineth with the red Sea, and +reacheth far into Afrike toward Aegypt and Barbarie. Southward it confineth +with the Sea toward the Cape de Bona Speranza: and on the other side with +the sea of sand, called Mare de Sabione, a very dangerous sea lying between +the great citie of Alcair, or Cairo in Aegypt, and the country of +Aethiopia: In the which way are many vnhabitable deserts, continuing for +the space of fiue dayes iourney. And they affirme, that if the sayd +Christian Emperour were not hindered by those deserts (in the which is +great lacke of victuals, and especially of water) he would or now haue +inuaded the kingdom of Egypt, and the citie of Alcair. The chiefe city of +Ethiopia, where this great emperor is resident, is called Amacaiz, being a +faire citie, whose inhabitants are of the colour of an Oliue. There are +also many other cities, as the city of Saua vpon the riuer of Nilus, where +the Emperour is accustomed to remaine in the Sommer season. There is +likewise a great city named Barbaregaf, and Ascon, from whence it is said +that the Queene of Saba came to Hierusalem to heare the wisedom of Salomon. +This citie is but litle, yet very faire, and one of the chiefe cities in +Ethiope. In this prouince are many exceeding high mountains, vpon the which +is said to be the earthly paradise: and some say that there are the trees +of the Sunne and Moone, whereof the antiquitie maketh mention: yet that +none can passe thither by reason of great deserts of an hundred daies +iourney. Also beyond these mountains is the Cape of Bona Speranza. And to +haue said thus much of Afrike it may suffice. + + +The first voiage to Guinea and Benin. + +In the yeere of our Lord 1553. the twelfth day of August, sailed from +Portsmouth two goodly ships, the Primerose and the Lion, with a pinnas +called the Moone, being all well furnished aswell with men of the lustiest +sort, to the number of seuen score, as also with ordinance and victuals +requisite to such a voiage: hauing also two captaines, the one a stranger +called Anthonie Anes Pinteado, a Portugall, borne in a towne named The Port +of Portugall, a wise, discreet, and sober man, who for his cunning in +sailing, being as well an expert Pilot as a politike captaine, was sometime +in great fauour with the king of Portugall, and to whom the coasts of +Brasile and Guinea were committed to be kept from the Frenchmen, to whom he +was a terrour on the Sea in those parts, and was furthermore a gentleman of +the king his masters house. But as fortune in maner neuer fauoureth but +flattereth, neuer promiseth but deceiueth, neuer raiseth but casteth downe +againe: and as great wealth and fauour haue alwaies companions, emulation +and enuie, he was after many aduersities and quarels made against him, +inforced to come into England: where in this golden voyage he was euil +matched with an vnequal companion, and vnlike match of most sundry +qualities and conditions, with vertues few or none adorned. Thus departed +these noble ships vnder saile on their voyage: But first captaine Windam +putting forth of his ship at Portsmouth a kinsman of one of the head +marchants, and shewing herein a muster of the tragicall partes hee had +conceiued in his braine, and with such small beginnings nourished so +monstrous a birth, that more happy, yea and blessed was that yong man being +left behind, then if he had bene taken with them, as some do wish he had +done the like by theirs. Thus sailed they on their voyage, vntill they came +to the Iland of Madera, where they tooke in certaine wines for the store of +their ships, and paid for them as they agreed of the price. At these Ilands +they met with a great Galion of the king of Portugall, full of men and +ordinance: yet such as could not haue preuailed if it had attempted to +withstand or resist our ships, for the which cause it was set foorth, not +onely to let and interrupt these our shippes of their purposed voiage, but +al other that should attempt the like: yet chiefly to frustrate our voiage. +For the king of Portugall was sinisterly informed, that our ships were +armed to his castle of Mina in those parties, whereas nothing lesse was +ment. + +After that our ships departed from the Iland of Madera forward on their +voiage, began this worthy captaine Pinteados sorow, as a man tormented with +the company of a terrible Hydra, who hitherto flattred with him, and made +him a faire countenance and shew of loue. Then did he take vpon him to +command all alone, setting nought both by captain Pinteado, and the rest of +the marchants factors, sometimes with opprobrious words, and sometimes with +threatnings most shamfully abusing them, taking from Pinteado the seruice +of the boies and certain mariners that were assigned him by the order and +direction of the worshipful merchants, and leauing him as a common mariner, +which is the greatest despite and grief that can be to a Portugale or +Spaniard, to be diminished of their honor, which they esteem aboue all +riches. Thus sailing forward on their voiage, they came to the Ilands of +Canarie, continuing their course from thence vntil they arriued at the +Iland of S. Nicholas, where they victualled themselues with fresh meat, of +the flesh of wild goats, whereof is great plenty in that Iland, and in +maner of nothing els. From hence following on their course and tarying here +and there at the desert Ilands in the way, because they would not come too +timely to the countrey of Guinea for the heat, and tarying somewhat too +long (for what can be well ministred in a common wealth, where inequalitie +with tyrannie wil rule alone) they came at the length to the first land of +the country of Guinea, where they fel with the great riuer of Sesto, where +they might for their marchandizes haue laden their ships with the graines +of that countrey, which is a very hote fruit, and much like vnto a fig as +it groweth on the tree. For as the figs are full of small seeds, so is the +said fruit full of graines, which are loose within the cod, hauing in the +mids thereof a hole on euery side. This kind of spice is much vsed in cold +countries, and may there be sold for great aduantage, for exchange of other +wares. But our men, by the perswasion or rather inforcement of this +tragicall captaine, not regarding and setting light by that commoditie, in +comparison of the fine gold they thirsted, sailed an hundred leagues +further, vntil they came to the golden land: where not attempting to come +neere the castle pertaining to the king of Portugall, which was within the +riuer of Mina, they made sale of their ware only on this side and beyond +it, for the gold of that country, to the quantitie of an hundred and fiftie +pounds weight, there being in case that they might haue dispatched all +their ware for gold, if the vntame braine of Windam had, or could haue +given eare to the counsell and experience of Pinteado. For when that Windam +not satisfied with the gold which he had, and more might haue had if he had +taried about the Mina, commanding the said Pinteado (for so he tooke vpon +him) to lead the ships to Benin, being vnder the Equinoctial line, and an +hundred and fifty leagues beyond the Mina, where he looked to haue their +ships laden with pepper: and being counselled of the said Pinteado, +considering the late time of the yeere, for that time to go no further, but +to make sale of their wares such as they had for gold, wherby they might +haue bene great gainers: Windam not assenting hereunto, fell into a sudden +rage, reuiling the sayd Pinteado, calling him Iew, with other opprobrious +words, saying, This whoreson Iew hath promised to bring vs to such places +as are not, or as he cannot bring vs vnto: but if he do not, I will cut off +his eares and naile them to the maste. Pinteado gaue the foresaid counsell +to go no further for the safegard of the men and their liues, which they +should put in danger if they came too late, for the Rossia which is their +Winter, not for cold, but for smothering heate, with close and cloudie aire +and storming weather, of such putrifying qualitie, that it rotted the +coates of their backs: or els for comming to soone for the scorching heat +of the sunne, which caused them to linger in the way. [Sidenote: The king +of Benin his court.] But of force and not of will brought he the ships +before the riuer of Benin, where riding at an Anker, they sent their pinnas +vp into the riuer 50 or 60 leagues, from whence certaine of the marchants +with captaine Pinteado, Francisco, a Portugale, Nicholas Lambert gentleman, +and other marchants were conducted to the court where the king remained, +ten leagues from the riuer side, whither when they came, they were brought +with a great company to the presence of the king, who being a blacke Moore +(although not so blacke as the rest) sate in a great huge hall, long and +wide, the wals made of earth without windowes, the roofe of thin boords, +open in sundry places, like vnto louers to let in the aire. + +And here to speake of the great reuerence they giue to their king, it is +such, that if we would giue as much to our Sauior Christ, we should remooue +from our heads many plagues which we daily deserue for our contempt and +impietie. + +So it is therefore, that when his noble men are in his presence, they neuer +looke him in the face, but sit cowring, as we vpon our knees, so they vpon +their buttocks, with their elbowes vpon their knees, and their hands before +their faces, not looking vp vntil the king command them. And when they are +comming toward the king, as far as they do see him, they do shew such +reuerence, sitting on the ground with their faces couered as before. +Likewise when they depart from him, they turn not their backs toward him, +but goe creeping backward with like reuerence. + +[Sidenote: The communication between the king of Benin and our men.] And +now to speake somewhat of the communication that was between the king and +our men, you shall first vnderstand that he himselfe could speake the +Portugall tongue, which he had learned of a child. Therefore after he had +commanded our men to stand vp, and demanded of them the cause of their +comming into that countrey, they answered by Pinteado, that they were +marchants trauelling into those parties for the commodities of his +countrey, for exchange of wares which they had brought from their +countries, being such as should be no lesse commodious for him and his +people. The king then hauing of old lying in a certaine store house 30 or +40 kintals of Pepper (euery kintall being an hundred weight) willed them to +looke vpon the same, and againe to bring him a sight of such marchandizes +as they had brought with them. [Sidenote: The kings gentlenes towards our +men. ] And thereupon sent with the captaine and the marchants certaine of +his men to conduct them to the waters side, with other to bring the ware +from the pinnas to the court. Who when they were returned and the wares +seen, the king grew to this ende with the merchants to prouide in 30 dayes +the lading of al their ships with pepper. And in case their merchandizes +would not extend to the value of so much pepper, he promised to credite +them to their next returne, and thereupon sent the country round about to +gather pepper, causing the same to be brought to the court: So that within +the space of 30 dayes they had gathered fourescore tunne of pepper. + +In the meane season our men partly hauing no rule of themselues, but eating +without measure of the fruits of the countrey, and drinking the wine of the +Palme trees that droppeth in the night from the cut of the branches of the +same, and in such extreme heate running continually into the water, and +vsed before to such sudden and vehement alterations (then the which nothing +is more dangerous) were thereby brought into swellings and agues: insomuch +that the later time of the yeere comming on, caused them to die sometimes +three and sometimes 4 or 5 in a day. Then Windam perceiuing the time of the +30 daies to be expired, and his men dying so fast, sent to the court in +post to Captaine Pinteado, and the rest to come away and to tary no longer. +But Pinteado with the rest, wrote backe to him againe, certifying him of +the great quantity of pepper they had alreadie gathered, and looked daily +for much more: desiring him furthermore to remember the great praise and +name they should win, if they came home prosperously, and what shame of the +contrary. With which answere Windam not satisfied, and many of their men +dying dayly, willed and commaunded them againe either to come away +forthwith, or els threatened to leaue them behinde. When Pinteado heard +this answere, thinking to perswade him with reason, hee tooke his way from +the court toward the ships, being conducted thither with men by the kings +commandement. + +[Sidenote: The Death of Windham.] In the meane season Windam all raging, +brake vp Pinteados Cabin, brake open his chestes, spoiled such prouision of +cold stilled waters and suckets as he had prouided for his health, and left +him nothing, neither of his instruments to saile by, nor yet of his +apparell: and in the meane time falling sicke, himselfe died also. Whose +death Pinteado comming aboord, lamented as much as if he had bene the +deerest friend he had in the world. [Sidenote: Pinteado euill vsed of the +mariners.] But certaine of the mariners and other officers did spit in his +face, some calling him Iewe, saying that he had brought them thither to +kill them: and some drawing their swords at him, making a shew to slay him. +Then he perceiuing that they would needs away, desired them to tarry that +he might fetch the rest of the marchants that were left at the court, but +they would not grant this request. Then desired he them to giue him the +ship-boate, with as much of an old saile as might serue for the same, +promising them therwith to bring Nicholas Lambert and the rest into +England, but all was in vaine. [Sidenote: This Lambert was a Londiner +borne, whose father had bin Lord Maior of London.] Then wrote he a letter +to the court to the marchants, informing them of all the matter, and +promising them if God would lend him life to returne with all haste to +fetch them. And thus was Pinteado kept ashipboord against his will, thrust +among the boyes of the ship, not vsed like a man, nor yet like an honest +boy, but glad to find fauour at the cookes hand. Then departed they, +leauing one of their ships behind them, which they sunke for lacke of men +to cary her. [Sidenote: The death of Pinteado.] After this, within 6 or 7 +dayes sayling, dyed also Pinteado for uery pensiuenesse and thought that +stroke him to the heart. A man worthy to serue any prince, and most vilely +vsed. And of seuenscore men came home to Plimmouth scarcely forty, and of +them many died. [Sidenote: Pinteado first perswaded our men to the voiage +of Guinea.] And that no man should suspect these words which I haue saide +in commendation of Pinteado, to be spoken vpon fauour otherwise then +trueth, I haue thought good to adde hereunto the copie of the letters which +the king of Portugall and the infant his brother wrote vnto him to +reconcile him, at such time as vpon the king his masters displeasure (and +not for any other crime or offence, as may appeare by the said letters) he +was only for pouertie inforced to come into England, where he first +perswaded our marchants to attempt the said voyages to Guinea. But as the +king of Portugall too late repented him that he had so punished Pinteado, +vpon malicious informations of such as enuied the mans good fortune: euen +so may it hereby appeare that in some cases euen Lions themselues may +either be hindered by the contempt, or aided by the helpe of the poore +mise, according vnto the fable of Esope. + + * * * * * + +The copie of Anthonie Anes Pinteado his letters patents, whereby the king + of Portugall made him knight of his house, after all his troubles and + imprisonment, which, by wrong information made to the king, he had + susteined of long time, being at the last deliuered, his cause knowen and + manifested to the king by a gray Friar the kings Confessor. + +[Sidenote: Seven hundred reis are ten shillings. Alcayre is halfe a +bushell.] I the king doe giue you to vnderstand lord Francis Desseaso, one +of my counsell and ouerseer of my house, that in consideration of the good +seruice which Anthony Anes Pinteado, the sonne of Iohn Anes, dwelling in +the towne called the Port, hath done vnto me, my will and pleasure is, to +make him knight of my house, allowing to him in Pension seuen hundred reis +monethly, and euery day one alcayre of barly, as long as he keepeth a +horse, and to be paid according to the ordinance of my house. Prouiding +alwaies that he shall receiue but one marriage gift. And this also in such +condition, that the time which is accepted in our ordinance, forbidding +such men to marry for getting such children as might succeede them in this +allowance, which is 6 yeres after the making of this patent, shalbe first +expired before he do marry. I therfore command you to cause this to be +entred in the booke called the Matricula of our houshold, vnder the title +of knights. And when it is so entred, let the clarke of the Matricula, for +the certeintie therof, write on the backside of this Aluala, or patent, the +number of the leafe wherein this our grant is entred. Which done, let him +returne this writing vnto the said Anthonie Anes Pinteado for his warrant. + +I Diego Henriques haue written this in Almarin the two and twentie day of +September, in the yeere of our Lord 1551. And this beneuolence the king +gaue vnto Anthonie Anes Pinteado, the fiue and twentie day of Iuly this +present yeere. + +Rey. + + +The Secretaries declaration written vnder the kings grant. + +Your Maiestie hath vouchsafed, in respect and consideration of the good +seruice of Anthonie Anes Pinteado, dwelling in the port, and sonne of Iohn +Anes, to make him knight of your house, with ordinarie allowance, of seuen +hundred reis pension by the moneth, and one alcaire of barley by the day, +as long as he keepeth a horse: and to be paide according to the ordinance +of your house, with condition that hee shall haue but one marriage gift: +and that not within the space of sixe yeres after the making of these +letters Patents. The Secretaries note. Entred in the booke of the +Matricula. Fol. 683. + +Francisco de Siquera. + + +The copie of the letter of Don Lewes the infant, and brother to the king of + Portugall, sent into England to Anthonie Anes Pinteado. + +Anthony Anes Pinteado, I the infant brother to the king, haue me heartily +commended vnto you. Peter Gonsalues is gone to seeke you, desiring to bring +you home againe into your countrey. And for that purpose he hath with him a +safe conduct for you, granted by the king, that therby you may freely and +without all feare come home. And although the weather be foule and stormie, +yet faile not to come: for in the time that his Maiestie hath giuen you, +you may doe many things to your contentation and gratifying the king, +whereof I would be right glad: and to bring the same to passe, I will do +all that lieth in me for your profite. But forasmuch as Peter Gonsalues +will make further declaration hereof vnto you, I say no more at this +present. Written in Lisbone, the eight day of December. Anno 1552. + +The infant Don Lewes. + + +All these foresaid writings I saw vnder seale, in the house of my friend +Nicholas Liese, with whom Pinteado left them, at his vnfortunate departing +to Guinea. But, notwithstanding all these friendly letters and faire +promises, Pinteado durst not attempt to goe home, neither to keepe companie +with the Portugals his countrey men, without the presence of other: +forasmuch as he had secrete admonitions that they intended to slay him, if +time and place might haue serued their wicked intent. + + * * * * * + +The second voyage to Guinea set out by Sir George Barne, Sir Iohn Yorke, + Thomas Lok, Anthonie Hickman and Edward Castelin, in the yere 1554. The + Captaine whereof was M. Iohn Lok. + +As in the first voiage I haue declared rather the order of the history, +then the course of the nauigation, whereof at that time I could haue no +perfect information: so in the description of this second voyage, my chiefe +intent hath beene to shew the course of the same, according to the +obseruation and ordinarie custome of the mariners, and as I receiued it at +the handes of an expert Pilot, being one of the chiefe in this voyage, who +also with his owne handes wrote a briefe declaration of the same, as he +found and tried all things, not by coniecture, but by the art of sayling, +and instruments perteining to the mariners facultie. Not therefore assuming +to my selfe the commendations due vnto other, neither so bold as in any +part to change or otherwise dispose the order of this voyage so well +obserued by art and experience, I haue thought good to set forth the same, +in such sort and phrase of speech as is commonly vsed among them, and as I +receiued it of the said Pilot, as I haue said. Take it therefore as +followeth. + +[Sidenote: Robert Gainsh was master of the Iohn Euangelist.] In the yeere +of our Lord 1554 the eleuenth day of October, we departed the riuer of +Thames with three goodly ships, the one called the Trinitie, a ship of the +burden of seuenscore tunne, the other called the Bartholomew, a ship of the +burden of ninetie, the third was the Iohn Euangelist, a ship of seuen score +tunne. With the sayd ships and two pinnesses (wherof the one was drowned on +the coast of England) we went forward on our voyage, and stayed at Douer +fourteene dayes. We staied also at Rie three or foure dayes. Moreouer last +of all we touched at Dartmouth. + +The first day of Nouember at nine of the clocke at night, departing from +the coast of England, we set off the Start, bearing Southwest all that +night in the sea, and the next day all day, and the next night after, +vntill the third day of the said moneth about noone, making our way good, +did runne threescore leagues. + +The 17. day in the morning we had sight of the Ile of Madera, which doth +rise to him that commeth in the Northnortheast part vpright land in the +west part of it, and very high: and to the Southsoutheast a low long land, +and a long point, with a saddle thorow the middest of it, standing in two +and thirtie degrees: and in the West part, many springs of water running +downe from the mountaine, and many white fieldes like vnto corne fields, +and some white houses to the Southeast part of it: and the toppe of the +mountaine sheweth very ragged, if you may see it, and in the Northeast part +there is a bight or bay as though it were a harborow: Also in the said +part, there is a rocke a little distance from the shoare, and ouer the sayd +bight you shall see a great gappe in the mountaine. + +The 19 day at twelue of the clocke we had sight of the isle of Palmes and +Teneriffa and the Canaries. The Ile of Palme riseth round, and lieth +Southeast and Northwest, and the Northwest part is lowest. In the South is +a round hill ouer the head land, and another round hill aboue that in the +land. There are between the Southeast part of the Ile of Madera and the +Northwest part of the Ile of Palme seuen and fifty leagues. This Isle of +Palme lieth in eight and twenty degrees. And our course from Madera to the +Ile of Palme was South and South and by West, so that we had sight of +Teneriffa and of the Canaries. The Southeast part of the Ile of the Palme, +and the Northnortheast of Teneriffa lie Southeast and Northwest, and +betweene them are 20 leagues. Teneriffa and the great Canary called Gran +Canaria, and the West part of Forteuentura stande in seuen and twenty +degrees and a halfe. Gomera is a faire Island but very ragged, and lieth +Westsouthwest off Teneriffa. And whosouer wil come betweene them two Ilands +must come South and by East, and in the South part of Gomera is a towne and +a good rode in the said part of the Iland: and it standeth in seuen and +twentie degrees and three terces. Teneriffa is an high land, with a great +high pike like a sugar loafe, and vpon the said pike is snow throughout all +the whole yeere. And by reason of that pike it may be knowen aboue all +other Ilands, and there we were becalmed the twentieth day of Nouember, +from sixe of the clocke in the morning, vntill foure of the clocke at +afternoone. + +The two and twentieth day of Nouember, vnder the Tropike of Cancer the +Sunne goeth downe West and by South. Vpon the coast of Barbarie fiue and +twentie leagues by North Cape blanke, at three leagues off the maine, there +are fifteene fadomes and good shelly ground, and sande among and no +streames, and two small Ilands standing in two and twentie degrees and a +terce. + +From Gomera to Cape de las Barbas is an hundred leagues, and our course was +South and by East. The said Cape standeth in two and twentie and a halfe: +and all that coast is flatte, sixteene or seuenteene fadome deepe. Seuen or +eight leagues off from the riuer del Oro or Cape de las Barbas, there vse +many Spaniardes and Portugals to trade for fishing, during the moneth of +Nouember: and all that coast is very low lands. Also we went from Cape de +las Barbas Southsouthwest, and Southwest and by South, till we brought our +selues in twentie degrees and a halfe, reckoning our selues seuen leagues +off: and there were the least sholes of Cape Blanke. + +Then we went South vntil we brought our selues in 13 degrees, reckoning our +selues fiue and twentie leagues off. And in 15 degrees we did reare the +Crossiers, and we might haue reared them sooner if we had looked for them. +They are not right a crosse in the moneth of Nouember, by reason that the +nights are short there. Neuertheless we had the sight of them the 29 day of +the said moneth at night. + +The first of December, being in 13 degrees we set our course South and by +East, vntill the fourth day of December at 12 of the clocke the same day. +Then we were in nine degrees and a terce, rekoning our selues 30 leagues of +the sholes of the riuer called Rio Grande, being Westsouthwest off them, +the which sholes be 30 leagues long. + +The fourth of December we beganne to set our course Southeast, we being in +sixe degrees and a halfe. + +The ninth day of December we set our course Eastsoutheast: the fourteenth +day of the sayde moneth we set our course East, we being in fiue degrees +and a halfe, reckoning our selues thirty and sixe leagues from the coast of +Guinea. + +The nineteenth of the said moneth we set our course East and by North, +reckoning our selues seuenteene leagues distant from Cape Mensurado, the +said Cape being Eastnortheast of vs, and the riuer of Sesto being East. + +The one and twentieth day of the said moneth, we fell with Cape Mensurado +to the Southeast, about two leagues off. This Cape may be easily knowen, by +reason yet the rising of it is like a Porpose-head. Also toward the +Southeast there are three trees, whereof the Eastermost tree is the +highest, and the middlemost is like a hie stacke, and the Southermost like +vnto a gibet: and vpon the maine are foure or fiue high hilles rising one +after another like round hommocks or hillocks. And the Southeast of the +three trees, brandiernwise: and all the coast along is white sand. The said +Cape standeth within a litle in sixe degrees. + +The two and twentieth of December we came to the riuer of Sesto, and +remained there vntill the nine and twentieth day of the said moneth. Here +we thought it best to send before vs the pinnesse to the riuer Dulce, +called Rio Dulce, that they might haue the beginning of the market before +the comming of the Iohn Euangelist. + +At the riuer of Sesto we had a tunne of graines. This riuer standeth in +sixe degrees, lacking a terce. From the riuer of Sesto to Rio Dulce are +fiue and twentie leagues. Rio Dulce standeth in fiue degrees and a halfe. +The river of Sesto is easie to be knowen, by reason there is a ledge of +rockes on the Southeast part of the Rode. And at the entring into the hauen +are fiue or sixe trees that beare no leaues. The is a good harborow, but +very narow at the entrance into the riuer. There is also a rocke in the +hauens mouth right as you enter. And all that coast betweene Cape de Monte, +and cape de las Palmas, lieth Southeast and by East, Northwest and by West, +being three leagues off the shore. And you shal haue in some places rocks +two leagues off: and that, betweene the riuer of Sesto and cape de las +Palmas. + +Betweene the riuer of Sesto and the riuer Dulce are fiue and twentie +leagues: and the high land that is betweene them both, is called Cakeado, +being eight leagues from the riuer of Sesto. And to the Southeastwarde of +it is a place called Shawgro, and another called Shyawe or Shauo, where you +may get fresh water. Off this Shyawe lieth a ledge of rockes: and to the +Southeastwarde lieth a hedland called Croke. Betweene Cakeado and Croke are +nine or ten leagues. To the Southeastward off, is a harborow called S. +Vincent: Right ouer against S. Vincent is a rocke vnder the water two +leagues and a halfe off the shore. To the Southeastward of that rocke you +shal see an island about three or foure leagues off: this island is not +past a league off the shore. To the Eastsoutheast of the island, is a rocke +that lieth aboue the water, and by that rocke goeth in the riuer Dulce, +which you shall know by the said riuer and rocke. The Northwest side of the +hauen is flat sand, and the Southeast side thereof is like an Island, and a +bare plot without any trees, and so is it not in any other place. + +In the Rode you shall ride in thirteene or foureteene fadomes, good oaze +and sand, being the markes of the Rode to bring the Island and the +Northeast land together, and here we ankered the last of December. + +The third day of Ianuarie, we came from the riuer Dulce. + +Note that Cape de las Palmas is a faire high land, but some low places +thereof by the water side looke like red cliffes with white strakes like +hie wayes, a cable length a piece, and this is the East part of the cape. +This cape is the Southermost land in all the coast of Guinea, and standeth +in foure degrees and a terce. + +The coast from Cape de las Palmas to Cape Trepointes, or de Tres Puntas, is +faire and cleare without rocke or other danger. + +Twentie and fiue leagues from Cape de las Palmas, the land is higher then +in any place, vntill we come to Cape Trepointes: And about ten leagues +before you come to Cape Trepointes, the land riseth still higher and +higher, vntill you come to Cape Trepointes. Also before you come to the +said Cape, after other 5 leagues to the Northwest part of it, there is +certaine broken ground, with two great rockes, and within them in the bight +of a bay, is a castle called Arra, perteining to the king of Portugall. You +shall know it by the said rockes that lie off it: for there is none such +from Cape de las Palmas to Cape Trepointes. This coast lieth East and by +North, West and by South. From Cape de las Palmas to the said castle is +fourescore and fifteene leagues. And the coast lieth from the said castle +to the Westermost point of Trepoyntes, Southeast and by South, Northwest +and by North. Also the Westermost point of Trepoyntes is a low lande, lying +halfe a mile out in the sea: and vpon the innermost necke, to the +land-ward, is a tuft of trees, and there we arriued the eleuenth day of +Ianuary. + +The 12 day of Ianuary we came to a towne called Samma or Samua, being 8 +leagues from Cape Trepointes toward Eastnortheast. Betweene Cape Trepointes +and the towne of Samua is a great ledge of rockes a great way out in the +sea. [Sidenote: The pledge was sir Iohn Yorke his Nephew.] We continued +foure dayes at that Towne, and the Captaine thereof would needs haue a +pledge a shore. But when they receiued the pledge, they kept him still, and +would trafficke no more, but shot off their ordinance at vs. They haue two +or three pieces of ordinance and no more. + +The sixteenth day of the said month we made reckoning to come to a place +called Cape Corea, where captaine Don Iohn dwelleth, whose men entertained +vs friendly. This Cape Corea is foure leagues Eastwarde of the castle of +Mina, otherwise called La mina, or Castello de mina, where we arriued the +18 day of the month. [Sidenote: The castle of Mina perteining to the king +of Portugall.] Here we made sale of all our cloth, sauing two or three +packes. + +The 26 day of the same moneth we weighed anker, and departed from thence to +the Trinitie, which was seuen leagues Eastward of vs, where she solde her +wares. Then they of the Trinitie willed vs to go Eastward of that eight or +nine leagues, to sell part of their wares, in a place called Perecow, and +another place named Perecow Grande, being the Eastermost place of both +these, which you shal know by a great round hill neere vnto it, named Monte +Rodondo, lying Westward from it, and by the water side are many high palme +trees. From hence did we set forth homeward the thirteenth day of February, +and plied vp alongst till we came within seuen or eight leagues to Cape +Trepointes. About eight of the clocke the 15 day at afternoone, wee did +cast about to seaward: and beware of the currants, for they will deceiue +you sore. Whosoeuer shall come from the coast of Mina homeward, let him be +sure to make his way good West, vntill he reckon himselfe as farre as Cape +de las Palmas, where the currant setteth alwayes to the Eastward. And +within twentie leagues Eastward of Cape de las Palmas is a riuer called De +los Potos, where you may haue fresh water and balast enough, and plenty of +iuory or Elephants teeth. This riuer standeth in foure degrees, and almost +two terces. [Sidenote: Cabo de las Palmas.] And when you reckon your selfe +as farre shot as Cape de las Palmas, being in a degree, or a degree and a +halfe, you may go West, and West by North, vntill you come in three +degrees: and then you may go Westnorthwest, and Northwest and by West, +vntill you come in fiue degrees, and then Northwest. And in sixe degrees, +we met Northerly windes, and great ruffling of tides. And as we could +iudge, the currants went to the Northnorthwest. Furthermore betweene Cape +de Monte, and Cape Verde, go great currants, which deceiue many men. + +The 22 day of Aprill, we were in 8 degrees and two terces: and so we ran to +the Northwest, hauing the winde at Northeast and Eastnortheast, and +sometimes at East, vntill we were at 18 degrees and a terce, which was on +May day. And so from 18 and two terces, we had the winde at East and +Eastnortheast, and sometimes at Eastsoutheast: and then we reckoned the +Island of Cape verde Eastsoutheast of vs, we iudging our selues to be 48 +leagues off. And in 20 and 21 degrees, we had the winde more Easterly to +the Southward then before. And so we ran to the Northwest and +Northnorthwest, and sometimes North and by West and North, until we came +into 31 degrees, where we reckoned our selues a hundred and fourescore +leagues Southwest and by South of the Island de los Flores, and there wee +met with the winde at Southsoutheast, and set our course Northeast. + +In 23 degrees we had the winde at the South and Southwest, and then we set +our course Northnortheast, and so we ran to 40 degrees, and then we set our +course Northeast, the winde being at the Southwest, and hauing the Ile de +Flores East of us, and 17 leagues off. + +In the 41 degrees we met with the winde at Northeast, and so we ran +Northwestward, then we met with the winde Westnorthwest, and at the West +within 6 leagues, running toward the Northwest, and then we cast about, and +lay Northeast, vntill we came in 42 degrees, where we set our course +Eastnortheast, iudging the Ile of Coruo South and by West of vs, and sixe +and thirty leagues distant from vs. + +A remembrance, that the 21st day of May we communed with Iohn Rafe, and he +thought it best to goe Northeast, and iudged himselfe 25 leagues Eastward +to the Isle de Flores, and in 39 degrees and a halfe. + +Note, that on the fourth day of September, vnder nine degrees, we lost the +sight of the North starre. + +Note also, that in 45 degrees, the compasse is varied 8 degrees to the +West. + +Item, in 40 degrees the compasse did varie 15 degrees in the whole. + +Item, in 30 degrees and a halfe, the compasse is varied 5 degrees to the +West. + +Be it also in memory that two or three daies before we came to Cape de 3 +puntas, the pinnesse went alongst the shore, thinking to sell some of our +wares, and so we came to anker three or foure leagues West and by South of +the Cape de 3 puntas, where we left the Trinitie. + +Then our pinnesse came aboord with all our men, the pinnesse also tooke in +more wares. They told me moreouer that they would goe to a place where the +Primrose was, and had receiued much gold at the first voyage to these +parties, and tolde me furthermore that it was a good place: but I fearing a +brigantine that was then vpon the coast, did wey and follow them, and left +the Trinitie about foure leagues off from vs, and there we rode against +that towne foure dayes: so that Martine by his owne desire, and assent of +some of the Commissioners that were in the pinnesse, went a shoare to the +towne, and there Iohn Berin went to trafique from vs, being three miles off +trafiquing at an other towne. The towne is called Samma or Samua, for Samma +and Sammaterra, are the names of the two first townes, where we did +trafique for gold, to the Northeast of Cape de 3 puntas. + +Hitherto continueth the course of the voyage, as it was described by the +sayde Pilot. Nowe therefore I will speake somewhat of the countrey and +people, and of such things as are brought from thence. + +They brought from thence at the last voyage foure hundred pound weight and +odde of gold, of two and twentie carrats and one graine in finenesse: also +sixe and thirtie buts of graines, and about two hundred and fiftie +Elephants teeth of all quantities. Of these I saw and measured, some of +nine spans in length, as they were crooked. Some of them were as bigge as a +mans thigh aboue the knee, and weyed about fourescore and ten pound weight +a peece. They say that some one hath bin seene of an hundred and fiue and +twentie pound weight. Other there were which they call the teeth of calues, +of one or two or three yeeres, whereof some were a foot and a halfe, some +two foot, and some 3 or more, according to the age of the beast. These +great teeth or tusks grow in the vpper iaw downeward, and not in the nether +iaw vpward, wherein the Painters and Arras workers are deceiued. At this +last voyage was brought from Guinea the head of an Elephant, of such huge +bignesse, that onely the bones or cranew thereof, beside the nether iaw and +great tusks, weighed about two hundred weight, and was as much as I could +well lift from the ground: insomuch that considering also herewith the +weight of two such great teeth, the nether iaw with the lesse teeth, the +tongue, the great hanging eares, the bigge and long snout or troonke, with +all the flesh, braines, and skinne, with all other parts belonging to the +whole head, in my iudgement it could weigh litle lesse then fiue hundred +weight. [Sidenote: Sir Andrew Iudde. The contemplation of Gods works.] This +head diuers haue seene in the house of the worthy marchant sir Andrew +Iudde, where also I saw it, and beheld it, not only with my bodily eyes, +but much more with the eye of my mind and spirit, considering by the worke, +the cunning and wisedome of the workemaister: without which consideration, +the sight of such strange and wonderfull things may rather seeme +curiosities, then profitable contemplations. + +[Sidenote: The decription and properties of the Elephant.] The Elephant +(which some call an Oliphant) is the biggest of all foure footed beasts, +his forelegs are longer then his hinder, he hath ancles in the lower part +of his hinder legges, and fiue toes on his feete vndiuided, his snout or +tronke is so long, and in such forme, that it is to him in the stead of a +hand: for he neither eateth nor drinketh but by bringing his tronke to his +mouth, therewith he helpeth vp his Master or keeper, therewith he +ouerthroweth trees. Beside his two great tusks, he hath on euery side of +his mouth foure teeth, wherewith he eateth and grindeth his meate: either +of these teeth are almost a span in length, as they grow along in the iaw, +and are about two inches in height, and almost as much in thicknesse. The +tuskes of the male are greater then of the female: his tongue is very +litle, and so farre in his mouth, that it cannot be seene: of all beastes +they are most gentle and tractable, for by many sundry wayes they are +taught, and doe vnderstand: insomuch that they learne to doe due honor to a +king, and are quick sense and sharpenesse of wit. When the male hath once +seasoned the female, he neuer after toucheth her. The male Elephant liueth +two hundreth yeeres, or at the least one hundred and twentie: the female +almost as long, but the floure of their age is but threescore yeres, as +some write. They cannot suffer winter or cold: they loue riuers, and will +often go into them vp to the snout, wherewith they blow and snuffe, and +play in the water: but swimme they cannot, for the weight of their bodies. +Plinie and Soline write, that they vse none adulterie. If they happen to +meete with a man in wildernesse being out of the way, gently they wil go +before him, and bring him into the plaine way. Ioyned in battel, they haue +no small respect vnto them that be wounded: for they bring them that are +hurt or weary into the middle of the army to be defended: they are made +tame by drinking the iuise of barley. [Sidenote: Debate between the +Elephant and the Dragon.] They haue continual warre against Dragons, which +desire their blood, because it is very cold: and therefore the Dragon lying +awaite as the Elephant passeth by, windeth his taile (being of exceeding +length) about the hinder legs of the Elephant, and so staying him, +thrusteth his head into his tronke and exhausteth his breath, or else +biteth him in the eare, whereunto he cannot reach with his tronke, and when +the Elephant waxeth faint, he falleth downe on the serpent, being now full +of blood, and with the poise of his body breaketh him: so that his owne +blood with the blood of the Elephant runneth out of him mingled together, +which being colde, is congealed into that substance which the Apothecaries +call Sanguis Draconis, (that is) Dragons blood, otherwise called +Cinnabaris, although there be an other kinde of Cinnabaris, commonly called +Cinoper or Vermilion, which the Painters vse in certaine colours. + +[Sidenote: Three kinds of Elephants.] They are also of three kinds, as of +the Marshes, the plaines, and the mountaines, no lesse differing in +conditions. Philostratus writeth, that as much as the Elephant of Libya in +bignes passeth the horse of Nysea, so much doe the Elephants of India +exceed them of Libya: for the Elephants of India, some haue bene seene of +the height of nine cubits: the other do so greatly feare these, that they +dare not abide the sight of them. Of the Indian Elephants onely the males +haue tuskes, but of them of Ethiopia and Libya both kindes are tusked: they +are of diuers heights, as of twelue, thirteene, and fourteene dodrants, +euery dodrant being a measure of nine inches. Some write that an Elephant +is bigger then three wilde Oxen or Buffes. They of India are black, or of +the colour of a mouse, but they of Ethiope or Guinea are browne: the hide +or skinne of them all is very hard, and without haire or bristles: their +eares are two dodrants broad, and their eyes very litle. Our men saw one +drinking at a riuer in Guinea, as they sailed into the land. + +Of other properties and conditions of the Elephant, as of their marueilous +docilitie, of their fight and vse in the warres, of their generation and +chastitie, when they were first seene in the Theatres and triumphes of the +Romanes, how they are taken and tamed, and when they cast their tusks, with +the vse of the same in medicine, who so desireth to know, let him reade +Plinie, in the eight booke of his naturall history. He also writeth in his +twelft booke, that in olde time they made many goodly workes of iuory or +Elephants teeth: as tables, tressels, postes of houses, railes, lattesses +for windowes, images of their gods, and diuers other things of iuory, both +coloured, and vncoloured, and intermixt with sundry kindes of precious +woods, as at this day are made certaine chaires, lutes, and virginals. They +had such plenty thereof in olde time, that (as far as I remember) Iosephus +writeth, that one of the gates of Hierusalem was called Porta Eburnea, +(that is) the Iuory gate. The whitenesse thereof was so much esteemed, that +it was thought to represent the natural fairenesse of mans skinne: insomuch +that such as went about to set foorth (or rather corrupt) naturall beautie +with colours and painting, were reproued by this prouerbe, Ebur atramento +candefacere, that is, To make iuory white with inke. The Poets also +describing the faire necks of beautifull virgins, call them Eburnea colla, +that is, Iuory necks. And to haue said thus much of Elephants and Iuory, it +may suffice. + +[Sidenote: The people of Africa.] Now therefore I will speake somewhat of +the people and their maners, and maner of liuing, with an other briefe +description of Africa also. It is to be vnderstood, that the people which +now inhabite the regions of the coast of Guinea, and the midle parts of +Africa, as Libya the inner, and Nubia, with diuers other great and large +regions about the same, were in old time called AEthiopes and Nigritae, +which we now call Moores, Moorens, or Negroes, a people of beastly liuing, +without a God, lawe, religion, or common wealth, and so scorched and vexed +with the heat of the sunne, that in many places they curse it when it +riseth. Of the regions and people about the inner Libya (called Libya +interior) Gemma Phrysius writeth thus. + +Libya interior is very large and desolate, in the which are many horrible +wildernesses and mountaines, replenished with diuers kinds of wilde and +monstrous beastes and serpents. First from Muritania or Barbary toward the +South is Getulia, a rough and sauage region, whose inhabitants are wilde +and wandering people. After these follow the people called Melanogetuli and +Pharusij, which wander in the wildernesse, carrying with them great gourdes +of water. [Sidenote: AEthiopes, Nigritae. The riuer Nigritis or Senega.] +The Ethiopians called Nigritae occupy a great part of Africa, and are +extended to the West Ocean. Southward also they reach to the riuer +Nigritis, whose nature agreeth with the riuer of Nilus, forasmuch as it is +increased and diminished at the same time, and bringeth forth the like +beasts as the Crocodile. By reason whereof, I thinke this to be the same +riuer which the Portugals called Senega: For this riuer is also of the same +nature. It is furthermore marueilous and very strange that is said of this +river: And this is, that on the one side thereof, the inhabitants are of +high stature and black, and on the other side, of browne or tawne colour, +and low stature, which thing also our men confirme to be true. + +[Sindenote: People of Libya.] There are also other people of Libya called +Garamantes, whose women are common: for they contract no matrimonie; +neither haue respect to chastitie. After these are the nations of the +people called Pyrei, Sathiodaphnitae, Odrangi, Mimaces, Lynxamatae, +Dolopes, Aganginae, Leuci Ethiopes, Xilicei Ethiopei, Calcei Ethiopes, and +Nubi. These haue the same situation in Ptolome that they now giue to the +kingdome of Nubia. Here are certaine Christians vnder the dominion of the +great Emperour of AEthiopia, called Prester Iohn. From these toward the +West is a great nation of people called Aphricerones, whose region (as +faire as may be gathered by coniecture) is the same that is now called +Regnum Orguene, confining vpon the East parts of Guinea. From hence +Westward, and somewhat toward the North, are the kingdoms of Gambra and +Budomel, not farre from the riuer of Senega. And from hence toward the +inland regions, and along by the sea coast, are the regions of Ginoia or +Guinea, which we commonly call Ginnee. [Sidenote: The Portugals Nauigation +to Brasile.] On the Westside of these regions toward the Ocean, is the +cape or point called Cabo verde, or Caput viride, (that is) the greene +cape, to the which the Portugals first direct their course when they saile +to America, or the land of Brasile. Then departing from hence, they turne +to the right hand toward the quarter of the winde called Garbino, which is +betweene the West and the South. But to speake somewhat more of AEthiopia: +although there are many nations of people so named, yet is AEthiopia +chiefly diuided into two parts, whereof the one is called Aethiopia vnder +Aegypt, a great and rich region. To this perteineth the Island Meroe, +imbraced round about with the stremes of the riuer Nilus. In this Island +women reigned in old time. Iosephus writeth, that it was sometime called +Sabea: and that the Queene of Saba came from thence to Ierusalem, to heare +the wisedom of Salomon. [Sidenote: Prester Iohn Emperour of Aethiopia.] +From hence toward the East reigneth the said Christian Emperour Prester +Iohn, whom some cal Papa Iohannes, and other say that he is called Pean +Iuan (that is) great Iohn, whose Empire reacheth far beyond Nilus, and +is extended to the coasts of the Red sea and Indian sea. The middle of the +region is almost in 66. degrees of longitude, and 12. degrees of latitude. +[Sidenote: People of the Eastside of Africa.] About this region inhabite +the people called Clodi, Risophagi, Bobylonij, Axiuntae, Molili, and +Molibae. After these is the region called Troglodytica, whose inhabitants +dwel in caues and dennes: for these are their houses, and the flesh of +serpents their meat, as writeth Plinie, and Diodorus Siculus. They haue no +speach, but rather a grinning and chattering. There are also people +without heads, called Blemines, hauing their eyes and mouth in their +breast. Likewise Strucophagi, and naked Ganphasantes: Satyrs also, which +haue nothing of men but onely shape. Moreouer Oripei, great hunters. +Mennones also and the region of Smyrmophora, which bringeth foorth myrrhe. +After these is the region of Azania, in the which many Elephants are found. +A great part of the other regions of Africke that are beyond the +Aequinoctiall line, are now ascribed to the kingdome of Melinde, whose +inhabitants are accustomed to trafique with the nations of Arabia, and +their king is ioyned in friendship with the king of Portugal, and payeth +tribute to Prester Iohn. + +The other Ethiope, called AEthiopia interior (that is) the inner Ethiope, +is not yet knowne for the greatnesse thereof, but onely by the sea +coastes: yet is it described in this manner. First from the Aequinoctiall +toward the South, is a great region of Aethiopians, which bringeth forth +white Elephants, Tygers, and the beastes called Rhinocerotes. Also a +region that bringeth foorth plenty of cynamome, lying betweene the +branches of Nilus. Also the kingdome of Habech or Habasi, a region of +Christian men, lying both on this side and beyond Nilus. Here are also the +Aethiopians, called Ichthiopagi (that is) such as liue onely by fish, and +were sometimes subdued by the warres of great Alexander. Furthermore the +Aethiopians called Rhapsij, and Anthropophagi, that are accustomed to eat +mans flesh, inhabite the regions neere vnto the mountains called Montes +Lunae (that is) the mountaines of the Moone. Gazati is vnder the Tropike +of Capricorne. After this followeth the front of Afrike, the Cape of Buena +Speranza, or Caput Bonae Spei, that is, the Cape of good hope, by the +which they passe that saile from Lisbon to Calicut. But by what names the +Capes and gulfes are called, forasmuch as the same are in euery globe and +card, it were here superfluous to rehearse them. + +Some write that Africa was so named by the Grecians, because it is without +colde. For the Greeke letter Alpha or A signifies priuation, voyd, or +without: and Phrice signifies colde. For in deed although in the stead of +Winter they haue a cloudy and tempestuous season, yet is it not colde, but +rather smothering hote, with hote showres of raine also, and somewhere such +scorching windes, that what by one meanes and other, they seeme at certaine +times to liue as it were in fornaces, and in maner already halfe way in +Purgatorie or hell. Gemma Phrisius writeth, that in certaine parts of +Africa, as in Atlas the greater, the aire in the night season is seene +shining, with many strange fires and flames rising in maner as high as the +Moone: and that in the element are sometime heard as it were the sound of +pipes, trumpets and drummes: which noises may perhaps be caused by the +vehement and sundry motions of such firie exhalations in the aire, as we +see the like in many experiences wrought by fire, aire and winde. +[Sidenote: The middle region of the aire is cold.] The hollowness also, and +diuers reflexions and breaking of the cloudes may be great causes hereof, +beside the vehement colde of the middle region of the aire, whereby the +said fiery exhalations, ascending thither, are suddenly stricken backe with +great force: for euen common and dayly experience teacheth vs, by the +whissing of a burning torch, what noise fire maketh in the aire, and much +more where it striueth when it is inclosed with aire, as appeareth in +gunnes, and as the like is seene in onely aire inclosed, as in Organ pipes, +and such other instruments that go by winde. [Sidenote: The strife of +Elements. Winde.] For winde (as say the Philosophers) is none other then +aire vehemently moued, as we see in a paire of bellowes, and such other. + +[Sidenote: The heate of the Moone.] Some of our men of good credite that +were in this last voiage to Guinea, affirme earnestly that in the night +season they felt a sensible heat to come from the beames of the moone. +[Sidenote: The nature of the starres.] The which thing, although it be +strange and insensible to vs that inhabite cold regions, yet doeth it stand +with good reason that it may so be, forasmuch as the nature of starres and +planets (as writeth Plinie) consisteth of fire, and conteineth in it a +spirit of fire, which cannot be without heat. + +And, that the Moone giueth heate vpon the earth the Prophet Dauid seemeth +to confirme in his 121. Psalme, where speaking of such men as are defended +from euil by Gods protection, hee saith thus: Per diem Sol non exuret te, +nec Luna per noctem. That is to say, In the day the Sunne shall not burne +thee, nor the Moone by night. + +They say furthermore, that in certaine places of the sea they saw certaine +streames of water, which they call spouts, falling out of the aire into the +sea, and that some of these are as bigge as the great pillars of Churches: +insomuch that sometimes they fall into shippes, and put them in great +danger of drowning. Some faine that these should be the Cataracts of +heauen, which were all opened at Noes floud. But I thinke them rather to be +such fluxions and eruptions as Aristotle in his booke de Mundo saith, to +chance in the sea. For speaking of such strange things as are seene often +times in the sea, he writeth thus. Oftentimes also euen in the sea are +seene euaporations of fire, and such eruptions and breaking foorth of +springs, that the mouthes of riuers are opened. Whirlepooles, and fluxions +are caused of such other vehement motions, not only in the middest of the +sea, but also in creeks and streights. At certaine times also, a great +quantity of water is suddenly lifted vp and carried about with the Moone, +&c. By which wordes of Aristotle it doth appeare that such waters be lifted +vp in one place at one time, and suddenly fall downe in an other place at +another time. [Sidenote: A strange thing.] And hereunto perhaps perteineth +it that Richard Chancellor told me that he heard Sebastian Cabot report, +that (as farre as I remember) either about the coasts of Brasile or Rio de +Plata, his shippe or pinnesse was suddenly lifted from the sea, and cast +vpon land, I wot not howe farre. [Sidenote: The power of nature.] The which +thing, and such other like wonderfull and strange workes of nature while I +consider, and call to remembrance the narrownesse of mans vnderstanding and +knowledge, in comparison of her mightie power, I can but cease to maruell +and confesse with Plinie, that nothing is to her impossible, the least part +of whose power is not yet knowen to men. Many things more our men saw and +considered in this voyage, woorthy to be noted, whereof I haue thought good +to put some in memory, that the reader may aswell take pleasure in the +variety of things, as knowledge of the historie. Among other things, +therefore touching the maners and nature of the people, this may seeme +strange, that their princes and noble men vse to pounce and rase their +skinnes with pretie knots in diuers formes, as it were branched damaske, +thinking that to be a decent ornament. [Sidenote: Fine iewels. A bracelet.] +And albeit they goe in maner all naked, yet are many of them, and +especially their women, in maner laden with collars, bracelets, hoopes, and +chaines, either of gold, copper, or iuory. I my selfe haue one of their +brassets of Iuory, weighing two pound and sixe ounces of Troy weight, which +make eight and thirtie ounces: this one of their women did weare vpon her +arme. It is made of one whole piece of the biggest part of the tooth, +turned and somewhat carued, with a hole in the midst, wherein they put +their handes to wear it on their arme. Some haue on euery arme one, and as +many on their legges, wherewith some of them are so galled, that although +they are in maner made lame thereby, yet will they by no meanes leaue them +off. Some weare also on their legges great shackles of bright copper, which +they thinke to bee no lesse comely. They weare also collars, bracelets, +garlands, and girdles, of certain blew stones like beads. Likewise some of +their women weare on their bare armes certaine foresleeues made of the +plates of beaten golde. On their fingers also they weare rings, made of +golden wires, with a knot or wreath, like vnto that which children make in +a ring of a rush. Among other things of golde that our men bought of them +for exchange of their wares, were certaine dog-chaines and collers. + +They are very wary people in their bargaining, and will not lose one sparke +of golde of any value. They vse weights and measures, and are very +circumspect in occupying the same. They that shall haue to doe with them, +must vse them gently: for they will not trafique or bring in any wares if +they be euill vsed. At the first voyage that our men had into these +parties, it so chanced, that at their departure from the first place where +they did trafick, one of them either stole a muske Cat, or tooke her away +by force, not mistrusting that that should haue hindered their bargaining +in another place whither they intended to goe. But for all the haste they +coulde make with full sailes, the fame of their misusage so preuented them, +that the people of that place also, offended thereby, would bring in no +wares: insomuch that they were inforced either to restore the Cat, or pay +for her at their price before they could trafique there. + +Their houses are made of foure postes or trees, and couered with boughes. + +Their common feeding is of roots, and such fishes as they take, whereof +they haue great plenty. + +There are also such flying fishes as are seene in the sea of the West +Indies. Our men salted of their fishes, hoping to prouide store thereof: +but they would take no salt, and must therefore be eaten forthwith as some +say. Howbeit other affirme, that if they be salted immediately after they +be taken, they wil last vncorrupted ten or twelue dayes. But this is more +strange, that part of such flesh as they caried with them out of England, +which putrified there, became sweete againe at their returne to the clime +of temperate regions. + +They vse also a strange making of bread, in this maner. They grinde +betweene two stones with their handes as much corne as they thinke may +suffice their family, and when they haue thus brought it to floure, they +put thereto a certaine quantitie of water, and make thereof very thinne +dough, which they sticke vpon some post of their houses, where it is baked +by the heate of the Sunne: so that when the master of the house or any of +his family will eate thereof, they take it downe and eate it. + +They haue very faire wheate, the eare whereof is two handfuls in length, +and as bigge as a great Bulrush, and almost foure inches about where it is +biggest. The stemme or straw seemeth to be almost as bigge as the litle +finger of a mans hand, or litle lesse. The graines of this wheate are as +big as our peason, round also, and very white, and somewhat shining, like +pearles that haue lost their colour. Almost all the substance of them +turneth into floure, and maketh little bran or none. I told in one eare two +hundred and threescore graines. The eare is inclosed in three blades longer +than it selfe, and of two inches broad a piece. And by this fruitfulnes the +Sunne seemeth partly to recompence such griefes and molestations as they +otherwise receiue by the feruent heate thereof. It is doubtlesse a worthy +contemplation to consider the contrary effects of the sunne: or rather the +contrary passions of such things as receiue the influence of his beames, +either to their hurt or benefit. Their drinke is either water, or the iuise +that droppeth from the cut branches of the barren Date trees, called +Palmitos. For either they hang great gourdes at the said branches euery +euening, and let them so hang all night, or else they set them on the +ground vnder the trees, that the droppes may fall therein. They say that +this kinde of drinke is in taste much like vnto whey, but somewhat sweeter, +and more pleasant. They cut the branches euery euening, because they are +seared vp in the day by the heate of the Sunne. They haue also great beanes +as bigge as chestnuts, and very hard, with a shell in the stead of a huske. + +Many things more might be saide of the maners of the people, and of the +wonders and monstrous things that are engendered in Africke. But it shall +suffice to haue saide this much of such things as our men partly sawe, and +partly brought with them. + +And whereas before speaking of the fruit of graines, I described the same +to haue holes by the side (as in deede it hath, as it is brought hither) +yet was I afterward enfourmed, that those holes were made to put stringes +or twigges through the fruite, thereby to hang them vp to dry at the Sunne. +They grew not past a foote and a halfe, or two foote from the ground, and +are as red as blood when they are gathered. The graines themselues are +called of the Phisicions Grana Paradisi. + +[Sidenote: Shels that cleaue to ships.] At their comming home the keeles of +their shippes were marueilously ouergrowne with certaine shelles of two +inches length and more, as thicke as they could stand, and of such bignesse +that a man might put his thumbe in the mouthes of them. They certainely +affirme that in these there groweth a certaine slimie substance, which at +the length slipping out of the shell and falling in the sea, becommeth +those foules which we call Barnacles. The like shelles haue bene seene in +ships returning from Iseland, but these shels were not past halfe an inch +in length. Of the other that came from Guinea, I sawe the Primerose lying +in the docke, and in maner couered with the said shels, which in my +iudgement should greatly hinder her sayling. Their ships were also in many +places eaten with the wormes called Bromas or Bissas, whereof mention is +made in the Decades. These creepe betweene the plankes, which they eate +through in many places. + +[Sidenote: A secret.] Among other things that chanced to them in this +voyage, this is worthy to be noted, that whereas they sailed thither in +seuen weekes, they could returne in no lesse space then twentie weekes. The +cause whereof they say to be this: That about the coast of Cabo Verde the +winde is euer at the East, by reason whereof they were enforced to saile +farre out of their course into the maine Ocean, to finde the winde at the +West to bring them home. [Sidenote: The death of our men.] There died of +our men at this last voyage about twentie and four, whereof many died at +their returne into the clime of the colde regions, as betweene the Islands +of Azores and England. [Sidenote: Fiue blacke Moores brought into England. +Colde may be better abiden then heate.] They brought with them certaine +black slaues, whereof some were tall and strong men, and could wel agree +with our meates and drinkes. The colde and moyst aire doth somewhat offend +them. Yet doubtlesse men that are borne in hot Regions may better abide +colde, then men that are borne in colde Regions may abide heate, forasmuch +as vehement heate resolueth the radicall moysture of mens bodies, as colde +constraineth and preserueth the same. + +This is also to be considered as a secret worke of nature, that throughout +all Africke, vnder the AEquinoctial line, and neere about the same on both +sides, the regions are extreeme hote, and the people very blacke. Whereas +contrarily such regions of the West Indies as are vnder the same line are +very temperate, and the people neither blacke, nor with curlde and short +wooll on their heads, as they of Afrike haue, but of the colour of an +Oliue, with long and blacke heare on their heads: the cause of which +variety is declared in diuers places in the Decades. + +It is also worthy to be noted that some of them that were at this voyage +told me: That is, that they ouertooke the course of the Sunne, so that they +had it North from them at noone, the 14. day of March. And to haue said +thus much of these voyages, it may suffice. + + * * * * * + +The first voyage made by Master William Towrson Marchant of London, to the + coast of Guinea, with two Ships, in the yeere 1555. + +Vpon Munday the thirtieth day of September wee departed from the Isle of +Wight, out of the hauen of Neuport with two good shippes, the one called +the Hart, the other the Hinde, both of London, and the Masters of them were +Iohn Ralph, and William Carter, for a voyage to bee made vnto the Riuer de +Sestos in Guinea, and to other hauens thereabout. + +It fell out by the varietie of windes, that it was the fourteenth day of +October before wee coulde fetch Dartmouth: and being there arriued wee +continued in that roade sixe dayes, and the 20. of October we warpt out of +the hauen, and set saile, directing our course towards the Southwest, and +the next morning we were runne by estimation thirty leagues. + +The first of Nouember we found our selues to be in 31. degrees of latitude +by the reckoning of our Master. This day we ranne about 40. leagues also. + +The second day we ranne 36. leagues. + +The third day we had sight of Porto Santo, which is a small Island lying in +the sea, about three leagues long, and a league and a halfe broad, and is +possessed by Portugals. It riseth as we came from the Northnorthwest like +two small hilles neere together. The East end of the same Island is a high +land like a saddle with a valley, which makes it to beare that forme. The +West ende of it is lower with certaine small round hillocks. This Island +lieth in thirty and three degrees. The same day at 11. of the clocke we +raysed the Isle of Madera, which lieth 12. leagues from Porto Santo, +towards the Southwest: that Island is a faire Island and fruitfull, and is +inhabited by Portugals, it riseth afarre off like a great whole land and +high. By three of the clocke this day at after noone we were thwart of +Porto Santo, and we set our course Southwest, to leaue the Isle of Madera +to the Eastward, as we did Porto Santo. These two Islands were the first +land that we saw since wee left the coast of England. About three of the +clocke after midnight wee were thwart of Madera, within three leagues of +the West ende of it, and by meanes of the high hilles there, we were +becalmed: We suppose we ranne this day and night 30. leagues. + +The fourth day we lay becalmed vnder thejsle of Madera, vntill one of the +clocke at afternoone, and then, the winde comming into the East, wee went +our course, and ranne that day fifteene leagues. + +The 5. day we ranne 15. leagues more. + +The 6. day in the morning we raysed the Isle of Tenerif, otherwise called +the Pike, because it is a very high Island, with a pike vpon the top like a +loafe of suger. The same night we raised the Isle of Palma, which is a high +land also, and to the Westward of the Isle of Tenerif. + +The 7. day we perceiued the Isle of Gomera, which is an Island standing +betwixt Tenerif and Palma, about 12. leagues Eastward from Palma, and 8. +leagues Westward from Tenerif: and for feare of being becalmed with the +Isle of Tenerif, we left both it, and Gomera to the Eastward of vs, and +went betwixt Palma and Gomera. We ranne this day and night 30. leagues. + +Note that these Islands be 60. leagues from Madera, and that there are 3 +Islands more to the Westward of Tenerif, named the Grand Canaria, +Forte-ventura, and Lancerot, of which Island we came not in sight: they +being inhabited by Spaniards. + +This day also we had sight of the Isle of Ferro, which is to the Southwards +13. leagues from the other Islands, and is possessed by Spaniards. All this +day and night by reason of the winde we could not double the point of the +Isle of Ferro, except we would haue gone to the Westward of it, which had +bene much out of our course: therefore we kept about, and ranne backe fiue +houres Eastnortheast to the ende we might double it vpon the next boord, +the winde continuing Southeast, which hath not bene often seene vpon that +coast by any traueilers: for the winde continueth there for the most part +Northeast, and East Northeast: so vpon the other boord by the next morning +we were in a maner with the Island, and had roome ynough to double the +same. + +The 8. day we kept our course as neere the winde as wee could, because that +our due course to fetch the coast of Barbary was Southeast and by East, but +by the scant winde we could not goe our due course, but went as neere it as +we could, and ranne this day and night 25. leagues. + +The 9. day we ranne 30. leagues, the 10. 25. leagues, the 12. 24. + +The 12. day we saw a saile vnder our Lee, which was as we thought a +fishermen, so that wee went roome to haue spoken with him, but within one +houre there fell such a fogge, that wee could not see the shippe nor one of +vs the other: we shot off diuers pieces to the Hinde, but she heard them +not: at afternoone she shot off a piece which wee heard, and made her +answere with another: and within one halfe houre after the fogge brake vp, +and we were within 4. leagues of the shoare vpon the coast of Barbary, and +wee sounded and had 14. fadom water. The Barke also came roome with vs and +their ankered by reason of the contrary winde. When we fell with the land, +we could not iudge iustly what part of the land it was, because the most +part of that coast is lowe land, and no part to be iudged of it but the +fore part of the shoare, which is white like chalke or sand, and very deepe +vnto the hard shoare: there immediatly we began to fish, and found great +store of a kinde of fish which the Portugals commonly fish for vpon that +coast, which they cal Pergosses, the Frenchmen call them Saders, and our +men salt-water breames. Before the clearing vp of the fogge, the shippe +which we followed shaped such a course that we could see her no more, by +reason of our shooting off to finde the Hinde againe. This part of the +coast of Barbary, by our Pilots reckoning, is about 16. leagues to the +Eastwards of the riuer del Oro. + +The 13. day in the afternoone wee spyed a saile comming towards vs, which +wee iudged to be the saile that wee sawe the day before, and as soone as we +spied him, wee caused the Hinde to way her ancre and to goe towardes him, +and manned out our Skiffe in like case to lay him aboorde, or to discerne +what hee was, and wee our selues within halfe an houre after wayed also: +but after the saile had espied vs, hee kept about, and turned backe againe, +and shortly after there fell such another fogge, that wee coulde not see +him: which fogges continued all that night, so that wee were constrained to +leaue the chase. This afternoone the winde came about, and wee went our +course Southwest and by West, to goe cleare off the coast, wee ranne that +night sixteene leagues. + +The foureteenth day in the morning was verie foggie: but about twelue a +clocke wee espied a Caruell of 60. tunne which was fishing, and we sent our +Skiffe to him with fiue men, and all without any weapon sauing their Oares. +[Sidenote: A Caruell taken.] The Caruell for haste let slippe her ancre, +and set saile; and they seeing that, fearing that they should not fetch +her, would tarry for no weapons, and in the ende ouertooke the Caruel, and +made her to strike saile, and brought her away, although they had +foureteene or fifteene men aboord, and euery man his weapon, but they had +not the hearts to resist our men. After they were come to vs, they let fall +their ancre, for wee had cast ancre because the winde was not good: I +caused then the Skiffe to come for mee, and I went aboorde of them to see +that no harme should bee done to them, nor to take any thing but that which +they might spare vs for our money. [Sidenote: Great store of fish vpon the +coast of Barbary.] So wee tooke of them 3. Tapnets of figges, two small +pots of oyle, two pipes of water, foure hogsheads of saltfish which they +had taken vpon the coast, and certaine fresh fish which they did not +esteeme, because there is such store vpon that coast, that in an houre and +sometime lesse, a man may take as much fish as will serue twentie men a +day. For these things, and for some wine which wee dranke aboord of them, +and three or foure great Cannes which they sent aboord of our shippes, I +payed them twentie and seuen Pistoles, which was twise as much as they +willingly would haue taken: and so let them goe to their ancre and cable +which they had let slippe, and got it againe by our helpe. After this wee +set saile, but the winde caused vs to ancre againe about twelue leagues off +the riuer del Oro, as the Portugals tolde vs. There were fiue Caruels more +in this place, but when they sawe vs, they made all away for feare of vs. + +The 15. day we ridde still because of the winde. + +[Sidenote: The Tropike of Cancer in 23. and a halfe.] The 16. day we set +saile and ranne our course 40. leagues. This day, by the reckoning of our +Pilots, we were right vnder the Tropike of Cancer. The 17. we ranne 25. +leagues within sight for the most part of the coast of Barbary. + +The 18. day wee ranne thirtie leagues, and at twelue of the clocke by the +reckoning of our Pilots we were thwart of Cape Blanke. + +The 22. day our Pilots reckoned vs to be thwart Cape Verde. + +[Sidenote: The coast of Guinea.] The 12. day of December we had sight of +land of Guinea, which as soone as we saw we halled into the land Northeast, +and about 12. of the clocke at night we were neere the shoare within lesse +then 2. leagues: and then we kept about and sounded, and found 18. fadom +water. Afterwards we saw a light towards the shoare, which we thought to +haue bene a ship, and thereby iudged it to be the riuer de Sestos, which +light as soone as we espied, we came to an anker and armed our tops, and +made all things ready to fight, because we doubted that it might be some +Portugal or French man: this night we remained at an anker, but in the +morning we saw no man, only we espied 4. rockes about 2. English miles from +vs, one great rocke, and the 3. other smal ones, which when we sawe, we +supposed that the light came from the shore, and so wayed, and set saile +East Southeast along the shoare, because the Master did not well know the +place, but thought that we were not so farre to the East as the riuer de +Sestos. + +This land all along is a low land, and full of very high trees all along +the shoare, so that it is not possible to know the place that a man doth +fall withall, except it be by the latitude. In these 24. houres I thinke we +ran 16. leagues, for all the night we had a great gale as we were vnder +saile, and had withall store of thunder and lightnings. + +The 13. day for the most part we ran East Southeast all along the shoare, +within two leagues alwayes of the same, and found the land all as at the +first, ful of woods and great rocks hard aboord the shoare, and the billow +beating so sore, that the seas brake vpon the shoare as white as snow, and +the water mounted so high that a man might easily discerne it 4. leagues +off, in such wise that no boate could land there. Thus we ran vntil 12. of +the clocke, and then they tooke the Sunne and after iudged themselues to be +24. leagues past the riuer de Sestos to the Eastwards, by reason whereof we +halled into the shoare within two English miles, and there ancred and found +fifteene fadom water, and all off from the shoare the sea so smooth, that +we might wel haue rid by an Hawser. All that after-noone we trimmed our +boate and made her a saile, to the ende that she might go along by the +shoore to seeke some place to water in: for wee could not goe back againe +to the riuer de Sestos, because the winde blowes alwayes contrary, and the +Currant runneth alwayes to the Eastwards, which was also against vs. + +The 14. day we set saile and went back againe along the coast, and sent our +boats hard aboord the shoare to seeke a watering place, which they found +about 12. of the clock, and we being farre into the sea, met with diuers +boats of the Countrey, small, long and narrow, and in euery boate one man +and no more: we gaue them bread which they did eat, and were very glad of +it. About 4. of the clocke our boats came to vs with fresh water: and this +night we ankered against a Riuer. + +The 15. day we wayed and set saile to goe neere the shoare, and with our +leade wee sounded all the way, and found sometimes rockes, and sometimes +faire ground, and at the shallowest found 7. fadoms alwayes at the least. +So in fine we found 7. fadom and a halfe within an English mile of the +shoare, and there we ankered in a maner before the mouth of the Riuer, and +then wee sent our boats into the Riuer for water, which went about a mile +within the Riuer, where they had very good water. [Sidenote: Riuer S. +Vincent.] This Riuer lieth by estimation 8. leagues beyond the Riuer de +Sestos, and is called in the Carde Riuer S. Vincent, but it is so hard to +finde, that a boat being within halfe a mile of it shall not be able to +discerne that it is a Riuer: by reason that directly before the mouth of it +there lyeth a ledge of rockes, which is much broader then the Riuer, so +that a boate must runne in along the shoare a good way betwixt the rockes +and the shoare before it come to the mouth of the Riuer, and being within +it, it is a great Riuer and diuers other Riuers fall into it: The going +into it is somewhat ill, because that at the entring the seas doe goe +somewhat high, but being once within it, it is as calme as the Thames. + +[Sidenote: Cloth made of the barke of trees.] There are neere to the sea +vpon this Riuer diuers inhabitants, which are mighty bigge men and go al +naked except some thing before their priuie parts, which is like a clout +about a quarter of a yard long made of the barke of trees, and yet it is +like a cloth: for the barke is of that nature, that it will spin small +after the maner of linnen. [Sidenote: The Negroes race their skinnes.] Some +of them also weare the like vpon their heades being painted with diuers +colours, but the most part of them go bare headed, and their heads are +clipped and shorne of diuers sorts, and the most part of them haue their +skin of their bodies raced with diuers workes, in maner of a leather +Ierkin. The men and women goe so alike, that one cannot know a man from a +woman but by their breastes, which in the most part be very foule and long, +hanging downe like the vdder of a goate. + +The same morning we went into the Riuer with our Skiffe, and caried +certaine basons, manels, &c. [Sidenote: Graines of Guinea.] And there we +tooke that day one hogs-head and 100 li. waight of Graines, and two +Elephants teeth at a reasonable good reckoning. We solde them both basons, +and Manellios, and Margarits, but they desired most to haue basons: For the +most part of our basons wee had by estimation about 30. li. for a piece, +and for an Elephants tooth of 30. li. waight, we gaue them 6. + +The 16. day in the morning we went into the riuer with our Skiffe, and +tooke some of euery sort of our marchandize with vs, and shewed it to the +Negroes, but they esteemed it not, but made light of it, and also of the +basons, Manellios and Margarits, which yesterday they did buy: howbeit for +the basons they would haue giuen vs some graines, but to no purpose, so +that this day wee tooke not by estimation aboue one hundreth pound waight +of Graines, by meanes of their Captaine, who would suffer no man to sell +any thing but through his hands, and at his price: he was so subtile, that +for a bason hee would not giue 15. pound waight of Graines, and sometimes +would offer vs smal dishfuls whereas before wee had baskets full, and when +he saw that wee would not take them in contentment, the Captaine departed, +and caused all the rest of the boates to depart, thinking belike that wee +would haue followed them, and haue giuen them their owne askings. +[Sidenote: The description of their townes and houses.] But after that we +perceiued their fetch, wee wayed our Grapnel and went away, and then wee +went on land into a small Towne to see the fashions of the Countrey, and +there came a threescore of them about vs, and at the first they were afraid +of vs, but in the end perceiuing that wee did no hurt, they would come to +vs and take vs by the hand and be familiar with vs, and then we went into +their Townes, which were like to twentie small houels, all couered ouer +with great leaues and baggage, and all the sides open, and a scaffolde +vnder the house about a yarde high, where they worke many pretie things of +the barkes of trees, and there they lye also. In some of their houses they +worke yron and make faire dartes, and diuers other things to worke their +boates, and other things withall, and the women worke as well as the men. +But when wee were there diuers of the women to shew vs pleasure danced and +sung after their maner, full ill to our eares. Their song was thus: + + Sakere, sakere, ho, ho. Sakere, sakore, ho, ho. + +And with these words they leape and dance, and clap their hands. Beastes we +could see none that they had, but two goates, small dogges, and small +hennes: other beastes we saw none. After that we had well marked all things +we departed and went aboord our ships: which thing the Captaine of the +other towne perceiuing, sent two of his seruants in a boat with a basket of +Graines, and made vs signes that if when wee had slept wee would come +againe into their riuer, wee should haue store of Graines, and so shewed vs +his Graines and departed. + +The 17. day in the morning because we thought that the Negroes would haue +done something because the Captaine sent for vs, I required the Master to +goe on shoare, and sent the rest of our Marchants with him, and taried +aboord my selfe by reason that the last day he esteemed our things so +litle: so when the Master and the rest came into the riuer, the captaine +with diuers others came to them, and brought Graines with them, and after +that he saw that I was not there, he made signes to know where I was, and +they made signes to him againe that I was in the ships: [Sidenote: Diago +the name of a Captaine.] and then hee made signes to know who was Captaine +by name of Diago, for so they call their Captaine, and they pointed to the +master of the ship: then he began to shew his Graines, but he held them so +vnreasonably, that there was no profit to be made of them: which things the +Master perceiuing, and seeing that they had no store of Graines, came away, +and tooke not aboue 50. pound waight of Graines. Then he went a shoare to +the litle Towne where we were the day before, and one of them plucked a +Gourd, wherewith the Negroes were offended, and came many of them to our +men with their darts and great targets, and made signes to them to depart: +which our men did, hauing but one bow and two or three swords, and went +aboord the boate and came away from them: and assoone as they were come +aboord we wayed and set saile, but the winde was off the Sea, so that we +could not get out cleare of certaine rocks, and therefore we came to an +ancre againe. + +[Sidenote: The latitude of S. Vincent riuer is 4. degrees and a halfe.] +This riuer is called Riuer S. Vincent, standing in 4. degrees and a halfe, +and ebbeth and floweth there every 12. houres, but not much water when it +ebbeth the most: while wee were there, it ebbeth one fadome and a halfe +water. + +[Sidenote: Leaues of exceeding length.] This countrey as farre as we could +perceiue is altogether woody, and al strange trees, whereof wee knewe none, +and they were of many sorts, with great leaues like great dockes, which bee +higher then any man is able to reach the top of them. + +[Sidenote: Long pease stalkes.] There are certaine peason by the Sea side, +which grow vpon great and very long stalkes, one of the stalkes I measured +and found it 27. paces long, and they grow vpon the sand like to trees, and +that so neere the Sea, that sometimes the Sea floweth into the woods as we +might perceiue by the water markes. + +[Sidenote: Long womens breasts.] The trees and all things in this place +grow continually greene. Diuers of the women haue such exceeding long +breasts, that some of them wil lay the same vpon the ground and lie downe +by them, but all the women haue not such breasts. + +At this place all the day the winde bloweth off the Sea, and all the night +off the land, but wee found it to differ sometimes, which our Master +marueiled at. + +This night at 9. of the clocke the winde came vp at the East, which +ordinarily about that time was wont to come out of the North Northwest off +the shoare: yet we wayed and halled off South with that winde all night +into the Sea, but the next morning we halled in againe to the lande, and +tooke in 6. Tunnes of water for our ship, and I thinke the Hinde tooke in +as much. + +I could not perceiue that here was any gold, or any other good thing: for +the people be so wilde and idle, that they giue themselues to seeke out +nothing: if they would take paines they might gather great store of +graines, but in this place I could not perceiue two Tunne. + +There are many foules in the Countrey, but the people will not take the +paines to take them. + +I obsetued some of their words of speach, which I thought good here to set +downe. + + Bezow, bezow, Is their salutation. + Manegete afoye, Graines ynough. + Crocow, afoye, Hennes ynough. + Zeramme, afoye, Haue ynough. + Begge sacke Giue me a knife. + Begge come, Giue me bread + Borke, Holde your peace. + Coutrecke. Ye lye. + Veede, Put foorth, or emptie. + Brekeke, Rowe. + Diago, Their Captaine, and some + call him Dabo. + +These and other wordes they speake very thicke, and oftentimes recite one +word three times together, and at the last time longer then at the two +first. + +The 18. day towards night, as we were sailing along the coast, we met with +certaine boats in the sea, and the men shewed vs that there was a riuer +thwart of vs, where there were Graines to be sold, but we thought it not +good to tary there, least the other ships should get before vs. This riuer +hath lying before it three great rockes, and 5. small rocks, one great +tree, and a little tree right by the riuer, which in height exceeded all +the rest: we halled this night along the coast 16. leagues. + +The 19. day as we coasted the shoare, about twelue of the clocke there came +out to vs 3. boates to tell vs that they had graines, and brought some with +them for a shew, but we could not tary there. We proceeded along the coast, +and ancred by the shore all the night, and ran this day 10. leagues. + +The 20. day the Hinde hauing ankered by vs amongst rockes, and foule +gronnd, lost a small anker. At noone, as we passed along the coast, there +came forth a Negro to vs, making signes, that if we would goe a shoare, wee +should haue Graines, and where wee ankered at night, there came another to +vs, and brought Graines, and shewed vs them, and made signes that wee +should tary, and made a fire vpon the land in the night, meaning thereby to +tell vs where we should land, and so they did in diuers other places vpon +the coast, where they saw vs to anker. [Sidenote: The tides and nature of +the shore.] In al the places where we haue ancred, since we came from our +watring place, we haue found the tide alwayes running to the Westwards, and +all along the coast many rockes hard aboord the shoare, and many of them a +league off the shoare or more, we ran this day 12. leagues. + +The 21 day, although we ranne all day with a good gale of winde, yet the +tides came so sore out of the coast, that we were not able to runne aboue +sixe leagues: and this day there came some Negroes to vs, as there had done +other times. + +The 22. wee ranne all day and night to double a point, called Das Palmas, +and ranne sixteene leagues. + +The 23. day about 3. of the clocke we were thwart of the point, and before +we came to the Westermost part of it, we saw a great ledge of rocks, which +lie West from the Cape about 3. leagues and a league or more from the land. +Shortly after we had sight of the Eastermost part of the Cape, which lieth +4. leagues from the Westermost part, and vpon the very corner thereof lie +two greene places, as it were closes, and to the Westwards of the Cape the +land parted from the Cape, as it were a Bay, whereby it may well be knowen. +Foure leagues more beyonde that there lieth a head-land in the sea, and +about two leagues beyond the head-land there goeth in a great Bay, as it +were a riuer, before which place we ankered all that night, which wee did, +least in the night wee should ouerrunne a riuer where the last yeere they +had all their Elephants teeth. [Sidenote: That was the yeere 1554.] + +This Cape Das palmas lieth vnder foure degrees and a halfe, and betwixt the +said Cape, and the riuer de Sestos is the greatest store of Graines to be +had, and being past the said Cape there is no great store else where. + +Where we ankered this night, we found that the tide, which before ran +alwayes to the Westward, from this Cape runneth all to the Eastward: this +day we ranne some 16. leagues. + +The 24. day running our course, about eight of the clock there came forth +to vs certaine boats, which brought with them small egges, which were soft +without shels, and they made vs signes, that there was within the land +fresh water, and Goates: and the Master thinking that it was the riuer +which we sought, cast ancker and sent the boate on shoare, with one that +knew the riuer, and comming neere the shoare, hee perceiued that it was not +the riuer, and so came backe againe, and went along the shoare, with their +oares and saile, and wee weyed and ranne along the shoare also: and being +thirteene leagues beyond the Cape, the Master perceiued a place which he +iudged to be the riuer, when wee were in deede two miles shot past it: yet +the boate came from the shoare, and they that were in her saide, that there +was no riuer: notwithstanding wee came to an ancker, and the Master and I +tooke fiue men with vs in the boat, and when hee came neere the shoare, hee +perceiued that it was the same riuer which hee did seeke: so we rowed in, +and found the entrance very ill, by reason that the sea goeth so high: and +being entred, diuers boats came to vs, and shewed vs that they had +Elephants teeth, and they brought vs one of about eight pound, and a little +one of a pound, which we bought: then they brought certaine teeth to the +riuer side, making signes, that if the next day we would come againe, they +would sell vs them: so we gaue vnto two Captaines, to either of them a +manillio, and so we departed, and came aboord, and sent out the other boate +to another place, where certaine boats that came into the sea, made vs +signes that there was fresh water: and being come thither, they found a +towne, but no riuer, yet the people brought them fresh water, and shewed +them an Elephants tooth, making signes that the next day they would sel +them teeth, and so they came aboord. + +This riuer lieth by the Carde thirteene leagues from the Cape Das palmas, +and there lieth to the Westwards of the same a rocke about a league in the +sea, and the riuer it selfe hath a point of lande comming out into the Sea, +whereupon grow fiue trees, which may well bee discerned two or three +leagues off, comming from the Westward, but the riuer cannot bee perceiued +vntill such time as a man be hard by it, and then a man may perceiue a +litle Towne on ech side the riuer, and to ech Towne there belongeth a +Captaine. The riuer is but small, but the water is good and fresh. + +Two miles beyond the riuer, where the other towne is, there lieth another +point into the Sea, which is greene like a close, and not aboue sixe trees +vpon it, which growe one of them from the other, whereby the coast may well +be knowen: for along all the coast that we haue hitherto sailed by, I haue +not seene so much bare land. + +In this place, and three or foure leagues to the Westward of it, al along +the shoare, there grow many Palme trees, whereof they make their wine de +Palma. These trees may easily be knowen almost two leagues off, for they be +very high and white bodied, and streight, and be biggest in the midst: they +haue no boughes, but onely a round bush in the top of them: and at the top +of the same trees they boare a hoale, and there they hang a bottell, and +the iuyce of the tree runneth out of the said hole into the bottle, and +that is their wine. + +From the Cape das Palmas, to the Cape Tres puntas, there are 100. leagues: +and to the port where we purpose to make sales of our cloth beyond the Cape +Tres puntas, 40. leagues. + +Note, that betwixt the riuer De Sestos, and the Cape Das palmas, is the +place where all the graines be gathered. + +The language of the people of this place, as far as I could perceiue, +differeth not much from the language of those which dwel where we watred +before: but the people of this place be more gentle in nature then the +other, and goodlier men: their building and apparel is all one with the +others. + +Their desire in this place was most of all to haue Manillios and +Margarites: as for the rest of our things, they did litle esteeme them. + +[Sidenote: Their maner of swearing by the water of the Sea.] About nine of +the clocke there came boates to vs foorth, from both of the places +aforsaid, and brought with them certaine teeth, and after they had caused +me to sweare by the water of the Sea that I would not hurt them, they came +aboord our ship three or foure of them, and we gaue them to eate of all +such things as we had, and they did eate and drinke of all things, as well +as we our selues. Afterwards we bought all their teeth, which were in +number 14. and of those 14. there were 10. small: afterwards they departed, +making vs signes that the next day we should come to their Townes. + +[Sidenote: Two townes.] The 26. day because we would not trifle long at +this place I required the Master to goe vnto one of the townes, and to take +two of our marchants with him, and I my selfe went to the other, and tooke +one with me, because these two townes stand three miles asunder. To these +places we caried somewhat of euery kind of marchandize that we had: and hee +had at the one Towne, nine teeth, which were but small, and at the other +towne where I was, I had eleuen, which were also not bigge, and we left +aboord with the Master certaine Manillios, wherewith he bought 12. teeth +aboord the ship, in our absence: and hauing bought these of them, wee +perceiued that they had no more teeth: so in that place where I was one +brought to me a small goat, which I bought, and to the Master at the other +place they brought fiue small hennes, which he bought also, and after that +we saw there was nothing else to be had, we departed, and by one of the +clocke we met aboord, and then wayed, and went East our course 18. leagues +still within sight of land. + +The 28. the wind varied, and we ranne into the sea, and the winde comming +againe off the sea, wee fell with the land againe, and the first of the +land which we raised shewed as a great red cliffe round, but not very high, +and to the Eastward of that another smaller red cliffe, and right aboue +that into the land a round hammoke and greene, which we tooke to be trees. +We ranne in these 24. houres, not aboue foure leagues. + +The 29. day comming neere to the shoare, we perceiued the red cliffe +aforesaide to haue right vpon the top of it a great heape of trees, and all +to the Westwards of it ful of red cliffes as farre as we could see, and all +along the shoare, as well vpon the cliffes, as otherwise, full of wood: +within a mile of the said great cliffe there is a riuer to the Eastwards, +and no cliffes that we could see, except one small cliffe, which is hard by +it. We ran this day and night 12. leagues. + +The windes that wee had in this place by the reports of the people and of +those that haue bene there, haue not bene vsuall, but in the night, at +North off the lande, and in the day South off the Sea, and most commonly +Northwest, and Southwest. + +The 31. day we went our course by the shoare Northwards: this land is al +along a low shoare, and full of wood, as all the coast is for the most +part, and no rockes. This morning came out many boates which went a +fishing, which bee greater boates then those which we sawe before, so that +in some of them there sate 5. men, but the fashion of the boats is all one. +In the afternoone about three of the clocke wee had sight of a Towne by the +sea side, which our Pilots iudged to be 25. leagues to the Westwards of the +Cape Tres puntas. + +The third of Ianuary in the morning we fell with the Cape Tres puntas, and +in the night passed, as our Pilots saide, by one of the Portugals castles, +which is 8. leagues to the Westwards of the Cape: vpon the first sight of +the Cape wee discerned it a very high land, and all growen ouer with trees, +and comming neere to it, we perceiued two head lands, as it were two Bayes +betwixt them, which opened right to the Westward, and the vttermost of them +is the Easterne Cape, there we perceiued the middle Cape, and the +Eastermost Cape: the middle Cape standeth not aboue a league from the West +Cape, although the Card sheweth them to be 3. leagues one from the other: +and that middle Cape hath right before the point of it a small rocke so +neere to it, that it cannot be discerned from the Cape, except a man be +neere to the shoare, and upon the same Cape standeth a great heape of +trees, and when a man is thwart the same Cape to the Eastward, there riseth +hard by it a round greene hommoke, which commeth out of the maine. + +The thirde Cape is about a league beyond the middle Cape, and is a high +land like to the other Capes, and betwixt the middle, and the thirde +commeth out a little head or point of a land out of the maine, and diuers +rocks hard aboord the shoare. + +Before we came to the Capes, being about 8. leagues off them, wee had the +land Southeast, and by East, and being past the Capes, the land runneth in +againe East Northeast. + +About two leagues beyond the farthest Cape there is a lowe glade about two +miles long, and then the land riseth high againe, and diuers head lands +rise one beyond another, and diuers rockes lie at the point of the first +head-land. The middest of these Capes is the neerest to the Southwards, I +meane, further into the sea than any of the other, so that being to the +Eastward of it, it may be discerned farre off, and being so to the Eastward +it riseth with two small rockes. + +This day we ankered for feare of ouershooting a towne called S. Iohns. Wee +ran this day not aboue 8. leagues. In the afternoone this day there came a +boate of the countrey from the shoare, with fiue men in her, and went along +by vs, as we thought, to discerne our flagges, but they would not come +neere vs, and when they had well looked vpon vs, they departed. + +The fourth day in the morning, sailing by the coast, we espied a ledge of +rockes by the shoare, and to the Westwards of them two great grene hils +ioyning together, so that betweene them it was hollow like a saddle: and +within the said rockes the Master thought the aforenamed Towne had stoode, +and therefore we manned our boates, and tooke with vs cloth, and other +marchandize, and rowed ashoare, but going along by the coast, we sawe that +there was no towne, therefore wee went aboord againe. + +From these two hils aforesaid, about two leagues to the Eastward, lie out +into the Sea almost two miles a ledge of rockes, and beyond that a great +Bay, which runneth into the North Northwestward, and the land in this place +lieth North Northeast along the shoare: but the vttermost point of land in +that place that we could see, lay Northeast, and by East from vs. + +After that we were with a small gale of winde runne past that vttermost +head-land, we sawe a great red cliffe, which the Master againe iudged to be +the towne of S. Iohns, and then wee tooke our boate with marchandize, and +went thither, and when we came thither, we perceiued that there was a towne +vpon the toppe of the hill, and so wee went toward it, and when we were +hard by it, the people of the towne came together a great sort of them, and +waued vs to come in, with a peece of cloth, and so we went into a very +faire Bay, which lieth to the Eastward of the cliffe, whereupon the towne +standeth, and being within the cliffe, wee let fall our grapnell, and after +that we had taried there a good space, they sent a boate aboord of vs, to +shewe vs that they had golde, and they shewed us a peece about halfe a +crowne weight, and required to know our measure, and our weight, that they +might shewe their Captaine thereof: and wee gaue them a measure of two +elles, and a waight of two Angels to shew vnto him, which they tooke, and +went on shoare, and shewed it vnto their Captaine, and then they brought vs +a measure of two elles, one quarter and a halfe, and one Crusado-weight of +gold, making vs signes that so much they would giue for the like measure, +and lesse they would not haue. After this, we taried there about an houre, +and when we sawe that they would doe no otherwise, and withall vnderstood, +that all the best places were before vs, wee departed to our shippes and +wayed, and ranne along the shoare, and went before with our boate, and +hauing sailed about a league, we came to a point where there lay foorth a +ledge of rockes, like to the others before spoken of, and being past that +people, the Master spied a place which hee saide plainely was the towne of +Don Iohn: and the night was come vpon vs, so that we could not well +discerne it, but we ankered as neere vnto the place as we could. + +[Sidenote: The towne of Don Iohn.] The fift day in the morning we perceiued +it to be the same towne in deede, and we manned our boates and went +thither, and because that the last yeere the Portugals at that place tooke +away a man from them, and after shot at them with great bases, and did +beate them from the place, we let fall our grapnel almost a base shot off +the shoare, and there we lay about two houres, and no boats came to vs. +Then certaine of our men with the Hindes boate went into the Bay which +lieth to the Eastward of the towne, and within that Bay they found a goodly +fresh riuer, and afterwards they came and waued to vs also to come in, +because they perceiued the Negroes to come downe to that place, which we +did: and immediately the Negroes came to vs, and made vs signes that they +had golde, but none of them would come aboord our boates, neither could we +perceiue any boates that they had to come withall, so that we iudged that +the Portugals had spoiled their boates, because we saw halfe of their towne +destroyed. + +Wee hauing stayed there a good space, and seeing that they would not come +to vs, thrust our boates heads a shoare, being both well appointed, and +then the Captaine of the Towne came downe being a graue man: and he came +with his dart in his hand, and sixe tall men after him, euery one with his +dart and his target, and their darts were all of yron, faire and sharpe, +and there came another after them which caried the Captaines stoole: wee +saluted him, and put off our caps, and bowed our selues, and hee like one +that thought well of himselfe, did not mooue his cap, nor scant bowed his +body, and sate him downe very solemnly, vpon his stoole: but all his men +put off their caps to vs, and bowed downe themselues. + +He was clothed from the loines down with a cloth of that Countrey making, +wrapped about him, and made fast about his loynes with a girdle, and his +cap of a certaine cloth of the Countrey also, and bare legged, and bare +footed, and all bare aboue the loynes, except his head. + +His seruants, some of them had cloth about their loines, and some nothing +but a cloth betwixt their legges, and made fast before, and behinde to +their girdles, and cappes of their owne making, some like a basket, and +some like a great wide purse of beasts skinnes. + +[Sidenote: Their weapons.] All their cloth, cordes, girdles, fishing lines, +and all such like things which they haue, they make of the bark of certaine +trees, and thereof they can worke things very pretily, and yron worke they +can make very fine, of all such things as they doe occupy, as darts, +fishhookes, hooking yrons, yron heads, and great daggers, some of them as +long as a woodknife, which be on both sides exceeding sharpe, and bended +after the maner of Turkie blades, and the most part of them haue hanging at +their left side one of those great daggers. + +Their targets bee made of such pils as their cloth is made of, and very +closely wrought, and they bee in forme foure square, and very great, and +somewhat longer then they bee broad, so that kneeling downe, they make +their targets to couer their whole body. Their bowes be short, and of a +pretie strength, as much as a man is able to draw with one of his fingers, +and the string is of the barke of a tree, made flat, and about a quarter of +an inch broad: as for their arrowes, I haue not as yet seene any of them, +for they had wrapped them vp close, and because I was busie I could not +stand about it, to haue them open them. Their golde also they worke very +well. + +When the Captaine was set, I sent him two elles of cloth, and two basons, +and gaue them vnto him, and hee sent againe for a waight of the same +measure, and I sent him a weight of two Angels, which he would not take, +nether would hee suffer the towne to buy any thing, but the basons of +brasse: so that wee solde that day 74. basons vnto the men of the towne, +for about half an Angel weight, one with another, and nine white basons, +which we solde for a quarter of an Angell a peece, or thereabouts. + +We shewed them all our other things which we had, but they did not esteeme +them. + +About two of the clocke, the Captaine who did depart in the morning from +vs, came againe, and brought with him to present mee withall, a henne, and +two great rootes, which I receiued, and after made me signes that the +countrey would come to his towne that night, and bring great store of gold, +which in deed about 4. of the clocke they did: for there came about 100. +men vnder 3. Captaines, well appointed with their darts and bowes, and when +they came to vs, euery man sticked downe his dart vpon the shoare, and the +Captaines had stooles brought them, and they sate downe, and sent a young +man aboord of vs, which brought a measure with him of an ell, and one +fourth part, and one sixteenth part, and he would haue that foure times for +a waight of one Angell and twelue graines: I offered him two elles, as I +had done before for two Angels weight, which he esteemed nothing, but still +stucke at his foure measures aforesaide: yet in the ende, when it grew very +late, and I made him signes, that I would depart, he came to foure elles +for the weight abouesaid, and otherwise he would not deale, and so we +departed. This day we tooke for basons sixe ounces and a halfe and one +eight part. + +The sixt day in the morning we manned our boates and the skiffe well, for +feare of the Portugals which the last yeere had taken away a man from the +other ships, and went on shoare, and landed, because they had no boates to +come to vs, and so the young man which was with vs the night before was +sent aboord, who seemed to haue dealt and bargained before with the +Portugals for he could speake a litle Portuguise, and was perfect in +weights and measures: at his comming be offered vs, as he had done before, +one Angell, and twelue graines for four elles, and more he would not giue, +and made signes, that if we would not take that, we should depart, which we +did: but before we did indeede depart, I offered him of some rotten cloth +three elles for his waight of an Angell and twelue graines, which he would +not take, and then we departed making signes to him that we would go away, +as indeede we would haue done, rather then haue giuen that measure, +although the cloth was ill, seeing we were so neere to the places, which we +iudged to be better for sale. Then we went aboord our ships which lay about +a league off, and came backe againe to the shoare for sand and balaste: and +then the Captaine perceiuing that the boats had brought no marchandize but +came onely for water and sand, and seeing that we would depart, came vnto +them, making signes againe to know whether would we not giue the foure +elles, and they made signes againe, that we would giue them but three, and +when they sawe that the boates were ready to depart, they came vnto them +and gaue them the weight of our Angell and twelue graines, which we +required before and made signes, that if we would come againe, they would +take three elles. So when the boates came aboord, we layde wares in them +both, and for the speedier dispatch I and Iohn Sauill went in one boat, and +the Maister Iohn Makeworth, and Richard Curligin, in the other, and went on +shoare, and that night I tooke for my part fiftie and two ounces, and in +the other boate they tooke eight ounces and a quarter, all by one weight +and measure, and so being very late, we departed and went aboord, and took +in all this day three pound. + +The seuenth day we went a shoare againe, and that day I tooke in our boate +three pound 19 ounces, so that we dispatched almost all the cloth that we +caried with us before noone, and then many of the people were departed and +those that remained had litle golde, yet they made vs signes to fetch them +some latten basons which I would not because I purposed not to trifle out +the time, but goe thence with speede to Don Iohns towne. But Iohn Sauill +and Iohn Makeworth were desirous to goe againe: and I, loth to hinder them +of any profite, consented, but went not my selfe: so they tooke eighteene +ounces of gold and came away, seeing that the people at a certaine crie +made, were departed. + +While they were at the shoare, there came a young fellow which could speake +a little Portuguise, with three more with him, and to him I solde 39 basons +and two small white sawcers, for three ounces, &c., which was the best +reckoning that we did make of any basons: and in the forenoone when I was +at the shoare, the Master solde fiue basons vnto the same fellow, for halfe +an ounce of golde. + +[Sidenote: 60. Portugales in the castle of Mina.] This fellow, as farre as +we could perceiue, had bene taken into the Castle by the Portugales, and +was gotten away from them, for he tolde vs that the Portugales were bad +men, and that they made them slaues if they could take them, and would put +yrons vpon their legges, and besides he tolde vs, that as many Frenchmen or +Englishmen, as they could take (for he could name these two very well) they +would hang them: he tolde vs further, that there were 60 men in the castle, +and that euery yeere there came thither two shippes, one great, and one +small caruell, and further, that Don Iohn had warres with the Portugals, +which gaue mee the better courage to goe to his towne, which lieth not +foure leagues from the Castle, wherehence our men were beaten the last +yeere. + +[Sidenote: The English in anno 1544 tooke away 5 Negroes.] This fellowe +came aboord our shippe without much feare, and assoone as he came, he +demaunded, why we had not brought againe their men, which the last yeere we +tooke away, and could tell vs that there were fiue taken away by +Englishmen: we made him answere, that they were in England well vsed, and +were there kept till they could speake the language, and then they should +be brought againe to be a helpe to Englishmen in this Countrey: and then he +spake no more of that matter: + +Our boates being come aboord, we wayed and set saile and a litle after +spied, a great fire vpon the shoare, and by the light of the fire we might +discerne a white thing, which they tooke to be the Castle, and for feare of +ouersbooting the towne of Don Iohn we there ankered two leagues off the +shoare, for it is hard to fetch vp a towne here, if a ship ouershoot it. +This day we tooke seuen pound, and fiue ounces of gold. + +This towne lieth in a great Bay, which is very deepe. + +The people in this place desired most to haue basons and cloth. They would +buy some of them also many trifles, as kniues, horsetailes, hornes: and +some of our men going a shoare, sold a cap, a dagger, a hat, &c. + +They shewed vs a certain course cloth, which I thinke to be made in France, +for it was course wooll, and a small threed, and as thicke as wosted, and +striped with stripes of greene, white, yellow &c. Diuers of the people did +weare about their neckes great beades of glasse of diuerse colours. Here +also I learned some of their language, [Marginal note: This language +seemeth partly to be corrupt.] as followeth: + + Mattea, mattea, Is their salutation. + Dassee, dassee, I thanke you. + Sheke, Golde. + Cowrte, Cut. + Cracca, Kniues. + Bassina, Basons. + Foco, foco, Cloth. + Molta, Much, or great store. + +[Sidenote: Sight of the casle of Mina.] The eight day in the morning we had +sight of the Castle, but by reason of a miste that then fell we could not +haue the perfect sight of it, till we were almost at the towne of Don Iohn, +and then it cleared vp, and we saw it and a white house, as it were a +Chappell, vpon the hill about it, and then we halled into the shoare, +within two English miles of Don Iohns towne, and there ankered in seuen +fadome water. Here, as in many other places before, we perceiued that the +currant went with the winde. + +The land here is in some places low and in some high, and full of wood +altogether. + +[Sidenote: Don Iohns towne described.] The towne of Don Iohn is but litle, +of about twentie houses, and the most part of the towne is walled in with a +wall of a mans height, made with reede or sedge, or some such thing. Here +we staied two or three houres after we had ankered, to see if any man would +come vnto vs: and seeing that none did come, we manned our boates and put +in marchandize, and went and ankered with our boates neere to the shoare: +then they sent out a man to vs who made vs signes that that was the towne +of Don Iohn, and that he himselfe was in the Countrey, and would be at home +at the going downe of the Sunne, and when he had done, he required a +reward, as the most part of them will doe which come first aboord, and I +gaue him one ell of cloth and he departed, and that night we heard no more +of him. + +The ninth day in the morning we went againe with our boates to the shoare, +and there came foorth a boate to vs, who made signes that Don Iohn was not +come home, but would be at home this day: and to that place also came +another boate from the other towne a mile from this, which is called Don +Deuis, and brought with him gold to shew vs, making signes that we should +come thither. I then left in this place Iohn Sauill, and Iohn Makeworth, +and tooke the Hinde, and went to the other towne and there ankered, and +tooke cloth and went to shore with the boate, and by and by the boates came +to vs and brought a measure of foure yards long and a halfe, and shewed vs +a weight of an angell and twelue graines, which they would giue for so +much, and not otherwise: so I staied and made no bargaine. And all this day +the barke lay at Don Iohns towne, and did nothing, hauing answere that he +was not come home. + +The tenth day we went againe to the shoare, and there came out a boat with +good store of gold, and hauing driuen the matter off a long time, and +hauing brought the measure to a nayle lesse then three elles, and their +weight to an angell and twentie graines, and could not bring them to more, +I did conclude with them and solde, and within one quarter of an houre I +tooke one pound and a quarter of an ounce of golde: and then they made me +signes to tary, till they had parted their cloth vpon the shoare as their +manner is, and they would come againe, and so they went away, and layde the +cloth all abroad vpon the sande peece by peece, and by and by one came +running downe from the towne to them, and spake vnto them, and foorthwith +euery man made as much haste as he could away, and went into the woods to +hide his golde and his cloth: we mistrusted some knauery, and being waued +by them to come a shoare, yet we would not, but went aboorde the Hinde, and +perceiued vpon the hill 30 men whom we iudged to be Portugals: and they +went vp to the toppe of the hill and there mustered and shewed themselues, +hauing a flagge with them. Then I being desirous to knowe what the Hart +did, tooke the Hindes boate and went towards her, and when I came neere to +them they shot off two pieces of ordinance which I marueiled at: I made as +much haste as I could to her, and met her boate and skiffe comming from the +shoare in all haste, and we met aboord together. [Sidenote: The Portugales +of the castle of Mina inuaded our men.] They shewed me that they had beene +a shoare all that day, and had giuen to the two sonnes of Don Iohn, to +either of them three yardes and a halfe of doth, and three basons betwixt +them, and had deliuered him 3 yards of cloth more and the weight of an +angell and 12 graines, and being on land did tarie for his answere, and in +the meane time the Portugals came running from the hill vpon them, whereof +the Negroes a litle before had giuen them warning, and bad them to go away, +but they perceiued it not. The sonne of Don Iohn conspired with the +Portugales against them, so that they were almost vpon them, but yet they +recouered their boate and set off from the shoare, and the Portugales shot +their calieuers at them, but hurt no man, and then the shippe perceiuing +it, shot off the two peeces aforesayde among them. Hereupon we layde bases +in both the boates, and in the Skiffe and manned them well, and went a +shoare againe, but because of the winde we could not land, but lay off in +the sea about ten score and shot at them, but the hill succoured them, and +they from the rockes and from the hilles shot at vs with their halfe +hakes, and the Negroes more for feare then for loue stoode by them to helpe +them, and when we saw that the Negroes were in such subiction vnto them +that they durst not sell vs any thing for feare of them we went aboord, and +that night the winde kept at the East, so that we could not with our ship +fetch the Hinde, but I tooke the boate in the night and went aboord the +barke to see what was there to be done, and in the morning we perceiued the +towne to be in like case layde with Portugales, so we wayed and went along +the coast. [Sidenote: The towne of Don Iohn de Viso.] This towne of Iohn de +Viso standeth vpon an hill like the towne of Don Iohn, but it hath beene +burned, so that there are not passing sixe houses in it: the most part of +the golde that comes thither comes out of the countrey, and no doubt if the +people durst for feare of the Portugals bring forth their gold, there would +be had good store: but they dare not sell any thing, their subiection is so +great to the Portugales. The 11 day running by the shoare we had sight of a +litle towne foure leagues from the last towne that we came from, and about +halfe a league from that, of another towne vpon a hill, and halfe a league +from that also of another great towne vpon the shoare: whither we went to +set what could there be done: if we could doe nothing, then to returne to +the other towne, because we thought that the Portugales would leaue the +towne vpon our departure. Along from the castle vnto this place are very +high hilles which may be seene aboue all other hilles, but they are full of +wood, and great red cliffes by the sea side. The boates of these places are +somewhat large and bigge, for one of them will carie twelue men, but their +forme is alike with the former boates of the coast. There are about these +townes few riuers: their language differeth not from the language vsed at +Don Iohns towne: but euery one can speake three or foure words of +Portuguise, which they vsed altogether to vs. + +We sawe this night about 5 of the clocke 22 boates running along the shoare +to the Westward, whereupon we suspected some knauery intended against vs. +The 12 day therefore we set sayle and went further along the coast, and +descried more townes wherein were greater houses then in the other townes, +and the people came out of the townes to looke vpon vs, but we could see no +boates. Two mile beyond the Eastermost towne are blacke rocks, which blacke +rockes continue to the vttermost cape of the land, which is about a league +off, and then the land runnes in Eastnortheast, and a sandy shoare againe: +vpon these blacke rockes came downe certaine Negroes, which waued vs with a +white flagge, but we perceiuing the principall place to be neere, would not +stay, but bare still along the shoare: and as soone as we had opened the +point of the land, we raysed another headland about a league off the point, +which had a rocke lying off it into the sea, and that they thought to be +the place which we sought. When we came thwart the place they knew it, and +we put wares into our boate, and the ship being within halfe a mile of the +place ankered in fiue fadome water and faire ground. We went on shoare with +our boate, and ankered about ten of the clocke in the forenoone: we saw +many boates lying vpon the shoare, and diuers came by vs, but none of them +would come neere vs, being as we iudged afraid of vs: [Sidenote: Foure men +taken away by the English.] because that foure men were taken perforce the +last yeere from this place, so that no man came to vs, whereupon we went +aboord againe, and thought here to haue made no saile: yet towardes night a +great sort came downe to the water side, and waued vs on shoare with a +white flagge, and afterwarde their Captaine came downe and many men with +him, and sate him downe by the shoare vnder a tree: which when I perceiued, +I tooke things with me to giue him: at last he sent a boat to call to vs, +which would not come neere vs, but made vs signes to come againe the next +day: but in fine, I got them to come aboord in offering them things to giue +to their captaine, which were two elles of cloth, one latten bason, one +white bason, a bottle, a great piece of beefe, and sixe bisket cakes, which +they receiued making vs signes to come againe the next day, saying, that +their Captain was Grand Capitane as appeared by those that attended vpon +him with their darts and targets, and other weapons. + +This towne is very great and stands vpon a hill among trees, so that it +cannot well be seene except a man be neere it: to the Eastward of it vpon +the hill hard by the towne stand 2. high trees, which is a good marke to +knowe the towne. And vnder the towne lieth another hill lower then it, +whereupon the sea beates: and that end next the sea is all great blacke +rockes, and beyonde the towne in a bay lieth another small towne. + +The 13 day in the morning we tooke our boate and went to shoare, and stayed +till ten a clocke and no man came to vs: we went about therefore to returne +aboord, and when the Negroes saw that, they came running downe with a +flagge to waue vs againe, so we ankered againe, and then one shewed vs that +the Captaine would come downe by and by: we sawe a saile in the meane time +passe by vs but it was small, and we regarded it not. [Sidenote: The like +they doe in the countrey of Prette Ianni.] Being on shore we made a tilt +with our oares and sayle, and then there came a boate to vs with fiue men +in her, who brought vs againe our bottle, and brought me a hen, making +signes by the sunne, that within two houres the marchants of the countrey +would come downe and buy all that we had: so I gaue them sixe Manillios to +carry to their Captaine, and they made signes to haue a pledge of vs, and +they would leaue vs another man: and we willing to do so, put one of our +men in their boate, but they would not giue vs one of theirs, so we tooke +our man againe, and there tarried for the marchants: and shortly after one +came downe arrayed like their Captaine with a great traine after him, who +saluted us friendly, and one of the chiefest of them went and sate downe +vnder a tree, where the last yere the Captaine was wont to sit: and at last +we perceiued a great many of them to stand at the ende of a hollow way, and +behinde them the Portugales had planted a base, who suddenly shotte at vs +but ouershot vs, and yet we were in a manner hard by them, and they shot at +vs againe before we could ship our oares to get away but did no hurt. Then +the Negroes came to the rocks hard by vs, and disharged calieuers at vs, +and againe the Portugales shot off their base twise more, and then our ship +shot at them, but the rockes and hilles defended them. + +[Sidenote: Master Robert Gainshes voyage to Guinea in anno 1554.] Then we +went aboord to goe from this place, seeing the Negroes bent against vs, +because that the last yeere M. Gainsh did take away the Captaines sonne and +three others from this place with their golde, and all that they had about +them: [Sidenote: The English were offered to build a towne in Guine.] which +was the cause that they became friends with the Portugales, whom before +they hated, as did appeare the last yeere by the courteous intertainement +which the Trinitie had there, when the Captaine came aboord the shippe, and +brought them to his towne, and offered them ground to build a Castle in, +and there they had good sales. + +The 14 day we wayed and plyed backe againe to seeke the Hinde, which in the +morning we met, and so we turned both back to the Eastwardes to see what we +could doe at that place where the Trinitie did sell her eight frises the +last yeere. The Hinde had taken eighteene ounces and a halfe more of golde +of other Negroes, the day after that we left them. This day about one of +the clocke we espied certaine boates vpon the sand and men by them and went +to them with marchandizes, and tooke three ounces of gold for 18 fuffs of +cloth, euery fuffe three yards and a halfe after one angell and 12 graines +the fuffe, and then they made me signes that the next day I should haue +golde enough: so the Master took the Hinde with Iohn Sauill and Iohn +Makeworth, and went to seeke the place aforesaid, and I with Richard +Pakeman remained in this place to see what we could do the next day: and +when the Negroes perceiued our ship to go away, they feared that the other +would follow, and so sent forth 2 boats to vs with 4 men in them, requiring +vs to tary and to giue them one man for a pledge, and 2 of them should tary +with vs for him, so Edward M. Morleis seruant seeing these men so earnest +therein offered himselfe to be pledge, and we let him goe for two of them, +one whereof had his waights and scales, and a chaine of golde aboute his +necke, and another about his arme. They did eate of such things as we had +and were well contented. In the night the Negroes kept a light vpon the +shoare thwart of vs, and about one of the clocke we heard and saw the light +of a base which shot off twise at the said light, and by and by discharged +two calieuers, which in the end we perceiued to be the Portugals brigandine +which followed vs from place to place, to giue warning to the people of the +countrey, that they should not deale with vs. + +The 15 day in the morning the Captaine came downe with 100 men with him, +and brought his wife, and many others brought their wiues also, because +their towne was 8 miles vp in the countrey, and they determined to lie by +the sea side till they had brought what they would. When he was come he +sent our man aboord, and required to haue two men pledges, and he himselfe +would come aboord, and I sent him two, of whom he tooke but one, and so +came aboord vs, he and his wife with diuers of his friends, and brought me +a goate and two great rootes, and I gaue him againe a latten bason, a white +bason, 6 manillios, and a bottell of Malmesie, and to his wife a small +casket. After this we began to make our measure and weight: and he had a +weight of his owne which held one angell and 14 graines, and required a +measure of 4 elles and a halfe. In fine we concluded the 8 part for one +angell and 20 graines, and before we had done, they tooke mine owne weight +and measure. + +The 16 day I tooke 8 li. 1 ounce of gold: and since the departure of the +Hinde I heard not of her, but when our pledge went into the countrey the +first night, he said he saw her cast anker aboue fiue leagues from this +place. The 17 day I sold about 17 pieces of cloth, and tooke 4 li. 4 ounces +and a halfe of gold. The 18 day the captaine desired to haue some of our +wine, and offered halfe a ducket of gold for a bottell: but I gaue it him +freely, and made him and his traine drinke besides. And this day also I +tooke 5 li. 5 ounces of gold. The 19 day we sold about 18 clothes, and +tooke 4 li. 4 ounces and one quarter of golde. + +The 20 day tooke 3 li. sixe ounces and a quarter of golde. The 21 we tooke +8 li. 7. ounces and a quarter. The 22. 3. li. 8. ounces and a quarter. And +this night about 4 of the clocke the Captaine who had layen all this while +vpon the shoare, went away with all the rest of the people with him. + +The 23 day we were waued a shoare by other Negroes, and sold them cloth, +caskets, kniues, and a dosen of bels, and tooke 1 li. 10 ounces of gold. +The 24 likewise we sold bels, sheetes, and thimbles, and tooke two li. one +ounce and a quarter of gold. The 25 day we sold 7 dosen of smal bels and +other things, and then perceiuing their gold to be done, we wayed and set +sayle and went to leeward to seeke the Hinde, and about 5 of the clocke at +night we had sight of her, and bare with her, and understood that shee had +made some sales. The 26 day wee receiued out of the Hinde 48 li. 3 ounces +and one eight part of golde, which they had taken in the time that we were +from them. And this day vpon the request of a Negro that came vnto vs from +a captaine, we went to shoare with our marchandize, and tooke 7 li. and one +ounce of gold. At this place they required no gages of vs, but at night +they sent a man aboord vs, which lay with vs all night, because we might +knowe that they would also come to vs the next day. The 27 day in both our +shippes we tooke 8. li. one ounce, three quarters and halfe a quarter of +golde. The 28 we made sales for the companie, and tooke one pound and half +an ounce of gold. The 29 day in the morning we heard two calieuers shot off +vpon the shore, which we iudged to be either by the Portugales or by the +Negroes of the Portugales: we manned our boates and armed our selues and +went to shoare, but coulde finde nothing: for they were gone. The 30 day we +made more sales for the companie and for the Masters. + +The 31 we sent our boate to shoare to take in sand for balast, and there +our men met the Negroes, with whom they had made sale the day before a +fishing which did helpe them to fill sand, and hauing no gold, sold fish to +our men for their handkerchiefs and nightkerchiefes. + +The 1 day of February we wayed and went to another place, and tooke 1 li. +9. ounces 3 quarters of gold. The 2 day we made more sales: but hauing +viewed our victuals we determined to tarie no long time vpon the coast, +because the most part of our drinke was spent, and that which remained grew +sowre. [Sidenote: They returne for England.] The 3 and 4 dayes we made some +sales, though not great, and finding the wind this 4. day to come off the +shoare, we set saile and ranne along the shoare to the Westwards: vpon this +coast we found by experience that ordinarily about 2 of the clocke in the +night the winde comes off the shoare at Northnortheast, and so continueth +vntil eight of the clocke in the morning: and all the rest of the day and +night it comes out of Southwest: and as for the tide or currant vpon this +shoare, it goeth continually with the winde. The 5 day we continued sayling +and thought to haue met with some English ships, but found none. + +The sixt day we went our course Southwest to fetch vnder the line, and +ranne by estimation 24 leagues. + +The 13 day wee thought our selues by our reckoning to be cleare off the +Cape das Palmas, and ranne 12 leagues. + +The 22 day we were thwart of the Cape de Monte, which is to the Westward of +the Riuer de Sestos, about 30 leagues. + +The first day of March in a Ternado we lost the Hinde, whereupon we set vp +a light and shot off a piece but could not heare of her, so that then we +strooke our saile and taried for her, and in the morning had sight of her +againe three leagues a sterne off vs. + +Vpon the 22 day we found our selues to be in the height of Cape Verde, +which stands in 14 degrees and a halfe. + +From this day till the 29 day we continued our course, and then we found +our selues to be in 22 degrees. This day one of our men called William +King, who had bene long sicke, died in his sleepe, his apparel was +distributed to those that lackt it, and his money was kept for his friends +to be deliuered them at his comming home. + +The 30 day we found our selues to be vnder the Tropike. + +The 31 day we went our course, and made way 18 leagues. + +From the first day of Aprill to the 20 we went our course, and then found +our selues to bee in the height of the Asores. + +The seuenth day of May we fell with the South part of Ireland, and going on +shoare with our boate had fresh drinke, and two sheepe of the countrey +people, which were wilde Kernes, and we gaue them golde for them, and +bought further such other victuals as we had neede of, and thought would +serue vs till we arriued in England. + +The 14. day with the afternoone tide we went into the Port of Bristoll +called Hungrode, and there ankered in safetie and gaue thankes to God for +our safe arriuall. + + * * * * * + +The second voyage made by Maister William Towrson to the coast of Guinea, + and the Castle of Mina, in the yeere 1556. with the Tiger of London, a + ship of 120 tunnes, the Hart of London of 60 tunnes, and a Pinnesse of + sixteene tunnes. + +The fourteenth day of September, the yeere abouesayd, we departed from +Harwich, and directed our course for the Isle of Sillie, to meete there +with the Hart and Pinnesse, which were rigged and victualed at Bristoll, +but arriuing there the eight and twientieth day we found them not, and +therefore after long lying at Hull to tarrie for them, but not espying +them, we turned backe to Plimmouth the 12 day of October, and being there, +the Hart and the Pinnesse came to vs, so that the 15 of Nouember we all +departed together from Plimmouth at one of the clocke in the after noone, +and the 28 day we had sight of the Isle of Porto Santo, and the next day in +the morning of Madera. + +The third day of December we fell with the Ile of Palma, and the 9 we were +thwart of Cape Blanke, and found there certaine Carauels fishing for +Pargoes. + +The 19 we found our selues in the height of Sierra Leona, and all this day +we ranne thwart of certaine Currants, which did set to the West +Southwestward so fast as if it had bene the ouerfall of a sand, making a +great noyse like vnto a streame or tide-gate when the water is shoale: and +to prooue whither we could finde ground in this place, we sounded and had +150 fadome, and no ground, and so departed. + +The 30 of December we fell with the coast of Guinea, and had first sight of +it about 4 leagues off. The best marke that we could take of the place to +knowe it was three hilles, which lay Northeast and by East from vs: betwixt +the Northermost two hilles there are two high and great trees standing in +sight as it were a sailes breadth one from another, and a litle more to the +Northwestwards are certaine hommocks. Hauing sayled somewhat into the +shoare wee tooke our selues to be shotte somewhat past the riuer de Sestos, +so that we kept about to fetch it. And a litle after we had sight of three +sayles of shippes and two pinnesses which were in the weather of vs, and +hauing sight of them we made our selues readie to meete them, and halled +off our ships to fetch the winde as neere as we could: and hauing sayled +about an houre or two, they also went about, and went as we went to make +themselues readie, and when we had them in chase, they went away from vs: +but when they had made themselues readie, they kept about againe, and came +with vs verie finely appointed with their streamers, and pendants and +ensignes, and noyse of trumpets very brauely: so when we met, they had the +weather of vs, and we being determined to fight, if they had bene +Portugals, waued them to come vnder our Lee, which they denied stoutly: +then we demaunded of them whence they were, and they sayd of France, we +told them againe that we were of London in England. They asked of vs what +Portugals wee had seene, we answered, none but Fishermen: then they told vs +that there were certaine Portugall ships gone to the Mina to defend it, and +that they met with another at the riuer de Sestos, which was a ship of two +hundred which they had burned, and had saued none but the master and two or +three Negroes, and certaine others which were sore burned which they left a +shoare there. Then they desired to come aboord of vs with their boates to +talke with vs, and wee gaue them leaue. Then the captaine of the Admirall +and diuers others came aboord very friendly, desiring vs to keepe them +company because of the Portugals, and to goe to the Mina with them: wee +told them that we had not watered, and that we were but now fallen with the +coast, and they shewed vs that we were fiftie leagues past the riuer de +Sestos: notwithstanding there was water enough to be had, and they would +helpe vs to water with their owne boates because they would haue our +companie. And told vs further, that they had bene sixe weekes vpon the +coast, and had gotten but three tunnes of graines amongst them all: and +when wee had heard them, we made our reckoning that although the Mina were +cleare, yet if they did goe before vs, they would marre our market; and if +it were not cleare, then if the Portugals were there and did take them, +they would vnderstand that we were behind, and so would waite for vs. +[Sidenote: They admit certaine Frenchmen into their companie.] And further +we made account that if we went with them we should doe as well as they, if +the coast were cleare: if it were not cleare, then by them we were assured +to be the stronger. Therefore hauing considered thus much of their gentle +offers, we tolde them that the next day wee would conferre more largely of +the matter. Whereupon they desired me to come the next day to dinner to +them, and to bring the masters of our ships with me, and such merchants as +I thought good, promising to giue vs water out of their owne ships if we +would take it, or els to tarie with vs and helpe vs to water with their own +boats and pinnasses. + +The 31 day in the morning the Admirall sent his boat aboord for me, and I +tooke our masters and certaine of our marchants and went to him, who had +prouided a notable banquet for vs, and intreated vs very friendly, desiring +vs still to keepe his company, promising that what victuals were in his +ships, or other things that might doe vs pleasure vntill the end, we should +haue the one halfe of it, offering vs if we would to furle his Flags, and +to bee at our commaundement in all things. + +In the ende we agreed to come to an anker, and to send our boat on shore +with the Admirals boat, and one of his pinnasses, and an Almaine which they +had brought out of France, to seeke water, as for our pinnasse she came to +an anker to seaward of vs all, and would not come at vs. All this night the +boats continued on shore. + +The first day of Ianuary our boats came to vs againe and had found no +riuer. Whereupon we weighed and set saile, and ankred againe at another +riuer. + +The 2 day we went into the riuer and bargained, and tooke 5 small Elephants +teeth. + +The 3 day we tooke 5 more. + +[Sidenote: An assault vpon elephants.] The fourth day the French Admirall +and wee tooke fifteene small teeth. This day wee tooke thirtie men with vs +and went to seeke Elephants, our men being all well armed with +harquebusses, pikes, long bowes, crossebowes, partizans, long swordes, and +swordes and bucklers: wee found two Elephants which wee stroke diuers times +with harquebusses and long bowes, but they went away from vs and hurt one +of our men. The fift day we set saile and ranne along the coast. + +The 6 day we fell with the riuer de S. Andre, at which place the land is +somewhat high to the Westward of the riuer, and a faire Baie also to the +Westward of it: but to the Eastward of it it is lowe land. + +The 7 day we went into the Riuer and found no village, but certaine wild +Negros not accustomed to trade. It is a very great riuer and 7 fadome water +in some places at the entring. Here we filled water, and after set saile. + +The 8 day we sailed along the shore and came to the red cliffes, and went +forward in sailing the 9 day also. + +The 10 day we came together to confer with captaine Blundel Admiral of the +French ships, Ierom Baudet his vice admiral, and Iohn de Orleans master of +a ship of 70 tunne, and with their marchants, and agreed that when God +should send vs to any place where wee might make sale, that we should be of +one accord and not one of vs hurt the market of the other, but certaine of +our boates to make the price for all the rest, and then one boate to make +sale for euery shippe. This night our boats going to the shore met with +certaine Negros, who said that they had gold, and therefore we here cast +anker. + +The 11 day all the day we tooke but one halfe angel weight of 4 graines, +which we tooke by hand, for the people of this place had no weight: the +Negros called this place Allow. + +The 12 day we ran along the coast and found but one towne, but no boates +would come out to vs, and therefore we went our course. + +The 13 day I tooke my boat and went along the shore, and passed by diuers +small townes, and was waued to come on shore at 3 places, but the sea went +so high vpon the shore, that it was not possible for vs to land, neither +could they come to vs if they had had boats, as I could see none but at one +place, where there was one that would haue come vnto vs, but the Land-wash +went so sore that it ouerthrew his boat, and one of the men was drowned, +which the people lamented, and cried so sore, that we might easily heare +them, and they got his body out of the sea, and caried it amongst them to +their towne. + +[Sidenote: The castle of Mina.] The 14 day we came within Saker-shot of the +castle, and straightway they set forth an Almade to descry vs, and when +they perceiued that we were no Portugals, they ranne within the towne +againe: for there is a great towne by the Castle which is called by the +Negros Dondou. Without this there lie two great rockes like Ilands, and the +castle standeth vpon a point which sheweth almost like an Iland. Before we +came at this castle, we found the land for fiue or six leagues to be high +land, and about seuen leagues before we came to the castle, lowe land, +vntil we came at the castle, and then wee found the land high againe. This +castle standeth about fiue leagues to the East of Cape de Tres puntas. Here +I tooke the boate with our Negros and ranne alongst the shore till I came +to the Cape and found two small townes, but no boates at them, neither any +traffique to be had. At these places our Negros did vnderstand them well, +and one of them went ashore at all the places and was well receiued of +them. This night we ankred at the Cape de Tres puntas. + +The 15 day I tooke our boat and went along the shore, and about 3 leagues +beyond the Eastermost part of the Cape we found a faire Bay where we ran +in, and found a smal towne and certaine boates which belonged to the same +towne, but the Negros in a long time would not come to vs, but at the last +by the perswasion of our owne Negros, one boat came to vs, and with him we +sent George our Negro a shore, and after he had talked with them, they came +aboard our boates without feare, and I gaue to their captaine a bason, and +two strings of Margarets, and they shewed vs about 5 duckats weight of +gold, but they required so much for it that wee would not take it, because +the Frenchman and we had agreed to make price of our goods all in one boat, +and the price being made then euery man to sell in his owne boat, and no +man to giue more then the price which should be set by vs al. This place is +called Bulle, and here the Negros were very glad of our Negros, and shewed +them all the friendship they could, when they had told them that they were +the men that were taken away being now againe brought by vs. + +The Negros here shewed vs that a moneth since there were 3 ships that +fought together, and the two shippes put the other to flight: and before +that at the castle of Mina there were 4 ships of the Portugals which met +with one Frenchman, which Frenchman caused them all to flee, which shippe +we tooke to be the Roebarge: for the Frenchmen of our company iudged her to +be thereabout that time with her pinnasse also. And further, that after her +went a shippe of twelue score named the Shaudet all alone, and after her a +ship of fourescore, and both for the Mina. And there were two others also +which they left, one at Cape Verde called the Leuriere of Diepe, and +another at the riuer De Sestos, besides these 3 which all this time be in +our company, whose names be these: + +The Espoier of Hableneff which is the Admirall, whose captaine is Denis +Blundell. + +The Leuriere of Roan Viceadmirall, whose master is Ierome Baudet. + +The other is of Hunfleur whose master is called Iohn de Orleans. + +The sixteenth day I went along the shore with two pinasses of the +Frenchmen, and found a Baie and a fresh riuer, and after that went to a +towne called Hanta, twelue leagues beyond the Cape. At this towne our +Negros were well knowen, and the men of the towne wept for ioy when they +saw them, and demanded of them where Anthonie and Binne had bene: and they +told them that they had bene at London in England, and should bee brought +home the next voyage. So after this, our Negros came aboord with other +Negros which brought a weight with them, which was so small that wee could +not giue them the halfe of that which they demaunded for it. + +The Negros here told vs that there were fiue Portugall shippes at the +Castle, and one pinnasse, and that the Portugals did much harme to their +Countrey, and that they liued in feare of them, and we told them againe, +that we would defend them from the Portugals whereof they were very glad. + +The 17 day we went a shoare and the Frenchmen with vs, but did no great +good, the Negros were so vnreasonable, we sold 80. Manellios for one ounce +of gold. + +[Sidenote: The Negros brought home by our men.] Then wee departed and went +to Shamma, and went into the riuer with fiue boates well appointed with men +and ordinance, and with our noises of trumpets and drummes, for we thought +here to haue found some Portugals but there were none: so wee sent our +Negros on shoare, and after them went diuers of vs, and were very well +receiued, and the people were very glad of our Negros, specially one of +their brothers wiues, and one of their aunts, which receiued them with much +ioy, and so did all the rest of the people, as if they had bene their +naturall brethren: we comforted the captaine and told him that hee should +not feare the Portugals, for wee would defend him from them: whereupon we +caused our boats to shoote off their bases and harquebusses, and caused our +men to come on shore with their long bowes, and they shot before the +captaine, which he, with all the rest of the people, wondred much at, +specially to see them shoot so farre as they did, and assaied to draw their +bowes but could not. When it grew to be late, we departed to our ships, for +we looked euery houre for the Portugals. And here the Negros shewed vs that +there was an English ship at the Mina, which had brought one of the Negros +againe, which Robert Gaynsh tooke away. + +The 18 day we went into the riuer with no lesse strength then before, and +concluded with the Negros to giue them for euery Fuffe two yardes and three +nailes of Cloth, and to take for it one angel-duckat: so that we tooke in +all 70 Duckats, whereof the Frenchmen had fortie, and wee thirtie. + +The nineteenth day wee went a shore euery man for himselfe, and tooke a +good quantitie of gold, and I for my part tooke foure pound and two ounces +and a halfe of gold, and our Hartes boate tooke one and twentie ounces. At +night the Negros shewed vs that the next day the Portugals would be with vs +by land or by Sea: and when we were ready to depart, we heard diuers +harquebusses shoote off in the woods by vs which wee knew to bee Portugals, +which durst come no neerer to vs, but shot off in the woods to see if they +could feare vs and so make vs to leaue our traffique. + +The 20 day we manned our fiue boats, and also a great boat of the +Frenchmens with our men and the Admirals, 12 of them in their murrians and +corsets, and the rest all well appoynted, with foure trumpets, a drumme and +a Fife, and the boate all hanged with streamers of Silke and pendants very +faire, and went into the riuer and traffiqued, our man of warre lying off +and on in the riuer to waft vs, but we heard no more of the Portugals. This +day the Negros told vs that there were certain ships come into Hanta, which +towne is about two leagues to the Westward of this place. + +This 21 day we manned our boats againe and went to a place a league from +this to the Westwards, and there found many Negros with another Captaine, +and sold at the same rate that wee had done with the others. + +The 22 day we went ashore againe and traffiqued in like sort quietly, and I +tooke 4 pound and six ounces of gold. + +The 23 day about night the Negros with their captaine came to vs and told +vs that the king of Portugals ships were departed from the Castle, meaning +the next day to plie to the windward to come to vs, giuing vs warning to +take heed to our selues: we told them againe that wee were very glad of +their comming, and would be ready at all times to meet them, and to assure +them that wee were glad of it, wee sounded our trumpets, and shot off +certaine bases whereof the Negros were very glad, and requested vs that if +the Portugals sought to hinder our traffique, to shew them all the +extremitie that we could, promising vs that if they came by land, they +would aduertise vs thereof. + +The 24 we went a shore with our trumpets and drummes, and traffiqued, and I +bade the captaine of the towne to dinner. + +[Sidenote: Fiue sailes of Portingals descried.] The 25 day we being a +shore, our ships had descried fiue sailes of the king of Portugals, and our +ships shot off ordinance to call vs away, and we threw euery man his caske +ashore for water, and went to our ships, and by that time we had weighed +and giuen order one to another what to do, it was night, so that that night +nothing was done. We set saile and lay close all night to get the wind if +we could: we were neere some of them, and one shot off a piece which wee +iudged to be the Admirall of the Portugals, to cause the rest to come and +speake with him: so all this night we made our selues ready for fight. + +The 26 we came in with the shore and had sight of the Portugals where they +rid at anker, and we bare with them, and we gaue all our men white +scarffes, to the ende that the Frenchmen might know one the other if we +came to boording: but the night came vpon vs that we could not fetch them, +but we ankered within demie-Culuering shot of them. + +[Sidenote: The fight with the Portugals.] The 27 day we weighed and so did +the Portugals, and about eleuen of the clocke wee had the wind of them, and +then we went roome with them, which when they pereeiued, they kept about to +the shore againe, and wee after them, and when they were so neere the shore +that they could not well runne any further on that boord, they kept about +againe, and lay to the Seaward, and then we kept about with them, and were +a head of them, and tooke in our topsailes and taried for them: and the +first that came vp was a small barke which sailed so well that she cared +not for any of vs, and caried good ordinance: and as soone as she came vp, +she shot at vs, and ouershot vs, and then she shot at the Admirall of the +Frenchmen, and shot him through in two or three places, and went forth a +head of vs, because we were in our fighting sailes: then came vp another +carauell vnder our Lee in like case which shot at vs and at the Frenchman, +and hurt two of his men and shot him through the maine maste. And after +them came vp the Admirall vnder our Lee also, but he was not able to doe vs +so much harme as the small shippes, because he caried ordinance higher then +they, neither were we able to make a good shot at any of them, because our +shippe was so weake in the side, that she laid all her ordinance in the +Sea: [Sidenote: The French forsake our men.] wherefore we thought to lay +the great ship aboord, and as soone as the French Admirall went roome with +him, be fell a sterne and could not fetch him, and after he fell asterne of +two carauels more and could fetch none of them, but fell to Leeward of them +all: and when he was to Leeward, he kept about to the shoreward, and left +vs, and then we put out our topsailes and gaue them chase, and both the +other Frenchmen kept the wind, and would not come neere vs, and our owne +ship was a sterne so that she could not come to vs: and after we had +folowed them about two houres to the seaward, they kept about againe +towards the shore, thinking to pay vs as they went along by, and to haue +the wind of the French Admirall which before ran in towards the shore, and +we kept about with them, and kept still the wind of them thinking that our +Viceadmiral and the other would haue folowed vs as wee willed them to do: +but after that the Portugall was past by them, and euery one had shot at vs +and our Viceadmirall, both our Viceadmirall and the two Frenchmen, and our +owne pinnasse left vs in the laps, and ran to seaward, and we ran still +along, and kept the wind of them to succour the French Admirall, who was +vnder all of their Lees, and when they met with him, euery one went roome +with him, and gaue him the broad side, and after they cast about againe, +and durst not boord him, because they sawe vs in the weather of them, or +els without doubt they had taken or sunke them, for three of them which +were the smallest went so fast that it was not possible for a ship to boord +them, and caried such ordinance that if they had had the weather of vs, +they would haue troubled 3 of the best ships that we had, and as for their +Admirall and Viceadmirall they were both notablie appointed. + +When the Frenchman was cleare of them, hee laie as neere the winde as hee +could, and wee followed them still towardes the shore, and there the +Admirall ranne to Sea after the rest, and left vs all alone: and when the +Portugals perceiued that we were alone, and gaue them chase, they kept +about with vs and we with them, to keepe the wind of them, and we ranne +still within base shot of them, but they shot not at vs, because we had the +weather of them, and sawe that they could do vs no hurt: and thus we +folowed one another vntil night, and in the night we lost them, but as for +all the rest of our ships, they packed on all the sailes that they could +and ranne to sea, and as they themselues confesse, they praied for vs, but +as for helpe at their hands we could haue none. + +The 28 day we met with our Viceadmirall, our pinnasse, and two of the +Frenchmen, and the third was fled which was a ship of fourscore tunne, and +belonged to Roan: and when I had the sight of the rest of our ships, I +tooke our skiffe and went to them to know why they lost vs in such a case, +and Iohn Kire made me answere that his ship would neither reare nor steere, +and as for the pinnasse, Iohn Dauis made me answere that she would doe +nothing, and that he could cary her no further, for her rudder was broken, +so that the Hart was glad to towe her. Then I went to the French Admirall, +and found himselfe to be a man of good stomacke, but the one halfe of his +men were sicke and dead: and then I talked with the smaller Frenchman, and +hee made me answere that he could doe nothing, saying, that his ship would +beare no saile, and had 16 of his men dead and sicke, so he made vs plaine +answere that he was able to doe nothing. After this the Frenchman durst not +anker for feare of the Portugales. + +The 29 day the master of the pinnasse came to vs and sayd that they were +not able to keepe her any longer, and then wee viewed her and seeing there +was no remedie, her rudder with all the iron worke being broken both aloft +and belowe, wee agreed to breake her vp and to put the men into the Hart. +So wee tooke out of her foure bases, one anker, and certaine fire wood, and +set her on fire, and afterwards ran along the coast. + +The thirtie day we went in to the shore, and spake with certaine Negros, +who told vs that some French shippes had bene there, but wee could not +bargaine with them they were so vnreasonable. + +The 31 day I went to shore but did not traffike. + +The 1 day of Februarie we weighed, seeing we could not bring the Negros to +any reason, and came to another place which standeth vpon an hill. + +The third day I went to a towne foure leagues from vs, and shot off two +pieces, and the Captaine came to vs, and I sent Thomas Rippen a land who +knew the Captaine, and assoone as he came on shore, the Captaine knew him +and diuers of the Negros who then began to aske for mee, and hauing told +the Captaine that I was in the boate, hee made no longer tarying but by and +by caused two boates to be put to the Sea, and came to me himselfe, and +when he sawe me, he cryed to me before hee came to the boat and seemed to +be the gladdest man aliue, and so did all the companie that knew mee, and I +gaue him a reward as the maner of the Countrey is, and caused the Frenchman +to giue another, promising the next day to giue him wine: and that night +because it was late, he would not talke of any price but left me a pledge, +and tooke another of me and so departed. + +The 4 day going on shore, I found that the ships of France which had bin +there, had done much hurt to our markets but yet I tooke fiue ounces and a +halfe of gold. + +The fift day I tooke eight ounces and one eight part of gold: but I saw +that the Negros perceiued the difference in Cloth betwixt ours and that +which the Frenchmen had, which was better, and broader then ours: and then +I told captaine Blundel that I would goe to the Leeward, because I +perceiued that being there where his Cloth was sold, I should do no good, +whereof hee was sorie. + +The 6 day there came an almade and Negros aboord me, requesting me to come +to their towne for they had much gold and many marchants: and so I went and +found their old Captaine gone, and another in his place: but this night wee +did no good, because the marchants were not come downe: so he required a +pledge which I let him haue, and tooke another of him. + +The 7 day George our Negro came to vs, who had followed vs at the least 30 +leagues in a small boat, and when he came, the Negros and we soone +concluded of price. I tooke this day fiue pound and one ounce, and 3 +quarters of gold. This Negro we had left at Shamma at the time of the +fight, who said that he saw the fight being on shore, and that when we were +gone from the Portugals, the Portugals came into their riuer, and told them +that the Englishmen had slaine two Portugals with a piece, which was in +deed out of our ship, and they required harbour there, but the captaine of +Shamma would not suffer them. + +The 8 day we tooke nineteene pound three ounces and a halfe. + +The 9 day we tooke two pound six ounces and a halfe. + +The 10 day three pound. + +[Sidenote: The Frenchmen bridled by the English.] The 11 day came to vs +Ierome Bawdet the Viceadmiral of the Frenchmen and his pinnasse, and he +shewed vs that where we left them there was no good to be done, and sayd he +would goe to the Eastward, but we told him hee should not: and thereupon +commaunded him to goe to his company which he was appointed to bee with, +which hee refused to doe vntill wee had shot three or foure pieces at their +pinnasse, and when the ship sawe that, she kept about, and ranne to +Seaward, and durst come no neerer to vs, so the pinnasse went after her. We +tooke this day one pound fiue ounces. + +The 12 day there came one of the Frenchmens pinnasses to vs laden with +cloth, and would haue made sale, but I would not suffer him, and therefore +tooke him and sent him aboord of our ship, and caused him to ride there all +day. We tooke fiue pound six ounces and a halfe. + +The 14 day we tooke of some Negros 4 ounces of gold. + +The 16 we came to another towne. + +The 17 day I went a shore and vnderstood that 3 of the Portugall ships were +at the Castle, and the other two at Shamma. The captaine of this towne was +gone to the principall towne, to speake with their king, and would returne +shortly as they told me, and so he did, and brought me a weight and +measure, and I sent a man to see that principall towne, and their king. The +Portugall ships rid so neere vs, that within 3 houres they might be with +vs, yet were all contented to tary for sales. + +The 18 day certaine of the kings seruants came to vs, and we tooke one +pound two ounces, and one eight part of gold. + +The 10 day we tooke fiue pound one ounce. + +The 20 day one pound and foure ounces. + +The 21 I tooke foure pound and one ounce, and the Negroes enquired for fine +cloth, and I opened two pieces which were not fine enough, as they sayd, +but seeing that we had no other, they bought of them. At night I prouided a +gift, or present, and sent one marchant and a mariner with it to the king, +to certifie him of our want of victuals, by reason whereof we could not +stay long: for in deed we searched our ship, and the most part of our beere +was leaked out of all our barrels. + +The 22 day we tooke three ounces and a halfe. + +[Sidenote: The offer of the king to the English to build a Fort.] The 23 +our men came from the king Abaan, and told vs, that he had receiued them +very friendly, but he had litle gold, but promised, if we would tary, to +send into all his countrey for gold for vs, and he willed our men at their +comming home to speake to our king to send men and prouision into his +countrey, to build a castle, and to bring Tailors with them, to make them +apparell, and good wares, and they should be sure to sell them: but for +that present the Frenchmen had filled them full of cloth. + +This towne standeth about foure leagues vp in the land, and is by the +estimation of our men, as big in circuit as London, but the building is +like to the rest of the countrey. They haue about this Towne great store of +the wheate of the Countrey, and they iudge, that on one side of the towne +there were one thousand rikes of Wheate, and another sorte of Corne which +is called Mill, which is much vsed in Spaine. + +[Sidenote: A pretie deuise to descrie the enemie.] About this towne they +keepe good watch euery night, and haue to warne the watchmen certaine +cordes made fast ouer their wayes which lead into the town, and certaine +bels vpon them, so that if any man touch the cordes, the bels ring, and +then the watchmen runne foorth of their watch houses to see what they be: +and if they be enemies, if they passe the cord, they haue prouision with +certaine nets hanged ouer the wayes, where they must passe, to let fall +vpon them, and so take them, and otherwise then by the wayes it is not +possible to enter the towne, by reason of the thickets and bushes which are +about the same, and the towne is also walled round about with long cords, +and bound together with sedge and certaine barkes of tree. + +[Sidenote: The kings friendly entertainment of our men.] When our men came +to the towne, it was about fiue of the clock in the morning, for there they +trauell alwayes in the night by reason of the heate of the day: and about +nine of the clocke, the king sent for them, for there may no man come to +him before he be sent for, and then they would haue carried their present +with them: but the Negros told them, that they must bee three times brought +before him, before they might offer their gift: and when they came to him, +he talked with them, and receiued them very friendly and kept them about +half an hour, and then they departed, and after that sent for them againe +three times, and last of all, they brought him their present, which he +receiued thankfully, and then caused a pot of wine of Palme to be brought +foorth, and made them drinke: and before they drinke, both here and in all +the Countrey, they vse certaine ceremonies. + +[Sidenote: Their ceremonies in drinking.] First, they bring foorth their +pot of drinke, and then they make a hole in the ground, and put some of the +drinke into it, and they cast the earth vpon it, which they digged forth +before, and then they set the pot vpon the same, then they take a little +thing made of a goord, and with that they take out of the same drinke, and +put it vpon the ground in three places, and in diuers places they haue +certaine bunches of the pils of Palme trees set in the ground before them, +and there they put in some drinke, doing great reuerence in all places to +the same Palme trees. + +All these ceremonies first done, the king tooke a cup of gold, and they put +him in wine, and hee dranke of it, and when he dranke, the people cried all +with one voice, Abaan, Abaan, with certaine other words, like as they cry +commonly in Flanders, vpon the Twelfe night, The kinning [sic--KTH] drinks: +and when he had drunke, then they gaue drinke to euery one, and that done, +the king licensed them to depart, and euery one that departeth from him +boweth 3 times towards him, and waueth with both hands together, as they +bow, and then do depart. The king hath commonly sitting by him 8 or 10 +ancient men with gray beards. + +This day we tooke one pound and 10 ounces of gold. + +The 24 day we tooke 3 pound and 7 ounces. + +The 25 we tooke 3 ounces and 3 quarters. + +The 26 day we tooke 2 pound and 10 ounces. + +The 27 two pound and fiue ounces. + +The 28 foure pound, and then seeing that there was no more gold to be had, +we weighed and went foorth. + +The first day of March we came to a towne called Mowre, but we found no +boats nor people there: but being ready to depart, there came two Almades +to vs from another towne, of whom we tooke two ounces and a halfe of gold: +and they tolde vs that the Negros that dwelled at Mowre were gone to dwell +at Lagoua. + +The second day we came thwart of the castle, and about two leagues off, and +there saw all the fiue Portugall ships at anker, and this day by night we +fetched Shamma. + +[Sidenote: Ships of Portugall.] The third day we had sight of one tall +ship, of about two hundred tunnes in the weather of vs, and within lesse +then two leagues of our ships, and then we saw two more a sterne of her, +the one a ship of fiue hundred or more, and the other a pinnesse: and these +were a new fleet at that present arriued out of Portugall. Whereupon we +wayed, and made shift to double out of the land, and then the winde comming +to the South-southwest, the Hart going roome with them fell three leagues +to the leewards of vs. These Portugals gaue vs the chase from nine of the +clocke in the morning, till fiue at night, but did no good against vs. At +last, we perceiuing the Admirall to be farre a sterne of his company, +because his maine topmast was spent, determined to cast about againe with +them, because we were sure to weather them, and the winde being as it was, +it was our best course: but the Hart was so farre to the leeward, that we +could not doe it, except we would lose her company, so that we tooke in +some of our sailes, and went roome with him: which when he perceiued, he +looffed to, and was able to lie as neere as he did before. At night, when +we came to him, he would not speake to vs: then we asked of his company why +he went so roome; and they made excuse that they were able to beare no +saile by, for feare of bearing their foretopmast ouer boord: but this was a +simple excuse. + +The fourth day, being put from our watring place we began to seethe our +meat in salt water, and to rebate our allowance of drinke, to make it +indure the longer: and so concluded to set our course thence, for our owne +countrey. + +The 12 of March I found my selfe thwart of Cape das Palmas. + +The 16 day we fell with the land, which we iudged to be the Cape Mensurado, +about which place is very much high land. + +The 18 day we lost sight of the Hart, and I thinke the willfull Master ran +in with the shore of purpose to lose vs, being offended that I tolde him of +his owne folly. + +[Sidenote: Two small Ilands by Sierra Leona. Note.] The 27 day we fell in +sight of two small Islands, which lie by our reckoning sixe leagues off the +headland of Sierra Leona: and before we came in sight of the same Ilands, +we made our reckoning to be forty or thirty leagues at the least off them. +Therefore all they that saile this way are to regard the currents which set +Northnorthwest, or els they may be much deceiued. + +The 14 of April we met with two great ships of Portugall, which although +they were in the weather of vs, yet came not roome with vs, whereby we +iudged that they were bound for Calicut. + +The 18 day we were in the heigth of Cape verde. + +The 24 we were directly vnder the tropike of Cancer. + +The first day of May Henry Wilson our Steward died: and the next day died +Iohn Vnderwood. + +[Sidenote: A French brauado.] The 23 we had sight of a shippe in the +weather of vs, which was a Frenchman of 90 tunne, who came with vs as +stoutly and as desperately as might be, and comming neere vs perceiued that +we had bene vpon a long voyage, and iudging vs to be weake, as in deed we +were, came neerer vs, and thought to haue layed vs aboord, and there stept +vp some of his men in armour, and commanded vs to strike saile: whereupon +we sent them some of our stuffe, crossebarres, and chaineshot, and arrowes, +so thicke, that it made the vpper worke of their shippe flit about their +eares, and then we spoiled him with all his men, and toare his shippe +miserably with our great ordinance, and then he began to fall a sterne of +vs, and to packe on his sailes, and get away: and we seeing that, gaue him +foure or fiue good pieces more for his farewell; and thus we were rid of +this French man, who did vs no harme at all. We had aboord vs a French man +a Trumpeter, who being sicke, and lying in his bed, tooke his trumpet +notwithstanding, and sounded till he could sound no more, and so died. + +The 28 we conferred together, and agreed to go into Seuerne, and so to +Bristoll, but the same night we had sight of the Lizard, and by reason of +the winde, we were not able to double the lands end to go into Seuerne, but +were forced to beare in with the Lizard. + +The 29 day, about nine of the clocke in the morning, we arriued safely in +Plimmouth, and praised God for our good arriuall. + + * * * * * + +The third and last voyage of M. William Towrson to the coast of Guinie, and + the Castle de Mina, in the yeere 1577. + +The thirtieth day of Ianuary, the yeere abouesayd, we departed out of the +sound of Plimmouth, with three ships, and a pinnesse, whereof the names are +these: + +1 The Minion Admirall of the fleet. + +2 The Christopher Viceadmirall. + +3 The Tyger. + +4 A pinnesse called the Vnicorne: being all bound for the Canaries, and +from thence, by the grace of God, to the coast of Guinie. + +The next day, being the last of this moneth, [Marginal note: It is to be +vnderstood, that at this time there was warre betwixt England and France.] +we met with two hulks of Dantzick, the one called the Rose, a ship of foure +hundred tunnes, and the other called the Vnicorne, of an hundred and fifty +tunnes, the Master of the Rose was called Nicholas Masse, and the Master of +the Vnicorne Melchior White, both laden at Bourdeaux, and for the most part +with wines. When we came to them, we caused them to hoise foorth their +boats, and to come and speake with vs, and we examined euery one of them +apart, what French mens goods they had in their shippes, and they said they +had none: but by the contrarieties of their tales, and by the suspicion +which we gathered of their false chartar-parties, we perceiued that they +had French mens goods in them: we therefore caused one of them to fetch vp +his bils of lading, and because he denied that he had any, we sent certaine +with him, who caused him to goe to the place where he had hid them, and by +the differences of his billes of lading, and his talke, we gathered, as +before, that they had Frenchmens goods. Whereupon we examined them +straightly, and first the Purser of the Vnicorne, which was the smaller +shippe, confessed that they had two and thirty tunnes and a hogs-head of a +French mans. Then we examined the Master in like case, and he acknowledged +the same to be true. Then we examined also the Master of the great ship, +and he confessed that he had an hundred and eight and twenty tunnes of the +same French mans, and more they would not confesse, but sayd that all the +rest was laden by Peter Lewgues of Hamburg, to be deliuered to one Henry +Summer of Camphire, notwithstanding all their letters were directed to +Hamburg, and written in Dutch without, and within in French. + +When they had confessed that they had thus much French mens goods within +their shippes, we conferred together what was best to be done with them. +William Cretton and Edward Selman were of the opinion, that it should be +good either to carry them into Spaine, and there to make sale of the goods, +or els into Ireland, or to returne backe againe into England with them, if +the winde would permit it. But I, waying what charge we had of our Masters, +first by mouth, and afterwards by writing, that for no such matter we +should in any case prolong the time, for feare of losing the voyage, and +considering that the time of the yeere was very farre spent, and the money +that we should make of the wines not very much, in respect of the commodity +which we hoped for by the voyage, perswaded them that to goe into Ireland, +the winde being Easterly as it was, might be an occasion that we should be +locked in there with that winde, and so lose our voyage: and to cary them +into Spaine, seeing they sailed so ill, that hauing all their sailes +abroad, we kept them company onely with our foresailes, and without any +toppe sailes abroad, so that in euery two dayes sailing they would haue +hindered vs more then one; and besides that (the winde being Easterly) we +should not be able to seaze the coast with them: besides all this the losse +of time when we came thither was to be considered, whereupon I thought it +not good to carry them any further. + +And as for carying them into England, although the winde had bene good, as +it was not, considering what charge we had of our Masters, to shift vs out +of the way for feare of a stay by reason of the warres, I held it not in +any wise conuenient. + +But notwithstanding all this, certeine of our company not being herewith +satisfied went to our Master to know his opinion therein, who made them a +plaine answere, that to cary them into any place, it was not the best way +nor the profit of their Masters. And he tolde them further, that if the +time were prolonged, one moneth longer before they passed the Cape, but a +few men would go the voyage. [Sidenote: The French mens goods seazed in the +time of the warre vpon the losse of Cales.] All these things considered, we +all paused, and determined at the last, that euery man should take out of +the hulks so much as he could well bestow for necessaries, and the next +morning to conclude what should be further done with them. So we tooke out +of them for vs foureteene tunnes and a halfe of wine, and one tunne we put +into the pinnesse. + +More we tooke out one hogshead of Aquauitae. + Sixe cakes of rozzen. + A small halser for ties: and certeine chestnuts. + +The Christopher tooke out, + Ten tunnes of wine, and one hogshead. + A quantity of Aquauitae. + Shall-lines. + Chesnuts. + Sixe double bases with their chambers. + +And then men broke vp the hulks chests, and tooke out their compasses, and +running glasses, the sounding leade and line, and candles: and cast some of +their beefe ouer board, and spoiled them so much, that of very pity we gaue +them a compasse, a running glasse, a leade and a line, certaine bread and +candles, but what apparel of theirs we could finde in their ship, we gaue +them againe, and some money also of that which William Crompton tooke for +the ransome of a poore Frenchman, who being then Pilot downe the Riuer of +Bordeux, they were not able to set him a shore againe, by reason of the +foule weather. + +The Tyger also tooke out of the smaller hulke sixe or seuen tunnes of wine, +one hogshead of Aquauitae, and certeine rozzen, and two bases he tooke out +of the great hulke. + +The first day of February in the morning we all came together againe sauing +W. Crompton who sent vs word mat he was contented to agree to that order +which we should take. + +Now Edward Selman was of this opinion, that it was not best to let the +ships depart, but put men into them to cary them into England, which thing +neither we nor our Master would agree vnto, because we thought it not good +to vnman our ships going outward, considering how dangerous the time was: +so that in fine we agreed to let them depart, and giue them the rest of the +wine which they had in their ships of the Frenchmens for the fraight of +that which we had taken, and for their ordinance, rozzen, aquauitae, +chesnuts, and other things which the company had taken from them. So we +receiued a bill of their handes, that they confessed how much Frenchmens +goods they had, and then we let them depart. + +The 10 day we reckoned our selues to be 25 leagues from the Grand Canarie, +and this day about nine of the clocke our pinnesse brake her rudder, so +that we were forced to towe her at the sterne of the Minion, which we were +able to doe, and yet kept company with the rest of our ships. About eleuen +of the clocke this day we had sight of the Grand Canarie. + +The 11 day when we came to the Iland we perceiued that it was the Ile of +Tenerif, and then indeed wee had sight of the Grand Canarie, which lieth 12 +leagues to the Eastwards of Tenerif: and because the road of Tenerif is +foule ground, and nothing was there to be gotten for the helping of our +pinnesse, hauing the winde long, we agreed to go with the Grand Canarie. + +The 12 day we came into the roade of the towne of Canarie, which lieth one +league from the same towne. And after we had shot off diuers pieces of +ordinance to salute the towne and the castle, the gouernour and captiues of +the Iland sent to vs which were the captaines of the ships, requiring vs to +come a shoare. + +[Sidenote: Two English Marchants Legiers in the Grand Canary.] And when we +came to them they receiued vs very friendly, offering vs their owne Iennets +to ride to the towne, and what other friendship they could shew vs: and we +went to the towne with two English Marchants which lay there, and remained +in their house that day. The second day following we came aboord to deliuer +our marchandise, and to get our pinnesse mended. + +The 14 day came into the road the Spanish fleet which was bound to the +Emperours Indies, which were in number nineteene saile, whereof sixe were +ships of foure hundred and fiue hundred a piece, the rest were of two +hundred, an hundred and fifty, and of an hundred. When they were come to an +ancre they saluted vs with ordinance, and so we did them in like case. And +afterwards the Admirall (who was a knight) sent his pinnesse to desire me +to come to him; and when I came to him he receiued me friendly, and was +desirous to heare somewhat of the state of England and Flanders. And after +he had me a banquet, I departed; and I being gone vnto the boat, hee caused +one of his gentlemen to desire Francisco the Portugall, which was my +interpreter, to require me to furle my flagge, declaring that hee was +Generall of the Emperours fleet. Which thing (being come aboord) Francisco +shewed me: and because I refused to furle it, and kept it foorth still, +certaine of the souldiers in the ships shot diuers harquebush shot about +the ship, and ouer the flagge: and at the same time there came certeine +gentlemen aboord our ship to see her: to whom I sayd, that if they would +not cause those their men to leaue shooting, I would shoot the best +ordinance I had thorow their sides. And when they perceuied that I was +offended, they departed, and caused their men of warre and souldiers to +shoot no more, and afterwards they came to me againe, and tolde me that +they punished their men. That done, I shewed them the ship, and made them +such cheere as I could, which they receiued very thankfully: and the day +following they sent for mee to dine with them, and sent me word that their +General was very sory that any man should require me to furle my flagge, +and that it was without his consent: and therefore he requested me not to +thinke any vngentlenesse to be in him, promising that no man of his should +misdemeane himselfe. + +The 17 day we set saile in the road of Grand Canarie, and proceeded on our +voyage. + +The 20 in the morning we had sight of the coast of Barbarie, and running +along the shore we had sight of Rio del Oro, which lieth almost vnder the +tropike of Cancer. + +The 21 day we found our selues to be in 20 degrees and a halfe, which is +the heigth of Cape Blank. + +The 25 we had sight of the land in the bay to the Northward of Cape Verde. + +[Sidenote: Cape verde. Foure Ilands.] The 26 I tooke Francisco and Francis +Castelin with me, and went into the pinnesse, and so went to the Tyger +which was neerer the shore then the other ships, and went aboord her, and +with her and the other ships we ranne West and by South, and West +southwest, vntill about foure of the clocke, at which time we were hard +aboord the Cape, and then we ran in Southwest, and beyond the Cape about +foure leagues we found a faire Iland, and besides that two or three Ilands, +which were of very high rocks being full of diuers sorts of sea foule, and +of pigeons, with other sorts of land-foules, and so many, that the whole +Iland was couered with the dung thereof, and seemed so white as if the +whole Iland had bene of chalke; and within those Ilands was a very faire +bay, and hard aboord the rocks eighteene fadom water, and faire ground. +[Sidenote: A great trade of the Frenchmen at Cape verde.] And when we +perceiued the bay, and vnderstanding that the Frenchmen had a great trade +there, which we were desirous to know, we came to an ancre with the Tyger. +And after that the Minion and the Christopher ancred in like case: then we +caused the pinnesse to runne beyond another Cape of land, to see if there +were any place to trade in there. + +It being neere night I took our cocke and the Tygers skiffe, and went to +the Iland, where we got certaine foules like vnto Gannards: and then I came +aboord againe and tooke two of the Gannards which we had taken, and caried +them to the captaine of the Christopher, and when I had talked with him I +found him not willing to tary there, neither was I desirous to spend any +long time there, but onely to attempt what was to be done. The Master of +the Christopher told me he would not tary, being not bound for that place. + +[Sidenote: A faire Iland where the French trade.] The 27 the Captaine of +the Tyger and Edward Selman came to me, and Iohn Makeworth from the +Christopher, and then we agreed to take the pinnessse, and to come along +the shore, because that where we rid no Negros came to vs, and the night +before our pinnesse brought vs word that there was a very faire Iland. And +when I came beyond the point I found it so, and withall a goodly bay, and +we saw vpon the maine certaine Negros which waued vs on shore, and then we +came to an ancre with the pinnesse, and went a shore with our cocke, and +they shewed vs where their trade was, and that they had Elephants teeth, +muske, and hides, and offered vs to fetch downe their Captaine, if we would +send a man with them, and they would leaue a pledge for him: then we asked +him when any ship had bene there; and some of them sayd not in eight +moneths, others, in sixe moneths, and others in foure and that they were +Frenchmen. + +Then we perceuing, the Christopher not willing to tary, departed from them, +and set saile with the pinnesse and went aboord the Tyger. + +The 10 day of March we fell with the coast of Guinea, fiue leagues to the +Eastward of Cape de Monte, beside a riuer called Rio das Palmas. + +The 11 we went to the shore, and found one man that could speake some +Portuguise, who tolde vs that there were three French ships passed by; one +of them two moneths past, and the other one moneth past. At this place I +receiued nineteene Elephants teeth, and two ounces and halfe a quarter of +golde. + +The 12 we set saile to go to the riuer de Sestos. + +The 13 at night we fell with the same riuer. + +The 14 day we sent in our boats to take water, and rommaged our shippes, +and deliuered such wares to the Christopher and Tyger, as they had need of. + +The 15 we came together, and agreed to send the Tyger to another riuer to +take in her water, and to see what she could do for graines. + +After that we tooke marchandise with vs, and went into the riuer, and there +we found a Negro which was borne in Lisbone, left there by a ship of +Portugal which was burned the last yere at this riuer in fighting with +three Frenchmen: and he told vs further, that two moneths past there were +three Frenchmen at this place; and sixe weeks past there were two French +ships at the riuer: and fifteene dayes past there was one. All which ships +were gone towards the Mina. This day we tooke but few graines. + +The 19 day considering that the Frenchman were gone before vs, and that by +reason of the vnholesome aires of this place foureteene of our men in the +Minion were fallen sicke, we determined to depart, and with all speed to go +to the Mina. + +The 21. wee came to the riuer de Potos, where some of our boats went in for +water, and I went in with our cocke, and tooke 12 small Elephants teeth. + +The 23. day, after we had taken as many teeth as we could get, about nine +of the clocke we set saile to go towards the Mina. + +The 31 we came to Hanta, and made sale of certaine Manillios. + +[Sidenote: They descrie fiue saile of the Portugals.] The first Aprill we +had sight of fiue saile of Portugals, wherevpon we set saile and went off +to sea to get the winde of them, which wee should haue had if the winde had +kept his ordinary course, which is all the day at the Southwest, and +West-southwest: but this day with a flaw it kept all the day at the East, +and East-southeast, so that the Portugals had the winde of vs, and came +roome with the Tyger and vs untill night, and brought themselues all saue +one, which sailed not so well as the rest, within shot of vs: then it fell +calme, and the winde came vp to the Southwest, howbeit it was neere night, +and the Christopher, by meanes of her boat, was about foure leagues to the +leewards of vs. We tacked and ranne into the weather of the Admirall, and +three more of his company, and when we were neere him we spake to him, but +he would not answere. [Sidenote: The fight.] Then we cast about and lay in +the weather of him; and casting about he shot at vs, and then wee shot at +him, and shot him foure or fiue times thorow. They shot diuers times thorow +our sailes, but hurt no man. The Tyger and the pinnesse, because it was +night, kept out their sailes, and would not meddle with them. After we had +thus fought together 2 houres or more, and would not lay him aboord because +it was night, we left shooting one at the other, and kept still the weather +of them. Then the Tyger and the pinnesse kept about and came to vs, and +afterwards being neere the shore, we three kept about and lay to the sea, +and shot off a piece to giue warning to the Christopher. + +This night about 12 of the clocke, being very litle winde, and the Master +of the Tyger asleepe, by the ill worke of his men the ship fel aboord of +vs, and with her sheare-hooks cut our maine-saile, and her boat being +betwixt vs was broken and suncke, with certaine marchandise in her, and the +ships wales were broken with her outleger: yet in the ende we cleared her +without any more hurt, but she was in hazzard to be broken downe to the +water. + +The second day we had sight of the Christopher, and were neere vnto her, so +that I tooke our boat and went to her. And when I came thither, they shewed +me, that after the Portugals had left vs, they went all roome with him, and +about twelue a clocke at night met him, and shot at him, and hee at them, +and they shot him thorow the sailes in diuers places, and did no other +great hurt. And when we had vnderstood that they had bene with him as well +as with vs, we agreed altogether to seeke them (if wee might finde them) +and keepe a weather our places of traffique. + +The third day we ran all day to the Southwestwards to seeke the Portugals, +but could haue no sight of them, and halled into the shore. + +The fourth day, when we had sight of land, we found that the current had +set vs thirty leagues to the Eastwards of our reckoning, which we woondered +at: for the first land we made was Lagua. Then I caused our boat to be +manned, and the Christophers also, and went to the shore and tooke our +Negro with vs. And on shore we learned that there were foure French ships +vpon the coast: one at Perinnen, which is six leagues to the Westward of +Laguoa: another at Weamba, which is foure leagues to the Eastward of +Laguoa; a third at Perecow, which is foure leagues to the Eastward of +Weamba: and the fourth at Egrand, which is foure leagues to the Eastward of +Perecow. + +When we had intelligence of these newes we agreed to go to the Eastwards +with the Frenchmen to put them from their traffique, and shot off two or +three pieces in our boats to cause the ships to way: and hauing bene about +one houre vnder saile, we had sight of one of the French men vnder saile, +halling off from Weamba to whome we gaue chase, and agreed in the night for +feare of ouershooting them, that the Minion should first come to ancre, and +after that about three houres, the Tyger and the Christopher to beare along +all night. + +The 5. day we found three of the French ships at ancre: one called La foye +de Honfleur, a ship of 220 tunnes, another called the Ventereuse or small +Roebarge of Honfleur, of 100 tunnes, both appertaining to Shawdet of +Honfleur, the third was called the Mulet de Batuille a ship of 120 tunnes, +and this ship belonged to certaine Marchants of Roan. + +[Sidenote: the English boord the Frenchmen.] When we came to them, we +determined to lay the Admiral aboord, the Christopher the Viceadmirall, and +the Tyger the smallest: but when we came nere them they wayed, and the +Christopher being the headmost and the weathermost man, went roome with the +Admirall: the Roebarge went so fast that wee could not fetch her. The first +that we came to was the Mullet, and her wee layed aboord, and our men +entred and tooke her, which ship was the richest except the Admirall: for +the Admirall had taken about 80 pound of golde, and Roeberge had taken but +22 pound: and all this we learned of the Frenchmen, who knew it very well: +for they were all in consort together, and had bene vpon the coast of Mina +two moneths and odde dayes: howbeit the Roebarge had bene there before them +with another ship of Diepe, and a carauel, which had beaten all the coast, +and were departed one moneth before our arriuing there, and they three had +taken about 700 pound of golde. + +Assoone as we had layed the ship aboord, and left certaine men in her to +keepe her, we set saile and gaue chase to the other two ships, and chased +them all day and night, and the next day vntill three a clocke in the +afternoone, but we could not fetch them: and therefore seeing that we +brought our selues very farre to leeward of our place, we left the chase, +and kept about againe to go with the shore. + +The 7 day I sent for the captaine, marchants and Masters of the other +ships, and when they came we weighed the golde which we had from the +Frenchmen, which weighed fifty pound and fiue ounces of golde: this done we +agreed to put men out of euery ship into the prise to keepe her. + +The 12 day we came to the further place of the Mina called Egrand, and +being come to an ancre, discharged all the marchants goods out of the +prise, and would haue sold the ship with the victuals to the Frenchmen, but +because she was leake they would not take her, but desired vs to saue their +liues in taking them into our owne ships: then we agreed to take out the +victuals and sinke the ship, and diuide the men among our ships. + +The 15 at night we made an end of discharging the prise, and diuided all +the Frenchmen except foure which were sicke and not able to helpe +themselues; which foure both the Christopher and the Tyger refused to take, +leauing them in their ship alone in the night, so that about midnight I was +forced to fetch them into our ship. + +The 15 of April, moouing our company for the voyage to Benin, the most part +of them all refused it. + +The 16, seeing the vnwillingnesse of the company to goe thither, we +determined to spend as much time vpon the coast as we could, to the end we +might make our voyage, and agreed to leaue the Minion here at Egrand, the +Tyger to go to Pericow which is foure leagues off, and the Christopher to +goe to Weamba, which is ten leagues to the weatherward of this place: and +if any of them both should haue sight of more sailes then they thought good +to meddle withall to come roome with their fellowes; to wit, first the +Christopher to come with the Tyger, and then both they to come with vs. + +We remained in this place called Egrand, vntill the last day of April, in +which time many of our men fell sicke: and sixe of them died. And here we +could haue no traffique with the Negros but three or foure dayes in the +weeke, and all the rest of the weeke they would not come at vs. + +The 3 of May not hauing the pinnesse sent vs with cloth from the other +ships, as they promised, we solde French cloth, and gaue but three yards +thereof to euery fuffe. + +The 5 day the Negros departed, and told vs they would come to vs againe +within foure dayes, which we determined there to tary, although we had +diuers of our men sicke. + +The 8 day, all our cloth in the Minion being sold, I called the company +together, to know whether they would tary the sale of the cloth taken in +the prise at this place or no: they answered, that in respect of the death +of some of their men, and the present sicknesse of twentie more, they would +not tary, but repaire to the other ships, of whom they had heard nothing +since the 27 of April: and yet they had our pinnesse with them, onely to +cary newes from one to another. + +The 9 day we determined to depart hence to our fellowes, to see what they +had done, and to attempt what was to be done at the towne of Don Iohn. + +The 10 day in the morning we sat saile to seeke the Christopher and the +Tyger. + +The ll day the Captaine of the Christopher came to vs, and told vs that +they could finde small doings at the places where they had bene. + +The 12 William Crompton and I in our small pinnesse went to the Tyger and +the Christopher at Perenine. + +The 13 we sent away the Tyger to Egrand, because we found nothing to doe at +Perenine, worth the tarying for. + +The 14 our great pinnesse came to vs, and presently we put cloth into her, +and sent her backe to Weamba, where she had bene before, and had taken +there ten pound of golde. + +The 15 the Minion came to vs, and the next day we went a shore with our +boats, and tooke but one ounce of golde. + +The 19 day hauing set saile we came to an ancre before Mowre, and there we +tarried two dayes, but tooke not an ounce of golde. + +The 21 we came to an ancre before Don Iohns towne. + +[Sidenote: the great towne of Don Iohn.] The 22 we manned our boats and +went to shore, but the Negros would not come at vs; then the Captaine of +the Christopher and I tooke a skiffe and eight men with vs, and went and +talked with the Negros, and they sayd that they would send a man to the +great towne, where Don Iohn himselfe lay, to aduertise him of our comming. + +The 23 we went ashore againe, and the Negros tolde vs that this day the +marchants of Don Iohn would come downe: so we tarried there vntill night, +and no man would come to vs: but diuers of the Negros made vs signes to +depart. + +The 24 the Captaine of the Christopher tooke his boat and went to Mowre, +and when he came thither, certaine Negros came to him to know the price of +his wares, but in the end there came an Almade, which he iudged came from +the castle, and caused all the Negros to depart from him: and when he saw +they would come no more to him, he went ashore and tooke certaine men with +him, and then the Negros cast stones at them, and would not suffer them to +come vp to their towne. And when they saw that, they tooke certaine of the +Almades, and put them to the sea, and afterwards departed. The same morning +I went a shore at Don Iohns towne, and tooke a white flag with me, but none +of the Negros could come to me, which caused vs to iudge that the Portugals +were in the towne. After this, our boat came to vs well manned, and I sent +one man vp to the towne with a white flag in his hand, but when he was come +thither, all the Negros went away and would not speake with him. Then I +sent one alone into the woods after them, but they in no case would come to +vs. When we saw that, we tooke twelue goats and fourteene hennes, which we +found in the towne, and went aboord without doing any farther hurt to the +towne: and when I came aboord, I found our pinnesse come from Cormatin, +which had taken there two pound and fiue ounces of golde. Then after much +ado with the froward Mariners, we went thitherwards with our ship, and the +Christopher went to Mowre. + +[Sidenote: A fight with the Negros.] The 25 day the Master of the +Christopher sent his boat to the shore for balast, and the Negros would +haue beaten the company from the shore, whereupon the company resisted +them, and slew and hurt diuers of them, and hauing put them to flight, +burned their towne, and brake all their boats. + +The 26 day our pinnesse came to vs from Cormatin, and had taken two pound +and eleuen ounces of golde: and Iohn Shirife tolde vs that the Negros of +that place were very desirous to haue a ship come back againe to their +towne. + +The 27 we wayed and went to Cormatin. + +The 28 the Christopher came to vs from Mowre and traffiqued there two +dayes. + +The second day of Iune the Tyger came to vs from Egrand, and the pinnesse +from Weamba, and they two had taken about fifty pound of golde since they +departed from vs. + +The 4 day we departed from Cormatin to plie vp to Shamma, being not able to +tary any longer vpon the coast for lacke of victuals, and specially of +drinke. + +The 7 day we had sight of fiue of the king of Portugals ships which came to +an ancre besides the castle. + +The 8 day George and Binny came to vs, and brought with them two pound of +golde. + +The 10 day in the morning I tooke our small pinnesse, and the Captaine of +the Christopher with me, and manned her well, and went to the castle to +view the Portugals ships, and there we found one ship of about 300 tunne, +and foure carauels: when we had well viewed them, we returned backe againe +to our ships which we found seuen leagues at sea. + +The 11 day in the morning we found our selues wel shot toward Shamma, and +the Tyger with vs, but the Minion and the pinnesse had not wayed that +night, so that we were out of sight of them: and hauing brought our selues +in the weather of the Portugals ships, we came to an ancre to tary for the +Minion, or els we might haue fetched Shamma. At night the Minion and the +pinnesse came vp to vs, but could not fetch so farre to the weatherward as +we, and therefore they ancred about a league a weather The castle, and we +waied in the Christopher, and went roome with her. + +The 12 day the Tyger came roome with vs, and she and the Christopher +finding themselues to stand in great need of victuals, would haue gone with +the Portugals ships to haue fetched some of them forth: but our master and +company would in no case consent to goe with them, for feare of hanging +when we came home: and the other two ships being fully minded to haue gone, +and fearing that their owne company would accuse them, durst not go to +them. + +After this, by reason of the want of victuals in the pinnesse, which could +receiue no victuals from the other shippes, but from vs onely, we tooke out +all our men, and put twelue Frenchmen into her, and gaue them victuals to +bring them to Shamma. + +The 19 day the Tyger and Minion arrived at Shamma, and the Christopher +within two leagues off them, but could not fetch the winde by reason of the +scantnesse of the winde, which hath bene so scant, that in fifteene dayes +we haue plied to the windewards but twelue leagues, which before we did in +one day and a night. + +The 20 day I tooke our pinnesse, and went to the towne of Shamma to speake +with the captaine, and he tolde me that there was no golde there to be had, +nor as much as a hen to be bought, and all by reason of the accord which he +had made with the Portugals, and I seeing that departed peaceably from him. + +The 21 I put such things as we had into our small pinnesse, and tooke one +marchant of our ship, and another of the Tyger, and sent her to Hanta, to +attempt, if she could doe any thing there. That night they could doe +nothing but were promised to haue golde the next day. + +The next day (which was the 22) being come, we sent our pinnesse to Hanta +againe, but there neither the captaine nor the Negros durst traffike with +vs, but intised vs from place to place, and all to no purpose. + +This day we put away our pinnesse, with fiue and twenty Frenchmen in her, +and gaue them such victuals as we could spare, putting fifteene of them to +the ransome of sixe crownes a man. + +The 23 of Iune our pinnesse came to vs from Hanta, and tolde vs that the +Negros had dealt very ill with them, and would not traffike with them to +any purpose. + +[Sidenote: Shamma burnt by the English.] The 24 we tooke our boat and +pinnesse and manned them well, and went to the towne of Shamma, and because +the Captaine thereof was become subiect to the Portugals we burned the +towne, and our men seeking the spoile of such trifles as were there found a +Portugals chest, wherein was some of his apparell, and his weights, and one +letter sent to him from the castle, whereby we gathered that the Portugall +had bene there of a long time. + +The 25 day, about three of the clocke at afternoone, we set saile, and put +into the sea, for our returne to England. + +The last day of this moneth we fell with the shore againe, and made our +reckoning to be eighteene leagues to the weatherward of the place where we +set off. When we came to make the land, we found our selues to be eighteene +leagues to the leeward of the place, where we set off, which came to passe, +by reason of the extreme currant that runneth to the Eastward: when we +perceiued our selues so abused, we agreed to cast about againe, and to lie +as neere the winde as we could, to fetch the line. + +The seuenth of Iuly we had sight of the Ile of S. Thome, ana thought to +haue sought the road to haue arriued there: but the next morning the wind +came about, and we kept our course. + +The ninth, the winde varying, we kept about againe, and fell with the Iland +of S. Thome, and seeking the road, were becalmed neere the Iland, and with +the currant were put neere the shore, but could haue no ground to ancre: so +that we were forced to hoise out our pinnesse, and the other ships their +skiffs to towe from the Iland, which did litle good, but in the ende the +winde put vs three leagues off the shore. + +The tenth day the Christopher and the Tyger cast about, whereby we iudged +them to haue agreed together, to goe seeke some ships in the road, and to +leaue vs: our men were not willing to goe after them, for feare of running +in with the Iland againe, and of putting our selues into the same danger +that we were in the night before: but we shot off a piece, and put out two +lights, and they answered vs with lights againe: whereupon we kept our +course, and thought that they had followed vs, but in the morning we could +not see them, so that they left vs willingly, and we determined to follow +them no more. But the eleuenth day we altered our opinion and course, and +consented to cast about againe for the Iland, to seeke our ships; and about +foure of the clocke in the afternoone we met with them. + +The 13 we fell againe with the Iland of S. Thome; and the same night we +found our selues directly vnder the line. + +[Sidenote: The description of the Ile of S. Thome.] This Iland is a very +high Iland, and being vpon the West side of it, you shall see a very high +pike, which is very small, and streight, as it were the steeple of a +church, which pike lieth directly vnder the line, and at the same South end +of the Iland to the Westward thereof lieth a small Iland, about a mile from +the great Iland. + +The third of August we departed from the Ile of S. Thome, and met the winde +at the Southwest. + +The 12 day we were in the height of Cape Verde. + +The 22 day we fell with one of the Iles of Cape verde, called the Ile of +Salt, and being informed by a Scotish man that we tooke among the Frenchmen +vpon the coast, that there were fresh victuals to be had, we came to an +ancre there. + +The 23 day in the morning we manned our skiffe, and went a shore, and found +no houses, but we saw foure men, which kept themselues alwayes farre from +vs, as for cattell we could finde none, but great store of goats, and they +were so wilde, that we could not take aboue three or foure of them: but +there we had good store of fish, and vpon a small Iland which lay by the +same we had great store of sea-birds. + +At night the Christopher brake her cradle, and lost an ancre, so that she +could tary no longer, so we all wayed, and set saile. Vpon the same Iland +we left the Scotish man, which was the occasion of our going aland at that +place, but how he was left we could not tell: but, as we iudged, the people +of the Iland found him sleeping, and so caried him away; for at night I +went my selfe to the Iland to seeke him, but could hear nothing of him. + +[Sidenote: The great inconuenience by late staying vpon the coast of +Guinie.] The 24 day the Master of the Tyger came aboord vs, and tolde vs +that his men were so weake, and the shippe so leake, that he was not able +to keepe her aboue the water, and therefore requested vs to go backe againe +to the Iland, that we might discharge her, and giue her vp: but we +intreated him to take paine with her awhile, and we put a French Carpenter +into her, to see if he could finde the leake. This day we tooke a view of +all our men, both those that were hole, and the sicke also, and we found +that in all the three ships, were not aboue thirty sound men. + +The 25 we had sight of the Ile of S. Nicholas, and the day following of the +other Iles, S. Lucia, S. Vincent, and S. Anthony; which four Iles lie the +one from the other Northwest, and by West, Souteast and by East. + +The 26 we came againe with the Iland of S. Anthony, and could not double +the Cape. This day Philip Iones, the Master of the Christopher, came aboord +vs, who had beene aboord the Tyger, and tolde vs that they were not able to +keepe the Tyger, because she was leake, and the Master very weake, and sayd +further, he had agreed with the Master and the company, that if the next +day we could double the Iland, we should runne to the leeward of it, and +there discharge her: but if we could not double it, then to put in betwixt +the Iland of S. Vincent and S. Anthony, to see if we could discharge her. + +The third day of September I went aboord the Tyger, with the Master and +Marchants with me, to view the shippe and men: and we found the shippe very +leake, and onely six labouring men in her, whereof one was the Master +gunner: so that we seeing that they were not able to keepe the ship, agreed +to take in the men, and of the goods what we could saue, and then to put +the ship away. + +The fift day we went to discharge the Tyger. + +The eight day, hauing taken out the artillery, goods, victuals, and gold of +the Tyger, we gaue her vp 25 degrees by North the line. + +The 27 we had sight of two of the Iles of the Azores, S. Mary, and S. +Michael. + +The fourth of October we found ourselues to be 41 degrees and a halfe from +the line. + +The sixt day the Christopher came to vs, and willed vs to put with the +Cape, for they also were so weake, that they were not able to keepe the +sea, and we being weake also, agreed to go for Vigo, being a place which +many English men frequent. + +The 10 day the Christopher went roome with the Cape, but we having a mery +wind for England, and fearing the danger of the enemies, which ordinarily +lie about the Cape: besides, not knowing the state of our countrey and +Spaine, and although it were peace, yet there was little hope of friendship +at their hands, considering the voyage that we had made, and we also being +so weake, that by force and violence we could come by nothing, and doubting +also that the king of Portugall knowing of our being there, might worke +some way with the Counsell of Spaine to trouble vs: and further, +considering that if we did put in with any harbor, we should not be able to +come out againe, till we sent for more men into England, which would be a +great charge, and losse of time, and meanes of many dangers. All these +things pondred, we agreed to shoot off two pieces of ordinance, to warne +the Christopher, and then we went our course for England: she hearing our +pieces followed vs, and we carried a light for her, but the next day in the +morning it was thicke, and we could not see her in the afternoone neither, +so that we suspected that either she was gone with Spaine, or els that she +should put foorth more sailes then we in the night, and was shot a head of +vs, so that then we put forth our top-sailes, and went our course with +England. + +At the time when the Christopher left vs, we were within 120 leagues of +England, and 45 leagues Northwest and by West from Cape Finister: and at +the same time in our ships we had not aboue sixe Mariners and sixe +Marchants in health, which was but a weake company for such a ship to seeke +a forren harbour. + +The 16 day about sixe of the clocke at night, we met with a great storme at +the West-south-west, and West, and our men being weake, and not able to +handle our sailes, we lost the same night our maine saile, foresaile, and +spreetsaile, and were forced to lie a hulling, vntill the eighteenth day, +and then we made ready an olde course of a foresaile, and put it to the +yard, and therewith finding our selues far shot into the sleeue, we bare +with our owne coast; but that foresaile continued not aboue two houres, +before it was blowen from the yard with a freat, and then we were forced to +lie a hull againe, vntil the nineteenth day of October in the morning, and +then we put an olde bonnet to our foreyard, which, by the good blessing and +prouidence of God, brought vs to the Ile of Wight, where we arriued the 20 +of October in the afternoone. + + * * * * * + +The commodities and wares that are most desired in Guinie, betwixt Sierra + Liona and the furthest place of the Mine. + +Manils of brasse, and some of loade. + +Basons of diuers sorts, but the most lattin. + +Pots of course tinne, of a quart and more. + +Some wedges of yron. + +Margarites, and certaine other sleight beads. + +Some blew Corall. + +Some horse tailes. + +Linnen cloth principally. + +Basons of Flanders. + +Some red cloth of low price, and some kersie. + +Kettles of Dutch-land with brasen handles. + +Some great brasse basons graued, such as in Flanders they set vpon their +cupboords. + +Some great basons of pewter, and ewers grauen. + +Some lauers, such as be for water. + +Great kniues of a low price. + +Sleight Flanders-caskets. + +Chests of Roan of a lowe price, or any other chests. + +Great pinnes. + +Course French couerings. + +Packing sheets good store. + +Swords, daggers, frise mantels, and gownes, clokes, hats, red caps, Spanish +blankets, axe heads, hammers, short pieces of yron, sleight belles, gloues +of a lowe price, leather bags, and what other trifles you will. + + * * * * * + +Certaine Articles deliuered to M. Iohn Lok, by Sir William Gerard Knight, + M. William Winter, M. Beniamin Gonson, M. Anthony Hickman, and M. Edward + Castelin the 8 of September 1561, touching a voyage to Guinea. + +A remembrance for you M. Lok at your comming to the coast of Guinie. + +First, when God shal send you thither, to procure, as you passe alongst the +coast, to understand what riuers, hauens, or harboroughs there be; and to +make your selfe a plat thereof, setting those places which you shall thinke +materiall in your sayd plat, with their true eleuations. + +Also you shall learne what commodities doe belong to the places where you +shall touch, and what may be good for them. + +It is thought good, that hauing a fort vpon the coast of Mina in the king +of Habaans country, [Marginal note: The English marchants intend to +fortifie in Ghinea, in the king of Habaans country.] it would serve to +great purpose: wherfore you are especially sent to consider where the fort +might be best placed, and vpon what ground: wherein are to be noted these +things following. + +1. That the ground so serue, that it ioyne to the sea on the one +part, so as shippes and boats may come to lade and vnlade. + +2. What molde of earth the ground is of. + +3. What timber or wood may be had, and how it will be caried. + +4. What prouision of victuals may be had in the countrey: and what kinde of +our victuals will best serve to continue. + +5. The place must be naturally strong, or such as may be made strong with a +small charge, and afterwards kept with a few men. + +6. How water may be prouided, if there be none to be had in the ground +where the fort shall stand, or neere to it. + +7. What helpe is to be had from the people of the country, either for the +building of it, or for the defence thereof. + +To mooue the king of Haban a farre off, for the making of a fort, and to +note how he will like it; but vse your communication so, that although +there might fall out good cause for the doing of it, yet he do not +vnderstand your meaning. + +Search the countrey so farre as you may, both alongst the coast, and into +the land. + +To learne what became of the marchants that were left at Benin. + +The matters which shall be of importance to be noted we nothing doubt that +you will omit, wherefore we referre the order of these affaires to your +discretion. + +Also we pray you as occasion shall serue that you ayd and helpe our +factours, both with your counsell and otherwise; and thus God send you +safely to returne. + +William Gerrard, William Winter, Beniamin Gonson, Anthony Hickman, Edward +Castelin. + + * * * * * + +A letter of M. Iohn Lok to the worshipfull company of Marchants aduenturers + for Guinie, written 1561, shewing reasons for his not proceeding in a + voyage then intended to the foresayd countrey. + +Worshipfull sirs; since the arriuall of M. Pet and Buttoll Monioy (as I +vnderstand) for the voyage it is concluded that the Minion shall proceed on +her voyage, if within 20 dayes she may be repaired of those hurts she hath +receiued by the last storme: or in the moneth of Ianuary also, if the wind +wil serue therfore. Wherefore for that your worships shall not be ignorant +of my determined purpose in the same, with the reasons that haue perswaded +me thereunto; I haue thought good to aduertise you thereof, trusting that +your worships will weigh them, as I vprightly and plainly meane them. And +not for any feare or discouragement that I haue of my selfe by the raging +of the stormes of the sea, for that (I thanke the Lord) these haue not +beene the first that I haue abiden, neither trust I they shalbe the last. +First the state of the ship, in which, though I thinke not but M. Pet can +do more for her strengthening than I can conceiue, yet for all that, it +will neither mend her conditions, nor yet make her so stanch that any cabin +in her shalbe stanch for men to lie drie in: the which sore, what a +weakening it will be to the poore men after their labour, that they neither +can haue a shift of apparell drie, nor yet a drie place to rest in, I +referre to your discretion. For though that at Harwich she was both bound +and caulked as much as might be, both within and without, yet for all that +she left not, afore this flaw, in other weathers, being stressed, to open +those seames, and become in the state she was before; I meane, in wetting +her men: notwithstanding her new worke. And my iudgement, with that litle +experience I haue had, leadeth me to thinke that the ship whose water works +and footings be spent and rotten cannot be but leake for men. Next, the +vnseasonable time of the yeere which is now present. And how onely by +meanes of the vnseasonable times in the returne from the voyage home, many +thereby haue decayed, to the great misery and calamity of the rest, and +also to the great slander of the voyage, (which I much respect) the last +and other voyage haue declared. And what it is to make the voyage in +vnseasonable time, that hath the second voyage also declared. Wherefore +weying and foreseeing this (as I may wel terme it) calamity and vneuitable +danger of men, and that by men she must be brought home againe (except that +God will shew an extraordinary miracle) I purpose not nor dare I venture +with a safe conscience to tempt God herein. Againe, forsomuch as she is +alone, and hath so little helpe of boat or pinnesse in her trade, and also +for her watering, where a long time of force must be spent, my going, to +the accomplishment of your expectations, will be to small effect for this +time, because I shall want both vessell and men to accomplish it. And I +would not gladly so spend my time and trauell, to my great charges and +paine, and after, for not falling out accordingly, to lose both pot and +water, as the prouerbe is. As for the Primrose, if she be there, her trade +will be ended or euer we come there, so that she of force, by want of +prouision, must returne: yea, though we should carry with vs a supply for +her, yet is the meeting of her doubtfull, and though we met her, yet will +the men not tarry, as no reason is they should: howbeit my opinion of her +is that she is put into Ireland. The Flowerdeluce was in Milford. Thus for +that your worships might vnderstand the whole cause why I doe not proceed, +I haue troubled you at this time with this my long Letter. And, as God is +my Iudge, not for feare of the Portugals, which there we shall meet (and +yet alone without ayde) as here is a shippe which was in Lisbon, whose men +say that there are in a readinesse (onely to meet vs) foure great ships, of +the which one is accounted 700 tunnes, and other pinnesses: yet not for +feare of them, nor raging of the seas (whose rage God is aboue to rule) but +onely for the premisses: the sequell whereof must by reason turne to a +great misery to the men; the which I for my part (though it might turne me +to as much gaine as the whole commeth to) yet would I not be so tormented, +as the sight thereof would be a corsiue to my heart, and the more, because +foreseeing the same, I should be so leud, as yeelding, to haue runne into +the danger thereof, and therefore I haue absolutely determined with my +selfe not to goe this voyage. Howbeit if in a seasonable time of the yeere +I had but one ship sufficient, though much lesse by the halfe, I would not +refuse (as triall being made thereof should appeare) or if I had ability of +my selfe to venture so much, it should well be seene. And this I speake to +giue you to vnderstand that I refuse not this for feare: If you purpose to +proceed heerein, send some one whom you please; to whom I will not onely +deliuer the articles which I haue receiued, but also will giue some +particular notes which I haue noted in the affaires which you haue +committed vnto mee, with the best helpe and counsell I can. Thus the liuing +God keepe your worships all. Bristoll this 11 of December 1561. + +Your worships to comand to his power. + +Iohn Lok. + + * * * * * + +The relation of one William Rutter to M. Anthony Hickman his master + touching a voyage set out to Guinea in the yeere 1562, by Sir William + Gerard, Sir William Chester, M. Thomas Lodge, the sayd Anthony Hickman, + and Edward Castelin, which voyage is also written in verse by Robert + Baker. + +Worshipfull sir, my duty remembered, this shalbe to declare vnto you the +discourse of this our voyage, since our departure out of England from +Dartmouth; at which time I gaue you to vnderstand of our departure, which +was the 25 of February 1562. Then hauing a prosperous winde we departed +from thence, and sailed on our voyage vntill we arriued at Cauo verde the +20 of March, making no abode there, but sailed along the coast to our first +appointed port Rio de Sestos, at which port we arriued the third of Aprill +in the morning, hauing the sight of a Frenchman, who assoone as he +perceiued vs, set saile and made to the sea: in the meane time we came to +an anker in the rode: and after that he had espied our flag, perceiuing vs +to be Englishman, he bare with the shore, and hailed our ships with his +ordinance, at which time we the merchants of both the ships were in the +riuer in traffike, and had vnderstanding of the Negroes that he had bene +there three dayes before our comming: so we concluded together, that if he +sent his pinnesse to traffike, we would not suffer him, vntill we had taken +further order with their captaine and marchants. In the afternoone the +pinnesse came into the riuer, whose men we willed to make no traffike +vntill we had talked further with their captaine, whom we willed that night +to come aboord our admirall: which was done. At which sayd time M. Burton +and Iohn Munt went aboord the Minion where the Frenchmen were, and there +concluded that they should tary by vs eight dayes, and suffer vs quietly to +traffike, wherewith they were not well pleased. Wherevpon the next morning +they departed from vs, sailing alongst the coast to the Eastward towards +Potis, which he did to hinder our traffike that way: wherefore the +marchants of the Minion and we concluded (forasmuch as at that present we +vnderstood that were no sailes past alongst) that we should go before, to +the end we might not be hindered of our traffike by the Frenchmen; which +thing we did: and at our comming thither we found the Frenchmen in traffike +to the West of Potis, by whom we passed, and arriued at Rio de Potis the 12 +of April, where we remained in traffike vntill the 15 of the sayd moneth, +and then departed from thence along the coast toward Sant Andre, where we +appointed by agreement to tary for the Minion; and the 17 at night we came +to the riuer of S. Andre, in which very day the Minion came vnto vs, +telling vs that they met at cauo das Palmas a great ship and a caruell of +the king of Portugals bound to the Mina, who gaue chase vnto them, and shot +freely at them, and the Minion in her defence returned her the like: but +God be praised the Minion had no hurt for that time. In the end we +concluded to hasten towards cauo de tres puntus to haue put them from the +castle, if by any meanes wee might; and when wee were come to the Cape, we +lay a hull one night and two dayes, and doubting they had bene past, the +Minion went neere the shore, and sent her merchants to a place called Anta, +where beforetime we had traffike, and the next morning very early being the +21 of the sayd moneth, we againe had sight of the ship and the carauell a +good way to sea-boord of vs. Then we presently set saile, and bare with the +formost of them, hoping to haue got betweene the castle and them, but we +came short of our purpose, which was no small griefe vnto vs all; and when +they had gotten the castle to friend, they shot at vs freely, and we at +them, and the castle at vs; but we profited litle. In the afternoone we set +saile and came to the town of Don Iuan called Equi, where the 22 in the +morning we went a shoare to traffike, but the Negros would not vntill they +had newes from Don Luis, for at that time Don Iuan was dead, and the 23 +came Don Luis his sonne and Pacheco minding to traffike with vs, at which +said day came two gallies rowing along the shoare from the castle, minding +to keepe vs from our traffike. The 24 we set saile and chased the galies to +the castle againe. The Negroes being glad of that required vs to goe to +Mowre, which is some 3 leagues behind, and thither would they come for that +they stood in feare of the Portugals, and there we remained for the +marchants that came out of the countrey which were come with their gold, +but Anthonio don Luis his sonne, and Pacheco were aboord the Minion. And +the 25 in the morning came the two galies from the castle againe vnto vs, +the weather being very calme, they shot at vs and hit vs 3 times, and +shortly after the wind came from the shore, at which instant we descried +the ship, and the carauell comming toward vs, then we weighed and set +saile, and bare as neere vnto them as we could: but it was night or euer +wee met with them, and the night being very darke we lost them. The next +day plying to the shore, at night we agreed to go with Cormantin, but the +next morning being the 28 we were but a litle distant from the great ship +and the 2 galies, hauing no wind at all, and the carauell hard aboord the +shore. Then being calme, came the 2 galies rowing to the sterne of the +Minion, and fought with her the most part of the forenoone: [Sidenote: Much +hurt done in the Minion with firing a barrel of gunpouder.] and in the +fight a mischance hapned in the Minions steward-roome by means of a barrell +of pouder that tooke fire, wherewith were hurt the master gunner, the +steward, and most part of the gunners: which the galies perceiuing, began +to be more fierce vpon them, and with one shot cut halfe her foremast in +twaine, that without present remedie shee was not able to beare saile, and +presently vpon this the great ship sent her boat to the galies, who +suddenly departed from vs. And after their departure we went aboord the +Minion to counsell what were best to be done, at which time they were sore +discomfited. Whereupon we deuised what was best to be done: and because wee +knew that the Negros neither would nor durst traffike so long as the galies +were on the coast it was therefore agreed that we should prepare our selues +to depart to Rio de Sestos, and so we departed that day. [Sidenote: They +returne.] The 14 of May in the rooming we fell with the land, and when wee +came to it, we doubted what place it was, and sent our boates on land to +know the trueth, and we found it to be Rio de Barbos, which is to be +Eastward of sant Andre, and there remained in getting of water until the +21, where we lost the day before 5 of our men by meanes of overthrowing our +black pinnasse. The 22 we departed from thence to Rio de Sesto, where we +arriued the 2 of Iune, and the 4 wee departed from Rio de Sesto, and +arriued (God bee thanked) the 6 of August within sight of the Stert in the +West part of England, our men being very sicke and weake. We haue not at +this present aboue 20 sound men that are able to labour, and we haue of our +men 21 dead, and many more very sore hurt and sicke. Master Burton hath +bene sicke this 6 weekes, and at this present (God strengthen him) is so +weake that I feare he will hardly escape. Herein inclosed your worship +shall receiue a briefe of all the goods sold by vs, and also what +commodities we haue receiued for the same. Thus I leaue to trouble your +worship, reseruing all things als to our generall meeting, and to the +bringer hereof. From aboord the Primerose the 6 of August 1563. + +Your obedient seruant + +William Rutter. + +There are brought home this voiage An. 1363. Elephants teeth 166 weighing +1758 pounds. Graines 22 buts full. + + * * * * * + +A meeting at Sir William Gerards house the 11 of Iuly 1564. for the setting + foorth of a voyage to Guinea, with the Minion of the Queens, the Iohn + Baptist of London, and the Merline of M. Gonson. + +At this meeting were these chiefe aduenturers, Sir William Gerrard, sir +William Chester, sir Thomas Lodge, Anthonie Hickman, and Edward Castelin. +Where it was agreed that Francis Ashbie should be sent to Deptford to M. +Gonson for his letters to Peter Pet to goe about the rigging of the Minion +vpon the Queenes maiesties charges, and so the said Francis to repaire with +the same letters to Gillingham with money to supplie our charge there. + +Also that euery one of the fiue partners shall foorthwith call vpon their +partners to supply towards this new rigging and victualling, 29 li. 10s. +6d. for euery 100. li. value. + +Also that euery one of the fiue partners shall foorthwith bring in 50 li. +towards the furniture of the premisses. + +Likewise it is agreed that if M. Gonson giue his consent that the Merline +shall be brought about from Bristoll to Hampton, that a letter be drawen +whereunto his hand shall be, before order be giuen for the same. + + * * * * * + +The successe of this Voiage in part appeareth by certaine briefe relations + extracted out of the second voyage of Sir Iohn Hawkins to the West + Indies, made in the sayd yeere 1564, which I thought good to set downe + for want of further instructions, which hitherto I could not by any + meanes come by, albeit I haue vsed all possible indeuour for the + obtaining of the same: Take them therefore in the meane season as + foloweth. + +Master Iohn Hawkins, with the Iesus of Lubeck a ship of 700. tonnes, and +the Salomon, a ship of 7 score, the Tiger a barke of 50, and the Swalow 30 +tonnes, being all well furnished with men to the number of one hundred +threescore and ten, as also with ordinance and victuall requisite for such +a voiage, departed out of Plimmouth the 18 day of October in the yeere of +our Lord 1564. with a prosperous winde: at which departing, in cutting the +foresaile, a marueilous misfortune happened to one of the officers in the +ship, who by the pullie of the sheat was slaine out of hand, being a +sorowfull beginning to them all. And after their setting out 10 leagues to +the Sea, hee met the same day with the Minion a ship of the Queens +Maiesties, whereof was captaine Dauid Carlet, and also her consort the Iohn +Baptist of London being bound to Guinea likewise, who hailed one the other +after the custome of the sea, with certaine pieces of ordinance for ioy of +their meeting: which done, the Minion departed from him to seeke her other +consort the Merline of London, which was a stone out of sight, leauing in +M. Hawkins companie the Iohn Baptist her other consort. + +Thus sailing forwards on their way with a prosperous wind until the 21 of +the same moneth, at that time a great storme arose, the wind being at +Northeast about 9 of the clocke at night, and continued so 23 houres +together, in which storme M. Hawkins lost the company of the Iohn Baptist +aforesaid, and of his pinnasse called the Swallow, the other 3 ships being +sore beaten with the storme. The 23 day the Swalow, to his no small +reioicing, came to him againe in the night 10 leagues to the Northward of +Cape Finister, hauing put roomer and not being able to double the Cape, in +that there rose a contrary wind at Southwest. The 25 the wind continuing +contrary, he put into a place in Galicia called Ferol, where he remained 5 +daies and appointed all the masters of his ships an order for the keeping +of good company. + +[Sidenote: The firing and sinking of the Merline bound for Guinea.] The 26 +day the Minion came in also where he was, for the reioycing whereof he gaue +them certaine pieces of ordinance after the curtesie of the Sea for their +welcome, but the Minions men had no mirth because of their consort the +Merline, whom at their departure from M. Hawkins vpon the coast of England, +they went to seeke, and hauing met with her, kept company two dayes +together, and at last by misfortune of fire (through the negligence of one +of the gunners) the pouder in the gunners roome was set on fire, which with +the first blast stroke out her poope, and therewithall lost 3 men, besides +many sore burned (which escaped by the Brigandine being at her sterne) and +immediatly to the great losse of the owners, and most horrible sight of the +beholders, she sunke before their eies. The 30 day of the moneth M. Hawkins +with his consorts and company of the Minion hauing now both the Brigandines +at her sterne, weighed anker, and set saile on their voiage hauing a +prosperous wind thereunto. The 4 of Nouember they had sight of the Iland of +Madera, and the 6 day of Teneriffa, which they thought to haue bene the +Canarie, in that they supposed themselues to haue bene to the Eastward of +Teneriffa but were not: but the Minion beyng 3 or 4 leagues a head of vs +kept on her course to Teneriffa, hauing better sight thereof then the other +had, and by that means they parted company. + +The foresaid Sir Iohn Hawkins passing on his voiage by Cauo Verde and +Sierra Leona, and afterward crossing ouer the maine Ocean comming to the +towne of Burboroata vpon the coast of Terra firma in the West Indies, had +further information of the euill successe of this Guinean voyage, as in the +same hereafter is verbatim mentioned. + +The 29 of April, we being at anker without the road, a French ship called +the green Dragon of Newhauen, whereof was captaine one Bon Temps came in, +who saluted vs after the maner of the sea, with certaine pieces of +ordinance, and we resaluted him with the like againe: with whom hauing +communication, he declared that hee had bene at the Mina in Guinea, and was +beaten off by the Portugals gallies, and enforced to come thither to make +sale of such wares as he had: and further that the like was hapned vnto the +Minion: also that captaine Dauid Carlet, and a marchant, with a dozen +mariners were betraied by the Negros at their first arriuall thither, +remaining prisoners with the Portugals, besides other misaduentures of the +losse of their men hapned through the great lacke of fresh water, with +great doubts of bringing home the ships: which was most sorrowfull for vs +to vnderstand. + + * * * * * + +The voyage of M. George Fenner to Guinie, and the Islands of Cape Verde, in + the yeere of 1566. with three ships, to wit the Admirall called the + Castle of Comfort, the May Flower, and the George, and a pinnasse also: + +Written by Walter Wren. + +The 10 day of December, in the yeere abouesayd, we departed from Plimmouth, +and the 12 day we were thwart of Vshant. + +The 15 day in the morning being Sunday, wee had sight of Cape Finister, and +the same night we lost the company of our Admiral, wherefore we sayled +along the coast of Portugall, hoping that our Admiral had bene before vs. + +The 18 day we met with a French ship of whom wee made inquirie for our +Admirall, but he could not tell vs newes of him: so we followed our course +to the Ilands of the Canaries. + +The 25 day in the morning we fell with a small Iland called Porto Santo, +and within 3 houres wee had sight of another Iland called Madera which is 6 +leagues from Porto Santo. + +The said 25 day being the day of the Natiuitie, we hoised out our boat, and +fet Master Edward Fenner captaine of the May Flower aboord vs, being in the +George, with the master whose name was Robert Cortise and others of the +sayd shippe, and feasted them with such cheere as God had sent vs. + +The 28 day we fel with an Iland called Tenerif, which is 27 leagues from +the said Iland, and on the East side thereof we came to an anker in 40 +fadome water, within a base shot of the shore, in a little Baie wherein +were 3 or 4 small houses: which Baie and houses were distant from a litle +towne called Santa Cruz, a league or thereabout, and as we rode in the said +Baie, we might see an Iland called The grand Canarie, which was 6 or 7 +leagues from vs. + +The 29 day the May Flower for that she could not fet into ye road where we +were at an anker, by reason the wind was off the shore, and because she +bare more roomer from the land then we did, in the morning came bearing in +with the towne of Santa Cruz, thinking to come to an anker in the road +against the towne, and before she came within the reach of any of their +ordinance, they shot at her foure pieces which caused her to come roome +with vs, and came at last to an anker by vs. And about one of the clocke in +the afternoone, the forenamed captaine of the May Flower wrote a letter a +shoare, directing it to the head officer of the towne of Santa Cruz, to the +intent to vnderstand the pretense of the shooting off the said ordinance. + +The letter being written, Robert Courtise master of the May Flower, and +Walter Wren were appointed to deliuer the same a land at 3 or 4 houses to +bee conueid to the foresayd towne, and so went with six men in the boate, +and rowed to the shore as neere as they might, for setting the boate on +ground, for the sea went cruelly at the shore. + +The people stood in number 30 persons with such armour as they had: the +foresayd Wren called to them in Spanish, declaring to them that they had a +letter which they would very gladly haue conueid vnto the towne, shewing +that they would traffique with them as marchants, desiring their helpe for +the conuenience of the same letter. With that one of the Spaniards willed +vs to come on land, and we should be welcome, but doubting the worst, the +said Walter answered them that they would not come on land, vntill they had +answere of their letter which they had brought. + +Whereupon one of the Spaniards vnraied himselfe, and lept into the water, +and swam to the boat, whom we receiued. And he saluted vs, and demaunded +what our request was: we made him answere, that by misfortune we lost the +companie of our Admirall, and being bound to this Iland to traffique for +wines and other things necessary for vs, do here mind to stay vntill he +come. + +Concerning our letter he made vs answere, that he would with all diligence +cary it, and deliuer it according to the direction, and so the said Walter +knit the letter in a bladder, and deliuered it unto him, and also gaue him +foure roials of Spanish money for his paines: and promising that we should +haue answere of it, he tooke his leaue and swamme againe on shore, where +the people stood ready to receiue him. And after that they had talked with +him, and vnderstood our meaning, some of them threw vp their hats, and the +other put them off holding them in their hands, and made vs very curteous +signes, alwaies desiring that the boat would come a land, but we resaluting +them rowed backe againe aboord. + +The 30 day the Gouernors brother of Santa Cruz came aboord the May Flower +with sixe or seuen Spaniards with him, who concluded with the Captaine that +we might come a shoare and traffique with them, but that day we did not, +for we had sufficient pledge of theirs for our assurance. Our Captaine +entertained them well, and at their departure gaue them foure pieces of +ordinance for a farewell, and bestowed vpon them two cheeses with other +things. + +The said Gouernors brother promised our Captaine that hee should haue +sufficient pledges the morrow following, which was not done, whereupon wee +grew suspicious, and went not that day a shore. + +The first day of Ianuary our captaine sent Nicholas Day and Iohn Sumpter a +shore, who were very well entertained with as many of our company as went +after them. + +In the said Iland is a maruellous high hill called the Pike, which is a far +off more like a cloud in the aire, then any other thing: the hill is round +and somewhat small at the top, it hath not bene knowen that euer any man +could goe vp to the top thereof. And although it stand in 28 degrees which +is as hote in January, as it is in England at Midsommer, yet is the top of +the said hil Winter and Sommer seldome without snow. + +In this Iland about two leagues from the said Santa Cruz is a citie called +Anagona. + +The third day wee departed about the Westerne point of the Iland, about 12 +or 14 leagues from Santa Cruz, into a Baie which is right agaynst the house +of one Petro de Souses, in which Baie we came to an anker the 5 day, where +we heard that our Admirall had bene there at an anker 7 dayes before vs, +and was gone thence to an Iland called Gomera, whereupon we set saile +presently to seeke him. + +The 6 day we came to an anker against the towne of Gomera, where we found +our Admirall, which was very ioyfull of our comming, and we also of his +sight. + +In the sayd road we found Edward Cooke, in a tall ship, and a shippe of the +Coppersmiths of London, which the Portugals had trecherously surprised in +the Baie of Santa Cruz, vpon the coast of Barbarie, which ship we left +there all spoiled. + +Our General and merchants bought in the said towne for our provision, 14 +buts of wine, which cost 15 duckats a but, which were offred vs at Santa +Cruz in Tenerif for 8, 9, and 10 duckats. + +The 9 day we departed from this road to another Baie, about 3 leagues off +and there tooke in fresh water: and so the 10 day we set saile towards Cape +Blanke, which is on the coast of Guinea. + +The 12 day we fell into a Baie to the Eastward of Cape Pargos, which is 35 +leagues from Cape Blanke. But hauing no knowledge of that coast, we went +with Cape Blanke, and at the fall of the land we sounded and had 16 fadome +water two leagues from the shore. The land is very lowe and white sand. +[Sidenote: A good caueat.] Vpon the fall of the sayd coast beware how you +borow in 12 or 10 fadome, for within 2 or 3 casts of the lead you may be on +ground. + +The 17 day we set saile from Cape Blanke, directing our course South and by +East and South among, and so fell into a Baie to the Eastward of Cape +Verde, about 16 leagues, and about sixe leagues from the shore. The sayd +land seemed vnto vs as if it had bene a great number of shippes vnder +saile, being indeed nothing els but the land which was full of Hummoks, +some high some lowe, with high trees on them. We bare with the said land +till we were within 3 leagues of the shore, and then we sounded, and found +28 fadome water, black oase. This day we saw much fish in sundry sculs +swimming with their noses with the brim of the water. + +Passing along this coast we might see two small round hils, seeming to vs +about a league one from the other, which is the Cape, and betweene them are +great store of trees, and in all our dayes sailing we saw no land so high +as the said two hils. + +The 19 day we came to an anker at the Cape, in a roade fast by the +Westermost side of two hils in 10 fadome of water where you may ride in +fiue or sixe fadome, for the ground is faire, and alwayes you shall haue +the winde off the shore. And as soone as we were all at an anker our +Generall came aboord vs, and with him the master of the Admirall, whose +name was William Bats, and with them the captaine of the Viceadmirall, +whose name was master Edward Fenner, and Robert Curtise the master, and +dined aboord of vs being in the George, wherein was Captaine Iohn Heiwood, +and Iohn Smith of Hampton master, and there we concluded to goe a land, +which was halfe a mile from vs: [Sidenote: The foolish rashness of Wil. +Bats perswading company to land unarmed.] and by the counsel of William +Bats both Captaine and marchants and diuers of the companie went without +armour: for he sayd, that although the people were blacke and naked, yet +they were ciuill: so that hee would needs giue the venter without the +consent of the rest to go without weapon. Thus they rowed to shore, where +we being in the shippe might see a great companie of Negros naked, walking +to and fro by the sea side where the landing place was, waiting for the +comming of our men, who came too soone, and landed to their losse as it +fell out afterwards. + +There went a shore the Admirals skiffe, and the May Flowers boate, and in +them the number of 20 persons or thereabouts, as M. George Fenner the +Generall, his brother M. Edward Fenner, Thomas Valentine, Iohn Worme and +Francis Leigh marchants, Iohn Haward, William Bats, Nicholas Day, Iohn +Thomson and others. + +At their comming to the shore there were 100 Negros or vpward, with their +bowes and arrowes: our Captaines and merchants talked with them, and +according to the vse of the country, the one demanded pledges of the other, +and they were content to deliuer 3 of their Negros for 5 of our men. Our 5 +mens names were these, Iohn Haward, Wil. Bats, Nich. Day, Ioh. Tomson, and +Iohn Curtise: these were deliuered them, and we receiued 3 Negros into our +Admirals skiffe. + +Our men being a shore among the Negros, began to talke with them, declaring +what ware and marchandize we had, as woollen cloth, linnen cloth, iron, +cheese and other things. The Negros answered againe, they had ciuet, muske, +gold and graines, which pleased our captaines and marchants very well. Then +the Negros desired to haue a sight of some of our wares, to the which our +marchants were content, and foorthwith sent aboord one of the boats for +part of their marchandise, and in the meane time while the boate went to +the ship, our fiue men were walking on the shore with the Negros, and our +Generall and marchants staied in the other boat by the sea side, hauing the +3 Negros with them. + +Our boate then came againe and brought iron and other marchandise, with +bread, wine, and cheese which they gave vnto him. Then two of the Negros +(which were the pledges) made themselues sicke, desiring to goe a shore, +promising to send other two for them. Captaine Haiward perceiuing that our +men had let the Negros come a shore, asked what they meant, and doubting +the worst began to drawe toward the boate, and two or three of the Negros +folowed him. And when hee came to the boate they began to stay him, and he +made signes vnto them that hee would fetch them more drinke and bread: +notwithstanding, when he was entering into the boate, one of them caught +him by the breeches and would haue staied him, but hee sprang from him and +leapt into the boate, and as soone as hee was in, one of the Negros a shore +beganne to blow a pipe, and presently the other Negro that was in our boate +sitting on the boates side, and master Wormes sword by him, suddenly drew +the sword out of the scabberd, and cast himselfe into the Sea, and swamme a +shore, and presently the Negros laied handes on our men that were on shore, +and tooke three of them with great violence, and tore all their apparell +from their backes and left them nothing to couer them, and many of them +shot so thicke at our men in our boates, that they could scarse set hand to +any Oare to rowe from the shore, yet (by the helpe of God) they got from +them with their boates although many of them were hurt with their poysoned +arrowes: and the poison is vncurable, if the arrow enter within the skin +and drawe blood, and except the poison be presently suckt out, or the place +where any man is hurt bee foorthwith cut away, he dieth within foure dayes, +and within three houres after they bee hurt or pricked, wheresoeuer it be, +although but at the litle toe, yet it striketh vp to the heart, and taketh +away the stomacke, and causeth the partie marueilously to vomite, being +able to brooke neither meat nor drinke. + +The Negros hauing vsed our men with such cruelty, whose names were Nicholas +Day, William Bats, and Iohn Tomson, led them away to a towne which was +within a mile of the water side, or thereabout. + +The 20 day we sent to land a boate or skiffe wherein were eight persons, +and one of them was the foresayd Iohn Tomson and our interpreter which was +a Frenchman, (for there was one of the Negros which spake good French:) and +they caried with them two harquebusses, two targets and a mantell. + +The cause of sending them was to learne what ransome they demaunded for +Bats and Day whom they detained. And when they came to the shore and told +the Negros what they desired, they went and fetched them from among the +trees, and brought them loose among fortie or fiftie of them. And being +come within a stones cast of the sea side, William Bats brake from them, +and ran as fast as he could into the sea towards the boat, and he was not +so soone in the water but hee fell downe, either breath or his foote +failing him in the sand being soft: so that the Negros came and fell on him +and tooke him and haled him, that we thought they had torne him in pieces: +[Sidenote: The danger of poysoned arrowes.] for they tore againe all the +apparell from his backe, so that some of them caried our men againe to the +towne, and the rest shot at vs with their poisoned arrowes, and hurt one of +our men called Androwes in the smal of the leg, who being come aboord, (for +all that our Surgeons could do) we thought he would haue died. + +Our Generall (notwithstanding all this villanie) sent agayne to them, and +offered them any thing that they desired for the raunsome of our men, but +they would not deliuer them: giuing vs this answere: That there was in the +foresayd roade, three weekes before we came, an English shippe which had +taken three of their people, and vntill we did bring or send them againe, +wee should not haue our men although wee would giue our three shippes with +their furniture. + +The 21 day a French shippe of the burden of 80 tunnes (or thereabouts,) +came to the place where we were, being bound to traffique at the Cape: we +told them of the detaining of our two men by the Negros: and seeing that +these Frenchmen were very well welcome to the Negros, we wished them to see +whether they could procure them againe of the Negros, and bring them along +with them, and our Generall promised the Frenchmen 100 li. to obtaine them. +So wee committed the matter to the Frenchmen and departed. + +Of our men that were hurt by the Negros arrowes, foure died, and one to +saue his life had his arme cut off. Androwes that was last of all hurt, lay +lame not able to helpe himselfe: onely two recouered of their hurts. So we +placed other men in the roomes of those that we lost, and set saile. + +The 26 day between Cape Verde and Bona vista we sawe many flying fishes of +the bignesse of herrings, whereof two flew into our boat, which we towed at +our sterne. + +The 28 day we fell with an Iland called Bona vista, which is from Cape +Verde 86 leagues. The Northside of the sayde Iland is full of white sandie +hils and dales, and somewhat high land. + +The sayd day wee came to an anker within the Westermost point, about a +league within the point and found in our sounding faire sand in ten fadome +water, but you may go neere till you be in fiue or six fadome, for the +ground is faire. + +As soone as we were at an anker, our Generall sent his pinnasse a land, and +found fiue or sixe small houses, but the people were fled into the +mountains: and the next day he sent a shore againe, and met with two +Portugals, who willingly went aboord with his men, and at their comming he +welcommed them, although they were but poore and simple, and gaue each of +them a paire of shoes, and so set them a shore againe. + +The 30 day we weighed and sailed into a Bay within a small Iland about a +league from vs, and tooke plentie of diuers sortes of fishe. The foresayd +Iland lieth in sixteene degrees. And if you meane to anker in the said Bay, +you may borow in four or fiue fadome of the Southermost point of the sayd +Iland, which you may see when you ride in the road. But beware of the +middle of the Baie, for there lieth a ledge of rocks, which at lowe water +breaketh, yet there is three fadome water ouer them. + +The last day of Ianuarie our Generall with certaine of his men went a shore +in the Baie to the houses, where be found 12 Portugals. In all the Iland +there were not aboue 30 persons, which were banished men for a time, some +for more yeeres, some for lesse, and amongst them there was one simple man +which was their captaine. + +They liue vpon goats flesh, cocks, hennes, and fresh water: other victuals +they haue none, sauing fish, which they esteeme not, neither haue they any +boats to take them. + +They reported that this Iland was giuen by the king of Portugall to one of +his gentlemen, who hath let it foorth to rent for one hundreth duckats a +yeere, which rent is reared onely in goates skinnes. For by their speaches +there hath bene sent foorth of the sayd Iland into Portugall 40000 skins in +one yeere. + +We were to these men marueilously welcome, and to their powers very wel +entertained, and they gaue vs the flesh of as many hee-goates as wee would +haue, and tooke much paines for vs in taking them, and bringing them from +the mountains vpon their asses. + +They haue there great store of the oyle of Tortoises, which Tortoise is a +fish which swimmeth in the Sea, with a shell on his backe as broad as a +target. It raineth not in this Iland but in three moneths of the yeere, +from the midst of Iuly to the midst of October, and it is here alwayes very +hote. Kine haue bene brought hither, but by reason of the heate and drought +they haue died. + +The 3 of February wee departed from this Iland, and the same day fell with +another Iland called the Iland of Maiyo, which is 14 leagues from the other +Iland: there is in the midst of the way between these two Ilands a danger +which is alwayes to be seene. + +We ankred in the Northwest side of the sayd Ile in a faire Baie of eight +fadomes water and faire sand, but here we staied not, but the fourth day +weighed and sailed to another Iland called S. Iago, which lieth off the +said Iland of Maiyo East and by South, and about fiue leagues one from the +other. Being come within the Westermost point, we saw a faire road, and a +small towne by the water side, and also a fort or platforme by it: there we +purposed to come to anker, and our marchants to make some sale. But before +we came within their shot, they let flie at vs two pieces, whereupon we +went roomer and sailed along the shore two or three leagues from the road, +where we found a small Baie and two or three small houses, where we came to +an anker in 14 fadome faire ground. + +Within an houre after we had ankered we might see diuers horsemen and +footmen on the land right against vs riding and running to and fro. + +The next day being the fift of Februarie, a great companie of their +horsemen and footmen appeared on the shoare side, vnto whom our Generall +sent to vnderstande whether they would quietly trafike with vs: And they +sent him worde againe, desiring that they might speake with him, promising +that if he came to trafike as a marchant he should be welcome, and also +that he should haue any thing that he or the marchant would with reason +demaund. + +When this answere was brought vnto our Generall he was very glad thereof +and the whole companie, and presently (with as much speede as he could) he +caused his boates to be made readie: but doubting the villanie of the +Portugales, he armed his boates putting a double base in the head of his +pinnesse, and two single bases in the head of the Skiffe, and so sent to +the May-floure, and the George, and willed them in like sort to man their +two boates. + +These boates being thus manned and well appointed, our Generall entered +into his Skiffe, and with the rest rowed to the shoare where were +threescore horsemen or more, and two hundreth footemen readie to receiue +them. Our Generall marueiled that they came in so great a number and all +armed, and therefore with a flagge of truce sent to them to knowe their +pleasure: and they answered him with many faire promises and othes, that +their pretence was all true, and that they meant like Gentlemen and +Marchantes to trafike with him, declaring also that their Captaine was +comming to speake with him, and therefore desired our Generall to come and +speake with him himselfe. + +With this answere the boate returned, and then our Generall caused his +pinnesse to rowe to them, and as he came neere the shoare they came in a +great companie with much obeysance, opening their hands and armes abroade, +bowing themselues with their bonnets off, with as much humble salutations +outwardly as they might: earnestly desiring our Generall and Marchants to +come on lande to them, wherevnto he would not agree without sufficient +gages of Gentlemen and Marchants. At length they promised to sende two +gages to our Generals contentment, promising fresh water, victuall, money, +or Negroes for ware, if it were such as they liked: and therefore desired +our Generall and Marchants to sende them a shoare in writing the quantitie +of their wares, and the names of them: all which our Generall departed to +performe, looking for their answere the morrowe following. And being gone a +litle from the shoare, he caused his bases, curriers, and harquebusses to +be shot off, and our ships in like case shot off fiue or sixe pieces of +great ordinance, and so came aboord to prepare the note. The Portugales +most of them departed, sauing those that were left to watch and to receiue +the note, which about foure or five a clocke in the afternoone was sent, +and it was receiued. [Sidenote: The treason of the Portugals in S. Iago to +our men.] But all the purposes of the Portugal were villainously to betray +vs, (as shal appeare hereafter) although we meant in truth and honestie, +friendly to trafike with them. + +There was to the Westward of vs and about two leagues from vs, a towne +behinde a point fast by the sea side, where they had certaine carauels, or +shippes and also two Brigandines, whereof they (with all the speede that +they might) made readie foure Carauels, and both the brigandines which were +like two Gallies, and furnished them both with men and ordinance as much at +they could carrie, and as soone as it was night, they came rowing and +falling towardes vs: so that the land being high and the weather somewhat +cloude or mystie, and they comming all the way close vnder the shoare we +could not see them till they were right against one of our ships called the +May-floure. + +By this time it was about one or two of the clocke in the morning, and the +May-floure roade neerer them then the other two by a base shotte, so they +made a sure account either to haue taken her or burnt her. In the meane +time our men that had the watch (litle thinking of such villainous +treacheries after so many faire wordes) were singing and playing one with +the other and made such a noyse, that (being but a small gale of winde, and +riding neere the lande) they might heare vs from the shoare: so that we +supposed that they made account that we had espyed them, which indeede we +had not, neither had any one piece of ordinance primed, or any other thing +in a readinesse. + +They came so neere vs that they were within gunshot of vs, and then one of +our men chanced to see a light, and then looking out spied the 4 ships, and +suddenly cried out, Gallies, gallies, at which crie we were all amazed, and +foorthwith they shot at vs all the great ordinance that they had, and their +harquebusses, and curriers, and so lighted certaine tronkes or pieces of +wilde fire, and all of them with one voice (as well they on the shoare as +they in the shippes) gaue a great shoute, and so continued hallowing with +great noyses, still approaching neerer and neerer vnto the May-floure. We +(with all the speede that we might) made readie one piece of ordinance and +shotte at them, which caused them somewhat to stay, so they charged their +ordinance and shot at vs freshly againe, and while they shotte this second +time at vs, we had made readie three pieces which we shot at them, but they +approched still so neere, that at last we might haue shot a sheafe arrowe +to them. Wherevpon we hauing a gale of winde off the shoare hoysed our +foresayle, and cut our cable at the hawse, and went towarde our Admirall, +and they continued following and shooting at vs, and sometime at our +Admirall, but our Admirall shotte one such piece at them, that it made them +to retire, and at length to worpe away like traiterous villaines, and +although they thus suddenly shot all their shot at vs, yet they hurt +neither man or boye of ours, but what we did to them we know not. + +But seeing the villanie of these men we thought it best to stay there no +longer, but immediately set sayle towardes an Iland, called Fuego, 12 +leagues from the said Iland of S. Iago. At which Island of Fuego we came to +an anker the 11 day of this moneth, against a white chappell in the West +end of the sayd Iland, within half a league of a litle towne, and with in a +league or thereabout of the vtternost point of the said Island. + +In this Island is a marueilous high hill which doth burne continually, and +the inhabitants reported that about three yeeres past the whole Island was +like to be burned with the abundance of fire that came out of it. + +About a league from the chappel to the Westward is a goodly spring of fresh +water, where we had as much as we would. Wheate they haue none growing +here, but a certaine seede that they call Mill, and certaine peason like +Guinie peason, which Mill maketh good breade, but they haue here good store +of rother beasts and goates. [Sidenote: Cotton in Fuego.] Their marchandize +is cotton, which groweth there. + +The inhabitants are Portugals which haue commandement from the king to +trafike neither with Englishmen nor Frenchmen for victuall or any other +thing, except they be forced so to doe. + +There lieth off this Iland another called Ila Braua, which is not passing +two leagues ouer, it hath good store of goates and many trees, but there +are not passing three or foure persons dwelling in it. + +[Sidenote: They returne.] The 25 day of February we departed towardes the +Islands at Azores: and on the 23 day March we had sight of one of them +called Flores, and then wee might see another Island to the Northward of it +called Cueruo, lying two leagues or thereabouts off the other. + +The 27 we came to an anker in Cueruo ouer against a village of about twelue +simple houses; but in the night by a gale of winde, which caused vs to +drawe our anker after vs we hoysed sayle and went to the aforesayd Island +of Flores, where we sawe strange streames of water running downe from the +high cliffes by reason of the great abundance of raine that had suddenly +fallen. + +The 29 day we came againe to Cueruo and cast anker, but a storme arose and +continued seuen or eight houres together, so that we let slip a cable and +anker, and after the storme was alayed we came againe thinking to haue +recouered the same, but the Portugals had either taken it, or spoiled it: +the cable was new and neuer wet before, and both the cable and anker were +better worth then 40 li. So that we accompt our selues much beholding to +the honest Portugales. + +The 18 day of April we tooke in water at the Island of Flores, and hauing +ankered our cable was fretted in sunder with a rocke and so burst, where +wee lost that cable and anker also, and so departed to our coast. + +Then wee set sayle to an Islande named Faial, about the which lie three +other Islands, the one catted Pico, the other Saint George, and the other +Graciosa, which we had sight of on the eight and twentieth day. + +The 29 we came to an anker in the Southwest side of Faial in a faire bay, +and 22 fadom water against a litle towne where we had both fresh water and +fresh victuall. In this Iland by the report of the inhabitants, there +groweth certaine greene woad, which by their speeches is faire better then +the woad of S. Michael or of Tercera. + +The 8 day of May we came to Tercera where we met with a Portugall ship, and +being destitute of a cable and anker, our Generall caused vs to keepe her +companie, to see if she could conueniently spare vs any. The next morning +we might see bearing with vs a great shippe and two Carauels, which we +iudged to be of the king of Portugals Armada, and so they were, wherevpon +we prepared our selues for our defence. [Sidenote: A Portugall Galiasse of +400 tunnes.] The said ship was one of the kings Galliasses, about the +burden of foure hundred tunnes, with about three hundred men in her, the +shippe being well appointed with brasse pieces both great and small, and +some of them so bigge that their shot was as great as a mans head, the +other two Carauels were also very warlike and well appointed both with men +and munition. + +[Sidenote: A fight betweene one English ship and 7 Portugals.] As soone as +they were within shotte of vs, they waued vs amaine with their swords, we +keeping our course, the greatest shippe shot at vs freely and the carauell +also, and we prepared our selues, and made all things cleare for our +safegard as neere as we could. Then the great shippe shot at vs all her +broad side, and her foure greatest pieces that lay in her sterne, and +therewith hurt some of our men, and we did the best we could with our shot +to requite it. At last two other Carauels came off the shoare, and two +other pinnesses full of men, and deliuered them aboord the great shippe, +and so went backe againe with two men in a piece of them. The ship and the +Carauell gave vs the first day three fights, and when the night was come +they left off shooting, yet notwithstanding kept hard by vs all the night. +In the meane time we had as much as wee could doe all the night to mende +our ropes, and to strengthen our bulwarkes, putting our trust in God, and +resoluing our selues rather to die in our defence then to bee taken by such +wretches. + +The next day being the 10 of May in the morning, there were come to the +aide the said Portugals foure great Armadas or Carauels more which made +seuen, of which 4 three of them were at the least 100 tunnes a piece, the +other not so bigge, but all well appointed and full of men. All these +together came bearing with vs being in our Admirall, and one of the great +Carauels came to lay vs aboorde (as we iudged) for they had prepared their +false nettings, and all things for that purpose, so that the Gallias came +vp in our larboord side, and the Carauell in our starboord side. + +Our Captaine and master perceiuing their pretence, caused our gunners to +make all our ordinance readie with crossebarres, chaineshotte and +haileshot: so the ship and Carauell came vp, and as soone as they were +right in our sides, they shotte at vs as much ordinance as they could, +thinking to haue layde vs presently aboord: whereupon we gaue them such a +heate with both our sides, that they were both glad to fall asterne of vs, +and so paused the space of two or three houres being a very small gale of +winde. + +Then came vp the other fiue and shot all at vs, and so fell all asterne of +vs, and then went to counsell together. + +Then our small barke named the George came to vs, and wee confered together +a great space. And as the Portugall shippes and Carauels were comming to vs +againe, our barke minding to fall asteme of vs and so to come vp againe, +fell quickly vpon the lee, and by reason of the litle winde, it was so long +before she could fill her sailes againe, that both the shippe and Carauels +were came vp to vs, and she falling in among them made reasonable shift +with them, but they got a head of her, so that she could not vs: then 5 of +the Carauels followed her, but we saw she defended her selfe against them +all. + +Then came the great shippe and the Carauell to vs, and fought with vs all +that day with their ordinance. + +The May-floure our other consort being very good by the winde, tooke the +benefite thereof and halde all that day close by the winde, but could not +come neere vs. So when night againe was come, they gaue ouer their fight +and followed vs all the night. + +In these many fights it could not otherwise be but needes some of our men +must be slaine, (as they were indeede) and diuers hurt, and our tackle much +spoyled: yet for all this we did our best indeuour to repaire all things, +and to stand to it to the death with our assured trust in the mercie and +helpe of God. + +This night the May-floure came vp to vs, and our Captaine tolde them his +harmes and spoyles, and wished them if they could spare halfe a dosen fresh +men to hoyse out their boate and sende them to him, but they could not +spare any, and so bare away againe. Which when our enemies sawe in the next +morning that we were one from another, they came vp to vs againe and gaue +vs a great fight with much hallowing and hooping, making accompt either to +boorde vs or els to sinke vs: but although our companie was but small, yet +least they should see vs any whit dismayed, when they hallowed we hallowed +also as fast as they, and waued to them to come and boorde vs if they +durst, but that they would not, seeing vs still so couragious: [Sidenote: +The 7 Portugals depart with shame from one English ship.] and hauing giuen +vs that day foure fights, at night they forsooke vs with shame, as they +came to vs at the first with pride. + +They had made in our ship some leakes with their shot which we againe +stopped with al speed, and that being done, we tooke some rest after our +long labour and trouble. + +The next day in the morning the May-floure came to vs, and brought vs sixe +men in her boate which did vs much pleasure, and we sent to them some of +our hurt men. + +Then we directed our course for our owne countrey, and by the second day of +Iune we were neere to our owne coast and sounded being thwart the Lyzard. + +The third day we had sight of a shippe which was a Portugall, who bare with +vs, and at his comming to vs (the weather being calme) our Captaine caused +him to hoyse foorth his boate to come aboord to speake with him, and at +their comming our Captaine and Marchants demanded of them what ware they +had, and whether they were bound, and they made answere that their lading +was sugar and cotton. Then our Captaine and Marchants shewed them fiue +Negroes that we had, and asked them whither they would buy them, which they +were very desirous to doe, and agreed to giue for them 40 chests of sugar, +which chests were small hauiug not aboue 26 loaues in a piece: so they with +their boate did fetch fiue of the chestes and deliuered them and went for +more, and when they had laden their boate and were come againe, we might +see bearing with vs a great ship and a small, which our Captaine supposed +to be men of warre or Rouers, [Marginal Note: A Portugall ship +(notwithstanding all their villanies) defended by our men from Rouers.] and +then willed the Portugales to carie their sugar to their ship againe, +purposing to make our selues readie for our defence. But the Portugales +earnestly intreated our Captaine not so to forsake them, and promised him +(if he would safegard them) to giue him aboue the bargain ten chests of +sugar: whereupon our Captaine was content, and the Portugall not being good +of sayle, we spared our topsayles for her; so at last the foresaid ship +bare with vs, and (seeing that we did not feare them) gaue vs ouer. And the +next morning came two others bearing with vs, and seeing vs not about to +flie a iot from them forsooke vs also. + +The 5 day of Iune we had sight of the Stert, and about noone we were thwart +of the bay of Lime, and so sounded and had 35 fadom water. + +The sixt day we came in at the Needles and so came to an anker vnder the +Isle of Wight at a place called Meadhole, and from thence sayled to +Southampton where we made an ende of this voyage. + + * * * * * + +The Ambassage of M. Edmund Hogan, one of the sworne Esquires of her + Maiesties person, from her Highnesse to Mully Abdelmelech Emperour of + Marocco, and king of Fes and Sus: in the yeere 1577, written by himselfe. + +I Edmund Hogan being appointed Ambassadour from the Queenes Maiestie to the +aboue named Emperour and King Mully Abdelmelech, departed with my company +and seruants from London the two and twentie day of April 1577, being +imbarked in the good ship called the Gallion of London, and arriued in +Azafi a port of Barbarie the one and twentie day of May next following. +Immediatly I sent Leonell Edgerton a shoare with my letters directed to +Iohn Williams and Iohn Bampton, who dispatched a Trottero to Marocco to +knowe the kings pleasure for my repaire to the Court, which letters came to +their hands on the Thursday night. + +They with all speede gaue the king understanding of it, who being glad +thereof speeded the next day certaine Captaines with souldiers and tents, +with other prouision to Azafi, so that vpon Whitsunday at night the said +Captaines with Iohn Bambton, Robert Washborne, and Robert Lion, and the +kings officers came late to Azafi. + +In the meane time I remained a boord, and caused some of the goods to be +discharged for lightning of the shippe, and I wrote in my letter that I +would not lande, till I knewe the Kings pleasure. + +The 22 day being Saturday, the Make-speede arriued in the roade about two +of the clocke in the afternoone. + +The 27 day, being Whitsunday, came aboord the Gallion Iohn Bampton, and +others, giuing me to vnderstande how much the King reioyced of my safe +arriuall, comming from the Queenes Maiestie, and how that for my safe +conduct to the Court he had sent foure Captaines and an hundred souldiers +well appointed, with a horse furnished which he vsed himselfe to ride on +with all other furniture accordingly: they wished mee also to come on lande +in the best order I could, as well for my selfe as my men, which I did, +hauing to the number of tenne men, whereof three were trumpetters. + +The ships being foure appointed themselues in the best order they could for +the best shew, and shot off all their ordinance to the value of twentie +Markes in powder. + +At my comming a shoare, I found all the souldiers well appointed on +horsebacke, the Captaines and the Gouernour of the towne standing as neere +the water side as they could, with a Iennet of the kings, and receiued mee +from the boate declaring how glad his maiestie was of my safe arriuall, +comming from the Queenes Maiestie my Mistresse, and that hee had sent them +to attend vpon me, it being his pleasure that I should tarie there on shore +fiue or sixe dayes for my refreshing. + +So being mounted vpon the Iennet, they conducted mee through the Towne into +a faire fielde vpon the Sea-side where was a tent prouided for mee, and all +the ground spread with Turkie carpets, and the Castle discharged a peale of +ordinance, and all things necessarie were brought into my tent, where I +both tooke my table and lodging, and had other conuenient tents for my +seruants. + +The souldiers enuironed the tents, and watched about vs day and night as +long as I lay there, although I sought my speedier dispatch. + +On the Wednesday towards night, I tooke my horse and traueiled ten miles to +the first place of water that we could finde, [Marginal Note: In Barbarie +they haue no Innes but they lodge in open fieldes where they can find +water.] and there pitched our tents till the next morning, and so traueiled +till ten of the clocke, and then pitched our tents till foure, and so +traueiled as long as day light would suffer about 26 miles that day. + +The next day being Friday I traueiled in like order but eight and twentie +miles at the most, and by a Riuer being about sixe miles within sight of +the Citie of Marocco we pitched our tents. + +[Sidenote: The singular humanitie of the king to our Ambassadour.] +Immediatly after came all our English marchants, and the French on +horsebacke to meete me, and before night there came an Alcayde from the +king with fiftie men, and diuers mules laden with victuall and banket, for +my supper, declaring vnto me how glad the king shewed himselfe to heare of +the Queenes Maiestie, and that his pleasere was I should be receiued into +his country as neuer any Christian the like: and desired to knowe what time +the next day I would come into his citie, because he would that all the +Christians as also his nobilitie should meete me, and willed Iohn Bampton +to be with him early in the morning, which he did. + +About seuen of the clocke being accompanied with the French and English +marchants, and a great number of souldiers, I passed towards the citie, and +by that time I had traueiled 2 miles, there met me all the Christians of +the Spaniards and Portugals to receiue me, which I knowe was more by the +kings commandement then of any good wils of themselues: for some of them +although they speake me faire hung downe their heads like dogs, and +especially the Portugales, and I countenanced them accordingly. [Marginal +Note: The Spaniards and Portugales were commanded by the king in paine of +death, to meete the English Ambassadour.] + +So I passed on till I came within two English miles of the Citie, and then +Iohn Bampton returned, shewing me that the king was so glad of my comming, +that hee could not deuise to doe too much, to shewe the good will that hee +did owe to the Queenes Maiestie, and her Realme. + +His counsellors met me without the gates, and at the entrie of the gates, +his footmen and guard were placed on both sides of my horse, and so brought +me to the kings palace. + +The king sate in his chaire with his Counsell about him, as well the Moores +as the Elchies, and according to his order giuen vnto me before, I there +declared my message in Spanish, and made deliuerie of the Queenes Maiesties +letters, and all that I spake at that present in Spanish, hee caused one of +his Elchies to declare the same to the Moores present, in the Larbe tongue. + +Which done, he answered me againe in Spanish, yeelding to the Queenes +Maiestie great thankes, and offering himselfe and his countrey to bee at +her Graces commaundement, and then commaunded certaine of his Counsellers +to conduct mee to my lodging, not being farre from the Court. + +The house was faire after the fashion of that countrey, being daily well +furnished with al kind of victuall at the kings charge. + +The same night he sent for mee to the Court, and I had conference with him +about the space of two houres, where I throughly declared the charge +committed vnto mee from her Maiestie, finding him conformable, willing to +pleasure and not to vrge her Maiestie with any demaundes, more then +conueniently shee might willingly consent vnto, hee knowing that out of his +countrey the Realme of England might be better serued with lackes, then bee +in comparison from vs. + +[Sidenote: The king of Spaine sought to disgrace the Queene and her +Ambassadour.] Further he gaue me to vnderstand, that the king of Spaine had +sent vnto him for a licence, that an Ambassadour of his might come into his +countrey, and had made great meanes that if the Queenes maiesty of England +sent any vnto him, that he would not giue him any credit or intertainment, +albeit (said he) I know what the king of Spaine is, and what the Queene of +England and her Realme is: for I neither like of him nor of his religion, +being so gouerned by the Inquisition that he can doe nothing of himselfe. + +Therefore when he commeth vpon the licence which I haue granted, he shall +well see how litle account I will make of him and Spaine, and how greatly +will extoll you for the Queenes maiestie of England. + +He shall not come to my presence as you haue done, and shall dayly: for I +minde to accept of you as my companion and one of my house, whereas he +shall attend twentie dayes after he hath done his message. + +After the end of this speech I deliuered Sir Thomas Greshams letters, when +as he tooke me by the hand, and led me downe a long court to a palace where +there ranne a faire fountaine of water, and there sitting himselfe in a +chaire, he commanded me to sit downe in another, and there called for such +simple Musicians as he had. + +[Sidenote: The king of Barbarie sent into England for Musicians.] Then I +presented him with a great base Lute, which he most thankfully accepted, +and then he was desirous to heare of the Musicians, and I tolde him that +there was great care had to prouide them, and that I did not doubt but vpon +my returne they should come with the first ship. He is willing to giue them +good intertainment with prouision of victuall, and to let them liue +according to their law and conscience wherein he vrgeth none to the +contrary. + +I finde him to be one that liueth greatly in the feare of God, being well +exercised in the Scriptures, as well in the olde Testament as also in the +New, and he beareth a greater affection to our Nation then to others +because of our religion, which forbiddeth worship of Idols, and the Moores +called him the Christian king. + +[Sidenote: A rich gift bestowed upon our Ambassadour.] The same night being +the first of Iune, I continued with him till twelue of the clocke, and he +seemed to haue so good liking of me, that he tooke from his girdle a short +dagger being set with 200 stones, rubies and turkies, and did bestow it +vpon me, and so I being conducted returned to my lodging for that time. + +The next day because he knew it to be Sunday and our Sabbath day he did let +me rest. But on the Munday in the afternoone he sent for me, and I had +conference with him againe, and musicke. + +Likewise on the Tuesday by three of the clocke he sent for me into his +garden, finding him layd vpon a silke bed complayning of a sore leg: yet +after long conference he walked into another Orchard, where as hauing a +faire banketting-house and a great water, and a new gallie in it, he went +aboord the gallie and tooke me with him, and passed the space of two or +three houres, shewing the great experience he had in Gallies, wherein (as +he said) he had excercised himselfe eighteene yeeres in his youth. + +After supper he shewed me his horses and other commodities that he had +about his house, and since that night I haue not seene him, for that he +hath kept in with his sore legge, but he hath sent to me daily. + +The 13 of Iune at sixe of the clocke at night I had againe audience of the +king, and I continued with him till midnight, hauing debated as well for +the Queenes commission as for the well dealing, with her marchants for +their traffike here in these parts, saying, he would do much more for the +Queenes maiesty and the Realme offering that all English ships with her +subiects may with good securitie enter into his ports and dominions as well +in trade of marchandise, as for victuall and water, as also in time of +warre with any her enemies to bring in prises and to make sales, as +occasion should serue, or else to depart againe with them at their +pleasure. + +Likewise for all English ships that shall passe along his coast of +Barbarie, and thorow the straites into the Leuant seas, that he would +graunt safe conduct that the said ships and marchants with their goods +might passe into the Leuant seas, and so to the Turks dominions, and the +king of Argiers, as his owne, and that he would write to the Turke and to +the king of Argier his letters for the well vsing of our ships and goods. + +Also that hereafter no Englishmen that by any meanes be taken captiues, +shall be solde within any of his dominions: whereupon I declared that the +Queenes maiesty accepting of these his offers was pleased to confirme the +intercourse and trade of our marchants within this his countrey, as also to +pleasure him with such commodities as he should haue need of, to furnish +the necessities and wants of his countrey in trade of marchandise, so as he +required nothing contrarie to her honour and law, and the breach of league +with the Christian princes her neighbours. [Sidenote: A good prouiso.] + +The same night I presented the king with the case of combes, and desired +his maiestie to haue special regard that the ships might be laden backe +againe, for that I found litle store of saltpeter in readinesse in Iohn +Bamptons hands. He answered me that I should haue all the assistance +therein that he could, but that in Sus he thought to haue some store in his +house there, as also that the Mountayners had made much in a readinesse: I +requested that he would send downe, which he promised to doe. + +The eighteene day I was with him againe and so continued there till night, +and he shewed me his house with pastime in ducking with water-Spaniels, and +baiting buls with his English dogges. + +At this time I moued him againe for the sending downe to Sus, which he +granted to doe, and the 24. day there departed Alcayde Mammie, with Lionell +Edgerton, and Rowland Guy to Sus, and caried with them for our accompts and +his company the kings letters to his brother Muly Hammet, and Alcayde +Shauan, and the Viceroy. + +The 23. day the king sent me out of Marocco to his garden called +Shersbonare, with his gard, and Alcayde Mamoute, and the 24. at night I +came to the court to see a Morris dance, and a play of his Elchies. He +promised me audience the next day being Tuesday, but he put it off till +Thursday: and the Thursday at night I was sent for to the king after +supper, and then he sent Alcayde Rodwan, and Alcayde Gowry to conferre with +me, but after a little talke I desired to be brought to the King for my +dispatch. And being brought to him, I preferred two bils of Iohn Bamptons +which he had made for prouision of Salt-peter: also two bils for the quiet +traffique of our English marchants, and bils for sugars to be made by the +Iewes, as well for the debts past, as hereafter, and for good order in the +Ingenios. Also I mooued him againe for the Salt-peter, and other +dispatches, which he referred to be agreed vpon by the two Alcaydes. But +the Friday being the 20. the Alcaydes could not intend it, and vpon +Saturday Alcayde Rodwan fell sicke, so on Sunday we made meanes to the +King, and that afternoone I was sent for to conferre vpon the bargaine with +the Alcaydes and others, but did not agree. + +Vpon Tuesday I wrote a letter to the King for my dispatch, and the same +afternoone I was called againe to the Court, and referred all things to the +King, accepting his offer of Salt-peter. + +That night againe the King had me into his Gallie, and the Spaniels did +hunt the ducke. + +The Thursday I was appointed to way the 300. kintals grosse of Salt-peter, +and that afternoone the Tabybe came vnto mee to my lodging, shewing mee +that the king was offended with Iohn Bampton for diuers causes. + +The Sunday night late being the 7. of Iuly, I got the King to forgiue all +to Iohn Bampton, and the King promised me to speake againe with me vpon +Munday. + +Vpon Tuesday I wrote to him againe for my dispatch, and then hee sent Fray +Lewes to mee, and said that he had order to write. + +Vpon Wednesday I wrote againe, and he sent me word that vpon Thursday I +should come and be dispatched, so that I should depart vpon Friday without +faile, being the twelfth of Iuly. + +[Sidenote: The Emperor of Maroco his priuileges to the English.] So the +Friday after according to the kings order and appointment I went to the +court, and whereas motion and petition was made for the confirmation of the +demaunds which I had preferred, they were all granted, and likewise the +priuileges which were on the behalfe of our English marchants requested, +were with great fauour and readinesse yeelded vnto. And whereas the Iews +there resident were to our men in certaine round summes indebted, the +Emperors pleasure and commandement was, that they should without further +excuse or delay, pay and discharge the same. And thus at length I was +dismissed with great honour and speciall countenance, such as hath not +ordinarily bene shewed to other Ambassadors of the Christians. + +And touching the priuate affaires intreated vpon betwixt her Maiestie and +the Emperour, I had letters from him to satisfie her highnesse therein. So +to conclude, hauing receiued the like honourable conduct from his Court, as +I had for my part at my first landing, I embarked my selfe with my foresaid +company, and arriuing not long after in England, I repaired to her +Maiesties court, and ended my Ambassage to her highnesse good liking, with +relation of my seruice performed. + + * * * * * + +The voyage of Thomas Stukeley, wrongfully called Marques of Ireland, into + Barbary 1578. Written by Iohannes Thomas Freigius in Historia de caede + Sebastiani Regis Lusitaniae. + +Venerant autem ad regem etiam sexcenti Itali, quos Papa subministrarat, +Comiti Irlandiae: qui cum Vlissiponem tribus instructis nauibus appulisset +Regi operam suam condixit, eumque in bellum sequi promisit. Cap. 7. + +Totum exercitum diuisit in quatuor acies quadratas: In dextro latere primum +agmen erat Velitum et militum Tingitanorum, eosque ducebat Aluarus Peresius +de Tauara: sinistram aciem seu mediam tenebant Germani et Ital, quibus +imperabat Marchio Irlandiae, etc. Cap 11. + +Inter nobiles qui in hoc praelio ceciderunt, fuerunt, praeter regem +Sebastianum, dux de Auero, Episcopi Conimbricensis et Portuensis, +Commissarius generalis a Papa missus Marchio Irlandiae, Christophorus de +Tauora, et plures alij. Cap. 13. + + +The same in English. + +There came also to Don Sebastian the King of Portugal 600. Italians, whom +the Pope sent vnder the conduct of the Marques of Irland: [Marginal note: +Thomas Stukeley was wrongfully indued with this title.] who being arriued +at Lisbone with three tall ships, proffered his seruice to the king, and +promised to attend vpon him in the warres, &c. + +He diuided the whole Armie into 4 squadrons: vpon the right wing stood the +first squadron, consisting of men lightly armed or skirmishers and of the +souldiers of Tangier, Generall of whom was Don Aluaro Perez de Tauara: the +left or midle squadron consisted of Germanes and Italians, vnder the +command of the Marques of Irland, &c. cap. 7. + +Of Noblemen were slaine in this battel (besides Don Sebastian the king) the +duke de Auero, the two bishops of Coimbra and of Porto, the Marques of +Irland sent by the Pope as his Commissary generall, Christopher de Tauara, +and many others, cap. 13. + +It is further also to be remembred, that diuers other English gentlemen +were in this battell, whereof the most part were slaine; and among others +M. Christopher Lyster was taken captiue, and was there long detained in +miserable seruitude. Which gentleman although at length he happily escaped +the cruel hands of the Moores; yet returning home into England, and for his +manifold good parts being in the yeere 1586. employed by the honourable the +Earle of Cumberland, in a voyage intended by the Streights of Magellan for +the South sea, as Viceadmirall, (wherein he shewed singular resolution and +courage) and appointed afterward in diuers places of speciall command and +credite, was last of all miserably drowned in a great and rich Spanish +prize vpon the coast of Cornwall. + + * * * * * + +Certaine reports of the prouince of China learned through the Portugals + there imprisoned, and chiefly by the relation of Galeotto Perera, a + gentleman of good credit, that lay prisoner in that Countrey many yeeres. + Done out of Italian into English by Richard Willes. + +This land of China is parted into 13. Shires, the which sometimes were ech +one a kingdome by it selfe, but these many yeeres they haue bene all +subiect vnto one King. Fuquien is made by the Portugals the first Shire, +because there their troubles began, and they had occasion thereby to know +the rest. In the shire be 8 cities, but one principally more famous then +others called Fuquieo, the other seuen are reasonably great, the best +knowen whereof vnto the Portugals is Cinceo, in respect of a certaine hauen +ioyning thereunto, whither in time past they were wont for marchandise. + +Cantan is the second shire, not so great in quantitie, as well accompted +of, both by the king thereof, and also by the Portugals, for that it lieth +neerer vnto Malacca then any other part of China, and was first discried by +the Portugals before any other shire in that prouince: this shire hath in +it seuen Cities. + +Chequeam is the third shire, the chiefest Citie therein is Donchion, +therein also standeth Liampo, with other 13. or 14. boroughes: countrey +townes therein are too too many to be spoken of. + +The fourth shire is called Xutiamfu, the principall Citie thereof is great +Pachin, where the King is alwayes resident. In it are fifteene other very +great Cities: of other townes therein, and boroughes well walled and +trenched about, I will say nothing. + +The fift shire hath name Chelim: the great Citie Nanquin chiefe of other +fifteene cities was herein of ancient time the royall seat of the Chinish +kings. From this shire, and from the aforesaid Chequeam forward bare rule +the other kings, vntil the whole region became one kingdome. + +[Sidenote: Quianci, or, Quinzi.] The 6. shire beareth the name Quianci, as +also the principal City thereof, wherein the fine clay to make vessels is +wrought. The Portugals being ignorant of this Countrey, and finding great +abundance of that fine clay to be solde at Liampo, and that very good +cheape, thought at the first that it had bene made there, howbeit in fine +they perceiued that the standing of Quinzi more neere vnto Liampo then to +Cinceo or Cantan was the cause of so much fine clay at Liampo: within the +compasse of Quinci shire be other 12. cities. + +The 7. shire is Quicin, the 8. Quansi, the 9. Confu, the 10. Vrnan, the 11. +Sichiua. In the first hereof there be 16. Cities, in the next 15: how many +Townes the other 3. haue, wee are ignorant as yet, as also of the proper +names of the 12. and 13. shires, and the townes therein. + +This finally may be generally said hereof, that the greater shires in China +prouince may bee compared with mightie kingdomes. + +In eche one of these shires bee set Ponchiassini and Anchiassini, before +whom are handled the matters of other Cities. There is also placed in ech +one a Tutan, as you would say, a gouernour, and a Chian, that is a visiter, +as it were: whose office is to goe in circuit, and to see iustice exactly +done. By these meanes so vprightly things are ordered there, that it may be +worthily accompted one of the best gouerned prouinces in all the world. + +The king maketh alwayes his abode in the great city Pachin, as much to say +in our language, as by the name thereof I am aduertised, the towne of the +kingdome. This kingdome is so large, that vnder fiue moneths you are not +able to trauaile from the Townes by the Sea side to the Court, and backe +againe, no not vnder three moneths in poste at your vrgent businesse. The +post-horses in this Countrey are litle of body, but swift of foote. Many +doe traueile the greater part of this iourney by water in certaine light +barkes, for the multitude of Riuers commodious for passage from one Citie +to another. + +The king, notwithstanding the hugenesse of his kingdome, hath such a care +thereof, that euery Moone (for by the Moones they reckon their monethes) +hee is aduertised fully of whatsoeuer thing happeneth therein, by these +meanes following. + +The whole prouince being diuided into shires, and each shire hauing in it +one chiefe and principall Citie, whereunto the matters of all the other +Cities, Townes and boroughes, are brought, there are drawen in euery chiefe +Citie aforesaid intelligences of such things as doe monethly fall out, and +be sent in writing to the Court. If happely in one moneth euery Post be not +able to goe so long a way, yet doeth there notwithstanding once euery +moneth arriue one Poste out of the shire. Who so commeth before the new +moone stayeth for the deliuery of his letters vntil the moone be changed. +Then likewise are dispatched other Posts backe into all the 13. shires +againe. + +Before that we doe come to Cinceo wee haue to passe through many places, +and some of great importance. For this Countrey is so well inhabited neere +the Sea side, that you cannot goe one mile but you shall see some Towne, +borough or hostry, the which are so aboundantly prouided of all things, +that in the Cities and townes they liue ciuily. Neuertheles such as dwel +abrode are very poore, for the multitude of them euery where is so great, +that out of a tree you shall see many times swarme a number of children, +where a man would not haue thought to haue found any one at all. + +From these places in number infinite, you shall come vnto wo Cities very +populous, and, being compared with Cinceo, not possibly to be discerned +which is the greater of them. These Cities are as well walled as any Cities +in all the world. As you come into either of them, there standeth so great +and mighty a bridge, that the like thereof I haue neuer seene in Portugal +nor else where. I heard one of my fellowes say, that hee tolde in one +bridge 40. arches. The occasion wherefore these bridges are made so great +is, for that the Countrey is toward the sea very plaine and low, and +ouerflowed euer as the sea water encreaseth. The breadth of the bridges, +although it bee well proportioned vnto the length thereof, yet are they +equally built no higher in the middle then at either ende, in such wise +that you may see directly from the one ende to the other: the sides are +wonderfully well engraued after the maner of Rome-workes. But that we did +most marueile at was therewithall the hugenesse of the stones, the like +whereof, as we came into the Citie, we did see many set vp in places +dis-habited by the way, to no small charges of theirs, howbeit to little +purpose, whereas no body seeth them but such as doe come by. The arches are +not made after our fashion, vauted with sundry stones set together: but +paued, as it were, whole stones reaching from one piller to an other, in +such wise that they lye both for the arches heads, and galantly serue also +for the highway. I haue bene astonied to beholde the hugenesse of the +aforesaid stones: some of them are xii. pases long and vpward, the least +ii. good pases long, and an halfe. + +The wayes echwhere are galantly paued with fouresquare stone, except it be +where for want of stone they vse to lay bricke: in this voyage wee +trauailed ouer certaine hilles, where the wayes were pitched, and in many +places no worse paued then in the plaine ground. This causes vs to thinke, +that in all the world there bee no better workemen for buildings, then the +inhabitants of China. The Countrey is so well inhabited, that no one foote +of ground is left vntilled: small store of cattell haue we seene this day, +we sawe onely certaine oxen wherewithall the countrey, men do plow their +ground. One oxe draweth the plough alone not onely in this shire, but in +other places also, wherein is greater store of cattell. These countreymen +by arte do that in tillage, which we are constrained to doe by force. Here +be solde the voydings of close stooles, although there wanteth not the dung +of beastes: and the excrements of man are good marchandise throughout all +China. The dungfermers seek in euery streete by exchange to buy this dirtie +ware for herbs and wood. The custome is very good for keeping the Citie +cleane. There is great aboundance of hennes, geese, duckes, swine, and +goates, wethers haue they none: the hennes are solde by weight, and so are +all other things. Two pound of hennes flesh, geese, or ducke, is worth two +foi of their money, that is, d. ob. sterling. Swines flesh is sold at a +penie the pound. Beefe beareth the same price, for the scarcitie thereof, +howbeit Northward from Fuquieo and farther off from the seacoast, there is +beefe more plentie and solde better cheape; We haue had in all the Cities +we passed through, great abundance of all these victuals, beefe onely +excepted. And if this Countrey were like vnto India, the inhabitants +whereof eate neither henne, beefe, nor porke, but keepe that onely for the +Portugals and Moores, they would be sold here for nothing. But it so +falling out, that the Chineans are the greatest eaters in all the world, +they do feed vpon all things, specially on porke, which, the fatter it is, +is vnto them the lesse lothsome. The highest price of these things +aforesaid I haue set downe, better cheap shal you sometimes buy them for +the great plentie thereof in this countrey. Frogs are solde at the same +price that is made of hennes, and are good meate amongst them, as also +dogs, cats, rats, snakes, and all other vncleane meates. + +The Cities be very gallant, specially neere vnto the gates, the which are +marueilously great, and couered with iron. The gate houses are built on +high with towers, and the lower part thereof is made of bricke and stone, +proportionally with the walls, from the walles vpward the building is of +timber, and many stories in it one aboue the other. The strength of their +townes is in the mightie walles and ditches, artillerie haue they none. + +The streetes in Cinceo, and in all the rest of the Cities we haue seene are +very faire, so large and so straight, that it is wonderfull to behold. +Their houses are built with timber, the foundations onely excepted, the +which are layed with stone: in ech side of the streetes are pentises or +continuall porches for the marchants to walke vnder: the breadth of the +streets is neuertheless such, that in them 15. men may ride commodiously +side by side. As they ride they must needs passe vnder many high arches of +triumph that crosse ouer the streetes made of timber, and carued diuersly, +couered with tiles of fine clay: vnder these arches the Mercers do vtter +their smaller wares, and such as list to stand there are defended from +raine and the heate of the Sunne. The greater gentlemen haue these arches +at their doores: although some of them be not so mightily built as the +rest. + +I shall haue occasion to speake of a certaine order of gentlemen that are +called Louteas. I wil first therefore expound what this word signifieth. +Loutea is as much to say in our language as Sir, and when any of them +calleth his name, he answereth Sir: and as we do say, that the king hath +made some gentlemen, so say they, that there is made a Loutea. And for that +amongst them the degrees are diuers both in name and office, I will tell +you onely of some principals, being not able to aduertise you of all. + +The maner how gentlemen are created Louteas, and do come to that honour and +title, is by the giuing of a broad girdle, not like to the rest, and a cap, +at the commaundement of the king. The name Loutea is more generall and +common vnto mo, then the qualitie of honour thereby signified agreeth +withall. Such Louteas as doe serue their prince in weightie matters for +iustice, are created after trial made of their learning: but the other +which serue in smaller affaires, as Captaines, constables, sergeants by +land and sea, receiuers and such like, whereof there be in euery citie, as +also in this, very many, are made for fauour: the chiefe Louteas are serued +kneeling. + +The whole prouince of China is diuided, as I haue said, into 13. shires, in +euery shire at the least is one gouernour called there Tutan, in some +shires there be two. + +[Sidenote: Chian, or, Chaen.] Chiefe in office next vnto them be certaine +other named Chians, that is, high Commissioners as you would say, visiters, +with full authoritie in such wise, that they doe call vnto an accompt the +Tutans themselues, but their authoritie lasteth not in any shire longer +then one yere. Neuerthelesse in euery shire being at the least 7. cities, +yea, in some of them 15. or 16. beside other boroughes and townes not well +to be numbred, these visiters where they come are so honoured and feared, +as though they were some great princes. At the yeres end, their circuit +done, they come vnto that Citie which is chiefe of others in the shire, to +do iustice there: finally busying themselues in the searching out of such +as are to receiue the order of Louteas, whereof more shalbe said in another +place. + +Ouer and beside these officers, in the chiefe Citie of ech one of these +aforesaid 13. prouinces, is resident one Ponchiassi, Captaine thereof, and +treasurer of all the kings reuenues. This Magistrate maketh his abode in +one of the foure greatest houses that be in all these head Cities. And +although the principall part of his function be to be Captaine, to be +treasourer of the reuenues in that prouince, and to send these reuenues at +appointed times to the Court: yet hath he notwithstanding by his office +also to meddle with matters appertaining vnto iustice. + +[Sidenote: Anchiassi, or Hexasi.] In the second great house dwelleth an +other Magistrate called Anchiassi, a great officer also, for he hath +dealings in all matters of iustice. Who although he be somewhat inferior in +dignitie vnto the Ponchiassi, yet for his great dealings and generall +charge of iustice, whosoeuer seeth the affaires of the one house and the +other might iudge this Anchiassi to be the greater. + +Tuzi, an other officer so called, lieth in the thirde house, a magistrate +of importance, specially in things belonging vnto warfare, for thereof hath +he charge. + +There is resident in the 4 house a fourth officer, bearing name Taissu. In +this house is the principall prison of all the Citie. Ech one of these +Magistrates aforesaide may both lay euill doers in prison, and deliuer them +out againe, except the fact be heinous and of importance: in such a case +they can do nothing, except they do meet al together. And if the deed +deserueth death, all they together cannot determine thereof, without +recourse made vnto the Chian wheresoeuer hee be, or to the Tutan; and eft +soones it falleth put, that the case is referred vnto higher power. In all +Cities, not onely chiefe in ech shire, but in the rest also, are meanes +found to make Louteas. Many of them do study at the prince his charges, +wherefore at the yeeres ende they resort vnto the head Cities, whither the +Chians doe come, as it hath bene earst aside, as well to giue these +degrees, as to sit in iudgement ouer the prisoners. + +The Chians go in circuit euery yeere, but such as are to be chosen to the +greatest offices meete not but from three yeeres to three yeeres, and that +in certaine large halles appointed for them to be examined in. Many things +are asked them, whereunto if they doe answere accordingly, and be found +sufficient to take their degree, the Chian by and by granteth it them: but +the Cap and girdle, whereby they are knowen to be Louteas, they weare not +before that they be confirmed by the king. Their examination done, and +triall made of them, such as haue taken their degree wont to be giuen them +with all ceremonies, vse to banquet and feast many dayes together (as the +Chineans fashion is to ende all their pleasures with eating and drinking) +and so remaine chosen to do the king seruice in matters of learning. The +other examinates founde insufficient to proceed are sent backe to their +studie againe. Whose ignorance is perceiued to come of negligence and +default, such a one is whipped, and sometimes sent to prison, where lying +that yere when this kinde of acte was, we found many thus punished, and +demaunding the cause thereof, they saide it was for that they knew not how +to answere vnto certaine things asked them. It is a world to see how these +Louteas are serued and feared, in such wise, that in publike assemblies at +one shrike they giue, all the seruitors belonging vnto iustice tremble +thereat. At their being in these places, when they list to mooue, be it but +euen to the gate, these seruitors doe take them vp, and carry them in +seates of beaten gold. After this sort are they borne when they goe in the +City, either for their owne businesse abroade, or to see ech other at home. +For the dignitie they haue, and office they doe beare, they be all +accompanied: the very meanest of them all that goeth in these seates is +vshered by two men at the least, that cry vnto the people to giue place, +howbeit they neede it not, for that reuerence the common people haue vnto +them. They haue also in their company certaine Sergeants with their maces +either siluered or altogether siluer, some two, some foure, other sixe, +other eight, conueniently for ech one his degree. The more principal and +chiefe Louteas haue going orderly before these Sergeants, many other with +staues, and a great many catchpoules with rods of Indish canes dragged on +the ground, so that the streets being paued, you may heare affarre off as +well the noyse of the rods, as the voyce of the criers. These fellowes +serue also to apprehend others, and the better to be knowen they weare +liuery red girdles, and in their caps peacocks feathers. Behinde these +Louteas come such as doe beare certaine tables hanged at staues endes, +wherein is written in siluer letters, the name, degree, and office of that +Loutea, whom they follow. In like maner they haue borne after them hattes +agreeable vnto their titles: if the Loutea be meane, then hath he brought +after him but one hat, and that may not be yealowe: but if he be of the +better sort, then may he haue two, three, or foure: the principall and +chiefe Louteas may haue all their hats yealow, the which among them is +accompted great honour. The Loutea for warres, although he be but meane, +may notwithstanding haue yealow hats. The Tutans and Chians, when they goe +abroad, haue besides all this before them ledde three or foure horses with +their guard in armour. + +Furthermore the Louteas, yea and all the people of China, are wont to eate +their meate sitting on stooles at high tables as we doe, and that very +cleanely, although they vse neither tableclothes nor napkins. Whatsoeuer is +set downe vpon the boord is first carued before that it be brought in: they +feede with two sticks, refraining from touching their meate with their +hands, euen as we do with forkes: for the which respect they lesse do need +any table clothes. Ne is the nation only ciuill at meate, but also in +conuersation, and in courtesie they seeme to exceede all other. Likewise in +their dealings after their maner they are so ready, that they farre passe +all other Gentiles and Moores: the greater states are so vaine, that they +line their clothes with the best silke that may be found. The Louteas are +an idle generation, without all maner of exercises and pastimes, except it +be eating and drinking. Sometimes they walke abroad in the fields to make +the souldiers shoot at pricks with their bowes, but their eating passeth: +they will stand eating euen when the other do draw to shoot. The pricke is +a great blanket spread on certaine long poles, he that striketh it, hath of +the best man there standing a piece of crimson Taffata, the which is knit +about his head: in this sort the winners be honoured, and the Louteas with +their bellies full returne home againe. The inhabitants of China be very +great Idolaters, all generally doe worship the heauens: and, as wee are +wont to say, God knoweth it: so say they at euery word, Tien Tautee, that +is to say, The heauens doe know it. Some doe worship the Sonne, and some +the Moone, as they thinke good, for none are bound more to one then to +another. [Sidenote: After the Dutch fashion.] In their temples, the which +they do call Meani, they haue a great altar in the same place as we haue, +true it is that one may goe round about it There set they vp the image of a +certaine Loutea of that countrey, whom they haue in great reuerence for +certaine notable things he did. At the right hand standeth the diuel much +more vgly painted then we doe vse to set him out, whereunto great homage is +done by such as come into the temple to aske counsell, or to draw lottes: +this opinion they haue of him, that he is malicious and able to do euil. If +you aske them what they do thinke of the souls departed, they will answere +that they be immortall, and that as soone as any one departeth out of this +life, he becommeth a diuel if he haue liued well in this world, if +otherwise, that the same diuel changeth him into a bufle, oxe, or dogge. +[Marginal note: Pythagorean like.] Wherefore to this diuel they doe much +honour, to him doe they sacrifice, praying him that he will make them like +vnto himselfe, and not like other beastes. They haue moreouer another sort +of temples, wherein both vpon the altars and also on the walls do stand +many idols well proportioned, but bare headed; these beare name Omithofon, +accompted of them spirits, but such as in heauen doe neither good nor +euill, thought to be such men and women as haue chastly liued in this world +in abstinence from fish and flesh, fed onely with rise and salates. Of that +diuel they make some accompt: for these spirits they care litle or nothing +at all. Againe they hold opinion that if a man do well in this life, the +heauens will giue him many temporall blessings, but if he doe euil, then +shall he haue infirmities, diseases, troubles, and penurie, and all this +without any knowledge of God. Finally, this people knoweth no other thing +then to liue and die, yet because they be reasonable creatures, all seemed +good vnto them we speake in our language, though it were not very +sufficient; our maner of praying especially pleased them, and truely they +are well ynough disposed to receiue the knowledge of the trueth. Our Lord +grant for his mercy all things so to be disposed, that it may sometime be +brought to passe, that so great a nation as this is perish not for want of +helpe. + +Our maner of praying so well liked them, that in prison importunately they +besought vs to write for them somewhat as concerning heauen, the which we +did to their contentation with such reasons as we knew, howbeit not very +cunningly. As they do their idolatry they laugh at themselues. If at any +time this countrey might be ioyned in league with the kingdome of +Portugale, in such wise that free accesse were had to deale with the people +there, they might all be soone conuerted. The greatest fault we doe finde +in them is Sodomie, a vice very common in the meaner sort, and nothing +strange among the best. This sinne were it left of them, in all other +things so well disposed they be, that a good interpreter in a short space +might do there great good: If, as I said, the countrey were ioyned in +league with vs. + +Furthermore the Louteas, with all the people of China, are wont to +solemnise the dayes of the new and full Moones in visiting one an other, +and making great banquets: for to that end, as I earst said, do tend all +their pastimes, and spending their dayes in pleasure. They are wont also to +solemnise ech one his birth day, whereunto their kindred and friends do +resort of custome with presents of iewels or money, receiuing againe for +their reward good cheare. They keepe in like maner a generall feast with +great banquets that day their king was borne. But their most principall and +greatest feast of all, and best cheare, is the first day of new yeere, +namely the first day of the new Moone of February, so that their first +moneth is March, and they reckon the times accordingly, respect being had +vnto the reigne of their princes: as when any deed is written, they date it +thus, Made such a day of such a moone, and such a yeere of the reigne of +such a king. And their ancient writings beare date of the yeeres of this or +that king. + +Now will I speake of the maner which the Chineans doe obserue in doing of +iustice, that it be knowen how farre these Gentiles do herein exceed many +Christians, that be more bounden then they to deale iustly and in trueth. +Because the Chinish king maketh his abode continually in the city of +Pachin, his kingdome is so great, and the shires so many, as tofore it hath +bene said: in it therefore the gouernours and rulers, much like vnto our +Shireffs, be appointed so suddenly and speedily discharged againe, that +they haue no time to grow naught. Furthermore to keepe the state in more +securitie, the Louteas that gouerne one shire are chosen out of some other +shire distant farre off, where they must leaue their wiues, children and +goods, carying nothing with them but themselues. True it is, that at their +comming thither they doe finde in a readinesse all things necessary, their +house, furniture, seruants, and all other things in such perfection and +plentie, that they want nothing. Thus the king is well serued without all +feare of treason. + +In the principall Cities of the shires be foure chiefe Louteas, before whom +are brought all matters of the inferiour Townes, throughout the whole +Realme. Diuers other Louteas haue the managing of iustice, and receiuing of +rents, bound to yeelde an accompt thereof vnto the greater officers. Other +do see that there be no euil rule kept in the Citie: ech one as it behoueth +him. [Sidenote: The Italians call it the strapado.] Generally all these doe +imprison malefactors, cause them to be whipped and racked, hoysing them vp +and downe by the armes with a cord, a thing very vsuall there, and +accompted no shame. These Louteas do vse great diligence in the +apprehending of theeues, so that it is a wonder to see a theefe escape away +in any City, towne or village. Vpon the sea neere vnto the shoare many are +taken, and looke euen as they are taken, so be they first whipped, and +afterward layde in prison, where shortly after they all die for hunger and +cold. At that time when we were in prison, there died of them aboue +threescore and ten. If happely any one, hauing the meanes to get food, do +escape, he is set with the condemned persons, and prouided for as they be +by the King, in such wise as hereafter it shalbe said. + +Their whips be certaine pieces of canes, cleft in the middle, in such sort +that they seeme rather plaine then sharpe. He that is to be whipped lieth +groueling on the ground: vpon his thighes the hangman layeth on blowes +mightily with these canes, that the standers by tremble at their crueltie. +Ten stripes draw a great deale of blood, 20. or 30. spoile the flesh +altogether, 50. or 60. will require long time to bee healed, and if they +come to the number of one hundred, then are they incurable. + +The Louteas obserue moreouer this: when any man is brought before them to +be examined, they aske him openly in the hearing of as many as be present, +be the offence neuer so great. Thus did they also behaue themselues with +vs: For this cause amongst them can here be no false witnesse, as daily +amongst vs it falleth out. This good commeth thereof, that many being +alwayes about the Iudge to heare the euidence, and beare witnesse, the +processe cannot be falsified, as it happeneth sometimes with vs. The +Moores, Gentiles, and Iewes haue all their sundry othes, the Moores do +sweare by their Mossafos, the Brachmans by their Fili, the rest likewise by +the things they do worship. The Chineans though they be wont to sweare by +heauen, by the Moone, by the Sunne, and by all their Idoles, in iudgement +neuertheless they sweare not at all. If for some offence an othe be vsed of +any one, by and by with the least euidence he is tormented, so be the +witnesses he bringeth, if they tell not the trueth, or do in any point +disagree, except they be men of worship and credit, who are beleeued +without any further matter: the rest are made to confesse the trueth by +force of torments and whips. Besides this order obserued of them in +examinations, they do feare so much their King, and he where he maketh his +abode keepeth them so lowe, that they dare not once stirre. Againe, these +Louteas as great as they be, notwithstanding the multitude of Notaries they +haue, not trusting any others, do write all great processes and matters of +importance themselues. Moreouer one vertue they haue worthy of great +praise, and that is, being men so wel regarded and accompted as though they +were princes, yet they be patient aboue measure in giuing audience. We +poore strangers brought before them might say what we would, as all to be +lyes and fallaces that they did write, ne did we stand before them with the +usuall ceremonies of that Countrey, yet did they beare with vs so +patiently, that they caused vs to wonder, knowing specially how litle any +aduocate or Iudge is wont in our Countrey to beare with vs. For wheresoeuer +in any Towne of Christendome should be accused vnknowen men as we were, I +know not what end the very innocents cause would haue: but we in a heathen +Countrey, hauing our great enemies two of the chiefest men in a whole +Towne, wanting an interpreter, ignorant of that Countrey language, did in +the end see our great aduersaries cast into prison for our sake, and +depriued of their Offices and honour for not doing iustice, yea not to +escape death: for, as the rumour goeth, they shalbe beheaded. Somewhat is +now to be said of the lawes that I haue bene able to know in this Countrey, +and first, no theft or murther is at any time pardoned: adulterers are put +in prison, and the fact once prooued, are condemned to die, the womans +husband must accuse them: this order is kept with men and women found in +that fault, but theeues and murderers are imprisoned as I haue said, where +they shortly die for hunger and cold. If any one happely escape by bribing +the Gailer to giue him meate, his processe goeth further, and commeth to +the Court where he is condemned to die. [Sidenote: A pillory boord.] +Sentence being giuen, the prisoner is brought in publique with a terrible +band of men that lay him in Irons hand and foot, with a boord at his necke +one handfull broad, in length reaching downe to his knees, cleft in two +parts, and with a hole one handfull downeward in the table fit for his +necke, the which they inclose vp therein, nailing the boord fast together; +one handfull of the boord standeth vp behinde in the necke: The sentence +and cause wherefore the fellon was condemned to die, is written in that +part of the table that standeth before. + +This ceremony ended, he is laid in a great prison in the company of some +other condemned persons, the which are found by the king as long as they do +liue. The bord aforesaid so made tormenteth the prisoners very much, +keeping them both from rest, and eke letting them to eat commodiously, +their hands being manacled in irons vnder that boord, so that in fine there +is no remedy but death. In the chiefe Cities of euery shire, as we haue +erst said, there be foure principall houses, in ech of them a prison: but +in one of them, where the Taissu maketh his abode, there is a greater and a +more principall prison then in any of the rest: and although in euery City +there be many, neuerthelesse in three of them remaine onely such as be +condemned to die. Their death is much prolonged, for that ordinarily there +is no execution done but once a yeere, though many die for hunger and cold, +as we haue seene in this prison. Execution is done in this maner. The +Chian, to wit, the high Commissioner or Lord chiefe Iustice, at the yeres +end goeth to the head City, where he heareth againe the causes of such as +be condemned. Many times he deliuereth some of them, declaring that boord +to haue bene wrongfully put about their necks: the visitation ended, he +choseth out seuen or eight, not many more or lesse of the greatest +malefactors, the which, to feare and keepe in awe the people, are brought +into a great market place, where all the great Louteas meete together, and +after many ceremonies and superstitions, as the vse of the Countrey is, are +beheaded. This is done once a yeere: who so escapeth that day, may be sure +that he shall not be put to death all that yeere following, and so +remaineth at the kings charges in the greater prison. In that prison where +we lay were alwayes one hundred and mo of these condemned persons, besides +them that lay in other prisons. + +These prisons wherein the condemned caytifes do remaine are so strong, that +it hath not bene heard, that any prisoner in all China hath escaped out of +prison, for in deed it is a thing impossible. The prisons are thus builded. +First all the place is mightily walled about, the walles be very strong and +high, the gate of no lesse force: within it three other gates, before you +come where the prisoners do lye, there many great lodgings are to be seene +of the Louteas, Notaries, Parthions, that is, such as do there keepe watch +and ward day and night, the court large and paued, on the one side whereof +standeth a prison, with two mighty gates, wherein are kept such prisoners +as haue committed enormious offences. This prison is so great, that in it +are streets and Market places wherein all things necessary are sold. Yea +some prisoners liue by that kind of trade, buying and selling, and letting +out beds to hire: some are dayly sent to prison, some dayly deliuered, +wherefore this place is neuer void of 7. or eight hundred men that go at +libertie. + +Into one other prison of condemned persons shall you go at three yron +gates, the court paued and vauted round about, and open aboue as it were a +cloister. In this cloister be eight roomes with yron doores, and in ech of +them a large gallerie, wherein euery night the prisoners do lie at length, +their feet in the stocks, their bodies hampered in huge wooden grates that +keep them from sitting, so that they lye as it were in a cage, sleepe if +they can: in the morning they are losed againe, that they may go into the +court. Notwithstanding the strength of this prison, it is kept with a +garrison of men, part whereof watch within the house, part of them in the +court, some keepe about the prison with lanterns and watch-bels answering +one another fiue times euery night, and giuing warning so lowd, that the +Loutea resting in a a chamber not neere thereunto, may heare them. In these +prisons of condemned persons remaine some 15, other 20. yeres imprisoned, +not executed, for the loue of their honorable friends that seeke to prolong +their liues. Many of these prisoners be shoomakers, and haue from the king +a certaine allowance of rise: some of them worke for the keeper, who +suffreth them to go at libertie without fetters and boords, the better to +worke. Howbeit when the Loutea called his checke roll, and with the keeper +vieweth them, they all weare their liuerses, that is, boords at their +necks, yronned hand and foot. When any of these prisoners dieth, he is to +be seene of the Loutea and Notaries, brought out of a gate so narrow, that +there can but one be drawen out there at once. The prisoners being brought +forth, one of the aforesaid Parthions striketh him thrise on the head with +an yron sledge, that done he is deliuered vnto his friends, if he haue any, +otherwise the king hireth men to cary him to his buriall in the fields. + +Thus adulterers and theeues are vsed. Such as be imprisoned for debt once +knowen, lie there vntill it be paied. [Sidenote: Of like the first lenders +be the more wealthie.] The Taissu or Loutea calleth them many times before +him by the vertue of his office, who vnderstanding the cause wherefore they +do not pay their debts, appointeth them a certaine time to do it, within +the compasse whereof if they discharge not their debts being debtors in +deed, then they be whipped and condemned to perpetuall imprisonment: if the +creditors be many, and one is to be paied before another, they do, contrary +to our maner, pay him first of whom they last borrowed, and so ordinarily +the rest, in such sort that the first lender be the last receiuer. The same +order is kept in paying legacies: the last named receiueth his portion +first. They accompt it nothing to shew fauour to such a one as can do the +like againe: but to do good to them that haue litle or nothing, that is +worth thanks, therefore pay they the last before the first, for that their +intent seemeth rather to be vertuous then gainefull. + +When I said, that such as be committed to prison for theft and murther were +iudged by the Court, I ment not them that were apprehended in the deed +doing, for they need no triall, but are brought immediatly before the +Tutan, who out of hand giueth sentence. Others not taken so openly, which +do need trial, are the malefactors put to execution once a yere in the +chiefe cities, to keepe in awe the people: or condemned, do remaine in +prison, looking for their day. Theeues being taken are caried to prison +from one place to another in a chest vpon mens shoulders, hired therefore +by the king, the chest is 6. handfuls high, the prisoner sitteth therein +vpon a bench, the couer of the chest is two boords, amid them both a +pillery-like hole, for the prisoners necke, there sitteth he with his head +without the chest, and the rest of his body within, not able to mooue or +turne his head this way or that way, nor to plucke it in; the necessities +of nature he voydeth at a hole in the bottome of a chest, the meate he +eateth is put into his mouth by others. There abideth he day and night +during his whole iourney: if happily his porters stumble, or the chest do +iogge or be set down carelessly, it turneth to his great paines that +sitteth therein, al such motions being vnto him hanging as it were. Thus +were our companions carried from Cinceo, 7. dayes iourney, neuer taking any +rest as afterward they told vs, and their greatest griefe was to stay by +the way: as soone as they came, being taken out of the chests, they were +not able to stand on their feet, and two of them died shortly after. When +we lay in prison at Fuquieo, we came many times abroad, and were brought to +the pallaces of noble men, to be seene of them and their wiues, for that +they had neuer seene any Portugale before. Many things they asked vs of our +Countrey, and our fashions, and did write euery thing, for they be curious +in nouelties aboue measure. The gentlemen shew great curtesie vnto +strangers, and so did we finde at their hands, and because that many times +we were brought abroad into the City, somewhat wil I say of such things as +I did see therein, being a gallant City, and chiefe in one of the 13. +shires aforesaid. The City Fuquieo is very great, and mightily walled with +square stone both within and without, and, as it may seeme by the breadth +thereof, filled vp in the middle with earth, layd ouer with brick and +couered with tyle, after the maner of porches or galleries, that one might +dwel therein. The staires they vse are so easily made, that one may go them +vp and downe a horse-backe, as eftsoones they do: the streets are paued, as +already it hath bin said: there be a great number of Marchants, euery one +hath written in a great table at his doore such things as he hath to sel. +In like maner euery artisane painteth out his craft: the market places be +large, great abundance of al things there be to be sold. The city standeth +vpon water, many streames run through it, the banks pitched, and so broad +that they serue for streets to the cities vse. Ouer the streams are sundry +bridges both of timber and stone, which being made leuel with the streets, +hinder not the passage of the barges too and fro, the chanels are so deepe. +Where the streames come in and go out of the city, be certaine arches in +the wal, there go in and out their Parai, that is a kind of barges they +haue, and that in the day time only: at night these arches are closed vp +with gates, so do they shut vp al the gates of the City. These streames and +barges do ennoblish very much the City, and make it as it were to seeme +another Venice. The buildings are euen, wel made, high, not lofted, except +it be some wherein marchandize is laid. It is a world to see how great +these cities are, and the cause is, for that the houses are built euen, as +I haue said, and do take a great deale of roome. One thing we saw in this +city that made vs al to wonder, and is worthy to be noted: namely, ouer a +porch at the comming in to one of the aforesaid 4. houses, which the king +hath in euery shire for his gouernors, as I haue erst said, standeth a +tower built vpon 40. pillers, ech one whereof is but one stone, ech one 40. +handfuls or spans long: in bredth or compasse 12, as many of vs did measure +them. Besides this, their greatnesse is such in one piece, that it might +seeme impossible to worke them: they be moreouer cornered, and in colour, +length and breadth so like, that the one nothing differeth from the other. +This thing made vs all to wonder very much. + +We are wont to cal this country China, and the people Chineans, but as long +as we were prisoners, not hearing amongst them at any time that name, I +determined to learne how they were called: and asked sometimes by them +thereof, for that they vnderstood vs not when we called them Chineans, I +answered them, that al the inhabitants of India named them Chineans, +wherefore I praied them that they would tel me, for what occasion they are +so called, whether peraduenture any city of theirs bare that name. Hereunto +they alwayes answered me, that they haue no such name, nor euer had. Then +did I aske them what name the whole Country bareth, and what they would +answere being asked of other nations what countrymen they were? It was told +me that of ancient time in this country had bin many kings, and though +presently it were al vnder one, ech kingdom neuertheles enioyed that name +it first had, these kingdomes are the prouinces I spake of before. +[Sidenote: Tamen the proper name of China.] In conclusion they said, that +the whole country is called Tamen, and the inhabitants Tamegines, so that +this name China or Chineans, is not heard of in that country. I thinke that +the neernesse of another prouince thereabout called Cochinchina, and the +inhabitants thereof Cochinesses, first discovered before China was, lying +not far from Malacca, did giue occasion to ech of the nations, of that name +Chineans, as also the whole country to be named China. But their proper +name is that aforesaid. + +I haue heard moreover that in the City of Nanquim remaineth a table of +gold, and in it written a kings name, as a memory of that residence the +kings were wont to keepe there. This table standeth in a great pallace, +couered alwayes, except it be on some of their festiuall dayes, at what +time they are wont to let it be seene, couered neuertheless as it is, all +the nobilitie of the City going of duetie to doe it euery day reuerence. +The like is done in the head Cities of all the other shires in the pallaces +of the Ponchiassini, wherein these aforesaid tables doe stand with the +kings name written in them, although no reuerence be done thereunto but in +solemn feastes. + +[Sidenote: Pochan, or Pachin.] I haue likewise vnderstood that the city +Pachin, where the king maketh his abode, is so great, that to go from one +side to the other, besides the Suburbs, the which are greater then the City +it selfe, it requireth one whole day a horseback, going hackney pase. In +the suburbs be many wealthy marchants of all sorts. They tolde me +furthermore that it was moted about, and in the moates great store of fish, +whereof the King maketh great gaines. + +[Sidenote: Their enemies.] It was also told me that the king of China had +no kings to wage battel withall, besides the Tartars, with whom he had +concluded a peace more then 80. yeres ago. Neuerthelesse their friendship +was not so great, that the one nation might marry with the other. +[Sidenote: Marriage of the kings children.] And demanding with whom they +married, they said, that in olde time the Chinish kings when they would +marry their daughters, accustomed to make a solemne feast, whereunto came +all sorts of men. The daughter that was to be married, stood in a place +where she might see them all, and looke whom she liked best, him did she +chuse to husband, and if happely he were of a base condition, hee became by +and by a gentleman: but this custome hath bene left long since. Now a dayes +the king marrieth his daughters at his owne pleasure, with great men of the +kingdome: the like order he obserueth in the marriage of his sonnes. + +They haue moreouer one thing very good, and that which made vs all to +maruelle at them being Gentiles: namely, that there be hospitals in all +their Cities, alwayes full of people, we neuer saw any poore body begge. +[Marginal note: He speaketh not here of all China, but of the Cities, for +in other places there be beggers, as you haue seene already, swarming out +of trees.] We therefore asked the cause of this: answered it was, that in +euery City there is a great circuit, wherein be many houses for poore +people, for blinde, lame, old folke, not able to trauaile for age, nor +hauing any other meanes to liue. These folke haue in the aforesaid houses +euer plentie of rice during their liues, but nothing else. Such as be +receiued into these houses, come in after this maner. When one is sicke, +blinde or lame, he maketh a supplication to the Ponchiassi, and prouing +that to be true he writeth, he remaineth in the aforesaid great lodging as +long as he liueth: besides this they keepe in these places swine and +hennes, whereby the poore be relieued without going a begging. + +I said before that China was full of riuers, but now I minde to confirme +the same anew: for the farther we went into the Countrey, the greater we +found the riuers. Sometimes we were so farre off from the sea, that where +we came no sea fish had bene seene, and salt was there very deare, of fresh +water fish yet was there great abundance, and that fish very good: they +keep it good after this maner. Where the riuers do meete, and so passe into +the sea, there lieth great store of boats, specially where no salt-water +commeth, and that in March and April. These boates are so many that it +seemeth wonderfull, ne serue they for other then to take small fish. By the +riuers sides they make leyres of fine and strong nettes, that lye three +handfulls vnder water, and one aboue to keepe and nourish their fish in, +vntill such time as other fishers do come with boates, bringing for that +purpose certaine great chests lined with paper, able to holde water, +wherein they cary their fish vp and downe the riuer, euery day renuing the +chest with fresh water, and selling their fish in euery City, towne and +village where they passe, vnto the people as they neede it: most of them +haue net leyres to keepe fish in alwayes for their prouision. Where the +greater boates cannot passe any further forward, they take lesser, and +because the whole Countrey is very well watered, there is so great plenty +of diuers sorts of fish, that it is wonderfull to see: assuredly we were +amazed to behold the maner of their prouision. [Sidenote: Meanes to fat +fish.] Their fish is chiefly nourished with the dung of Bufles and oxen, +that greatly fatteth it. Although I said their fishing to be in March and +April at what time we saw them do it, neuerthelesse they told vs that they +fished at all times, for that vsually they do feed on fish, wherefore it +behoueth them to make their prouision continually. + +When we had passed Fuquien, we went into Quicin shire, [Sidenote: He +speaketh of Fuquien shire.] where the fine clay vessell is made, as I said +before: and we came to a City, the one side whereof is built vpon the the +foote of a hill, whereby passeth a riuer nauigable: there we tooke boat, +and went by water toward the Sea: on ech side of the riuer we found many +Cities, Townes and villages, wherein we saw great store of marchandize, but +specially of fine clay: there did we land by the way to buy victuals and +other necessaries. Going downe this riuer Southward, we were glad that wee +drew neere vnto a warmer Countrey, from whence we had bene farre distant: +this Countrey we passed through in eight dayes, for our iourney lay downe +the streame. Before that I doe say any thing of that shire we came into, I +will first speake of the great City of Quicin, wherein alwayes remaineth a +Tutan, that is a gouernour, as you haue seene, though some Tutans do +gouerne two or three shires. + +That Tutan that was condemned for our cause, of whom I spake before, was +borne in this Countrey, but he gouerned Foquien shire: nothing it auailed +him to be so great an officer. This Countrey is so great, that in many +places where we went, there had bene as yet no talke of his death, although +he were executed a Whole yere before. [Sidenote: Alias Cenchi.] At the +Citie Quanchi whither we came, the riuer was so great it seemed a Sea, +though it were so litle where we tooke water, that we needed small boats. +One day about nine of the clocke, beginning to row neere the walls with the +streame, we came at noone to a bridge made of many barges, ouerlinked al +together with two mightie cheines. There stayed we vntill it was late, but +we saw not one go either vp thereon or downe, except two Louteas that about +the going downe of the Sunne, came and set them down there, the one on one +side, the other on the other side. Then was the bridge opened in many +places, and barges both great and small to the number of sixe hundred began +to passe: those that went vp the streame at one place, such as came downe +at an other. When all had thus shot the bridge, then was it shut vp againe. +[Sidenote: The kings reuenues.] We heare say that euery day they take this +order in all principall places of marchandize, for paying of the Custome +vnto the king, specially for salt, whereof the greatest reuenues are made +that the king hath in this Countrey. The passage of the bridge where it is +opened, be so neere the shoare, that nothing can passe without touching the +same. To stay the barges at their pleasure, that they goe no further +forward, are vsed certaine iron instruments The bridge consisteth of 112. +barges, there stayed we vntill the euening that they were opened, +lothsomely oppressed by the multitude of people that came to see vs, so +many in number, that we were enforced to go aside from the banke vntil such +time as the bridge was opened: howbeit we were neuerthelesse thronged about +with many boates full of people. And though in other Cities and places +where we went, the people came so importunate vpon vs, that it was needfull +to withdraw our selues: yet were we here much more molested for the number +of people: and this bridge is the principall way out of the Citie vnto +another place so wel inhabited, that were it walled about, it might be +compared to the Citie. When we had shot the bridge, we kept along the Citie +vntil it was night, and then met we with another riuer that ioyned with +this, we rowed vp that by the walls vntill we came to another bridge +gallantly made of barges, but lesser a great deale then that other bridge +ouer the greater streame: here stayed we that night, and other two dayes +with more quiet, being out of the preasse of the people. These riuers do +meet without at one corner point of the City. In either of them were so +many barges great and small, that we all thought them at the least to be +aboue three thousand: the greater number thereof was in the lesser riuer, +where we were. Amongst the rest here lay certaine greater vessels, called +in their language Parai, that serue for the Tutan, when he taketh his +voyage by other riuers that ioyne with this, towards Pachin, where the king +maketh his abode. For, as many times I haue erst said, all this Countrey is +full of riuers. Desirous to see those Parai we got into some of them, where +we found some chambers set foorth with gilded beds very richly, other +furnished with tables and seats, and all other things so neat and in +perfection, that it was wonderfull. + +Quiacim shire, as farre as I can perceiue, lieth vpon the South. On that +side we kept at our first entry thereinto, trauayling not farre from the +high mountaines we saw there. Asking what people dwelleth beyond those +monntaines, it was told me that they be theeues and men of a strange +language. And because that vnto sundry places neere this riuer the +mountaines doe approch, whence the people issuing downe do many times great +harme, this order is taken at the entry into Quiacim shire. To guard this +riuer whereon continually go to and fro Parai great and small fraught with +salt, fish poudred with peper, and other necessaries for that countrey, +they do lay in diuers places certaine Parai, and great barges armed, wherin +watch and ward is kept day and night on both sides of the riuer, for the +safety of the passage, and securitie of such Parai as do remaine there, +though the trauailers neuer go but many in company. In euery rode there be +at the least thirtie, in some two hundred men, as the passage requireth. +This guard is kept vsually vntill you come to the City Onchio, where +continually the Tutan of this shire, and eke of Cantan, maketh his abode. +From that City vpward, where the riuer waxeth more narrow, and the passage +more dangerous, there be alwayes armed one hundred and fiftie Parai, to +accompany other vessels fraught with marchandize, and all this at the Kings +charges. This seemed to me one of the strangest things I did see in this +Countrey. + +When we lay at Fuquien, we did see certaine Moores, who knew so litle of +their secte, that they could say nothing else but that Mahomet was a Moore, +my father was a Moore, and I am a Moore, with some other wordes of their +Alcoran, wherewithall, in abstinence from swines flesh, they liue vntill +the diuel take them all. This when I saw, and being sure that in many +Chinish Cities the reliques of Mahomet are kept, as soone as we came to the +City where these fellowes be, I enfourmed my selfe of them, and learned the +trueth. + +[Sidenote: Great ships comming from the North.] These Moores, as they tolde +me, in times past came in great ships fraught with marchandise from Pachin +ward, to a port granted vnto them by the king, as hee is wont to all them +that traffique into this Countrey, where they being arriued at a litle +Towne standing in the hauens mouth, in time conuerted vnto their sect the +greatest Loutea there. When that Loutea with all his family was become +Moorish, the rest began likewise to doe the same. In this part of China the +people be at libertie, euery one to worship and folow what him liketh best. +Wherefore no body tooke heede thereto, vntil such time as the Moores +perceiuing that many followed them in superstition, and that the Loutea +fauoured them, they began to forbid wholy the eating of swines flesh. But +all these countreymen and women chosing rather to forsake father and +mother, then to leaue off eating of porke, by no meanes would yeeld to that +proclamation. For besides the great desire they all haue to eate that kinde +of meate, many of them do liue thereby: and therefore the people complained +vnto the Magistrates, accusing the Moores of a conspiracie pretended +betwixt them and the Loutea against their king. In this countrey, as no +suspition, no not one traiterous word is long borne withall, so was the +king speedily aduertised thereof, who gaue commandement out of hand that +the aforesaid Loutea should be put to death, and with him the Moores of +most importance: the other to be layde first in prison, and afterward to be +sent abroad into certaine Cities, where they remained perpetuall slaues +vnto the king. To this City came by happe men and women threescore and +odde, who at this day are brought to fiue men and foure women, for it is +how twenty yeeres since this happened. [Sidenote: That is their temples.] +Their offspring passeth the number of two hundreth, and they in this City, +as the rest in other Cities whither they were sent, haue their Moscheas, +whereunto they all resort euery Friday to keepe their holy day. But, as I +thinke, that will no longer endure, then whiles they doe liue that came +from thence, for their posteritie is so confused, that they haue nothing of +a Moore in them but abstinence from swines flesh, and yet many of them doe +eate thereof primly. [Sidenote: It should seeme by their voyage to be +Cardandan in Ortelius.] They tell mee that their natiue Countrey hath name +Camarian, a firme land wherein be many kings, and the Indish countrey well +knowen vnto them. It may so be: for as soone as they did see our seruants +(our seruants were Preuzaretes) they iudged them to be Indians: many of +their wordes sounded vpon the Persian tongue, but none of vs coulde +vnderstand them. I asked them whether they conuerted any of the Chinish +nation vnto their secte: they answered mee, that with much a doe they +conuerted the women with whom they doe marry, yeelding me no other cause +thereof, but the difficultie they finde in them to be brought from eating +swines flesh and drinking of wine. I am perswaded therefore, that if this +Countrey were in league with vs, forbidding them neither of both, it would +be an easie matter to draw them to our Religion, from their superstition, +whereat they themselues do laugh when they do then idolatry. + +[Sidenote: A Northerne Sea.] I haue learned moreouer that the Sea, whereby +these Moores that came to China were wont to trauaile, is a very great +gulfe, that falleth into this Countrey out from Tartaria and Persia, +leauing on the other side all the Countrey of China, and land of the +Mogores, drawing alwayes toward the South: and of all likelyhood it is euen +so, because that these Moores, the which we haue seene, be rather browne +then white, whereby they shewe themselues to cone from some warmer Countrey +then China is neere to Pachin, where the riuers are frosen in the Winter +for colde, and many of them so vehemently that carts may passe ouer them. + +We did see in this Citie many Tartars, Mogores, Brames, and Laoynes, both +men and women. The Tartars are men very white, good horsemen and archers, +confining with China on that side where Pachin standeth, separated from +thence by great mountaines that are bewixt these kingdomes. Ouer them be +certaine wayes to passe, and for both sides, Castles continually kept with +Souldiers: in time past the Tartars were wont alwayes to haue warres with +the Chineans, but these fourescore yeeres past they were quiet, vntill the +second yeere of our imprisonment. The Mogores be in like maner white, and +heathen, we are aduertised that of one side they border vpon these Tartars, +and confine with the Persian Tartars on the other side, whereof we sawe in +them some tokens, as their maner of clothes, and that kinde of hat the +Saracens doe weare. The Moores affirmed, that where the king lyeth, there +be many Tartars and Mogores, that brought into China certaine blewes of +great value: all we thought it to be Vanil of Cambaia wont to be sold at +Ormus. So that this is the true situation of that Countrey, not in the +North parts, as many times I haue heard say, confining with Germanie. + +As for the Brames we haue seene in this city Chenchi certaine men and +women, amongst whom there was one that came not long since, hauing as yet +her haire tied vp after the Pegues fashion: this woman, and other mo with +whom a black Moore damsel in our company had conference, and did vnderstand +them wel ynough, had dwelt in Pegu. This new come woman, imagining that we +ment to make our abode in that citie, bid vs to be of good comfort, for +that her countrey was not distant from thence aboue fiue dayes iourney, and +that out of her countrey there lay a high way for vs home into our owne. +Being asked the way, she answered that the first three daies the way lieth +ouer certaine great mountaines and wildernesse, afterward people are met +withall againe. [Sidenote: Southward from Chenchi to the sea.] Thence two +dayes iourney more to the Brames countrey. Wherefore I doe conclude, that +Chenchi is one of the confines of this kingdome, separated by certaine huge +mountaines, as it hath bene alreadie said, that lie out towards the South. +In the residue of these mountaines standeth the prouince of Sian, the +Laoyns countrey, Camboia, Campaa, and Cochinchina. + +This citie chiefe of other sixteene is situated in a pleasant plaine +abounding in all things necessarie, sea-fish onely excepted, for it +standeth farre from the sea: of fresh fish so much store, that the market +places are neuer emptie. The walles of this city are very strong and high: +one day did I see the Louteas thereof go vpon the walles to take the view +thereof, borne in their seates which I spake of before, accompanied with a +troupe of horsemen that went two and two: It was tolde me they might haue +gone three and three. We haue seene moreouer, that within this aforesayd +Citie: the king hath moe then a thousande of his kinne lodged in great +pallaces, in diuers partes of the Citie: their gates be redde, and the +entrie into their houses, that they may be knowen, for that is the kings +colour. These Gentlemen, according to their neerenesse in blood vnto the +king, as soone as they be married receiue their place in honour: this place +neither increaseth nor diminisheth in any respect as long as the king +liueth, the king appointeth them their wiues and familie, allowing them by +the moneth all things necessarie abundantly, as he doth to his gouernours +of shires and Cities, howbeit, not one of these hath as long as he liueth +any charge or gouernement at all. They giue themselues to eating and +drinking, and be for the most part burly men of bodie, insomuch that +espying any one of them whom we had not seene before, we might knowe him to +be the King his cosin. They be neuerthelesse very pleasant, courteous, and +faire conditioned: neither did we find, all the time wee were in that +citie, so much honour and good intertainement any where as at their hands. +They bid vs to their houses to eate and drinke, and when they found vs not, +or we were not willing to go with them, they bid our seruants and slaues, +causing them to sit downe with the first. Notwithstanding the good lodging +these Gentlemen haue, so commodious that they want nothing, yet are they in +this bondage, that during life they neuer goe abroad. The cause, as I did +vnderstand, wherefore the king so vseth his cosins is, that none of them at +any time may rebell against him: and thus he shutteth them vp in three or +foure other cities. Most of them can play on the Lute, and to make that +kinde of pastime peculiar vnto them onely, all other in the cities where +they doe liue be forbidden that instrument, the Curtisans and blinde folke +onely accepted, who be musicians and can play. + +This king furthermore, for the greater securitie of his Realme and the +auoiding of tumults, letteth not one in all his countrey to be called Lord, +except he be of his blood. Manie great estates and gouernours there be, +that during their office are lodged Lord-like, and doe beare the port of +mightie Princes: but they be so many times displaced and other placed a +new, that they haue not the time to become corrupt. True it is that during +their office they be well prouided for, as afterward also lodged at the +kings charges, and in pension as long as they liue, payed them monethly in +the cities where they dwell by certaine officers appointed for that +purpose. The king then is a Lord onely, not one besides him as you haue +seene, except it be such as be of his blood. A Nephew likewise of the king, +the kings sisters sonne, lyeth continually within the walles of the citie +in a strong pallace built Castlewise, euen as his other cousins do, +remayning alwayes within doores, serued by Eunuches, neuer dealing with any +matters. On their festiuall dayes, new moones, and full moones the +magistrates make great bankets, and so do such as be of the king his blood. +[Sidenote: Goa is a city of the Portugals in the East Indies.] The kings +Nephew hath to name Vanfuli, his pallace is walled about, the wall is not +high but fouresquare, and in circuit nothing inferiour to the wals of Goa, +the outside is painted red, in euery square a gate, and ouer each gate a +tower made of timber excellently well wrought: before the principall gate +of the foure that openeth in to the high street no Loutea, be he neuer so +great, may passe on horsebacke, or carried in his seat. Amidst this +quadrangle standeth the pallace where that Nobleman lyeth, doubtlesse worth +the sight, although we came not in to see it. By report the roofes of the +towers and houses are glased greene, and the greater part of the quadrangle +set with sauage trees, as Okes, Chesnuts, Cypresse, Pineapples, Cedars, and +other such like that we do want, after the manner of a wood, wherein are +kept Stags, Oxen, and other beasts, for that Lord his recreation neuer +going abroad as I haue sayd. One preheminence this citie hath aboue the +rest where we haue bene, and that of right, as we do thinke, that besides +the multitude of market places wherein all things are to be sold through +euery streete continually are cryed all things necessary, as flesh of all +sortes, freshfish, hearbes, oyle, vineger, meale, rise: in summa, all +things so plentifully, that many houses neede no servants, euery thing +being brought to their doores. Most part of the marchants remaine in the +suburbes, for that the cities are shut vp euery night, as I haue said. The +marchants therefore, the better to attend their businesse, do chuse rather +to make their abode without in the suburbes then within the citie. I haue +seene in this riuer a pretie kinde of fishing, not to be omitted in my +opinion, and therefore I will set it downe. [Marginal note: Odeicus writeth +of the like.] The king hath in many riuers good store of barges full of +sea-crowes that breede, are fedde and doe die therein, in certaine cages, +allowed monethely a certaine prouision of rise. These barges the king +bestoweth vpon his greatest magistrates, giuing to some two, to some three +of them as be thinketh good, to fish therewithal after this manner. At the +houre appointed to fish, all the barges are brought together in a circle, +where the riuer is shalow, and the crowes tyed together vnder the wings are +let leape downe into the water some vnder, some aboue, woorth the looking +vpon: each one as he hath filled his bagge, goeth to his owne barge and +emptieth it, which done, he returneth to fish againe. Thus hauing taken +good store of fish, they set the crowes at libertie, and do suffer them to +fish for their owne pleasure. There were in that city where I was, twentie +barges at the least of these aforesayd crowes. I went almost euery day to +see them, yet could I neuer be throughly satisfyed to see so strange a kind +of fishing. + + * * * * * + +Of the Iland Iapan, and other litle Iles in the East Ocean. + +By R. Willes. + +The extreame part of the knowen world vnto vs is the noble Iland Giapan, +written otherwise Iapon and Iapan. This Island standeth in the East Ocean, +beyond all Asia, betwixt Cathayo and the West Indies sixe and thirtie +degrees Northward from the Equinoctial line, in the same clime with the +South part of Spain and Portugall, distant from thence by sea sixe thousand +leagues: the trauile thither, both for ciuill discord, great pyracie, and +often shipwracks is very dangerous. This countrey is hillie and pestered +with snow, wherefore it is neither so warme as Portugall, nor yet so +wealthy, as far as we can learne, wanting oyle, butter, cheese, milke, +egges, sugar, honny, vinegar, saffron, cynamom and pepper. Barleybranne the +Ilanders doe vse in stead of salt: medicinable things holsome for the bodie +haue they none at all. Neuerthelesse in that Iland sundry fruites doe +growe, not much vnlike the fruites of Spaine: and great store of Siluer +mynes are therein to be seene. The people are tractable, ciuill, wittie, +courteous, without deceit, in vertue and honest conuersation exceeding all +other nations lately discouered, but so much standing vpon their +reputation, that their chiefe Idole may be thought honour. The contempt +thereof causeth among them much discord and debate, manslaughter and +murther: euen for their reputation they doe honour their parents, keepe +their promises, absteine from adulterie and robberies, punishing by death +the least robbery done, holding for a principle, that whosoeuer stealeth a +trifle, will, if he see occasion, steale a greater thing. It may be theft +is so seuerely punished of them, for that the nation is oppressed with +scarcitie of all things necessary, and so poore, that euen for miserie they +strangle their owne children, preferring death before want. These fellowes +doe neither eate nor kill any foule. They liue chiefely by fish, hearbes, +and fruites, so healthfully, that they die very old. Of Rice and Wheat +there is no great store. No man is ashamed there of his pouertie, neither +be their gentlemen therefore lesse honoured of the meaner people, neither +will the poorest gentleman there matche his childe with the baser sort for +any gaine, so much they do make more account of gentry then of wealth. The +greatest delight they haue is in armour, each boy at fourteene yeeres of +ages, be he borne gentle or otherwise, hath his sword and dagger: very good +archers they be, contemning all other nations in comparison of their +manhood and prowesse, putting not vp one iniurie be it neuer so small in +worde or deede, among themselues. They feede moderately, but they drinke +largely. The vse of vines they knowe not, their drinke they make of Rice, +vtterly they doe abhorre dice, an all games, accounting nothing more vile +in a man, then to giue himselfe vnto those things that make vs greedy and +desirous to get other mens goods. If at any time they do sweare, for that +seldome they are wont to doe, they sweare by the Sunne: many of them are +taught good letters, wherfore they may so much the sooner be brought vnto +Christianitie. Each one is contented with one wife: they be all desirous to +learne, and naturally inclined vnto honesty and courtesie: godly talke they +listen vnto willingly, especially when they vnderstand it throughly. Their +gouernment consisteth of 3 estates. The first place is due vnto the high +Priest, by whose laws and decrees all publike and priuate matters +appertayning to religion are decided. The sects of their clergie men, whom +they doe call Bonzi, be of no estimation or authoritie except the high +Priest by letters patent doe confirme the same: he confirmeth and alloweth +of their Tundi, who be as it were Bishops, although in many places they are +nominated by sundry Princes. These Tundi are greatly honoured of all sorts: +they doe giue benefices vnto inferiour ministers, and do grant licences for +many things as to eate flesh vpon those dayes they goe in pilgrimage to +their Idoles with such like priuileges. Finally, this High Priest wont to +be chosen in China for his wisedome and learning, made in Iapan for his +gentry and birth, hath so large a Dominion and reuenues so great, that +eftsones he beardeth the petie Kings and Princes there. + +Their second principal Magistrate, in their language Vo, is the chiefe +Herehaught, made by succession and birth, honoured as a God. This gentleman +neuer toucheth the ground with his foote without forfaiting of his office, +he neuer goeth abroad out of his house, nor is at all times to be seene. At +home he is either carried about in a litter, or els he goeth in wooden +Choppines a foote high from the ground: commonly he sitteth in his chaire +with a sword in one side, and a bow and arrows in the other, next his bodie +he wearth blacke, his outward garments be red, all shadowed ouer with +Cypresse, at his cappe hang certaine Lambeaux much like vnto a Bishop +Miter, his forehead is painted white and red, he eateth his meat in earthen +dishes. This Herehaught determineth in all Iapan the diuerse titles of +honour, whereof in that Iland is great plentie, each one particularly +knowen by his badge, commonly seene in sealing vp their letters, and dayly +altered according to their degrees. About this Vo euery Noble man hath his +Solicitor, for the nation is so desirous of praise and honour, that they +striue among themselues who may bribe him best. By these meanes the +Herehaught groweth so rich, that although hee haue neither land nor any +reuenues otherwise, yet may he be accounted the wealthiest man in all +Iapan. For three causes this great Magistrate may loose his office: first, +if he touch the ground with his foote, as it hath beene alreadie said: +next, if he kill any body: thirdly, if he be found an enemie vnto peace and +quietnesse, howbeit neither of these aforesaid causes is sufficient to put +him to death. + +Their third chiefe officer is a Iudge, his office is to take vp and to end +matters in controuersie, to determine of warres and peace, that which he +thinketh right, to punish rebels, wherein he may commaund the noble men to +assist him vpon paine of forfeiting their goods: neuerthelesse at all times +he is not obeyed, for that many matters are ended rather by might and +armes, then determined by law. Other controuersies are decided either in +the Temporall Court, as it seemeth good vnto the Princes, or in the +Spirituall consistorie before the Tundi. + +Rebelles are executed in this manner, especially if they be noble men or +officers. The king looke what day he giueth sentence against any one, the +same day the partie, wheresoeuer he be, is aduertised thereof, and the day +told him of his execution. The condemned person asketh of the messenger +whether it may bee lawful for him to kill himselfe: the which thing when +the king doeth graunt, the partie taking it for an honour, putteth on his +best apparel and launcing his body a crosse from the breast downe all the +belly, murthereth himselfe. This kind of death they take to be without +infamie, neither doe their children for their fathers crime so punished, +loose their goods. But if the king reserue them to be executed by the +hangman, then flocketh he together his children, his seruants, and friends +home to his house, to preserue his life by force. The king committeth the +fetching of him out vnto his chiefe Iudge, who first setteth vpon him with +bow and arrowes, and afterward with pikes and swords, vntill the rebell and +family be slaine to their perpetuall ignominie and shame. + +The Indie-writers make mention of sundry great cities in this Iland, as +Cangoxima a hauen towne in the South part thereof, and Meaco distant from +thence three hundred leagues northward, the royall seat of the king and +most wealthy of all other townes in that Iland. The people thereabout are +very noble, and their language the best Iaponish. In Maco are sayd to be +ninetie thousande houses inhabited and vpward, a famous Vniuersitie, and in +it fiue principall Colleges, besides closes and cloysters of Bonzi, +Leguixil, and Hamacata, that is, Priests, Monks and Nunnes. Other fiue +notable Vniuersities there be in Iapan, namely, Coia, Negru, Homi, Frenoi, +and Bandu. The first foure haue in them at the least three thousand and +fiue hundred schollers: in the fift are many mo. For Bandu prouince is very +great and possessed with sixe princes, fiue whereof are vassals vnto the +sixt, yet he himselfe subiect vnto the Iaponish king, vsually called the +great king of Meaco: lesser scholes there be many in diuers places of this +Ilande. And thus much specially concerning this glorious Iland, among so +many barbarous nations and rude regions, haue I gathered together in one +summe, out of sundry letters written from thence into Europe, by no lesse +faithfull reporters than famous trauellers. [Sidenote: Petrus Maffeius de +rebus Iaponicis.] For confirmation wherof, as also for the knowledge of +other things not conteyned in the premisses, the curious readers may peruse +these 4 volumes of Indian matters written long ago in Italian, and of late +compendiously made Latine, by Petrus Maffeius my old acquainted friend, +entituling the same, De rubus Iaponicis. One whole letter out of the fift +booke thereof, specially intreating of that countrey, I haue done into +English word for word in such wise as followeth. + + +Aloisius Froes to his companions in Iesus Christ that remaine in China and + India. + +The last yeere, deare brethren, I wrote vnto you from Firando, how Cosmus +Turrianus had appointed me to trauile to Meaco to helpe Gaspar Vilela, for +that there the haruest was great, the labourers few, and that I should haue +for my companion in that iourney Aloisius Almeida. It seemeth now my part, +hauing by the helpe of God ended so long a voiage, to signifie vnto you by +letter such things specially as I might thinke you would most delight to +know. And because at the beginning Almeida and I so parted the whole labour +of writing letters betwixt vs, that he should speake of our voyage, and +such things as happened therein, I should make relation of the Meachians +estate, and write what I could well learne of the Iapans manners and +conditions: setting aside all discourses of our voyage, that which standeth +me vpon I will discharge in this Epistle, that you considering how +artificially, how cunningly, vnder the pretext of religion, that craftie +aduersary of mankind leadeth and draweth vnto perdition the Iapanish +mindes, blinded with many superstitions and ceremonies, may the more pitie +this Nation. + +The inhabiters of Iapan, as men that had neuer had greatly to doe with +other Nations, in their Geography diuided the whole world into three parts, +Iapan, Sian, and China. And albeit the Iapans receiued out of Sian and +China their superstitions and ceremonies, yet doe they neuertheless +contemne all other Nations in comparison of themselues, and standing in +their owne conceite doe far preferre themselues before all other sorts of +people in wisedome and policie. + +Touching the situation of the countrey and nature of the soyle, vnto the +things eftsoones erst written, this one thing I will adde: in these Ilands, +the sommer to be most hot, the winter extreme cold. In the kingdom of +Canga, as we call it, falleth so much snow, that the houses being buried in +it, the inhabitants keepe within doores certaine moneths of the yeere, +hauing no way to come foorth except they break vp the tiles. Whirlewindes +most vehement, earthquakes so common, that the Iapans dread such kind of +feares litle or nothing at all. The countrey is ful of siluer mines +otherwise barren, not so much by fault of nature, as through the +slouthfulnesse of the inhabitants: howbeit Oxen they keepe and that for +tillage sake onely. The ayre is holesome, the waters good, the people very +faire and well bodied: bare headed commonly they goe, procuring baldnesse +with sorrow and teares, eftsoones rooting vp with pinsars all the haire of +their heads as it groweth, except it be a litle behind, the which they knot +and keepe with all diligence. Euen from their childhood they weare daggers +and swords, the which they vse to lay vnder their pillowes when they goe to +bed: in shew courteous and affable, in deede haughtie and proud. They +delight most in warlike affaires, and their greatest studie is armes. Mens +apparel diuersely coloured is worne downe halfe the legges and to the +elbowes: womens attire made handsomely like vnto a vaile, is somewhat +longer: all manner of dicing and theft they do eschewe. The marchant +although he be wealthy, is not accounted of. Gentlemen, be they neuer so +poore, retaine their place: most precisely they stand vpon their honour and +worthinesse, ceremoniously striuing among themselues in courtesies and +faire speeches. Wherein if any one happily be lesse carefull than he should +be, euen for a trifle many times he getteth euill will. Want though it +trouble most of them, so much they doe detest, that poore men cruelly +taking pittie of their infantes newly borne, especially girles, do many +times with their owne feete strangle them. Noble men, and other likewise of +meaner calling generally haue but one wife a peece, by whom although they +haue issue, yet for a trifle they diuorse themselues from their wiues, and +the wiues also sometimes from their husbands, to marry with others. After +the second degree cousins may there lawfully marry. Adoption of other mens +children is much vsed among them. In great townes most men and women can +write and reade. + +This Nation feedeth sparingly, their vsuall meat is rice and salets, and +neere the sea side fish. They feast one another many times, wherein they +vse great diligence, especially in drinking one to another, insomuch that +the better sort, least they might rudely commit some fault therein, does +vse to reade certaine bookes written of duties and ceremonies apperteyning +vnto banquets. To be delicate and fine, they put their meate into their +mouthes with litle forkes, accounting it great rudenesse to touch it with +their fingers: winter and sommer they drinke water as hot as they may +possibly abide it. Their houses are in danger of fire, but finely made and +cleane, layde all ouer with strawe-pallets, whereupon they doe both sit in +stead of stooles, and lie in their clothes with billets under their heads. +For feare of defiling these pallets, they goe either bare foote within +doores, or weare strawe pantofles on their buskins when they come abroad, +the which they lay aside at their returne home againe. Gentlemen for the +most part do passe the night in banketting, musicke, and vaine discourses, +they sleepe the day time. In Meaco and Sacaio there is good store of beds, +but they be very litle, and may be compared vnto our pues. + +In bringing vp children they vse words only to rebuke them, admonishing as +diligently and aduisedly boyes of sixe or seuen yeeres of age, as though +they were olde men. They are giuen very much to intertaine strangers, of +whom most curiously they loue to aske euen in trifles what forraine nations +doe, and their fashions. Such arguments and reasons as be manifest, and are +made plaine with examples, doe greatly persuade them. They detest all kinde +of theft, whosoeuer is taken in that fault may be slaine freely of any +bodie. No publike prisons, no common gayles, no ordinary Iusticers: +priuately each householder hath the hearing of matters at home in his owne +house, and the punishing of greater crimes that deserue death without +delay. Thus vsually the people is kept in awe and feare. + +About foure hundred yeeres past (as in their olde recordes we finde) all +Iapan was subiect vnto one Emperour whose royall seat was Meaco, in the +Iaponish language called Cubucama. But the nobtlitie rebelling against him, +by litle and litle haue taken away the greatest part of his dominion, +howbeit his title continually remayneth, and the residue in some respect +doe make great account of him still, acknowledging him for their superior. +Thus the Empyre of Iapan, in times past but one alone, is now diuided into +sixtie sixe kingdomes, the onely cause of ciuill warres continually in that +Iland, to no small hinderance of the Gospell, whilest the kings that dwell +neare together inuade one another, each one coueting to make his kingdome +greater. Furthermore in the citie Meaco is the pallace of the high Priest, +whom that nation honoureth as a God, he hath in his house 306 Idoles, one +whereof by course is euery night set by his side for a watchman. He is +thought of the common people so holy, that it may not be lawfull for him to +goe vpon the earth: if happily he doe set one foote to the ground, he +looseth his office. He is not serued very sumptuously, he is maintained by +almes. The heads and beards of his ministers are shauen, they haue name +Cangues, and their authoritie is great throughout all Iapan. The Cubucama +vseth them for Embassadores to decide controuersies betwixt princes, and to +end their warres, whereof they were wont to make very great game. It is now +two yeres since or there about, that one of them came to Bungo, to intreate +of peace betwixt the king thereof and the king of Amanguzzo. This Agent +fauouring the king of Bungo his cause more then the other, brought to passe +that the foresayd king of Bungo should keepe two kingdomes, the which he +had taken in warres from the king of Amanguzzo. Wherefore he had for his +reward of the king of Bungo aboue 30000 ducats. And thus farre hereof. + +I come now to other superstitions and ceremonies, that you may see, deare +brethren, that which I said in the beginning, how subtilly the diuell hath +deceiued the Iaponish nation, and how diligent and readie they be to obey +and worship him. And first, al remembrance and knowledge not onely of +Christ our Redeemer, but also of that one God the maker of all things is +cleane extinguished and vtterly abolished out of the Iapans hearts. +Moreouer their superstitious sects are many, whereas it is lawfull for each +one to follow that which liketh him best: but the principall sects are two, +namely the Amidans and Xacaians. Wherefore in this countrey shall you see +many monasteries, not onely of Bonzii men, but also of Bonziae women +diuersely attired, for some doe weare white vnder, and blacke vpper +garments, other goe apparelled in ash colour, and their idole hath to name +Denichi: from these the Amidanes differ very much. Againe the men Bonzii +for the most part dwell in sumptuous houses, and haue great reuenues. These +fellowes are chaste by commandement, marry they may not vpon paine of +death. In the midst of their temple is erected an altar, whereon standeth a +woodden Idole of Amida, naked from the girdle vpward, with holes in his +eares after the manner of Italian gentlewomen, sitting on a wooden rose +goodly to behold. They haue great libraries, and halles for them all to +dine and sup together, and bels wherewith they are at certaine houres +called to prayers. In the euening the Superintendent giueth each one a +theame for meditation. After midnight before the altar in their Temple they +do say Mattens at it were out of Xaca his last booke, one quier one verse, +the other quier another. Early in the morning each one giueth himselfe to +meditation one houre: they shaue their heads and beards. Their cloysters be +very large, and within the precinct thereof, Chappels of the Fotoquiens, +for by that name some of the Iapanish Saints are called: their holydaies +yeerely be very many. Most of these Bonzii be gentlemen, for that the +Iapanish nobility charged with many children, vse to make most of them +Bonzii, not being able to leaue for each one a patrimony good enough. The +Bonzii most coueteously bent, know all the wayes how to come by money. They +sell vnto the people many scrolles of paper, by the helpe whereof the +common people thinketh it selfe warranted from all power of the deuils. +They borrow likewise money to be repayed with great vsury in an other +worlde, giuing by obligation vnto the lender an assurance thereof, the +which departing out of his life he may carry with him to hell. + +There is another great company of such as are called Inambuxu, with curled +and staring haire. They make profession to finde out againe things either +lost or stolen, after this sort. They set before them a child whom the +deuill inuadeth, called vp thither by charmes: of that child then doe they +aske that which they are desirous to know. + +These mens prayers both good and bad are thought greatly to preuaile, +insomuch that both their blessings and their curses they sell vnto the +people. The nouices of this order, before they be admitted, goe together +two or three thousand in a company, vp a certaine high mountaine to doe +pennance there, threescore dayes voluntarily punishing themselues. In this +time the deuill sheweth himselfe vnto them in sundry shapes: and they like +young graduats, admitted as it were fellowes into some certaine companie, +are set foorth with white tassels hanging about their neckes, and blacke +Bonnets that scarcely couer any more then the crawne of their heads. Thus +attyred they range abroade in all Iapan, to set out themselues and their +cunning to sale, each one beating his bason which he carieth alwayes about +with him, to giue notice of their comming in al townes where they passe. + +There is also an other sort called Genguis, that make profession to shewe +by soothsaying where stollen things are, and who were the theeues. These +dwell in the toppe of an high mountaine, blacke in the face: for the +continuall heate of the sunne, for the cold windes, and raines they doe +continually endure. They marry but in their owne tribe and line: the report +goeth that they be horned beasts. They climbe vp most high rockes and +hilles, and go ouer very great riuers by the onely arte of the deuill, who +to bring those wretches the more into errour, biddeth them to goe vp a +certaine high mountaine, where they stande miserably gazing and earnestly +looking for him as long as the deuill appointeth them. At the length at +noonetide or in the euening commeth that deuill, whom they call Amida among +them to shew himselfe vnto them: this shew breedeth in the braines and +hearts of men such a kinde of superstition, that it can by no meanes be +rooted out of them afterward. + +The deuill was wont also in another mountaine to shew himselfe vnto the +Iapanish Nation. Who so was more desirous than other to go to heauen and to +enioy Paradise, thither went he to see that sight, and hauing seene the +deuill followed him (so by the deuill persuaded) into a denne vntil he came +to a deepe pit. Into this pit the deuill was wont to leape and to take with +him his worshipper whom he there murdred. This deceit was thus perceiued. +An old man blinded with this superstition, was by his sonne diswaded from +thence, but all in vaine. Wherefore his sonne followed him priuily into +that denne with his bow and arrows, where the deuill gallantly appeared +vnto him in the shape of a man. Whilest the old man falleth downe to +worshippe the deuill, his sonne speedily shooting an arrow at the spirit so +appearing, strooke a Foxe in stead of a man so suddenly was that shape +altered. This olde manne his sonne tracking the Foxe so running away, came +to that pit whereof I spake, and in the bottome thereof he found many bones +of dead men, deceiued by the deuill after that sort in time past. Thus +deliuered he his father from present death, and all other from so pestilent +an opinion. + +There is furthermore a place bearing name Coia, very famous for the +multitude of Abbyes which the Bonzii haue therein. The beginner and founder +whereof is thought to be one Combendaxis a suttle craftie fellowe, that got +the name of holinesse by cunning speech, although the lawes and ordinances +he made were altogether deuillish: he is said to haue found out the +Iapanish letters vsed at this day. In his latter yeeres this Sim suttle +buried himselfe in a fouresquare graue, foure cubites deepe, seuerely +forbidding it to be opened, for that then he died not, but rested his bodie +wearied with continuall businesse, vntill many thousand thousands of yeeres +were passed, after the which time a great learned man named Mirozu should +come into Iapan, and then would he rise vp out of his graue againe. About +his tombe many lampes are lighted, sent thither out of diuerse prouinces, +for that the people are perswaded that whosoeuer is liberall and +beneficiall towardes the beautifying of that monument shall not onely +increase in wealth in this world, but in the life to come be safe through +Combendaxis helpe. Such as giue themselues to worship him, liue in those +Monasteries or Abbyes with shauen heads, as though they had forsaken all +secular matters, whereas in deede they wallow in all sortes of wickednesse +and lust. In these houses, the which are many (as I sayd) in number, doe +remaine 6000 Bonzii, or thereabout besides the multitude of lay men, women +be restrained from thence vpon paine of death. Another company of Bonzii +dwelleth at Fatonochaiti. They teach a great multitude of children all +tricks and sleights of guile and theft: whom they do find to be of great +towardnes, those do they instruct in al the petigrues of princes, and +fashions of the nobilitie, in chiualrie and eloquence, and so send them +abroad into other prouinces, attired like yong princes, to this ende, that +faining themselues to be nobly borne, they may with great summes of money +borowed vnder the colour and pretence of nobilitie returne againe. +Wherefore this place is so infamous in all Iapan, that if any scholer of +that order be happily taken abroad, he incontinently dieth for it. +Neuerthelesse these cousiners leaue not daily to vse their woonted +wickednesse and knauerie. + +[Sidenote: A warrelike people 300 leagues to the North of Meaco.] North +from Iapan, three hundred leagues out of Meaco, lieth a great countrey of +sauage men clothed in beasts skinnes, rough bodied, with huge beards and +monstrous muchaches, the which they hold vp with litle forkes as they +drinke. These people are great drinkers of wine, fierce in warres, and much +feared of the Iapans: being hurt in fight, they wash their wounds with salt +water, other Surgerie haue they none. In their breasts they are sayd to +cary looking glasses: their swordes they tie to their heads, in such wise, +that the handle doe rest vpon their shoulders. Seruice and ceremonies haue +they none at all, onely they are woont to worship heauen. To Aquita a great +towne in that Iaponish kingdom, which we call Geuano, they much resort for +marchandise, and the Aquitanes likewise doe trauell in to their countrey, +howbeit not often, for that there many of them are slaine by the +inhabiters. + +Much more concerning this matter I had to write: but to auoyd tediousnesse +I will come to speake of the Iapans madnesse againe, who most desirous of +vaine glory doe thinke then specially to get immortall fame, when they +procure themselues to be most sumptuously and solemnly buried: their +burials and obsequies in the citie Meaco are done after this maner. +[Sidenote: The Iapanish funerals.] About one houre before the dead body be +brought fourth, a great multitude of his friends apparelled in their best +aray goe before vnto the fire, with them goe their kinswomen and such as +bee of their acquaintance, clothed in white, (for that is the mourning +colour there) with a changeable coloured vaile on their heads. Each woman +hath with her also, according to her abilitie, all her familie trimmed vp +in white mockado: the better sort and wealthier women goe in litters of +Cedar artificially wrought and richly dressed. In the second place marcheth +a great company of footemen sumptuously apparelled. Then afarre off commeth +one of these Bonzii master of the ceremonies for that superstition, brauely +clad in silkes and gold, in a large and high litter excellently well +wrought, accompanied with 30 other Bonzii or thereabout, wearing hats, +linnen albes, and fine blacke vpper garments. Then attired in ashe colour +(for this colour also is mourning) with a long torch of Pineaple, he +sheweth the dead body the way vnto the fire, lest it either stumble or +ignorantly go out of the way. Well neere 200 Bonzii folow him singing the +name of that deuill the which the partie deceassed chiefly did worship in +his life time, and therewithall a very great bason is beaten euen to the +place of fire instead of a bell. Then follow two great paper baskets hanged +open at staues endes full of paper roses diuersly coloured, such as beare +them doe march but slowly, shaking euer now and then their staues, that the +aforesayd flowers may fall downe by litle and litle as it were drops of +raine: and be whirled about with wind. This shower say they is an argument +that the soule of the dead man is gone to paradise. After al this, eight +beardles Bonzii orderly two and two drag after them on the ground long +speares, the points backward, with flags of one cubite a piece, wherein the +name also of that idole is written. Then there be caried 10 lanterns +trimmed with the former inscription, ouercast with a fine vaile, and +candles burning in them. [Sidenote: They burne their dead.] Besides this, +two yoong men clothed in ashe colour beare pineaple torches, not lighted, +of three foote length, the which torches serue to kindle the fire wherein +the dead corpes is to bee burnt. In the same colour follow many other that +weare on the crownes of their heads faire, litle, threesquare, blacke +Lethren caps tied fast vnder their chinnes (for that is honorable amongst +them) with papers on their heads, wherein the name of the deuill I spake +of, is written. And to make it the more solemne, after commeth a man with a +table one cubite long, one foot broad, couered with a very fine white +vaile, in both sides whereof is written in golden letters the aforesayd +name. At the length by foure men is brought fourth the corps sitting in a +gorgeous litter clothed in white, hanging downe his head and holding his +hands together like one that prayed: to the rest of his apparell may you +adde an vpper gowne of paper, written full of that booke the which his God +is sayd to haue made, when he liued in the world, by whose helpe and +merites commonly they doe thinke to be saued. The dead man his children +come next after him most gallantly set foorth, the yongest wherof carieth +likewise a pineaple torch to kindle the fire. Last of all foloweth a great +number of people in such caps as I erst spake of. + +When they are al come to the place appointed for the obsequie, al the +Bonzii with the whole multitude for the space of one houre, beating pannes +and basons with great clamours, call vpon the name of that deuill, the +which being ended, the Obsequie is done in this maner. In the midst of a +great quadrangle railed about, hanged with course linnen, and agreeably +vnto the foure partes of the world made with foure gates to goe in and out +at, is digged a hole: in the hole is laied good store of wood, whereon is +raised gallantly a waued roofe; before that stand two tables furnished with +diuers kindes of meates, especially drie Figs, Pomegranates and Tartes good +store, but neither Fish nor Flesh: vpon one of them standeth also a chafer +with coales, and in it sweete wood to make perfumes. When all this is +readie, the corde wherewith the litter was caried, is throwen by a long +rope into the fire: as many as are present striue to take the rope in their +handes, vsing their aforesayd clamours, which done, they goe in procession +as it were round about the quadrangle thrise. Then setting the litter on +the wood built vp ready for the fire that Bonzius who then is master of the +ceremonies, saieth a verse that no bodie there vnderstandeth, whirling +thrise about ouer his head a torch lighted, to signifie thereby that the +soule of the dead man had neither any beginning, ne shall haue at any time +an ende, and throweth away the torch. Two of the dead man his children, or +of his neere kinne, take it vp againe, and standing one at the East side of +the litter, the other at the West, doe for honour and reuerence reach it to +each other thrise ouer the dead corps, and so cast it into the pile of +wood: by and by they throw in oyle, sweete wood, and other perfumes, +accordingly as they haue plentie, and so with a great flame bring the corps +to ashes: his children in the meane while putting sweete wood into the +chafer at the table with odours, doe solemnly and religiously worship their +father as a Saint: which being done, the Bonzii are paied each one in his +degree. The master of the ceremonies hath for his pact fiue duckats, +sometimes tenne, sometimes twentie, the rest haue tenne Iulies a piece, or +els a certaine number of other presents called Caxae. The meate that was +ordained, as soone as the dead corps friends and all the Bonzii are gone, +is left for such as serued at the obsequie, for the poore and impotent +lazars. + +The next day returne to the place of obsequie the dead man his children, +his kindred and friends, who gathering vp his ashes, bones, and teeth, doe +put them in a gilded pot, and so carie them home, to bee set vp in the same +pot couered with cloth, in the middest of their houses. Many Bonzii returne +likewise to these priuate funerals, and so do they againe the seuenth day: +then cary they out the ashes to be buried in a place appointed, laying +thereupon a fouresquare stone, wherein is written in great letters drawen +all the length of the stone, the name of that deuil the which the dead man +worshipped in his life time. Euery day afterward his children resort vnto +the graue with roses and warme water that the dead corps thirst not. Nor +the seuenth day onely, but the seuenth moneth and yeere, within their owne +houses they renue this obsequie, to no small commodities and gaine of the +Bonzii: great rich men doe spend in these their funerals 3000 duckats or +thereabout, the meaner sort two or three hundred. Such as for pouertie be +not able to go to that charges, are in the night time darke long without +all pompe and ceremonies buried in a dunghill. + +They haue another kinde of buriall, especially neere the Sea side, for them +that bee not yet dead. These fellowes are such, as hauing religiously with +much deuotion worshipped Amida, now desirous to see him, doe slay +themselues. And first they goe certaine dayes begging almes, the which they +thrust into their sleeues, then preach they in publique a sermon vnto the +people, declaring what they mind to doe, with the great good liking of all +such as doe heare them: for euery body wondreth at such a kinde of +holinesse. Then take they hookes to cut downe briars and thornes that might +hinder them in their way to heauen, and so embarke themselues in a new +vessell, tying great stones about their neckes, armes, loines, thighes, and +feete: thus they launching out into the main Sea be either drowned there, +their shippe bouged for that purpose, or els doe cast themselues ouer-boord +headlong into the Sea. The emptie barke is out of hand set a fire for +honours sake by their friends that folow them in another boat of their +owne, thinking it blasphemie that any mortall creature should afterward +once touch the barke that had bene so religiously halowed. + +Truly when we went to Meaco, eight dayes before we came to the Ile of Hiu +at Fore towne, sixe men and two women so died. To all such as die so the +people erecteth a Chappell, and to each of them a pillar and a pole made of +Pineaple for a perpetuall monument, hanging vp many shreds of paper in +stickes all the roofe ouer, with many verses set downe in the walles in +commendation of that blessed company. Wherefore vnto this place both day +and night many come very superstitiously in pilgrimage. It happened euen +then as Aloisius Almeida and I went to christen a childe wee traueiled that +way at what time foure or fiue olde women came foorth out of the aforesayd +chappell with beades in their handes (for in this point also the deuill +counterfeiteth Christianitie) who partly scorned at vs for follie, partly +frowned and taunted at our small deuotion, for passing by that holy +monument without any reuerence or worship done thereunto at all. + +It remaineth now we speake two or three wordes of those Sermons the Bonzii +are woont to make, not so many as ours in number, but assuredly very well +prouided for. The Pulpit is erected in a great temple with a silke Canopie +ouer it, therein standeth a costly seate, before the seate a table with a +bell and a booke. At the houre of Sermon each sect of the Iapans resorteth +to their owne doctors in diuers Temples. Vp goeth the doctor into the +Pulpit, and being set downe, after that hee hath lordlike looked him about, +signifieth silence with his bell, and so readeth a fewe wordes of that +booke we spake of, the which he expoundeth afterward, more at large. These +preachers be for the most part eloquent, and apt to drawe with their speach +the mindes of their hearers. Wherefore to this ende chieflie (such is their +greedinesse) tendeth all their talke, that the people bee brought vnder the +colour of godlinesse to enrich their monasteries, promising to each one so +much the more happinesse in the life to come, how much the greater costes +and charges they bee at in Church matters and obsequies: notwithstanding +this multitude of superstitious Sects and companies, and the diuersities +thereof amongst themselues: yet in this principally all their +Superintendents doe trauell so to perswade their Nouices in their owne +tales and lies, that they thinke nothing els trueth, nothing els sure to +come by euerlasting saluation, nothing els woorth the hearing. Whereunto +they adde other subtleties, as in going grauitie, in countenance, apparell, +and in all outward shew, comelinesse. Whereby the Iapans mindes are so +nousled in wicked opinions, and doe conceiue thereby such trust and hope of +euerlasting saluation, that not onely at home, but also abroad in euery +corner of the towne continually almost they run ouer their beades, humbly +asking of Amida and Xaca, wealth, honour, good health, and euerlasting +ioyes. Thus then, deare brethren, may you thinke how greatly they need the +helpe of God, that either doe bring the Gospell into this countrey, or +receiuing it brought vnto them, doe forsake idolatrie and ioine themselues +with Christ, being assaulted by so many snares of the deuill, troubled with +the daily dissuasions of their Bonzii, and finally, so iniuriously, so +hardly, so sharpely vexed of their kinred and friends, that except the +grace of God obtained by the sacrifices and prayers of the Catholique +church doe helpe vs, it cannot be chosen but that the faith and constancie +of many, if not of all, in these first beginnings of our churches, will +greatly be put in ieopardie. So much the more it standeth you vpon that so +earnestly long for the health of soules, to commend specially these +Iapanish flocks vnto our Lord. + +We came to Sacaio the eight and twentie day of Ianuary: Aloisius Almeida +first for businesse, but afterward let by sicknesse, staied there some +while, but I parting the next day from thence came thirteene leagues off to +Meaco the last of Ianuarie. Of my comming all the Christians tooke great +comfort, but specially Gaspar Vilela who in 6 yeres had seen none of our +companie at Meaco: his yeeres are not yet fortie, but his grey haires shew +him to be seuentie, so vehemently is his litle body afflicted and worne +with extreme cold. Hee speaketh Iapanish so skilfully after the phrase of +Meaco (the which for the renowne of this people and royal seat of the king +is best accounted of) that hee doeth both confesse and preach in that +language. Certaine godly bookes also he hath done into that speach, not +omitting to translate other as laisure suffreth him. To make an ende, our +Lord for his goodnesse vouchsafe to preserue vs all continually, and to +giue vs ayde both rightly to interprete his will, and well to doe the same. +From Meaco the 19 of February 1565. + +Other such like matter is handled both in other his letters, and also in +the Epistles written by his companions to be seene at large in the +aforesaid volume. Amongst the rest this seemed in my iudgement one of the +principall, and therefore the rather I tooke vpon me to doe it into +English. + + * * * * * + +Of the Iles beyond Iapan in the way from China to the Moluccas. + +Amongst other Iles in the Asian sea betwixt Canton a Chinish hauen in +Cathaio and the Moluccas, much spoken of in the Indian histories and +painted out in Maps, Ainan and Santianum are very famous. Ainan standeth 19 +degrees on this side of the Equinoctiall line neere China, from whence the +Chinish nation haue their prouision for shipping and other necessaries +requisite for their Nauie. There staied Balthasar Gagus a great traueiler 5 +moneths, who describeth that place after this maner. [Sidenote: De reb. +Iap. li. 4.] Ainan is a goodly countrey ful of Indian fruits and all kinds +of victuals, besides great store of iewels and pearle, well inhabited, the +townes built of stone, the people rude in conditions, apparelled in diuers +coloured rugs, with two oxe hornes, as it were, made of fine cypres hanging +downe about their eares, and a paire of sharpe cyzers at their foreheads. + +The cause wherefore they go in such attire I could not vnderstand, except +it bee for that they do counterfeit the deuil in the forme of a brute +beast, offring themselues vp to him. + +Santianum is an Ile neere vnto the hauen Cantan in the confines likewise of +China, famous for the death of that worthy traueiler and godly professour +and painfull doctor of the Indian nation in matters concerning religion, +Francis Xauier, who after great labours, many iniuries, and calamities +infinite suffred with much patience, singular ioy and gladnesse of mind, +departed in a cabben made of bowes and rushes vpon a desert mountaine, no +lesse voyd of all worldly commodities, then endued with all spirituall +blessings, out of this life, the 2 day of December, the yeere of our Lord +1552. after that many thousand of these Easterlings were brought by him to +the knowledge of Christ. Of this holy man, his particular vertues, and +specially trauell, and wonderfull works in that region, of other many litle +Iles (yet not so litle, but they may right wel be written of at laisure) +all the latter histories of the Indian regions are full. + + * * * * * + +An excellent treatise of the kingdome of China, and of the estate and + gouernment thereof: Printed in Latine at Macao a citie of the Portugals + in China, An. Dom. 1590. and written Dialogue-wise. The speakers are + Linus, Leo, and Michael. + +LINUS. + +Concerning the kingdome of China (Michael) which is our next neighbour, we +haue heard and daily do heare so many reports, that we are to request at +your hands rather a true then a large discourse and narration thereof. And +if there be ought in your knowledge besides that which by continual rumours +is waxen stale among vs, we will right gladly giue diligent eare vnto it. + +MICHAEL. Because the report of this most famous kingdome is growen so +common among vs, reducing diuers and manifold particulars into order, I +will especially aime at the trueth of things receiued from the fathers of +the societie, which euen now at this present are conuersant in China. +[Sidenote: The situation and limites of China.] First of all therefore it +is not vnknowen, that of all parts of the maine continent this kingdom of +China is situate most Easterly: albeit certaine Ilands, as our natiue +Iapon, and the Ile of Manilia stand more Easterly then China it selfe. As +touching the limites and bounds of this kingdom, we may appoint the first +towards the West to be a certaine Ile commonly called Hainan, which +standeth in 19 degrees of Northerly latitude. For the continent next +adioining vnto this Ile trendeth towardes the East, and that especially, +where the promontorie of the citie called Nimpo or Liampo doeth extend it +selfe. Howbeit, from that place declining Northward, it stretcheth foorth +an huge length, insomuch that the farthest Chinian inhabitants that way doe +behold the North pole eleuated, at least 50 degrees, and perhaps more also: +whereupon a man may easilie coniecture (that I may speake like an +Astronomer) how large the latitude of this kingdom is, when as it +containeth about more then 540 leagues in direct extension towards the +North. But as concerning the longitude which is accounted from East to +West, it is not so exactly found out, that it may be distinguished into +degrees. [Sidenote: Chinian Cosmographers.] Howbeit certaine it is, that +according to the Map wherein the people of China describe the forme of +their kingdom, the latitude thereof doeth not much exceed the longitude. +This kingdom therefore is, without all peradventure, of all earthly +kingdoms the most large and spacious: for albeit diuers other kings vnder +their iurisdiction containing in dimensions more length and breadth then +all China, do possesse very many kingdoms and far distant asunder: yet none +of them all enioyeth any one kingdom so large and so ample, as the most +puissant king of China doeth. [Sidenote: The rich reuenues of the king of +China.] Now, if we shall make enquirie into his reuenues and tributes, true +it is, that this king, of all others, is endued with the greatest and the +richest, both in regard of the fertilitie and greatnes of his dominions, +and also by reason of the seuere collection and exaction of his duties: +yea, tributes are imposed vpon his subiects, not onely for lands, houses, +and impost of marchandise, but also for euery person in each family. It is +likewise to be understood, that almost no lord or potentate in China hath +authoritie to leuie vnto himselfe any peculiar reuenues, or to collect any +rents within the precincts of his seigniories, al such power belonging +onely vnto the king: whereas in Europe the contrary is most commonly seen, +as we haue before signified. In this most large kingdom are conteined 15 +prouinces, euery one of which were in it selfe sufficient to be made one +great kingdom. Six of these prouinces do border vpon the sea, namely (that +I may vse the names of the Chinians themselues) Coantum, Foquien, Chequiam, +Nanquin, Xantum, Paquin: the other 9 be in-land prouinces, namely, Quiansi, +Huquam, Honan, Xiensi, Xansi, Suchuon, Queicheu, Iunan, Coansi. [Sidenote: +The seats roiall of the king of China.] Amongst all the foresayd prouinces, +two are allotted for the kings court and seat roial, that is to say, Paquin +for his court in the North, and Nanquin for his court in the South. For the +kings of China were woont to be resident altogether at the South court: but +afterward by reason of the manifold and cruell warres mooued by the +Tartars, they were constrained to defixe their princely seate and +habitation in that extreme prouince of the North. Whereupon it commeth to +passe, that those Northren confines of the kingdom doe abound with many moe +fortresses, marciall engines, and garrisons of souldiers. LEO. I haue +heard, amongst those munitions, a certaine strange and admirable wall +reported of, wherewith the people of China doe represse and driue backe the +Tartars attempting to inuade their territories. MICHAEL. Certes that wall +which you haue heard tell of is most woorthie of admiration; for it runneth +alongst the borders of three Northerlie prouinces, Xiensi, Xansit and +Paquin, and is sayd to contayne almost three hundred leagues in length, and +in such sort to bee built, that it hindereth not the courses and streames +of any riuers, their chanels being ouerthwarted and fortified with +wonderfull bridges and other defences. Yet is it not vnlikely, that the +sayd wall is built in such sort, that onely lowe and easie passages bee +therewith stopped and enuironed; but the mountaines running betweene those +lowe passages are, by their owne naturall strength, and inaccessible +heigth, a sufficient fortification agaynst the enemie. LINUS. Tell vs +(Michael) whether the kingdome of China be so frequented with inhabitants, +as wee haue often bene informed, or no? MICHAEL. It is (Linus) in very deed +a most populous kingdom, as I haue bene certified from the fathers of +societie: who hauing seene sundry prouinces of Europe renoumed for the +multitude of their inhabitants, doe notwithstanding greatly admire the +infinite swarmes of people in China. Howbeit these multitudes are not +pel-mel and confusiuely dispersed ouer the land, but most conueniently and +orderly distributed in their townes and famous cities: of which assemblies +there are diuers kindes among the Chinians. For they haue certaine +principal cities called by the name of Fu: other inferior cities called +Cheu: and of a third kind also named Hien, which be indeed walled townes, +but are not priuileged with the dignities and prerogatiues of cities. To +these may be added two other kindes of lesser townes, which are partly +villages, and partly garrisons of souldiers. Of the first and principall +kind is that most noble citie standing neere vnto the port of Macao, called +by the Chinians Coanchefu, but by the Portugals commonly termed Cantam, +which is rather the common name of the prouince, then a word of their +proper imposition. Vnto the third kind appertaineth a towne, which is yet +nigher vnto the port of Macao, called by the Portugals Ansam, but by the +Chinians Hiansanhien. Al the foresayd prouinces therefore haue their +greater cities named Fu, and their lesser cities called Cheu, vnto both of +which the other townes may be added. Moreouer in euery prouince there is a +certain principal city which is called the Metropolitane thereof, wherein +the chief magistrates haue their place of residence, as the principal citie +by me last mentioned, which is the head of the whole prouince called +Coantum. The number of the greater cities throughout the whole kingdom is +more then 150, and there is the same or rather a greater multitude of +inferiour cities. Of walled townes, not endued with the priuileges of +cities there are mo then 1120: the villages and garrisons can scarce be +numbred: ouer and besides the which conuents it is incredible what a number +of countrie fames or granges there be: for it is not easie to find any +place desert or void of inhabitants in all that land. [Sidenote: The +Chinian riuers greatly inhabited.] Now in the sea, in riuers, and in barks +there are such abundance of people, and of whole families inhabiting, that +euen the Europaeans themselues doe greatly wonder thereat: insomuch that +some (albeit beyond measure) haue bene perswaded that there are as many +people dwelling vpon the water as vpon the land. Neither were they induced +so to thinke altogether without probabilitie: for whereas the kingdom of +China is in all parts thereof interfused with commodious riuers, and in +many places consisteth of waters, barges and boats being euery-where very +common, it might easily bee supposed, that the number of watermen was equal +vnto the land inhabitants. Howbeit, that is to be vnderstood by +amplification, whereas the cities do swarme so ful with citizens and the +countrie with peasants. [Sidenote: Holesome aire, plenty and peace in +China.] LEO. The abundance of people which you tell vs of seemeth very +strange: whereupon I coniecture the soile to be fertile, the aire to be +holesome, and the whole kingdom to be at peace. MICHAEL. You haue (friend +Leo) ful iudicially coniectured those three: for they do all so excel that +which of the three in this kingdom be more excellent, it is not easie to +discerne. And hence it is that this common opinion hath been rife among the +Portugals, namely, that the kingdom of China was neuer visited with those +three most heauy and sharpe scourges of mankind, warre, famine, and +pestilence. But that opinion is more common then true: sithens there haue +bene most terrible intestine and ciuile warres, as in many and most +autenticall histories it is recorded: sithens also that some prouinces of +the sayd kingdom, euen in these our dayes, haue bene afflicted with +pestilence and contagious diseases, and with famine. [Sidenote: Chinian +stories.] Howbeit, that the foresaid three benefits do mightily flourish +and abound in China, it cannot be denied. For (that I may first speake of +the salubritie of the aire) the fathers of the societie themselues are +witnesses; that scarcely in any other realme there are so many found that +liue vnto decrepite and extreme old age: so great a multitude is there of +ancient and graue personages: neither doe they vse so many confections and +medicines, nor so manifold and sundry wayes of curing diseases, as wee saw +accustomed in Europe. For amongst them they haue no Phlebotomie or letting +of blood: but all their cures, as ours also in Iapon, are atchieued by +fasting, decoctions of herbes, and light or gentle potions. But in this +behalfe let euery nation please themselues with their owne customes. Now, +in fruitfulnes of soile this kingdom certes doth excel, far surpassing all +other kingdoms of the East: yet it is nothing comparable vnto the plentie +and abundance of Europe, as I haue declared at large in the former +treatises. But the kingdom of China is, in this regard, so highly extolled, +because there is not any region in the East partes that aboundeth so with +marchandise, and from whence so much traffique is sent abroad. [Sidenote: +The city of Coanchefu, _alias_ Cantam.] For whereas this kingdome is most +large and full of nauigable riuers, so that commodities may easilie be +conueyed out of one prouince into another: the Portugals doe find such +abundance of wares within one and the same Citie, (which perhaps is the +greatest Mart throughout the whole kingdome) that they are verily +perswaded, that the same region, of all others, most aboundeth with +marchandise: which notwithstanding is to be vnderstood of the Orientall +regions: albeit there are some kindes of marchandise, wherewith the land of +China is better stored then any other kingdom. [Sidenote: Great abundance +of gold in China.] This region affordeth especially sundry kinds of +mettals, of which the chiefe, both in excellencie and in abundance, is +gold, whereof so many Pezoes are brought from China to India, and to our +countrey of Iapon, that I heard say, that in one and the same ship, this +present yeere, 2000 such pieces consisting of massie gold, as the Portugals +commonly call golden loaues, were brought vnto vs for marchandise: and one +of these loaues is worth almost 100 duckats. Hence it is that in the +kingdom of China so many things are adorned with gold, as for example, +beds, tables, pictures, images, litters wherein nice and daintie dames are +caried vpon their seruants backes. Neither are these golden loaues onely +bought by the Portugals, but also great plentie of gold-twine and leaues of +gold: for the Chinians can very cunningly beate and extenuate gold into +plates and leaues. [Sidenote: Great store of siluer.] There is also great +store of siluer, whereof (that I may omit other arguments) it is no small +demonstration, that euery yeere there are brought into the citie commonly +called Cantam by the Portugal marchants to buie wares, at the least 400 +Sestertium thereof, and yet nothing in a maner is conueied out of the +Chinian kingdom: because the people of China abounding with all +necessaries, are not greatly inquisitiue or desirous of any marchandise +from other kingdomes. I doe here omit the Siluer mines whereof there are +great numbers in China, albeit there is much circumspection vsed in digging +the siluer thereout: for the king standeth much in feare least it may bee +an occasion to stirre vp the couetous and greedie humour of many. Nowe +their siluer which they put to vses is for the most part passing fine, and +purified from all drosse, and therefore in trying it they vse great +diligence. What should I speake of their iron, copper, lead, tinne, and +other mettals, and also of their quick-siluer. Of all which in the realme +of China there is great abundance, and from thence they are transported +into diuers countreys. Hereunto may bee added the wonderfull store of +pearles, which, at the Ile of Hainan, are found in shell-fishes taken very +cunningly by certaine Diuers, and doe much enlarge the kings reuenues. +[Sidenote: Great store of silke in China.] But now let vs proceed vnto the +Silke or Bombycine fleece, whereof there is great plentie in China: so that +euen as the husbandmen labour in manuring the earth, and in sowing of Rice; +so likewise the women doe employ a great part of their time in preseruing +of silke-wormes, and in keeming and weauing of Silke. Hence it is that +euery yeere the King and Queene with great solemnitie come foorth into a +publique place, the one of them touching a plough, and the other a Mulberie +tree, with the leaues whereof Silke-wormes are nourished: and both of them +by this ceremonie encouraging both men and women vnto their vocation and +labour: whereas otherwise, all the whole yeere throughout, no man besides +the principall magistrates, may once attaine to the sight of the king. +[Sidenote: Silke brought into Iapon.] Of this Silke or Bombycine fleece +there is such abundance, that three shippes for the most part comming out +of India to the port of Macao, and at the least one euery yeere comming +vnto vs, are laden especially with this fraight, and it is vsed not onely +in India, but caried euen vnto Portugal. Neither is the Fleece it selfe +onely transported thence, but also diuers and sundry stuffes wouen thereof, +for the Chinians do greatly excel in the Art of weauing, and do very much +resemble our weauers of Europe. Moreouer the kingdom of China aboundeth +with most costlie spices and odours, and especially with cynamom (albeit +not comparable to the cynamom of Zeilan) with camphire also and muske, +which is very principal and good. Muske deriueth his name from a beast of +the same name (which beast resembleth a Beuer) from the parts whereof +bruseda and putrified proceedeth a most delicate and fragrant smel which +the Portugals highly esteem, commonly calling those parts of the foresaid +beasts (because they are like vnto the gorges of foules) Papos, and conuey +great plenty of them into India, and to vs of Iapon. [Sidenote: Cotton +wooll, whereof Calicut-cloth is made.] But who would beleeue, that there +were so much gossipine or cotton-wool in China; whereof such variety of +clothes are made like vnto linnen; which we our selues do so often vse, and +which also is conueied by sea into so many regions? Let vs now intreat of +that earthen or pliable matter commonly called porcellan, which is pure +white, and is to be esteemed the best stuffe of that kind in the whole +world: whereof vessels of all kinds are very curiously framed. I say, it is +the best earthen matter in all the world, for three qualities; namely, the +cleannesse, the beauty, and the strength thereof. There is indeed other +matter to be found more glorious, and more costly, but none so free from +vncleannes, and so durable: this I adde, in regard of glasse, which indeed +is immaculate and cleane, but may easily be broken in pieces. This matter +is digged, not thorowout the whole region of China, but onely in one of the +fifteene prouinces called Quiansi, wherein continually very many artificers +are employed about the same matter: neither doe they only frame thereof +smaller vessels, as dishes, platters, salt sellers, ewers, and such like, +but also certaine huge tunnes, and vessels of great quantity, being very +finely and cunningly wrought, which, by reason of the danger and difficulty +of carriage, are not transported out of the realme, but are vsed onely +within it, and especially in the kings court. The beauty of this matter is +much augmented by variety of picture, which is layed in certaine colours +vpon it, while it is yet new, golde also being added thereunto, which +maketh the foresayd vessels to appeare most beautifull. It is wonderfull +how highly the Portugals do esteeme thereof, seeing they do, with great +difficulty transport the same, not onely to vs of Iapon and into India, but +also into sundry prouinces of Europe. Vnto the marchandize aboue-mentioned +may be added diuers and sundry plants, the rootes whereof be right holesome +for mens bodies, and very medicinable, which are brought vnto our Iles of +Iapon, and vnto many other Ilands, amongst the which that wood may be +reckoned, which (by a synechdoche) is called The Wood of China, being of +notable force to expell out of mens bodies those humours, which would breed +contagious diseases. To these you may adde sugar-canes (for in the realme +of China there is great store of excellent sugar) which is conueyed by the +Portugals very plentifully, both into our countrey, and also into India. My +speeches vttered immediatly before concerned marchandize onely, in regard +whereof this kingdome is beneficiall not to itselfe alone, but most +profitable to many other nations also. [Sidenote: China in a maner +destitute of corne, wine, and oile.] As for those fruits which pertaine to +yerely sustenance and common food, they can scarse be numbred: albeit, of +those three commodities which they of Europe so greatly account of; namely +of cornes, vines, and oliues the land of China is not very capable: for the +Chinians know not so much as the name of an Oliue tree (out of the fruit +whereof oile is expressed) neither yet the name of a vine. The prouince of +Paquin is not altogether destitute of wine, but whether it be brought from +other places, or there made, I am not able to say: although it aboundeth +with many other, and those not vnpleasant liquors, which may serue in the +stead of wine it selfe. Now, as touching corne, there is indeed wheat sowen +in all the prouinces, howbeit rise is in farre more vse and request then +it: and so in regard of these two commodities profitable for mans life; +namely, wine and come; the kingdome of China and our countrey of Iapon may +be compared together. + +LEO. You haue discoursed (Michael) of the fruitfulnesse of China, whereof I +haue often heard, that it is no lesse pleasant than fruitful, and I haue +bene especially induced so to thinke, at the sight of the Chinian maps. +MICHAEL. The thing it selfe agrees right well with the picture: for they +that haue seene the mediterran or inner parts of the kingdome of China, do +report it to be a most amiable countrey, adorned with plenty of woods, with +abundance of fruits and grasse, and with woonderfull variety of riuers, +wherewith the Chinian kingdome is watered like a garden; diuers of which +riuers doe naturally flowe, and others by arte and industry are defined +into sundry places. But now I will intreat of the tranquility and peace of +China, after I haue spoken a word or two concerning the maners of the +inhabitants. [Sidenote: The disposition and maners of the Chinians.] This +nation is indued with excellent wit and dexterity for the attaining of all +artes, and being very constant in their owne customes, they lightly regard +the customes or fashions of other people. They vse one and the same kinde +of vesture, yet so, that there is some distinction betweene the apparell of +the magistrate and of the common subiect. They all of them do weare long +haire vpon their heads, and, after the maner of women, do curiously keame +their dainty locks hanging downe to the ground, and, hauing twined and +bound them vp, they couer them with calles, wearing sundry caps thereupon, +according to their age and conditon. It seemeth that in olde time one +language was common to all the prouinces: notwithstanding, by reason of +variety of pronunciation, it is very much altered, and is diuided into +sundry idiomes or proprieties of speech, according to the diuers prouinces: +howbeit, among the magistrates, and in publike assemblies of iudgement, +there is one and the very same kinde of language vsed thorowout the whole +realme, from the which (as I haue sayd) the speech of ech prouince +differeth not a little. [Sidenote: Their loyaltie vnto their superiours.] +Moreouer this people is most loyall and obedient vnto the king and his +magistrates, which is the principall cause of their tranquility and peace. +For whereas the common sort doe apply themselues vnto the discretion and +becke of inferiour magistrates, and the inferiour magistrates of the +superiour, and the superiour magistrates of the king himselfe, framing and +composing all their actions and affaires vnto that leuell: a world it is to +see, in what equability and indifferency of iustice all of them do leade +their liues, and how orderly the publike lawes are administred. Which thing +notwithstanding shall be handled more at large, when we come to intreat of +the gouernment. LINUS. Tell vs now (Michael) of the industry of that +people, whereof we haue heard great reports. MICHAEL. Their industry is +especially to be discerned in manuary artes and occupations, and therein +the Chinians do surpasse most of these Easterly nations. For there are such +a number of artificers ingeniously and cunningly framing sundry deuices out +of golde, siluer, and other mettals, as likewise of stone, wood and other +matters conuenient for mans vse, that the streets of cities being +replenished with their shops and fine workemanship, are very woonderfull to +beholde. Besides whom also there are very many Painters, vsing either the +pensill or the needle (of which the last sort are called Embrotherers) and +others also that curiously worke golde-twine vpon cloth either of linnen or +of cotton: whose operations of all kinds are diligently conueyed by the +Portugals into India. Their industry doth no lesse appeare in founding of +gunnes and in making of gun-powder, whereof are made many rare and +artificiall fire-works. To these may be added the arte of Printing, albeit +their letters be in maner infinite and most difficult, the portraitures +whereof they cut in wood or in brasse, and with maruellous facilitie they +dayly publish huge multitudes of books. Vnto these mechanicall and +illiberall crafts you may adde two more; that is to say, nauigation and +discipline of warre; both of which haue bene in ancient times most +diligently practised by the inhabitants of China: for (as we haue before +signified in the third dialogue) the Chinians sailing euen as farre as +India, subdued some part thereof vnto their owne dominion: howbeit +afterward, least they should diminish the forces of their realme by +dispersing them into many prouinces, altering their counsell, they +determined to containe themselues within their owne limits: within which +limits (as I haue sayd) there were in olde time vehement and cruell wares, +both betweene the people of China themselues, and also against the +Tartarian king, who inuaded their kingdome, and by himselue and his +successours, for a long season, vsurped the gouernment thereof. Howbeit the +kings of the Tartarian race being worne out, and their stocke and family +being vtterly abolished, the Chinians began to lift vp their heads, and to +aduance themselues, inioying for these 200 yeeres last past exceeding peace +and tranquility, and at this day the posterity of the same king that +expelled the Tartars, with great dignity weareth the crowne, and wieldeth +the royall scepter. Albeit therefore the people of China (especially they +that inhabit Southerly from the prouince of Paquin) are, for the most part, +by reason of continuall ease and quiet, growen effeminate, and their +courage is abated, notwithstanding they would prooue notable and braue +souldiers, if they ioyned vse and exercise vnto their naturall fortitude. +As a man may easily obserue in them, that maintaine continuall warres +against the most barbarous and cruell Tartars. Howbeit in this kingdome of +China there is so great regard of military discipline, that no city nor +towne there is destitute of a garison, the captaines and gouernours keeping +ech man his order; which all of them, in euery prouince, are subiect vnto +the kings lieutenant generall for the warres, whom they call Chumpin, and +yet he himselfe is subiect vnto the Tutan or viceroy. Let vs now come vnto +that arte, which the Chinians do most of all professe, and which we may, +not vnfitly, call literature or learning. For although it be commonly +reported, that many liberall sciences, and especially naturall and morall +phylosophy are studied in China, and that they haue Vniuersities there, +wherein such ingenuous artes are deliuered and taught, yet, for the most +part this opinion is to be esteemed more popular then true; but I will +declare, vpon what occasion this conceit first grew. The people of China +doe, aboue all things, professe the arte of literature; and learning it +most diligently, they imploy themselues a long time and the better part of +their age therein. For this cause, in all cities and townes, yea, and in +pety villages also, there are certaine schole-masters hired for stipends to +instruct children: and their literature being (as ours in Iapon is also) in +maner infinite, their children are put to schole euen from their infancy +and tender yeeres, from whence notwithstanding such are taken away, as are +iudged to be vnfit for the same purpose, and are trained vp to marchandize +or to manuary sciences: but the residue do so dedicate themselues to the +study of learning, that (a strange thing it is to consider) being +conuersant in the principall books, they will easily tel you, if they be +asked the question, how many letters be conteined in euery page, and where +ech letter is placed. Now, for the greater progresse and increase of +learning, they (as the maner is in Europe) do appoint three degrees to the +attaining of noble sciences; that is to say, the lowest, the middle degree, +and the highest. Graduates of the first degree are called Siusai, of the +second Quiugin, and of the third Chinzu. And in each city or walled towne +there is a publique house called the Schoole, and vnto that all they doe +resort from all priuate and pety-schooles that are minded to obtaine the +first degree; where they do amplifie a sentence or theame propounded vnto +them by some magistrate: and they, whose stile is more elegant and refined, +are, in ech city, graced with the first degree. Of such as aspire vnto the +second degree triall is made onely in the metropolitan or principall city +of the prouince, whereunto, they of the first degree, euery third yere, +haue recourse, and, in one publike house or place of assembly, doe, the +second time, make an oration of another sentence obscurer then the former, +and doe vndergo a more seuere examination. Now, there is commonly such an +huge multitude of people, that this last yere, in the foresayd famous city +of Cantam, by reason of the incredible assembly of persons flocking to that +publike act or commencement, at the first entrance of the doores, there +were many troden vnder foot, and quelled to death, as we haue bene most +certainly informed. Moreouer they that sue for the highest degree are +subiect vnto a most seuere and exact censure, whereby they are to be +examined at the Kings Court onely, and that also euery third yere next +ensuing the sayd yere wherein graduates of the second degree are elected in +ech prouince, and, a certaine number being prescribed vnto euery particular +prouince, they do ascend vnto that highest pitch of dignity, which is in so +great regard with the king himselfe, that the three principall graduates +do, for honours sake, drinke off a cup filled euen with the Kings owne +hand, and are graced with other solemnities. [Marginal note: Note the +extraordinary honor vouchsafed by the great King of China vpon his learned +graduates.] Out of this order the chiefe magistrates are chosen: for after +that they haue attained vnto this third degree, being a while trained vp in +the lawes of the realme, and in the precepts of vrbanity, they are admitted +vnto diuers function. Neither are we to thinke that the Chinians be +altogether destitute of other artes. For, as touching morall philosophy, +all those books are fraught with the precepts thereof, which, for their +instructions sake, are alwayes conuersant in the hands of the foresayd +students, wherein such graue and pithy sentences are set downe, that, in +men void of the light of the Gospell, more can not be desired. [Sidenote: +Naturall philosophy.] They haue books also that intreat of things and +causes naturall, but herein it is to be supposed, that aswell their books +as ours do abound with errors. There be other books among them, that +discourse of herbs and medicines, and others of chiualry and martiall +affaires. Neither can I here omit, that certaine men of China (albeit they +be but few, and rare to be found) are excellent in the knowledge of +astronomy, by which knowledge of theirs the dayes of the new moone incident +to euery moneth are truly disposed and digested, and are committed to +writing and published: besides, they doe most infallibly foretell the +eclipses of the Sun and Moone: and whatsoeuer knowledge in this arte we of +Iapon haue, it is deriued from them. LEO. We doe freely confesse that +(Michael) sithens our books intreating of the same arte are a great part of +them, written in the characters or letters of China. [Sidenote: The +politike gouernment of China.] But now, instruct you vs as touching their +maner of gouernment, wherein the Chinians are sayd greatly to excell. +MICHAEL. That, that, in very deed, is their chiefe arte, and vnto that all +their learning and exercise of letters is directed. Whereas therefore, in +the kingdome of China, one onely king beares rule ouer so many prouinces, +it is strange what a number of Magistrates are by him created to admister +publique afiaires. For (to omit them which in ech Towne and City haue +iurisdiction ouer the townesmen and citizens) there are three principall +Magistrates in euery prouince. The first is he that hath to deale in cases +criminall, and is called Ganchasu: the second is the Kings Fosterer, and is +called Puchinsu: the third is the Lieutenant-generall for the warres, +named, as we sayd before, Chumpin. These three therefore haue their place +of residence in the chiefe City of the prouince: and the two former haue +certaine associates of their owne order, but of inferiour authority, +appointed in diuers Cities and Townes, vnto whom, according to the variety +of causes, the Gouernours of Townes and the Maiors of Cities doe appeale. +Howbeit the three forenamed Magistrates are in subjection vnto the Tutan, +that is, the Vice-roy, ordained in ech prouince. And all these Magistrates +beare office for the space of three yeeres together: yet so, that for the +gouerning of ech province, not any of the same prouince, but strangers, +that is, men of another prouince, are selected: whereof it commeth to +passe, that the Iudges may giue sentence with a farre more entire and +incorrupt minde, then if they were among their owne kinesfolke and allies. +Ouer and besides all these, there is an annuall or yeerely Magistrate, +which is called Chaien, whose duety it is to make inquisition of all +crimes, and especially the crimes of Magistrates, and also to punish common +offences: but concerning the faults of the great magistrates to admonish +the king himselfe. Of this order, euery yere, are sent out of the Kings +Court, for ech prouince, one; and going ouer all the Cities and Townes +thereof, they do most diligently ransacke and serch out all crimes, and +vpon them which are imprisoned they inflict due punishment, or, being found +not guilty, they dismisse them vnpunished. Hence it is, that all +Magistrates greatly fearing to be called in question by the Chaien are well +kept within the limits of their callings. [Sidenote: Two Senates or +Counsels continually holden in China.] Besides all these Magistrates there +is at either Court, namely in the North, and in the South, a Senate or +honourable assembly of graue counsellors, vnto the which, out of all +prouinces, according to the neerenesse and distance of the place, affaires +of greater weight and moment are referred, and by their authority diuers +Magistrates are created: howbeit the managing and expedition of principall +affaires is committed vnto the Senate of Paquin. Moreouer there are euery +yeere certaine Magistrates appointed in ech prouince, to goe vnto the king; +and euery third yeere all the Gouernours of Cities and of Townes do visit +him at once, what time triall is made of them that aspire vnto the third +degree: vpon which occasion there is at the same time an incredible number +of people at the Kings Court. [Sidenote: The causes of peace in China.] By +reason of this excellent order and harmony of Magistrates placed one vnder +another, it can scarse be imagined, what sweete peace and tranquility +flourisheth thorowout the whole realme, especially sithens, after speedy +inquisition, persons that are guilty be put (as the maner is there) to the +punishment of the bastinado: neither yet are suits or actions any long time +delayed. [Sidenote: Learning the only step to honour in China.] Also it is +not to be omitted, that for the obtaining of any dignity or magistracy, the +way is open, without all respect of gentry or blood, vnto all men, if they +be learned, and especially if they haue attained vnto the third and highest +degree aforesaid. [The stately and formidable procession of the Chinian +magistrates.] Neither can it be expressed how obedient and duetifull the +common sort are vnto their Magistrates, and with what magnificence and +pompe the sayd Magistrates come abroad: for the most part of them haue +fiftie or threescore Sergeants attending vpon them, and going before them, +two and two in a ranke: some of them carrying Halberds, Maces and +Battle-axes: some trailing yron chaines vpon the ground: others holding +great roddes or staues of a certaine kinde of reede, wherewith malefactours +are punished, in their hands: and two there are that carry, inclosed in a +case, the Kings seale peculiar for ech office: and many others also, that +shew sundry spectacles vnto the people: whereunto may be added the horrible +out-cries and showtes, which betweene whiles they vtter, to strike a +terrour into the hearts of all men: and at length come the Magistrates +themselues, being carried in a throne vpon the backs of foure men, sixe +men, or eight men, according to the dignity of their office. [Sidenote: The +houses of the Chinian magistrates.] Now, as concerning their houses, they +are very large and stately, being built and furnished with all necessary +stuffe, at the Kings owne cost, in the which, so long as their magistracy +lasteth, they leade a braue and an honourable life. The sayd houses are +without variety of stories one aboue another, which in the kingdome of +China and in our Iles of Iapon also are not ordinarily vsed for habitation, +but either to keepe watch and ward, or els for solace and recreations sake +(for the which purposes, eight most lofty turrets of nine stories high are +built) or els for the defence of Cities. Howbeit in other regardes these +buildings doe shew foorth no small magnificence: for they haue their +cisternes for the receit of raine-water, which are adorned with beautifull +trees, set in order, round about them: and they haue also their places +designed for the administration of iustice, and diuers other conuenient +roomes to bestow their wiues and families in. Within the doores of the +foresayd habitations a certain number of Sergeants and officers, hauing +cabbins or little houses allotted them on both sides, doe alwayes giue +their attendance; and so long as matters of iudgement are in deciding, they +be alwayes ready at hand, that, at the direction of the Magistrates they +may either beat malefactours, or by torments constraine them to tell the +trueth. [Sidenote: The magistrates barges.] The sayd Magistrates also haue +their peculiar barges wherein to take the water; being in breadth and +length not much vnlike to galleys of Europe, but for swiftnesse and +multitude of orres, farre inferiour vnto them. The rowers, sitting vpon +galleries without the hatches or compasse of the barge, doe mooue it on +forward with their oares: whereupon it commeth to passe, that the middle +part of the barge affordeth sufficient roome for the Magistrates themselues +to abide in, containing chambers therein almost as conuenient and handsome, +as in any of their foresayd publique houses, together with butteries and +kitchins, and such other places necessary for the prouision and stowage of +victuals. LEO. All these things agree right well with the reports, which we +haue heard of the stately and renowmed kingdome of China: I would now right +gladly know somewhat concerning the order which is obserued in the +obtaining of magistracies. + +MICHAEL. You haue enquired of a matter most woorthy to be knowen, which I +had almost omitted to entreat of. [Sidenote: The maner of electing +magistrates in China.] The Chinians therefore doe vse a kinde of gradation +in aduancing men vnto sundry places of authority, which for the most part +is performed by the Senatours of Paquin. For first they are made iudges of +townes: then of Cities: afterward they are elected to be of that order, +which decreeth punishments in cases criminall without further appeale, or +of their order, that are the kings fosterers. [Sidenote: Degrees vnto +honour.] And in both of these Orders, which are very honourable, there are +many places and degrees, so that from the inferiour place they must ascend +vnto the superiour, vntill they haue attained vnto the highest dignity of +all: and immediatly after that they come to be Vice-royes, howbeit this +gradation is not alwayes accomplished in one and the same prouince, but in +changing their offices they change places and prouinces also. Moreouer, +next after the office of Vice-roy they are capable to be chosen Senatours +of Nanquin, and last of all to be elected into the Senate of Paquin. Now, +there is such an order and methode obserued in the ascending vnto these +dignities, that all men may easily coniecture, what office any one is to +vndertake. [Sidenote: Riding post.] And there is so great diligence and +celerity vsed for the substitution of one into the roome of another, that +for the same purpose, messengers are dispatched by land, vpon swift +post-horses, vnto diuers prouinces, almost twenty dayes iourney from the +Kings Court. And, to be short, there is such district seuerity in degrading +those that vniustly or negligently demeane themselues, from an honourable +vnto an inferiour and base office, or altogether in depriuing them of the +kings authority: that all Magistrates doe stand in feare of nothing in the +world more then of that. [Sidenote: Martiall dignities.] The same order, +almost, is obserued among the Captaines and Lieu-tenants generall for the +warres: except onely in them, that their birth and offspring is respected: +for many there be, who descending by parentage from such men as haue in +times past atchieued braue exploits in warfare, so soone as they come to +sufficient yeeres, are created Centurions, Colonels, and Gouernours, vntill +at last they attaine to be Lieu-tenants generall and Protectours of some +whole prouince; who notwithstanding (as I haue sayd) are in all things +subiect vnto the Vice-roy. All the foresayd Magistrates both of warre and +of peace haue a set number of attendants allotted vnto them, enioying a +stipend, and carying certaine ensignes and peculiar badges of their office: +and (besides the ordinary watch, which souldiers appointed for the same +purpose doe in the night season, after the City gates be shut, keepe in +their forts) wheresoeuer any Magistrate is, either at his house or in his +barge, the sayd attendants striking vpon a cymball of brasse, at certaine +appointed times, do keepe most circumspect and continuall watch and ward +about his person. LINUS. You haue (Michael) sufficiently discoursed of the +Magistrates: informe vs now of the king himselfe, whose name is so renowmed +and spread abroad. [Sidenote: The king of China.] MICHAEL. Concerning this +matter I will say so much onely as by certaine rumours hath come to my +knowledge; for of matters appertaining vnto the kings Court we haue no +eye-witnesses, sithens the fathers of the society haue not as yet proceeded +vnto Paquin, who so soone as (by Gods assistance) they shall there be +arriued, will by their letters more fully aduertise vs. [Sidenote: +Van-Sui.] The king of China therefore is honoured with woonderfull +reuerence and submission thorowout his whole realme; and whensoeuer any of +his chiefe Magistrates speaketh vnto him, he calleth him VAN-SVI, +signifying thereby that be wisheth tenne thousands of yeeres vnto him. +[Sidenote: The succession of the crowne.] The succession of the kingdome +dependeth vpon the bloud royall: for the eldest sonne borne of the kings +first and lawfull wife obtaineth the kingdome after his fathers decease: +neither doe they depriue themselues of the kingly authority in their life +time (as the maner is in our Ilands of Iapon) but the custome of Europe is +there obserued. [Sidenote: The kings yonger brethren.] Now, that the safety +and life of the king may stand in more security, his yoonger brethren, and +the rest borne of concubines are not permitted to liue in the kings Court: +but places of habitation are by the king himselfe assigned vnto them in +diuers prouinces farre distant asunder, where they dwell most commodiously, +being comparable vnto kings for their buildings and revenues: howbeit they +exercise no authority ouer the people, but all the gouernment of those +cities wherein they dwell concerneth the Magistrates, who notwithstanding +haue the sayde Princes in high regard and honour, and doe visit them twise +in a moneth, and salute them kneeling vpon their knees, and bowing their +faces downe to the earth: and yet they communicate nothing vnto them as +touching the administration of the Common-wealth. These are they which may +properly be called the Peeres or Princes of the Realme of China: for they +deriue their houses and reuenues vnto their posterity, and so are these +royall families continually preserued. But to returne vnto the king +himselfe, hee is most chary in obseruing the Chinian lawes and customes, +and diligently exerciseth himselfe in learning so much as concernes his +estate, sheweth himselfe dayly vnto his chiefe Magistrates, and communeth +of matters appertaining to the publique commodity of the Realme. [Sidenote: +Twelue chariots.] His palace is of woonderfull largenesse and capacity, out +of the which he very seldome takes his progresse; and whensoeuer he doeth +so, there are twelue chariots brought foorth, all of them most like one to +another both in workemanship and in value, that no man may discerne in +which the king himselfe is placed. [Sidenote: The idolatrous religion of +the king.] He followeth in religion especially the opinions of the +Magistrates, attributing diuine power vnto heauen and earth as vnto the +parents of all, and with great solemnity sacrificing vnto them. He hath +diuers most sumptuous Temples dedicated vnto his ancestours, whereunto +likewise he ascribeth diuine honour, and yet ceaseth hee not to fauour +Priests of other sects, yea, hee erecteth Temples vnto their Patrons, +endowing them with most rich reuenues; and so often as any vrgent necessity +requireth, he enioynes continuall fastings and prayers vnto them: and after +this sort he doeth in a maner patronize all the idolatrous sects of his +Realme, and shewing himselfe ready to embrace any false religion +whatsoeuer, be liueth in sundry and manifolde kindes of superstition. +[Sidenote: The ciuill gouernment of China most agreeable to the instinct of +nature.] Out of all the former particulars by me alledged, you may easily +coniecture that the administration of kingdome of China doeth, for the most +parts agree with the instinct of nature, authority being committed, not +vnto rude and vnskilfull persons, but vnto such as haue beene conuersant in +the vse and exercise of learning, yea, and in promoting learned men vnto +magistracies, great consideration is had of their wisedom, justice, and of +other virtues esteemed by the Chinian: wherefore the way being open for all +men, without any respect of degree or parentage, to obtaine any of the +foresayd dignities, it can not be but that this most mighty and famous +kingdome must needes enioy exceeding peace and tranquility. LEO. I would +nowe (Michael) right gladly vnderstand, what kinde of vrbanity or ciuill +demeanour both the common people and the Magistrates doe vse one towardes +another: for it is not likely that where such due administration of iustice +is, common ciuility, which so well beseemeth all men, should be wanting. +[Sidenote: The fiue vertues principally esteemed among the Chinians.] +MICHAEL. You haue hit euen the very naile on the head: for among the fiue +vertues, which the Chinians principally regard, vrbanity or courtesy is +one, the rest are piety, a thankefull remembrance of benefites, true +dealing in contracts or bargaines, and wisedome in atchieuing of matters: +with the praises and commendations of which vertues the Chinian bookes are +full fraught. [Sidenote: Vrbanity.] Now as touching their vrbanity, it is +much vnlike vnto ours in Iapan, and vnto that of Europe: howbeit vnder two +principall kindes the rule of their vrbanity or courtesie may be +comprehended: whereof one is obserued betweene equals, and the other +betweene superiours and inferiours. For when men of equall dignity meet +together, they stand bending their backes, and bowing their heads downe to +the ground, and this they doe either once or twice, or sometimes thrise. +Now when the inferiour meets with his superiour, the sayd inferiour, for +the most part kneeling lowly on his knees, enclineth his countenance downe +to the earth. But how often and when this obeizance is to be performed it +is woonderfull what a number of rules and prescriptions are set downe, +which to recount would require a long time. [Sidenote: The Chinians great +piety towards their parents.] Somewhat also I wil say as touching their +piety, and especially of the piety which they vse towards their parents, +which verily is so exceeding great, that for the space of three whole yeres +together, the sonnes being cladde in mourning vestures doe bewaile the +death of their parents, which duety is performed not onely by the common +sort, but euen by all the Magistrates themselues, and that most curiously +and diligently. And that all men may wholly giue their attendance vnto this +businesse, it is prouided by a most inuiolable law among the Chinians, that +Magistrates, vpon the death of their parents, must foorthwith renounce +their authority, and three whole yeeres, for the performance of their +fathers exequies, must betake themselues vnto a priuate kinde of liuing: +which also is most duely put in practise by the Senatours of the Kings owne +Councell. For albeit a man be right gracious in the eyes of his Prince, +yea, and such an one, as vpon whom the administration of the Realme doeth +principally depend; yet hauing heard of the death of his parents, that is, +of his father or his mother, he hies himselfe immediately home to +solemnise their funerals: insomuch that if the king would retaine him still +in his office, he should be esteemed by the people, as a transgressour of +the lawes and customes of China: which accident (as it is recorded) in +ancient times fel out euen so. [Sisdenote: A memorable story.] For whenas a +certain king most familiarly vsed a certaine Senatour of his about the +managing and expedition of publike affaires, and vnderstanding well how +necessary the helpe of his foresayd Senatour was, would gladly, after the +death of his father, haue retained him still in his office: yet a certaine +other man, being a welwiller vnto the Chinian lawes, could in no case abide +it, but checking his Prince with sharpe rebukes, obiected the transgression +of the law against him. The king waxing wroth menaced present death vnto +the man; but when the party being no wit danted with the terrour of death, +persisted still in his sayings, the king changing his determination +dismissed the Senatour to mourne for his father, but as for his reprehender +be aduanced him vnto an higher dignity. LINUS. I perceiue (Michael) that +drawing to an end of these dialogues, and being weary of your long race, +you begin to affect breuity: yet let it not seeme troublesome vnto you to +speake somewhat of the religion of China, which onely thing seemes to be +wanting in this present dialogue. [Sidenote: The religion of China.] +MICHAEL. I confesse indeed that I endeuour to be briefe, not so much in +regard of wearisomnesse, as for feare least I haue bene ouer tedious vnto +you: howbeit I will not faile but accomplish that which I haue vndertaken, +and (according to your request) adde somewhat more concerning religion. +Whereas therefore the kingdome of China hath hitherto bene destitute of +true religion, and now the first beginnings thereof are included in most +narrow bounds, that nation being otherwise a people most ingenious, and of +an extraordinory and high capacity, hath alwayes liued in great errours and +ignorance of the trueth, being distracted into sundry opinions, and +following manifolde sects. [Sidenote: Three principall sectes among the +Chinians.] And among these sects there are three more famous then the rest: +[Sidenote: Confucius authour of the first sect.] the first is of them that +professe the doctrine of one Confucius a notable philosopher. This man (as +it is reported in the history of his life) was one of most vpright and +incorrupt maners, whereof he wrote sundry treatises very pithily and +largely, which aboue all other books, are seriously read and perused by the +Chinians. The same doctrine do all Magistrates embrace, and others also +that giue their mindes to the study of letters, a great part whereof +Confucius is sayd to haue inuented: and he is had in so great honour, that +all his followers and clients, vpon the dayes of the new and full Moone, +doe assemble themselues at the common Schoole, which I haue aboue +mentioned, and before his image, which is worshipped with burning of +incense and with tapers, they doe thrise bend their knees, and bow their +heads downe to the ground; which not onely the common scholars, but the +chiefe Magistrates do performe. [The summe of Confucius his doctrine.] The +summe of the foresayd doctrine is, that men should follow the light of +nature as their guide, and that they should diligently endeuour to attaine +vnto the vertues by me before mentioned: and lastly, that they should +employ their labour about the orderly gouernment of their families and of +the Common-wealth. All these things are in very deed praise-worthy, if +Confucius had made any mention of almighty God and of the life to come, and +had not ascribed so much vnto the heauens, and vnto fatall necessity, nor +yet had so curiously intreated of worshipping the images of their +forefathers. In which regard he can very hardly or not at all be excused +from the crime of idolatry: notwithstanding it is to be granted, that none +other doctrine among the Chinians approacheth so neere vnto the trueth as +this doeth. [Sidenote: Xequiam author of the second sect, whose followers +are called Cen or Bonzi.] The second sect is of them which followethe the +instructions of Xaquam, or as the Chinians call him Xequiam, whose +opinions, because they are well knowen amongst vs, it were bootlesse for me +to repeat; especially sithens, in the Catechisme composed by our grave +visitour, they are notably refuted. This doctrine doe all they embrace, +which are in China called Cen, but with vs at Iapon are named Bonzi. +[Sidenote: Note.] For this I doe briefly and by the way giue you to +vnderstand, that all words of the Chinians language are of one sillable +onely, so that if there be any word that consisteth of more sillables then +one, it consisteth also of more wordes then one. These sectaries called Cen +doe shaue their beards and their heads, and doe for the most part, together +with diuers of their associates, inhabit the Temples of Xaquam, or of +others which in regard of the same profession haue in their Kalenders beene +canonized for Saints, and doe rehearse certaine prayers after their maner, +either vpon books or beads, vsing other ceremonies after the maner of our +Bonzi. These men haue some inckling of the life to come, and of the +rewardes of good men, and the punishments of the wicked: howbeit all their +assertions are fraught with errours. [Sidenote: The third sect.] The third +sect is of them which are called Tauzu: and those doe imitate a certaine +other man, to be adored, as they thinke, for his holinesse. These also are +Priests after their kinde, howbeit they let their haire grow, and doe in +other obseruations differ from the former. Now, because the sect of +Confucius is the most famous of all the three, and the two other sects +called Cen and Tauzu are not much adicted vnto learning, their religion +preuailing onely among the common sort, the Priests of both the sayd sects +doe leade a most base and seruile life amongst the Chinians, insomuch that +they kneele downe before the Magistrates, and are not permitted to sit +beside them, sometimes, if the Magistrate please, are abased vnto the +punishment of the bastonado: whereas in our Iles of Iapon it is farre +otherwise, Priests, euen of false religion, being had in so great honour +among vs. [Sidenote: The superstition of the Saracens.] LEO. I heard also +(Michael) that the Saracens superstition takes place in China: now, whether +it doth or no, you can resolue vs. MICHAEL. That forren superstition was +brought into China what time the Tartars inuaded the kingdome, and vsurped +the gouernment thereof. All the Saracens therefore in China are originally +descended of the Tartars, who, because they were an infinite number, could +not vtterly be expelled and rooted out of the kingdome, but remaining +still there, haue propagated their posterity, though not their religion. +These therefore are souldiers for the greater part of them, and sometimes +doe obtaine martiall dignities: and except a few ceremonies of their +superstition which is nowe become stale and almost worne out, they doe +liue, altogether after the Chinians fashion, their predecessours being +brought into the same kingdome about foure hundred yeeres agoe. [Sidenote: +Christian religion planted in China.] LINUS. Now (Michael) let vs heare you +say somewhat of the Christian religion, which as we hope hath set most +happy footing in that kingdome. MICHAEL. I could say much concerning those +most wished and acceptable beginnings were they not already published in +Iapon by the letters of the fathers: howbeit I will make a briefe +rehearsall of all things, that I may not seem altogether to haue abandoned +this labour. You know that from the time wherein the fathers of the society +arriued in our Ilands, to the end they might augment Christian religion, +they were in like sort most carefull how they might insinuate themselues +into the innermost parts of the kingdome of China. In the middst of this +endeauour and trauell Francis Xauier, a most deuout man of the foresayd +society, departed out of this present life at the Ile of Sancian (which +some call Sangiam) leauing an example vnto the rest of his associates, how +they should likewise doe their best to plant the religion of Christ in that +nation. [Sidenote: An ancient custome worthy the obseruation.] This man was +seconded by others, who vsed all meanes, and left no practise vnattempted, +that they might bring these good beginnings vnto a prosperours issue: +howbeit they were greatly hindered by reason of an ancient custome in +China, in regard whereof they doe not without great difficulty and +circumspection admit any strangers into their dominions, except those which +hauing a long time executed the office of ambassadours doe ordinarily euery +third yeere present themselues before the king: in the admission of whom +likewise there is maruellous care vsed, that they may not easily espie and +become acquainted with the affaires of the Realme. [Sidenote: The Chinians +contemne other nations.] Hereunto may be added, that the Chinians are great +contemners of other nations, and most constant obseruers of their owne +lawes and customes: in all which respects it came to passe that there was +wonderfull labour and diligence employed aboue thirty yeeres together, +onely to get an entrance, vntill in the yeere one thousand fiue hundred +fourescore and three, two fathers of the foresayd society, that had pretty +skill in the letters and language of China, vtterly despairing of mans +helpe, and depending vpon the prouidence of almighty God, obtained licence +of the Tutan or Vice-roy to build them an house and a Church in the City of +Xauquin, which by reason of the commodiousnesse thereof is the seat of the +Viceroy himselue. This worke being begunne, the sayd fathers of the +society, for the nouelty therof, were a few yeeres right well entreated by +the Magistrates: inasmuch that two others out of India had free and easie +accesse vnto them, one couple remaining still in their foresayd house at +Xauquin, and the other two taking their iourney for the inner prouinces, to +conuert more people vnto the faith: who notwithstanding afterward, other +Magistrates not approouing of their attempts, were constrained to retire. +Nowe all the time wherein the foresayd fathers abode at Xauquin (being more +then fiue yeeres) certaine of the common people were restrained from false +superstition to Christian religion, and seuenty persons were baptised. But +the enemy of mankinde, who omitteth none opportunity for the hinderance of +Christian religion, suggested into the mindes of the Chinians (being, as I +sayd, of their owne nature, a people estranged from the traffique and +acquaintance of other nations, and alwayes being too suspicious of +strangers) that they should exhibit letters of supplication vnto the Caien +and the Tutan their principall Magistrates, to haue the fathers expelled +out of Xauquin: which Magistrates repairing vnto their foresayed house and +Church entered consultation how they might bannish them out of the sayd +City of Xauquin: in which thing verily they vsed great moderation, not any +way offending or exasperating the mindes of the fathers, but onely +signifying that they had regard vnto the estate of their Common-wealth. For +the Tutan or Vice-roy calling the fathers vnto him, and (to let passe other +accidents) vsing courteous and familiar conference with them, declared by +many arguments, that their habitation in the City of Xauquin was not +conuenient, especially sithens so many Magistrates resorted vnto that City, +who would take great offence at the presence of strangers. For the which +cause he perswaded them to accept some part of the money which they had +bestowed in the building of their house, and so to returne either home into +their own countrey, or vnto the port of Macao. Howbeit, such was the +instant supplication of the fathers, and so woorthy of compassion, that the +Tutan or Vice-roy, in the extreame and mediterrane borders of the prouince +of Coantum, assigned vnto them a new habitation at the city called Xaucheo, +commending them also to a certaine Magistrate, who was come from the same +place to salute him. Thither therefore the sayd others, not without great +sorrow and griefe of the Christians, hied themselues, and as we are +informed by their last letters, they haue euen now layed the foundation of +their first building, and haue also written that they are like to liue much +more peaceably and conueniently for the propagating of Christian religion. +These be the first beginnings of Christianity in China, where, euen as in +other places of the Christian Common-wealth, the seed is to be sowen with +great labour and teares, that acceptable fruits may be reaped with +gladnesse. LEO. It is euen as you haue sayd (Michael) and nowe for this +your pleasant and eloquent discourse we do acknowledge our selues much +bounden vnto you. + + * * * * * + +A Letter written from Goa, the principall City of all the East Indies, by + one Thomas Steuens an English man, and sent to his father, M. Thomas + Steuens: Anno 1579. + +After most humble commendations: These shall be to crave your dayly +blessing, with like commendations vnto my mother; and withall, to certifie +you of my being: according to your will and my duety. I wrote vnto you +taking my iourney from Italy to Portugall, which letters I thinke are come +to your hands, so that presuming therupon, I thinke I haue the lesse need +at this time to tell you the cause of my departing, which nevertheless in +one word I may conclude, if I do but name obedience. I came to Lisbon +toward the end of March, eight dayes before the departure of the shippes, +so late that if they had not bene stayed about some weighty matters, they +had bene long gone before our comming: insomuch that there were others +ordained to goe in our places, that the kings prouision and ours also might +not be in vaine. Neuerthelesse our sudden comming tooke place, and the +fourth of Aprill fiue ships departed for Goa, wherein besides shipmen and +souldiers, there were a great number of children which in the seas beare +out better than men, and no maruell, when that many women also passe very +well. The setting foorth from the port I need not to tell how solemne it is +with trumpets, and shooting of ordinance, you may easily imagine it, +considering that they go in the maner of warre. The tenth of the foresayd +moneth we came to the sight of Porto Santo neere vnto Madera, where an +English shippe set vpon ours (which was then also alone) with a few shots, +which did no harme, but after that our ship had layed out her greatest +ordinance, they straight departed as they came. The English shippe was very +faire and great, which I was sorry to see so ill occupied, for she went +rouing about, so that we saw her againe at the Canarian Iles, vnto the +which we came the thirteenth of the sayd moneth, and good leisure we had to +woonder at the high mountaine of the Iland Tenerif, for we wandred betweene +that and great Canaria foure dayes by reason of contrary windes: and +briefly, such euill weather we had vntill the foureteenth of May, that they +despaired, to compasse the Cape of Good hope that yeere. Neuertheless, +taking our voyage betweene Guinea and the Ilands of Capo Verde, without +seeing of any land at all, we arriued at length vnto the coast of Guinie, +which the Portugals so call, chiefly that part of the burning Zone, which +is from the sixt degree vnto the Equinoctiall, in which parts they suffered +so many inconueniences of heats, and lacke of windes, that they thinke +themselues happy when they haue passed it: for sometimes the ship standeth +there almost by the space of many dayes, sometimes she goeth, but in such +order that it were almost as good to stand still. And the greatest part of +this coast not cleare, but thicke and cloudy, full of thunder and +lightening, and raine so vnholesome, that if the water stand a little +while, all is full of wormes, and falling on the meat which is hanged vp, +it maketh it straight full of wormes. Along all that coast we often times +saw a thing swimming vpon the water like a cocks combe (which they call a +ship of Guinea) but the colour much fairer; which combe standeth vpon a +thing almost like the swimmer of a fish in colour and bignesse, and beareth +vnderneath in the water, strings which saue it from turning ouer. This +thing is so poisonous, that a man cannot touch it without great perill. In +this coast, that is to say, from the sixt degree vnto the Equinoctiall, we +spent no lesse than thirty dayes, partly with contrary windes, partly with +calme. The thirtieth of May we passed the Equinoctiall with contentation, +directing our course as well as we could to passe the promontory, but in +all that gulfe, and in all the way beside, we found so often calmes, that +the expertest mariner wondred at it. And in places where there are alwayes +woont to be most horrible tempests, we found most quiet calmes which was +very troublesome to those ships which be the greatest of all other, and +cannot go without good windes. Insomuch, that when it is tempest almost +intollerable for other ships, and maketh them maine all their sailes, these +hoise vp, and saile excellent well, vnlesse the waters be too furious, +which seldome happened in our nauigation. You shall vnderstand, that being +passed the line, they cannot straightway go the next way to the promontory: +but according to the winde, they draw always as neere South as they can to +put themselues in the latitude of the point, which is 35 degrees and an +halfe, and then they take their course towards the East, and so compass the +point. But the winde serued vs so, that at 33 degrees we did direct our +course toward the point or promontory of Good hope. + +You know that it is hard to saile from East to West, or contrary, because +there is no fixed point in all the skie, whereby they may direct their +course, wherefore I shall tell you what helps God prouided for these men. +There is not a fowle that appereth, or signe in the aire, or in the sea, +which they haue not written, which haue made the voyages heretofore. +[Sidenote: The variation of the compasse.] Wherfore, partly by their owne +experience, and pondering withall what space the ship was able to make with +such a winde, and such direction, and partly by the experience of others, +whose books and nauigations they haue, they gesse whereabouts they be, +touching degrees of longitude, for of latitude they be alwayes sure: but +the greatest and best industry of all is to marke the variation of the +needle or compasse, which in the Meridian of the Iland of S. Michael, which +is one of the Azores in the latitude of Lisbon, is iust North, and thence +swarueth towards the East so much, that betwixt the Meridian aforesayd, and +the point of Africa it carrieth three or foure quarters of 32. And againe +in the point of Afrike, a little beyond the point that is called Cape das +Agulias (in English the needles) it returneth againe vnto the North, and +that place passed, it swarueth againe toward the West, as it did before +proportionally. [Sidenote: Signes about the Cape of Bona Speransa.] As +touching our first signes, the neerer we came to the people of Afrike, the +more strange kindes of fowles appeared, insomuch that when we came within +no lesse then thirty leagues (almost an hundred miles) and sixe hundred +miles as we thought from any Iland, as good as three thousand fowles of +sundry kindes followed our ship: some of them so great that their wings +being opened from one point to the other, contained seuen spannes, as the +Mariners sayd. A maruellous thing to see how God prouided, so that in so +wide a sea these fowles are all fat, and nothing wanteth them. The +Portugals haue named them all according to some propriety which they haue: +some they call Rushtailes, because their tailes be not proportionable to +their bodies, but long and small like a rush, some forked tailes because +they be very broad and forked, some Veluet sleeues, because they haue wings +of the colour of veluet, and bowe them as a man boweth his elbow. This bird +is alwayes welcome, for he appeareth neerest the Cape. I should neuer make +an end if I should tell all particulars: but it shall suffice briefly to +touch a few, which yet shall be sufficient, if you marke them, to giue +occasion to glorifie almighty God in his wonderfull works, and such variety +in his creatures. [Sidenote: Fishes on sea coast of Africa.] And to speake +somewhat of fishes in all places of calme, especially in the burning Zone, +neere the line (for without we neuer saw any) there waited on our ship +fishes as long as a man, which they call Tuberones, they come to eat such +things as from the shippe fall into the sea, not refusing men themselues if +they light vpon them. And if they finde any meat tied in the sea, they take +it for theirs. These haue waiting on them six or seuen small fishes (which +neuer depart) with gardes blew and greene round about their bodies, like +comely seruing men: and they go two or three before him, and some on euery +side. Moreouer, they haue other fishes which cleaue alwayes vnto their +body, and seeme to take such superfluities as grow about them, and they are +sayd to enter into their bodies also to purge them if they need. The +Mariners in time past haue eaten of them, but since they haue seene them +eate men their stomacks abhorre them. Neuerthelesse, they draw them vp with +great hooks, and kill of them as many as they can, thinking that they haue +made a great reuenge. There is another kind of fish as bigge almost as a +herring, which hath wings and flieth, and they are together in great +number. These haue two enemies, the one in the sea, the other in the aire. +In the sea the fish which is called Albocore, as big as a Salmon, followeth +them with great swiftnesse to take them. This poore fish not being able to +swim fast, for he hath no finnes, but swimmeth with moouing of his taile, +shutting his wings, lifteth himselue aboue the water, and flieth not very +hie: the Albocore seeing that, although he haue no wings, yet he giueth a +great leape out of the water, and sometimes catcheth him, or els he keepeth +himselfe vnder the water going that way on as fast as he flieth. And when +the fish being weary of the aire, or thinking himselue out of danger, +returneth into the water, the Albocore meeteth with him: but sometimes his +other enemy the sea-crow, catcheth him before he falleth. [Sidenote: Note.] +With these and like sights, but alwayes making our supplications to God for +good weather and saluation of the ship, we came at length vnto the point, +so famous and feared of all men: but we found there no tempest, only great +waues, where our Pilot was a little ouerseene: for whereas commonly al +other neuer come within sight of land, but seeing signes ordinary, and +finding bottome, go their way sure and safe, he thinking himselfe to haue +wind at will, shot so nigh the land that the winde turning into the South, +and the waues being exceeding great, rolled vs so neere the land, that the +ship stood in lesse then 14 fadoms of water, no more then sixe miles from +the Cape, which is called Das Agulias, and there we stood as vtterly cast +away: for vnder vs were rocks of maine stone so sharpe, and cutting, that +no ancre could hold the ship, the shore so euill, that nothing could take +land, and the land itselfe so full of Tigers, and people that are sauage, +and killers of all strangers, that we had no hope of life nor comfort, but +onely in God and a good conscience. Notwithstanding, after we had lost +ancres, hoising vp the sailes for to get the ship a coast in some safer +place, or when it should please God, it pleased his mercy suddenly, where +no man looked for helpe, to fill our sailes with wind from the land, and so +we escaped, thanks be to God. And the day following, being in the place +where they are alwayes wont to catch fish, we also fell a fishing, and so +many they tooke, that they serued all the ship for that day, and part of +the next. [Sidenote: Corall.] And one of them pulled vp a corall of great +bignesse and price. For there they say (as we saw by experience) that the +corals doe grow in the maner of stalks vpon the rocks in the bottome, and +waxe hard and red. The day of perill was the nine and twentieth of Iuly. +[Sidenote: Two wayes beyond the cape of Good hope.] And you shall +vnderstand that, the Cape passed, there be two wayes to India: one within +the Ile of S. Lawrence, which they take willingly, because they refresh +themselues at Mosambique a fortnight or a moneth, not without great need, +and thence in a moneth more land in Goa. The other is without the Ile of S. +Lawrence, which they take when they set foorth so late, and come so late to +the point, that they have no time to take the foresayd Mosambique, and then +they goe heauily, because in this way they take no port. And by reason of +the long nauigation, and want of food and water, they fall into sundry +diseases, their gummes waxe great, and swell, and they are faine to cut +them away, their legges swell and all the body becommeth sore, and so +benummed, that they cannot stirre hand nor foot, and so they die for +weaknesse, others fall into fluxes and agues, and die thereby. And this way +it was our chance to make: yet though we had more then one hundred and +fifty sicke, there died not past seuen and twentie; which losse they +esteemed not much in respect of other times. Though some of ours were +diseased in this sort, yet, thanks be to God, I had my health, contrary to +the expectation of many: God send me my health so well in the land, if it +may be to his honour and seruice. This way is full of priuy rocks and +quicke-sands, so that sometimes we durst not saile by night, but by the +prouidence of God we saw nothing, nor neuer found bottom vntill we came to +the coast of India. When we had passed againe the line, and were come to +the third degree or somewhat more, we saw crabs swimming on the water that +were red as though they had bene sodden: but this was no signe of land. +After about the eleuenth degree, the space of many days, more than ten +thousand fishes by estimation followed round about our ship, whereof we +caught so many, that for fifteene days we did eate nothing els, and they +serued our turne very well: for at this time we had neither meate nor +almost any thing els to eate, our nauigation growing so long that it drew +neere to seuen moneths, where as commonly they goe it in fiue, I mean when +they saile the inner way. [Sidenote: They commonly sail from Lisbon to Goa +in 5 moneths.] But these fishes were not signe of land, but rather of deepe +sea. At length we tooke a couple of Birds which were a kinde of Hawks, +whereof they ioyed much, thinking that they had bene of India, but indeed +they were of Arabia, as we found afterward. And we that thought we had bene +neere India, were in the same latitude neere Zocotoro, an Ile in the mouth +of the Red sea. [Sidenote: Running seas very dangerous.] But there God sent +vs great winds from the Northeast or Northnortheast, wherevpon vnwillingly +they bare vp towards the East, and thus we went tenne dayes without seeing +signe of land, whereby they perceived their errour: for they had directed +their course before always Northeast, coueting to multiply degrees of +latitude, but partly the difference of the Needle, and most of all the +running seas, which at that time ran Northwest, had drawen vs to this other +danger, had not God sent vs this winde, which at length waxed larger, and +restored vs to our right course. These running seas be so perillous that +they deceiue the most part of the gouernours, and some be so little +curious, contenting themselues with ordinary experience, that they care not +to seeke out any meanes to know when they swarue, neither by the compasse, +nor by any other triall. [Sidenote: Certaine signs of land.] The first +signe of land were certaine fowles which they knew to be of India: the +second, boughes of palmes and sedges: the third, snakes swimming on the +water, and a substance which they call by the name of a coine of money, as +broad and as round as a groat, wonderfully printed and stamped of nature, +like vnto some coine. And these two last signes be so certaine, that the +next day after, if the winde serve, they see lande, which we did to our +great joy, when all our water (for you know they make no beere in those +parts) and victuals began to faile vs. [Sidenote: They arriued at Goa the +24 of October.] And to Goa we came the foure and twentieth day of October, +there being receiued with passing great charity. The people be tawny, but +not disfigured in their lips and noses, as the Moores and Cafres of +Ethiopia. They that be not of reputation, or at least the most part, goe +naked, sauing an apron of a span long, and as much in breadth before them, +and a lace two fingers broad before them, girded about with a string and no +more: and thus they thinke them as well as we with all our trimming. Of the +fruits and trees that be here I cannot now speake, for I should make +another letter as long as this. For hitherto I haue not seene a tree here +whose like I haue seene in Europe, the vine excepted, which neuerthelesse +here is to no purpose, so that all the wines are brought out of Portugall. +The drinke of this countrey is good water, or wine of the Palme tree, or of +a fruit called Cocos. And this shall suffice for this time. If God send me +my health, I shall haue opportunity to write to you once againe. Now the +length of my letter compelleth me to take my leaue, and thus I wish your +most prosperous health. From Goa the tenth of Nouember, 1579. + +Your louing sonne Thomas + +Steuens. + + * * * * * + +A briefe relation of the great magnificence and rich traffike of the + kingdome of Pegu beyond the East India, written by Frey Peter of Lisbon, + to his cousin Frey Diego of Lisbon, from Cochin. + +[Sidenote: The coast of India greatly troubled with Moores.] I receiued +your letters in the harbour of Damaon by a carauell of aduise that came +from Malacca, which brought shot, powder, and other prouision for the +furnishing of foure gallies and a great Gallion, which are now in building, +to keepe our coast for feare of great store of men of warre, being Moores, +which trouble vs very sore. At that instant when I receiued your letters I +was newly come from the kingdome of Pegu, where I had remained one yeere +and an halfe, and from thence I departed to the city of Cochin in October +1587. The newes which I can certifie you of concerning these countreys are: +that this king of Pegu is the mightiest king of men, and the richest that +is in these parts of the world: for he bringeth into the field at any time, +when he hath warres with other princes, aboue a million of fightingmen: +howbeit they be very leane and small people, and are brought vnto the field +without good order. [Sidenote: Abundance of golde, siluer, pearles, and +precious stones in Pegu.] He is lord of the Elephants, and of all the golde +and siluer mines, and of all the pearles and precious stones: so that he +hath the greatest store of treasure that euer was heard of in these parts. +The countrey people call him the God of trueth and of iustice. I had great +conference with this king, and with the head captaine of the Portugals, +which is one of the countrey. They demanded of me many questions as +touching the law and faith of Iesus Christ, and as touching the Ten +Commandements. And the king gaue his consent that our Order should build a +Church in his countrey, which was halfe builded; but our peruerse and +malicious Portugals plucked it downe againe: [Sidenote: The great gaine of +the Portugals in Pegu.] for whereas it is a countrey wherein our nation +gaine very much by their commodities, they fearing that by the building of +this Church there would be greater resort thither, and so their trade +should be impaired if their great gaines should be knowen vnto others then +those which found this countrey out first, therefore they were so vnwilling +that the building of this church should goe forward. Our Portugals which +are here in this realme are woorse people then the Gentiles. I preached +diuers times among those heathen people; but being obstinate they say, that +as their father beleeued so they will beleeue: for if their forefathers +went to the diuell so they will. Whereupon I returned backe againe to our +monastery to certifie our Father prouinciall of the estate of this new +found countrey. It is the best and richest countrey in all this East India: +and it is thought to be richer then China. + +[Sidenote: Pegu the best and richest countrey in all the East Indies.] I am +afrayd that the warres which his Maiestie hath with England will be the +vtter vndoing and spoile of Spaine: for these countreys likewise are almost +spoiled with ciull warres, which the Moores haue against the Gentiles: for +the kings here are vp in armes all the countrey ouer. Here is an Indian +which is counted a prophet, which hath prophesied that there will a Dragon +arise in a strange countrey, which will do great hurt to Spaine. How it +will fall out onely God doth know. And thus I rest: from this monastery of +Cochin the 28 of December, 1589. [Sidenote: A prophesie of an Indian +against Spaine.] + +Your good cousin and assured friend + +frier Peter of Lisbon. + + * * * * * + +A voyage with three tall ships, the Penelope Admirall, the Marchant royall + Viceadmirall, and the Edward Bonaduenture Rereadmirall, to the East + Indies, by the Cape of Buona Speransa, to Quitangone neere Mosambique, to + the Iles of Comoro and Zanzibar on the backeside of Africa, and beyond + Cape Comori in India, to the Iles of Nicubar and of Gomes Polo, within + two leagues of Sumatra, to the Ilands of Pulo Pinaom, and thence to the + maine land of Malacca, begunne by M. George Raymond, in the yeere 1591, + and performed by M. Iames Lancaster, and written from the mouth of Edmund + Barker of Ipswich, his lieutenant in the sayd voyage, by M. Richard + Hakluyt. + +Our fleet of the three tall ships abouenamed departed from Plimmouth the 10 +of April 1591, and arrived at the Canarie-ilands the 25 of the same, from +whence we departed the 29 of April. The second of May we were in the height +of Cape Blanco. The fift we passed the tropique of Cancer. The eight we +were in the height of Cape Verde. All this time we went with a faire winde +at Northeast, alwayes before the winde vntil the 13 of the same moneth, +when we came within 8 degrees of the Equinoctiall line, where we met with a +contrary winde. Here we lay off and on in the sea vntil the 6 of Iune, on +which day we passed the sayd line. While we lay thus off and on, we tooke a +Portugal Carauel laden by merchants of Lisbon for Brasile, in which Carauel +we had some 60 tunnes of wine, 1200 iarres of oyle, about 100 iarres of +oliues, certaine barrels of capers, three fats of peason, with diuers other +necessaries fit for our voyage; which wine, oyle, oliues and capers were +better to vs then gold. [Sidenote: Three occasions of sicknes neere the +line.] We had two men died before wee passed the line, and diuers sicke, +which took their sicknesse in those hote climates: for they be wonderfull +vnwholesome from 8 degrees of Northerly latitude vnto the line, at that +time of the yeere: for we had nothing but Ternados, with such thunder, +lightning, and raine, that we could not keep our men drie 3 houres +together, which was an occasion of the infection among them, and their +eating of salt victuals, with lacke of clothes to shift them. After we +passed the line, we had the wind still at Eastsoutheast, which carried vs +along the coast of Brasil 100 leagues from the maine, til we came in 26 +degrees to the Southward of the line, where the wind came vp to the North, +at which time we did account, that the Cape of Buona esperansa did beare +off vs East and by South, betwixt 900 and 1000 leagues. Passing this gulfe +from the coast of Brasil vnto the Cape we had the wind often variable as it +is vpon our coast, but for the most part so, that we might lie our course. +The 28 of Iuly we had sight of the foresayd Cape of Buona esperansa: vntill +the 31 we lay off and on with the wind contrary to double the Cape, hoping +to double it, and so to haue gone seuentie leagues further to a place +called Agoada de S. Bras, before we would haue sought to haue put into any +harbour. But our men being weake and sicke in all our shippes, we thought +good to seeke some place to refresh them. With which consent we bare vp +with the land to the Northward of the Cape, and going along the shoare, we +espied a goodly Baie with an Iland lying to Seawards of it into which we +did beare, and found it very commodious for our ships to ride in. +[Sidenote: Agoada de Saldanha.] This Baie is called Agoada de Saldanha, +lying 15 leagues Northward on the hither side of the Cape. The first of +August being Sunday we came to an anker in the Baie, sending our men on +land, and there came vnto them certaine blacke Saluages very brutish which +would not stay, but retired from them. For the space of 15 or 20 dayes we +could finde no reliefe but onely foules which wee killed with our pieces, +which were cranes and geese: there was no fish but muskles and other +shel-fish, which we gathered on the rockes. [Sidenote: Great store of +Penguins and Seales.] After 15 or 20 dayes being here, our Admirall went +with his pinnasse vnto the Iland which lieth off this Baie, where hee found +great store of Penguines and Seales, whereof he brought good plenty with +him. And twise after that we sent certain of our men, which at both times +brought their bots lading vnto our ships. After we had bene here some time, +we got here a Negro, whom we compelled to march into the countrey with vs, +making signs to bring vs some cattel; but at this time we could come to the +sight of none, so we let the Negro goe with some trifles. [Sidenote: +Bullocks, oxen, and sheepe, dog-cheape.] Within 8 dayes after, he with 30 +or 40 other Negroes, bought vs downe some 40 bullocks and oxen, with as +many sheepe: at which time we brought but few of them. But within 8 dayes +after they came downe with as many more, and then we bought some 24 oxen +with as many sheepe. We bought an oxe for two kniues, a stirke for a knife, +and a sheepe for a knife, and some we bought for lesse value then a knife. +The oxen be very large and well fleshed, but not fat. The sheepe are very +big and very good meat, they haue no woll on their backs but haire, and +haue great tailes like the sheepe in Syria. There be diuers sorts of wild +beests, as the Antilope, (whereof M. Lancaster killed one of the bignes of +a yong colt) the red and fallow Deere, with other great beasts vnknowen +vnto vs. Here are also great store of ouer-growen monkies. As touching our +proceeding vpon our voyage, it was thought good rather to proceed with two +ships wel manned, then with three euill manned: for here wee had of sound +and whole men but 198, of which there went in the Penelope with the Admiral +101, and in the Edward with the worshipfull M. captaine Lancaster 97. We +left behind 50 men with the Roiall marchant, whereof there were many +pretily well recouered, of which ship was master and gouernour Abraham +Kendal, which for many reasons we thought good to send home. The disease +that hath consumed our men hath bene the skuruie. Our souldiers which haue +not bene vsed to the Sea, haue best held out, but our mariners dropt away, +which (in my iudgement) proceedeth of their euill diet at home. + +[Sidenote: Cape de Buona Speransa doubled. Cape dos Corrientes.] Sixe dayes +after our sending backe for England of the Marchant Roiall from Agoada de +Saldanha, our Admirall M. captaine Raimond in the Penelope, and M. Iames +Lancaster in the Edward Bonaduenture, set forward to double the Cape of +Buona esperansa, which they did very speedily. [Sidenote: Here they are +seuered from the Penelope.] But being passed as far as Cape dos Corrientes +the 14 of September we were encountred with a mighty storme and extreme +gusts of wind, wherein we lost our Generals companie, and could neuer heare +of him nor his ship any more, though we did our best endeuour to seeke him +vp and downe a long while, and staied for him certaine dayes at the Iland +of Comoro, where we appointed to stay one for another. [Sidenote: Foure men +slaine with a clap of thunder.] Foure days after this uncomfortable +seperation in the morning toward ten of the clocke we had a terrible clap +of thunder, which slew foure of our men ovtright, the necks being wrung in +sonder without speaking any word, and of 94 men there was not one +vntouched, whereof some were striken blind, others were bruised in their +legs and armes, and others in their brests, so that they voided blood two +days after, others were drawen out at length as though they had been +racked. But (God be thanked) they all recouered sauing onely the foure +which were slain out right. Also with the same thunder our maine maste was +torn very grieuously from the head to the decke, and some of the spikes +that were ten inches into the timber, were melted with the extreme heate +thereof. [Sidenote: The Shoulds of S. Laurence.] From thence we shaped our +course to the Northeast, and not long after we fell vpon the Northwest end +of the mighty Iland of S. Laurence: which one of our men espied by Gods +good blessing late in the euening by Moone light, who seeing afarre off the +breaking of the Sea, and calling to certaine of his fellowes, asked them +what it was: which eft soones told him that it was the breaking of the Sea +vpon the Shoulds. Whereupon in very good time we cast about to auoyd the +danger which we were like to haue incurred. [Sidenote: Quitangone neere +Mozambique.] Thus passing on forward, it was our lucke to ouer-shoote +Mozambique, and to fall with a place called Quitangone two leagues to the +Northward of it, and we tooke three or foure Barkes of Moores, which Barkes +in their language they call Pangaias, laden with Millio, hennes and ducks, +with one Portugall boy, going for the prouision of Mozambique. [Sidenote: +The Ile of Comoro.] Within few dayes following we came to an Iland an +hundred leagues to, the Northeast of Mozambique called Comoro, which we +found exceedingly full of people, which are Moores of tawnie colour and +good stature, but they be very trecherous and diligently to be taken heed +of. Here wee desired to store our selues with water, whereof we stood in +great need, and sent sixteene of our men well armed on in our boate: whom +the people suffred quietly to land and water, and diuers of them with their +king came aboord our ship in a gowne of crimosine Sattin pinked after the +Moorish fashion downe to the knee, whom we entertained in the best maner, +and had some conference with him of the state of the place and +marchandises, vsing our Portugall boy which we had taken before for our +interpreter, and in the end licensed the king and his company to depart, +and sent our men againe for more water, who then also dispatched their +businesse and returned quietly: the third time likewise we sent them for +more, which also returned without any harme. [Sidenote: 32 of our men +betraid at the Ile of Comoro.] And though we thought our selues furnished, +yet our master William Mace of Radcliffe pretending that it might be long +before we might finde any good watering place, would needes goe himselfe on +shore with thirtie men, much against the will of our captaine, and hee and +16 of his company, together with one boat which was all that we had, and 16 +others that were a washing ouer against our ship, were betrayed of the +perfidious Moores, and in our sight for the most part slaine, we being not +able for want of a boat to yeeld them any succour. [Sidenote: Zanzibar +Iland.] From thence with heauie hearts we shaped our course for Zanzibar +the 7 of Nouember, where shortly after we arriued and made vs a new boat of +such boards as we had within boord, and rid in the road vntill the 15 of +February, where, during our aboad, we sawe diuers Pangaias or boates, which +are pinned with wooden pinnes, and sowed together with Palmito cordes, and +calked with the husks of Cocos shels beaten, whereof they made Occam. +[Sidenote: A Portugall Factorie in Zanzibar.] At length a Portugal Pangaia +comming out of the harborow of Zanzibar, where they haue a small Factorie, +sent a Canoa with a Moore which had bene christened, who brought vs a +letter wherein they desired to know what wee were, and what we sought. We +sent them word we were Englishmen come from Don Antonio vpon businesse to +his friends in the Indies: with which answere they returned, and would not +any more come at vs. Whereupon not long after wee manned out our boat and +tooke a Pangaia of the Moores, which had a priest of theirs in it, which in +their language they call a Sherife: whom we vsed very courteously: which +the king tooke in very good part, hauing his priests in great estimation, +and for his deliuerance furnished vs with two moneths victuals, during all +which time we detained him with vs. These Moores informed vs of the false +and spitefull dealing of the Portugals towards vs, [Marginal note: The +treason of the Portugals towards the English.] which made them beleeue that +we were cruell people and men-eaters, and willed them if they loued their +safetie in no case to come neere vs. Which they did onely to cut us off +from all knowledge of the state and traffique of the countrey. While we +road from the end of Nouember vntil the middle of February in this +harborough, which is sufficient for a ship of 500 tuns to ride in, we set +vpon a Portugall Pangaia with our boat, but because it was very litle, and +our men not able to stirre in it, we were not able to take the sayd Pangaia +which was armed with 10 good shot like our long fouling pieces. [Sidenote: +An excellent place for refreshing.] This place for the goodnesse of the +harborough and watering, and plentifull refreshing with fish, whereof we +tooke great store with our nets, and for sundry sorts of fruits of the +countrey, as Cocos and others, which were brought vs by the Moores as also +for oxen and hennes, is carefully to be sought for by such of our ships, as +shall hereafter passe that way. [Sidenote: A gallie Frigate.] But our men +had need to take good heed of the Portugals: for while we lay here the +Portugall Admiral of the coast from Melinde to Mozambique, came to view and +betray our boat if he could haue taken at any time aduantage, in a gallie +Frigate of ten tunnes with 8 or 9 oares on a side. Of the strength of which +Frigate and their trecherous meaning we were aduertised by an Arabian Moore +which came from the king of Zanzibar diuers times vnto vs about the +deliuerie of the priest aforesayd, and afterward by another which we caried +thence along with vs: for whersoeuer we came, our care was to get into our +hands some one or two of the countreys to learne the languages and states +of those partes where we touched. [Sidenote: Another thunder-clap.] +Moreouer, here againe we had another clap of thunder which did shake our +foremast very much, which wee fisht and repaired with timber from the +shore, whereof there is good store thereabout of a kind of tree some fortie +foot high, which is a red and tough wood, and as I suppose, a kind of +Cedar. [Sidenote: Heat in the head deadly. Letting of blood very +necessary.] Here our Surgeon Arnold negligently catching a great heate in +his head being on land with the master to seeke oxen, fell sicke and +shortly died, which might haue bene cured by letting of blood before it had +bin settled. Before our departure we had in this place some thousand weight +of pitch, or rather a kind of gray and white gumme like vnto frankincense, +as clammie as turpentine, which in melting groweth as blacke as pitch, and +is very brittle of it selfe, but we mingled it with oile, whereof wee had +300 iarres in the prize which we tooke to the Northward of the +Equinoctiall, not farre from Guinie, bound for Brasil. Sixe days before wee +departed hence, the Cape marchant of the Factorie wrote a letter vnto our +capitaine in the way of friendship, as he pretended, requesting a iarre of +wine and a iarre of oyle, and two or three pounds of gunpowder, which +letter hee sent by a Negro his man, and Moore in a Canoa: we sent him his +demaunds by the Moore, but tooke the Negro along with vs because we +vnderstood he had bene in the East Indies and knew somewhat of the +Countrey. [Sidenote: A Iunco laden with pepper and drugs.] By this Negro we +were aduertised of a small Barke of some thirtie tunnes (which the Moores +call a Iunco) which was come from Goa thither laden with Pepper for the +Factorie and seruice of that kingdome. Thus hauing trimmed our shippe as we +lay in this road, in the end we set forward for the coast of the East +Indie, the 15 of February aforesayd, intending if we could to haue reached +to Cape Comori, which is the headland or Promontorie of the maine of +Malauar, and there to haue lien off and on for such ships as should haue +passed from Zeilan, Sant Tome, Bengala, Pegu, Malacca, the Moluccos, the +coast of China, and the Ile of Japan, which ships are of exceeding wealth +and riches. [Sidenote: The currents set to the North-west.] But in our +course we were very much deceiued by the currents that set into the gulfe +of the Red sea along the coast of Melinde. [Sidenote: Zocotora.] And the +windes shortening vpon vs to the Northeast and Easterly, kept vs that we +could not get off, and so with the putting in of the currents from the +Westward, set vs in further vnto the Northward within fourscore leagues of +the Ile of Zocotora, farre from our determined course and expectation. But +here we neuer wanted abundance of Dolphins, Bonitos, and flying fishes. Now +while we found our selues thus farre to the Northward, and the time being +so farre spent, we determined to goe for the Red sea, or for the Iland of +Zocotora, both to refresh our selues, and also for some purchase. But while +we were in this consultation, the winde very luckily came about to the +Northwest and caried vs directly toward Cape Comori. [Sidenote: The Isles +of Mamale.] Before we should haue doubled this Cape, we were determined to +touch at the Ilands of Mamale, of which we had aduertisement, that one had +victuals, standing in the Northerly latitude of twelue degrees. Howbeit it +was not our good lucke to finde it, which fell out partly by the obstinacie +of our master: for the day before we fell with part of the Ilands the wind +came about to the Southwest, and then shifting our course we missed it. So +the wind increasing Southerly, we feared we should not haue bene able to +haue doubled the Cape, which would haue greatly hazarded our casting away +vpon the coast of India, the Winter season and Westerne Monsons already +being come in, which Monsons continue on that coast vntil August. +[Sidenote: Cape Comori doubled 1592.] Neuertheless it pleased God to bring +the wind more Westerly, and so in the moneth of May 1592, we happily +doubled Cape Comori without sight of the coast of India. From hence thus +hauing doubled this Cape, we directed our course for the Ilands of Nicubar, +which lie North and South with the Westerne part of Sumatra, and in the +latitude of 7 degrees to the Northward of the Equinoctiall. From which Cape +of Comori vnto the aforesayd Ilands we ranne in sixe days with a very large +wind though the weather were foule with extreme raine and gustes of winde. +These Ilands were missed through our masters default for want of due +obseruation of the South starre. [Sidenote: The Iles of Gomes Polo.] And we +fell to the Southward of them within the sight of the Ilands of Gomes Polo, +[Sidenote: Sumatra.] which lie hard vpon the great Iland of Sumatra the +first of Iune, and at the Northeast side of them we lay two or three dayes +becalmed, hoping to haue had a Pilote from Sumatra, within two leagues +whereof we lay off and on. [Sidenote: The Iles of Pulo Pinauo.] Now the +Winter coming vpon vs with much contagious weather, we directed our course +from hence with the Ilands of Pulo Pinaou, (where by the way it is to be +noted that Pulo in the Malaian tongue signifieth an Iland) at which Ilands +wee arriued about the beginning of Iune, where we came to an anker in a +very good harborough betweene three Ilands: at which time our men were very +sicke and many fallen. Here we determined to stay vntil the Winter were +ouerpast. This place is in 6 degrees and a halfe to the Northward, and some +fiue leagues from the maine betweene Malacca and Pegu. Here we continued +vntil the end of August. Our refreshing in this place was very smal, onely +of oysters growing on rocks, great wilks, and some few fish which we tooke +with our hookes. Here we landed our sicke men on these vninhabited Ilands +for their health, neuertheless 26 of them died in this place, whereof John +Hall our master was one, and M. Rainold Golding another, a marchant of +great honestie and much discretion. [Sidenote: Trees fit for mastes.] In +these Ilands are abundance of trees of white wood, so right and tall, that +a man may make mastes of them being an hundred foote long. The winter +passed and hauing watered our ship and fitted her to goe to Sea, wee had +left vs but 33 men and one boy, of which not past 22 were sound for labour +and helpe, and of them not past a third part sailers: [Sidenote: Malacca.] +thence we made saile to seeke some place of refreshing, and went ouer to +the maine of Malacca. The next day we came to an anker in a Baie in six +fadomes water some two leagues from the shore. Then master Iames Lancaster +our captaine, and M. Edmund Barker his lieutenant, and other of the +companie manning the boat, went on shoare to see what inhabitants might be +found. And comming on land we found the tracking of some barefooted people +which were departed thence not long before: for we sawe their fire still +burning, but people we sawe none, nor any other living creature, saue a +certaine kind of foule called oxe birds, which are a gray kind of +Sea-foule, like a Snite in colour, but not in beake. Of these we killed +some eight dozen with haile-shot being very tame, and spending the day in +search, returned toward night aboord. The next day about two of the clocke +in the afternoone we espied a Canoa which came neere vnto vs, but would not +come aboord vs, hauing in it some sixteen naked Indians, with whom +neuertheles going afterward on land, we had friendly conference and promise +of victuals. [Sidenote: Three ships of Pegu laden with pepper.] The next +day in the morning we espied three ships, being all of burthen 60 or 70 +tunnes, one of which wee made to strike with our very boate: and +vnderstanding that they were of the towne of Martabam, [Sidenote: +Martabam.] which is the chiefe hauen towne for the great citie of Pegu, and +the goods belonging to certaine Portugal Iesuites and a Biscuit baker a +Portugall we tooke that ship and did not force the other two, because they +were laden for marchants of Pegu, but hauing this one at our command, we +came together to an anker. The night folowing all the men except twelue, +which we tooke into our ship, being most of them borne in Pegu, fled away +in their boate, leauing their ship and goods with vs. [Sidenote: Pera.] The +next day we weighed our anker and went to the Leeward of an Iland hard by, +and tooke in her lading being pepper, which shee and the other two had +laden at Pera, which is a place on the maine 30 leagues to the South. +Besides the aforesaid three ships we tooke another ship of Pegu laden with +pepper, and perceiuing her to bee laden with marchants goods of Pegu onely, +wee dismissed her without touching any thing. + +[Sidenote: Pulo Sambilam.] Thus hauing staied here 10 daies and discharged +her goods into the Edward, which was about the beginning of September, our +sicke men being somewhat refreshed and lustie, with such reliefe as we had +found in this ship, we weighed anker, determining to runne into the +streights of Malacca to the Ilands called Pulo Sambilam, which are some +fiue and fortie leagues Northward of the citie of Malacca, to which Ilands +the Portugals must needs come from Goa or S. Thome, for the Malucos, China, +and Iapan. And when wee were there arriued, we lay too and agayne for such +shipping as should come that way. [Sidenote: A ship of Negapatan taken.] +Thus hauing spent some fiue dayes, vpon a Sunday we espied a saile which +was a Portugall ship that came from Negapatan a towne on the maine of India +ouer-against the Northeast part of the Ile of Zeilan; and that night we +tooke her being of 250 tunnes: she was laden with Rice for Malacca. +Captaine Lancaster commanded their captaine and master aboord our shippe, +and sent Edmund Barker his lieutenant and seuen more to keepe this prize, +who being aboord the same, came to an anker in thirtie fadomes water: for +in that chanell, three or foure leagues from the shore you shall finde good +ankorage. [Sidenote: A ship of S. Thome.] Being thus at an anker and +keeping out a light for the Edward, another Portugall ship of Sant Thome of +foure hundred tunnes, came and ankered hard by vs. The Edward being put to +Leeward for lacke of helpe of men to handle her sailes, was not able the +next morning to fetch her vp, vntil we which were in the prize with our +boate, went to helpe to man our shippe. Then comming aboord we went toward +the shippe of Sant Thome, but our ship was so foule that shee escaped vs. +After we had taken out of our Portugall prize what we thought good, we +turned her and all her men away except a Pilot and foure Moores. [Sidenote: +The galeon of Malacca of 700 taken.] We continued here vntill the sixt of +October, at which time we met with the ship of the captaine of Malacca of +seuen hundred tunnes which came from Goa: we shot at her many shot, and at +last shooting her maine-yard through, she came to an anker and yeelded. We +commaunded her Captaine, Master, Pilot, and Purser to come aboord vs. But +the Captaine accompanied by one souldier onely came, and after certaine +conference with him, he made excuse to fetch the Master, and Purser, which +he sayd would not come vnless he went for them: but being gotten from vs in +the edge of the euening, he with all the people which were to the number of +about three hundred men, women and children gote a shore with two great +boates and quite abandoned the ship. [Sidenote: Wares fit to carry into the +East India.] At our comming aboord we found in her sixteene pieces of +brasse, and three hundred but of Canarie wine, and Nipar wine, which is +made of the palme trees, and raisin wine which is also very strong: as also +all kinds of Haberdasher wares, as hats, red caps knit of Spanish wooll, +worsted stockings knit, shooes, veluets, taffataes, chamlets, and silkes, +abundance of suckets, rice, Venice glasses, certaine paper full of false +and counterfeit stones which an Italian brought from Venice to deceiue the +rude Indians withall, abundance of playing cardes, two or three packs of +French paper. Whatsoeuer became of the treasure which vsually is brought in +roials of plate in this gallion, we could not find it. After that the +mariners had disordredly pilled this rich shippe, the Captaine because they +would not follow his commandement to vnlade those excellent wines into the +Edward, abandoned her and let her driue at Sea, taking out of her the +choisest things that she had. [Sidenote: The kingdom of Iunsaloam.] And +doubting the forces of Malaca, we departed thence to a Baie in the kingdom +of Iunsalaom, which is betweene Malacca and Pegu eight degrees to the +Northward, to seeke for pitch to trimme our ship. Here we sent our +souldier, which the captaine of the aforesaid galion had left behind him +with vs, because he had the Malaian language, to deale with the people for +pitch, which hee did faithfully, and procured vs some two or three quintals +with promise of more, and certaine of the people came vnto vs. [Sidenote: +Amber-greese. The hornes of Abath.] We sent commodities to their king to +barter for Amber-griese, and for the hornes of Abath, whereof the king +onely hath the traffique in his hands. [Sidenote: The female Vnicorne.] Now +this Abath is a beast which hath one horne onely in her forehead, and is +thought to be the female Vnicorne, and is highly esteemed of all the Moores +in those parts as a most soueraigne remedie against poyson. We had only two +or three of these hornes which are of the colour of a browne gray, and some +reasonable quantitie of Amber-griese. At last the king went about to betray +our Portugall with our marchandise: but he to get aboord vs, told him that +we had gilt armour, shirtes of maile and halberds, which things they +greatly desire: for hope whereof he let him returne aboord, and so he +escaped the danger. [Marginal note: Some small quantitie hereof may be +caried to pleasure those kings.] Thus we left this coast and went backe +againe in sight of Sumatra, and thence to the Ilands of Nicubar, where we +arriued and found them inhabited with Moores, [Sidenote: They arriue at the +Iles of Nicubar, which are inhabited by Moores.] and after wee came to an +anker, the people daily came aboord vs in their Canoas, with hennes, Cocos, +plantans, and other fruits: and within two dayes they brought vnto vs +roials of plate, giuing vs them for Calicut cloth: which roials they nude +by diuing for them in the Sea, which were lost not long before in two +Portugall ships which were bound for China and were cast away there. They +call in their language the Coco Calambe, the Plantane Pison, a Hen Iam, a +Fish Iccan, a Hog Babee. From thence we returned the 21 of Nouember to goe +for the Iland of Zeilan, and arriued there about the third of December +1592, and ankered vpon the Southside in sixe fadomes water, where we lost +our anker, the place being rockie and foule ground. Then we ranne along the +Southwest part of the sayd Iland, to a place called Punta del Galle, where +we ankered, determining there to haue remained vntill the comming of the +Bengala Fleet of seuen or eight ships, and the Fleete of Pegu of two or +three sailes, and the Portugall shippes of Tanaseri being a great Baie to +the Southward of Martabam in the kingdome of Siam: which ships, by diuers +intelligences which we had, were to come that way within foureteene daye to +bring commodities to serue the Caraks, which commonly depart from Cochin +for Portugall by the middest of Ianuarie. The commodities of the shippes +which come from Bengala bee fine pauillions for beds, wrought quilts, fine +Calicut cloth, Pintados and other fine workes, and Rice, and they make this +voiage twise in the yeere. Those of Pegu bring the chiefest stones, as +Rubies and Diamants, but their chiefe fraight is Rice and certaine cloth. +Those of Tanaseri are chiefly freighted with Rice and Nipar wine, which is +very strong, and in colour like vnto rocke water, somewhat whitish, and +very hote in taste like vnto Aqua vitae. Being shot vp to the place +aforesayd, called Punta del Galle, wee came to an anker in foule ground and +lost the same, and lay all that night a drift, because we had nowe but two +ankers left vs, which were vnstocked and in hold. Whereupon our men tooke +occasion to come home, our Captaine at that time lying very sicke more like +to die then to liue. In the morning wee set our foresaile determining to +lie vp to the Northward and there to keepe our selues to and againe out of +the current, which otherwise would haue set vs off to the Southward from +all knowen land. Thus hauing set our foresayle, and in hand to set all our +other sayles to accomplish our aforesayd determination, our men made +answere that they would take their direct course for England and would stay +there no longer. Nowe seeing that they could not bee perswaded by any +meanes possible, the captaine was constrained to giue his consent to +returne, leauing all hope of so great possibilities. Thus the eight of +December 1592, wee set sayle for the Cape of Buona Speransa, passing by the +Ilands of Maldiua, and leauing the mightie Iland of S. Laurence on the +starreboord or Northward in the latitude of 26 degrees to the South. In our +passage ouer from S. Laurence to the maine we had exceeding great store of +Bonitos and Albocores, which are a greater kind of fish; of which our +captain, being now recouered of his sicknesse, tooke with a hooke as many +in two or three howers as would serue fortie persons a whole day. And this +skole of fish continued with our ship for the space of fiue or sixe weekes, +all which while we tooke to the quantitie aforesayd, which was no small +refreshing to vs. In February 1593 we fell with the Eastermost land of +Africa at a place called Baia de Agoa some 100 leagues to the Northeast of +the Cape of Good Hope: and finding the winds contrary, we spent a moneth or +fiue weekes before we could double the Cape. After wee had doubled it in +March following wee directed our course for the Iland of Santa Helena, and +arriued there the third day of Aprill, where we staied to our great comfort +nineteene dayes: in which meane space some one man of vs tooke thirtie +goodly Congers in one day, and other rockie fishe and some Bonitos. After +our arriual at Santa Helena, I Edmund Barker went on shore with foure or +fiue Peguins or men of Pegu which we had taken, and our Surgion, where in +an house by the Chappell I found an Englishman one Iohn Segar of Burie in +Suffock, [Marginal note: Iohn Segar an Englishman left 18 moneths alone in +the Ile of santa Helena.] who was left there eighteene moneths before by +Abraham Kendall, who put in there with the Roiall marchant and left him +there to refresh him on the Iland, being otherwise like to haue perished on +shipboord: and at our comming wee found him as fresh in colour and in as +good plight of body to our seeming as might be, but crazed in minde and +halfe out of his wits, as afterwards wee perceiued: for whether he was put +in fright of vs, not knowing at first what we were, whether friends or +foes, or of sudden ioy when he vnderstand we were his olde consorts and +countreymen, hee became idle-headed, and for eight dayes space neither +night nor day tooke any naturall rest, and so at length died for lacke of +sleepe. [Marginal note: A miraculous effect of extreme feare or extreme +ioy.] Here two of our men, whereof the one was diseased with the skuruie, +and the other had bene nine moneths sicke of the fluxe, in short time while +they were on the Iland, recouered their perfect health. We found in this +place great store of very holesome and excellent good greene figs, orenges, +and lemons very faire, abundance of goates and hogs, and great plentie of +partriges, Guiniecocks, and other wilde foules. [Marginal note: The +description of the commodities of the ile of santa Helena.] Our mariners +somewhat discontented being now watered and hauing some prouision of fish, +contrary to the will of the capitaine, would straight home. The capitaine +because he was desirous to goe for Phernambuc in Brasil, granted their +request. And about the 12 of Aprill 1593. we departed from S. Helena, and +directed our course for the place aforesayd. The next day our capitaine +calling vpon the sailers to finish a foresaile which they had in hand, some +of them answered that vnlesse they might goe directly home, they would lay +their hands to nothing; whereupon he was constrained to folow their humour. +And from thence-foorth we directed our course for our countrey, which we +kept vntill we came 8 degrees to the Northward of the Equinoctiall, +betweene which 8 degrees and the line, we spent some sixe weekes, with many +calme and contrary winds at North, and sometimes to the Eastward, and +sometimes to the Westward: which losse of time and expense of our victuals, +whereof we had very smal store, made vs doubt to keepe our course and some +of our men growing into a mutinie threatned to breake vp other mens chests, +to the ouerthrow of our victuals and all our selues, for euery man had his +share of his victuals before in his owne custody, that they might be sure +what to trust to, and husband it more thriftily. [Sidenote: The gulfe of +Paria, or Bocca del Dragone passed.] Our captaine seeking to preuent this +mischiefe, being aduertised by one of our companie which had bene at the +Ile of Trinidada in M. Chidleis voyage, that there we should be sure to +haue refreshing, hereupon directed his course to that Iland, and not +knowing the currents, we were put past it in the night into the gulfe of +Paria in the beginning of Iune, wherein we were 8 dayes, finding the +current continually setting in, [Sidenote: A good note.] and oftentimes we +were in 3 fadomes water, and could find no going out vntil the current had +put vs ouer to the Westernside vnder the maine land, where we found no +current at all, and more deep water; and so keeping by the shore, the wind +off the shore euery night did helpe vs out to the Northward. [Sidenote: The +Ile of Mona.] Being cleare, within foure or fiue days after we fell with +the Ile of Mona where we ankered and rode some eighteene dayes. In which +time the Indians of Mona gaue vs some refreshing. And in the meane space +there arriued a French ship of Cane in which was capitaine one Monsieur de +Barbaterre, of whom wee bought some two buts of wine and bread, and other +victuals. Then wee watered and fitted our shippe, and stopped a great leake +which broke on vs as we were beating out of the gulfe of Paria. And hauing +thus made ready our ship to goe to Sea, we determined to goe directly for +Newfound-land. But before we departed, there arose a storme the winde being +Northerly, which put vs from an anker and forced vs the Southward of Santo +Domingo. [Sidenote: The Ile of Sauona enuironed with flats.] This night we +were in danger of shipwracke vpon an Iland called Sauona, which is +enuironed with flats lying 4 or 5 miles off; yet it pleased God to cleare +vs of them, [Sidenote: Cape de Tiberon.] and so we directed our course +Westward along the Iland of Santo Domingo, and doubled Cape Tiberon, and +passed through the old channell betweene S. Domingo and Cuba for the cape +of Florida: And here we met againe with the French ship of Caen, whose +Captaine could spare vs no more victuals, as he said, but only hides which +he had taken by traffike vpon those Ilands, wherewith we were content and +gaue him for them to his good satisfaction. After this, passing the Cape of +Florida, and cleere of the channell of Bahama, we directed our course for +the banke of Newfound-land. Thus running to the height of 36 degrees, and +as farre to the East as the Ile of Bermuda the 17 of September finding the +winds there very variable, contrarie to our expectation and all mens +writings, we lay there a day or two the winde being northerly, and +increasing continually more and more, it grewe to be a storme and a great +frete of wind: which continued with vs some 24 houres, with such +extremetie, as it caried not onely our sayles away being furled, but also +made much water in our shipppe, so that wee had six foote water in hold, +and hauing freed our ship thereof with baling, the winde shifted to the +Northwest and became dullerd: but presently vpon it the extremetie of the +storme was such that with the labouring of our ship we lost our foremaste, +and our ship grewe as full of water as before. The storme once ceased, and +the winde contrary to goe our course, we fell to consultation which might +be our best way to saue our liues. Our victuals now being vtterly spent, +and hauing eaten hides 6 or 7 daies, we thought it best to beare back +againe for Dominica, and the Islands adioyning, knowing that there we might +haue some reliefe, whereupon we turned backe for the said Islands. But +before we could get thither the winde scanted vpon vs, which did greatly +endanger vs for lacke of fresh water and victuals; so that we were +constrained to beare vp to the Westward to certaine other Ilandes called +the Neublas or cloudie Ilands, towards the Ile of S. Iuan de porto Rico, +where at our arriuall we found land-crabs and fresh water, and tortoyses, +which come most on lande about the full of the moone. Here hauing refreshed +our selues some 17 or 18 dayes, and hauing gotten some small store of +victuals into our ship, we resolued to returne againe for Mona: vpon which +our determination fiue of our men left vs, remaining still on the Iles of +Neublas for all perswasions that we could vse to the contrary, which +afterward came home in an English shippe. From these Iles we departed and +arriued at Mona about the twentieth of Nouember 1593, and there comming to +an anker toward two or three of the clocke in the morning, the Captaine, +and Edmund Barker his Lieutenant with some few others went on land to the +houses of the olde Indian and his three sonnes, thinking to haue gotten +some foode, our victuals being all spent, and we not able to proceede any +further vntill we had obteyned some new supply. We spent two or three daies +in seeking prouision to cary aboord to relieue the whole companie. And +comming downe to go aboord, the winde then being northerly and the sea +somewhat growne, they could not come on shore with the boate, which was a +thing of small succour and not able to rowe in any rough sea, whereupon we +stayed vntill the next morning, thinking to haue had lesse winde and safer +passage. But in the night about twelue of the clocke our ship did driue +away with fiue men and a boy onely in it, our carpenter secretly cut their +owne cable, leauing nineteene of vs on land without boate or any thing, to +our great discomfort. In the middest of these miseries reposing our trust +in the goodnesse of God, which many times before had succoured vs in our +greatest extremities, we contented our selues with our poore estate, and +sought meanes to preserue our liues. And because one place was not able to +sustaine vs, we tooke our leaues one of another, diuiding our selues into +seuerall companies. The greatest reliefe that we sixe which were with the +Captaine could finde for the space of nine and twentie dayes was the +stalkes of purselaine boyled in water, and now and then a pompion, which we +found in the garden of the olde Indian, who vpon this our second arriual +with his three sonnes stole from vs, and kept himselfe continually aloft in +the mountaines. After the ende of nine and twentie dayes we espied a French +shippe, which afterwards we vnderstood to be of Diepe, called the Luisa, +whose Captaine was one Monsieur Felix, vnto whom wee made a fire, at sight +whereof he tooke in his topsayles, bare in with the land, and shewed vs his +flagge, whereby we iudged him French: so comming along to the Westerne ende +of the Island there he ankered, we making downe with all speede vnto him. +At this time the Indian and his three sonnes came downe to our Captaine +Master Iames Lancaster and went along with him to the shippe. This night he +went aboord the French man who gaue him good entertainement, and the next +day fetched eleuen more of vs aboord entreating vs all very courteously. +This day came another French shippe of the same towne of Diepe which +remayned there vntil night expecting our other seuen mens comming downe: +who, albeit we caused certaine pieces of ordinance to be shot off to call +them, yet came not downe. Whereupon we departed thence being deuided sixe +into one ship, and sixe into another, and leauing this Iland departed for +the Northside of Saint Domingo, where we remained vntill April following +1594, and spent some two moneths in traffike with the inhabitants by +permission for hides and other marchandises of the Countrey. In this meane +while there came a shippe of New-hauen to the place where we were, whereby +we had intelligence of our seuen men which wee left behinde vs at the Isle +of Mona: which was, that two of them brake their neckes with ventring to +take foules vpon the cliffes, other three were slaine by the Spaniards, +which came from Saint Domingo, vpon knowledge giuen by our men which went +away in the Edward, the other two this man of New-hauen had with him in his +shippe, which escaped the Spaniards bloodie hands. From this place Captaine +Lancaster and his Lieutenant Master Edmund Barker, shipped themselues in +another shippe of Diepe, the Captaine whereof was one Iohn La Noe, which +was readie first to come away, and leauing the rest of their companie in +other ships, where they were well intreated, to come after him, on Sunday +the seuenth of Aprill 1594 they set homewarde, and disbocking through the +Caijcos from thence arriued safely in Diepe within two and fortie dayes +after, on the 19 of May, where after two dayes we had stayed to refresh our +selues, and giuen humble thankes vnto God, and vnto our friendly +neighbours, we tooke passage for Rie and landed there on Friday the 24 of +May 1594, hauing spent in this voyage three yeeres, sixe weekes and two +dayes, which the Portugales performe in halfe the time, chiefely because +wee lost our fit time and season to set foorth in the beginning of our +voyage. + +We vnderstood in the East Indies by certaine Portugeles which we tooke, +that they haue lately discouered the coast of China, to the latitude of +nine and fiftie degrees, finding the sea still open to the Northward: +giuing great hope of the Northeast or Northwest passage. Witnesse Master +Iames Lancaster. + + * * * * * + +Certaine remembrances of an intended voyage to Brasill, and the Riuer of + Plate, by the Edward Cotton, a ship of 260 Tunnes of Master Edward Cotton + of Southampton, which perished through extreme negligence neare Rio + Grande in Guinie, the 17 of July 1583. + +Articles of Couenants agreed vpon betweene Edward Cotton Esquier, owner of +the good ship called the Edward Cotton of Southampton, and of all the +marchandizes in her laden, of the one part, and William Huddie gentleman, +Captaine of the said ship, Iohn Hooper his Lieutenant, Iohn Foster Master, +Hugh Smith Pilot for the whole voyage, and William Cheesman marchant, on +the other part. + +1 To obserue and keepe the dayly order of Common prayer aboord the ships, +and the companie to be called thereunto, at the least once in the day, to +be pronounced openly. + +2 Item, that they be ready with the first faire winde, to set saile and +sailes in the voyage, and not to put into any port or harbour, but being +forcibly constrained by weather, or other apparent and vrgent cause. + +3 Item, that they take in, at or about the Isles of Cape Verde, to the +quantitie of 25 or 30 tuns of salt, to be imployed among other the owners +marchandize, at Santos, and S. Vincent, to his onely behoofe, and the rest +of the salt, so much as shall be needed for victuall, and for sauing of the +hides to be kept aboord, and the same salt to be prouided either at the +fishermens hands neere the said Isles for trucke of commodities, or els to +be taken in at the aforesayd Isles, at discretion of the aboue-named. + +4 Item, vpon the due performance of this voiage, the owner bindeth himselfe +by this deede, to yeeld vnto any such of the companie, as shall refuse +their shares before they depart from the coast of England, 20 markes a +single share, for the dutie of the whole voiage, making not aboue 75. +shares single in the whole. + +5 Item, the company according as they be appointed by the officers of the +said ship aboue named, shall at all times be most ready to doe their +painfull indeuor, not onely aboord, but in all labours at the land, +according to the direction giuen by the aboue named officers, vpon paine of +forfeiture of their shares and wages, the same to be diuided amongst the +company. + +6 Item, that the shares be taken at their returne out of al the traine +oile, and hides of the seales, and of all other commodities gotten by their +handie labour, and of the salt that shall be vended and other commodities, +at, or neere the coast of Brasil, to allow after 9 li. the tunne freight, +whereof one third to goe to the company. + +7 Item, that if any man shall practise by any deuise or deuises whatsoeuer, +to alter the voiage from the true purpose and intent of the owner, viz. to +make their first port at Santos, and Saint Vincent, and there to revictuall +and traffike, and from thence to the riuer of Plate to make their voyage by +the traine, and hide of the seales, with such other commodities as are +there to be had, according as the owner, with diuers that haue gouernment +in the said ship, are bound to her highnesse by their deedes obligatorie in +great summes, that all such practisers, vpon due proofe made, shall lose +their whole intertainement due by shares or otherwise for this sayde voyage +to be adiuged by the Captaine, his Lieutenant, the Master, Pilot, and +marchant, or three of them at least, whereof the Captaine to be one. + +8 Item, that the pinnesse be ready at al times to serue the marchants turne +vpon his demand, to take in wares and commodities, and to cary and recary +to and from the shore, when, and as oft as neede shall be, and to giue due +attendance at the marchant and marchants direction during the whole voyage. + +9 Item, that no head or chiefe officer being set downe for such an officer +vnder the hand of the owner, at the going to sea of the said shippe, shall +or may be displaced from his said place or office, without great cause, and +his misdemeanor to be adiudged by the Captaine, and his Lieutenant, the +Master, the Pilot, and the marchant, or by the consent of three of them at +least. + +10 Item, that vpon the returne of the shippe to the coast of England, the +Maister and Pilot put not into any port or harbour, to the Westward of +Southampton, but forced by weather, or such like vrgent cause. + +William Huddie. +Iohn Hooper. +Hugh Smith. +John Foster. +William Cheesman. + + * * * * * + +A direction as well for the Captaine, and other my friends of the shippe, + as especially for William Cheesman Marchant, for the voyage to the riuer + of Plate. + +[Sidenote: The Ile of S. Sebastian.] At your comming to the Isle of Saint +Sebastian, vpon the coast of Brasill, you shall according to your +discretions, make sale of such commodities, as you may thinke will be +thereabout well vented, and likewise to buy commodities without making +longer stay there then your victuals be prouiding, but rather to bespeake +commodities against your returne from the riuer of Plate, especially of +Amber, Sugar, Greene ginger, Cotton wooll, and some quantitie of the +peppers of the countrey there. Also for Parats and Munkies, and the beast +called Serrabosa. Also you shall barrell vp of the beefe called Petune, two +or three barrels, and to lose no good opportunitie, to gather of the Indian +figges, and the graines of them to preserue drie, in such quantitie as +conueniently may be done: and touching the making of the traine, and +preseruing of the hides, I leaue it wholly to the order and the discretion +of the chiefe of the companie. Also that in any road where the ship shall +ride vpon the coast of America, triall be made with the dragges, for the +pearle Oisters, and the same being taken, to be opened and searched for +pearle in the presence of the Captaine, his Lieutenant, the Master, the +Pilot, and marchant, or three of them, whereof the Captaine or his +Lieutenant to be one, and to remaine in the custodie of the Captaine and +marchant, vnder two lockes, either of them to haue a key to his owne locke, +and that a true inuentorie be deliuered also to the Master and Pilot of the +said pearle or other iewels of price gotten in the said voiage, to the +intent that no partie be defrauded of his due, and that no concealment be +made of any such thing vpon forfeiture, the partie to lose his share and +dutie for the voyage that shall so conceale and not reueale it vnto the +officers aboue named. Also to doe your best indeuour to try for the best +Ore of golde, siluer, or other rich mettals whatsoeuer. Forget not also to +bring the kernels and seeds of strange plants with you, the Palmito with +his fruit inclosed in him. Serue God, keepe good watch, and stand alwayes +vpon your garde. + +Edward Cotton. + + +These things being thus ordered, and the ship of the burden of 260 tunnes, +with 83 men of all sortes furnished, and fully appointed for the voyage, +began to set saile from Hurst Castle vpon Friday the 20 of May, Anno 1583, +and the 17 day of Iuly ensuing fell with the coast of Guinie, to take in +fresh water, where, through meere dissolute negligence, she perished vpon a +sand, with the most part of the men in her, as appeareth by the confession +of one that escaped, the substance and tenor whereof is this. + + * * * * * + +The confession of William Bends Masters Mate in the Edward Cotton, the 21 + of October, Ann. 1584. + +He sayth, that the 17 day of Iuly, Anno 1583. hauing some lacke of fresh +water, they put roome vpon the coast of Guinie, where they were set vpon a +sand about 8 leagues from the shore, and this Examinate, with 29 more, got +into the pinnesse, who arriued in an Island, being desolate of people, and +fiue miles in compasse, where they rested 18 dayes through force of +weather, hauing nought to eate but grasse. [Sidenote: Rio Grande.] The rest +of the company the ship being splitted in two and in quarters, got them +into one of the after quarters, and by the helpe of raftes came also a +shore into another Island neere to Rio Grande, where they all died as he +supposeth. + +The other 30 in the pinnesse, at the end of 18 dayes, departed that Island, +and came to Saint Domingo, where comming on shore, they were taken of the +Moores, and stripped naked. And they buried one Coxe [Marginal note: One +Coxe an old English man buried aliue by the Moores of Rio Grande in +Guinea.] an olde man aliue, notwithstanding his pitifull lamentation and +skrikings: the rest hauing Rice and water allowed them, liued there a +certaine time. This Examinate was at last sold to a Portugall, with whom he +dwelt the space of a quarter of a yere, and in the end, a Portugall Carauel +comming, thither, his master laded the same with Negroes, and he obtained +leaue of his master to goe in the same Carauell, and by that meanes arriued +at Lisbone, and from thence came into England the 17 of October, 1584, +leauing behinde him of his companie aliue, Richard Hacker, Iohn Baker, Iohn +Mathew, and a boy, with two others which were gone beyond Saint Domingo: +all which, as he saith, were so sicke and diseased, that he iudged them to +be long before this time dead. + + * * * * * + +The Letters patents or priuiledges granted by her Maiestie to certaine + Noble men and Marchants of London, for a trade to Barbarie, in the yeere + 1585. + +Elizabeth by the grace of God Queene of England, France, and Ireland, +defender of the faith, &c. to the Treasurer & Barons of our Eschequer, and +to al Maiors, shirifs, constables, customers, collectors of our customes +and subsidies, controllers, searchers, and keepers of our hauens and +creekes, ports and passages, within this our realme of England and the +dominions of the same and to al our officers, ministers and subiects, and +to all other whosoeuer to whom it shall or may appertaine, and to euery of +them greeting. Whereas it is made euidently and apparently knowen vnto vs, +that of late yeeres our right trustie and right welbeloued councellors, +Ambrose Erle of Warwike, and Robert Erle of Leicester, and also our louing +and naturall subiects, Thomas Starkie of our citie of London Alderman, +Ierard Gore the elder, and all his sonnes, Thomas Gore the elder, Arthur +Atie gentleman, Alexander Auenon, Richard Staper, William Iennings, Arthur +Dawbeney, William Sherington, Thomas Bramlie, Anthony Garrard, Robert How, +Henry Colthirst, Edward Holmden, Iohn Swinnerton, Robert Walkaden, Simon +Lawrence, Nicholas Stile, Oliuer Stile, William Bond, Henrie Farrington, +Iohn Tedcastle, Walter Williams, William Brune, Iohn Suzan, Iohn Newton, +Thomas Owen, Roger Afield, Robert Washborne, Reinold Guy, Thomas +Hitchcocke, George Lydiat, Iohn Cartwright, Henry Paiton, Iohn Boldroe, +Robert Bowyer, Anthonie Dassell, Augustine Lane, Robert Lion, and Thomas +Dod, all of London, Marchants now trading into the Countrey of Barbary, in +the parts of Africa, vnder the gouernement of Muly Hammet Sheriffe, Emperor +of Morocco, and king of Fesse and Sus, haue sustained great and grieuous +losses, and are like to sustaine greater if it should not be preuented: In +tender consideration whereof, and for that diuers Marchandize of the same +Countries are very necessary and conuenient for the vse and defence of this +our Realme of England, and for diuers other causes vs specially mouing, +minding the reliefe and benefit of our said subiects, and the quiet +trafique and good gouernment to be had, and vsed among them in their said +trade, of our speciall grace, certaine knowledge, and meere motion haue +giuen and granted, and by those presents for vs, our heires and successors, +doe giue and grant vnto the saide Earles of Warwike and Leicester, Thomas +Starkie, Ierard Gore the elder, Arthur Atie gentleman, Alexander Auenon, +Richard Staper, William Iennings, Arthur Dawbenie, William Sherrington, +Thomas Bramlie, Anthonie Gerrard, Robert Howe, Henry Colthirst, Edward +Holmden, Iohn Swinnerton, Robert Walkaden, Simon Lawrence, Nicholas Stile, +Oliuer Stile, William Bond, Henry Farrington, Iohn Tedcastle, Walter +Williams, William Brune, Iohn Suzan, Iohn Newton, Thomas Owen, Roger Afild, +Robert Washborne, Rainold Guie, Thomas Hitchcocke, George Lidiate, Iohn +Cartwright, Henry Payton, Iohn Baldroe, Robert Bowyer, Anthony Dassell, +Augustine Lane, Robert Lion, and Thomas Dod, that they and euery of them by +themselues or by their factors or seruants, and none others, shall and may, +for, and during the space of 12. yeeres, haue and enioy the whole freedome +and libertie in the saide trafique or trade, vnto or from the said countrey +of Barbary, or to or from any part thereof, for the buying and selling of +all maner of wares and marchandizes whatsoeuer, that now or accustomably +heretofore haue bene brought or transported, from, or to the said country +of Barbary, or from or to any of the cities, townes, places, ports, roades, +hauens, harbors, or creeks of the said country of Barbary, any law, +statute, graunt, matter, customes or priuileges, to the contrary in any +wise notwithstanding. + +And for the better establishing, ordering and gouerning of the said Erles +of Warwike and Leicester, Thomas Starkie, &c. abouesaid, their factors, +seruants and assignes in the trade aforesaid, we for vs, our heires and +successors, doe by these presents giue and graunt full licence to the saide +Thomas Starke, Ierard Gore the elder, and the rest aforesaide, and euery of +them from time to time, during the said terme of twelue yeeres, at their +pleasures to assemble and meete together in any place or places conuenient +within our citie of London, or elsewhere, to consult of, and for the said +trade, and with the consent of the said Erie of Leicester, to make and +establish good and necessary orders and ordinances for and touching the +same, and al such orders and ordinances so made, to put in vse and execute, +and them or any of them with the consent of the said Erle of Leicester, to +alter, change and make voyde, and if need be, to make new, at any time +during the saide terme, they or the most part of them then liuing and +trading, shall finde conuenient. + +Prouided alwayes, that the ordinances or any of them bee not contrary or +repugnant to the lawes, statutes or customes of this our Realme of England. +And to the intent that they onely to whom the said libertie of trafique is +graunted by these our Letters patents, and none other our Subiects +whatsoeuer, without their special consent and licence before had, should +during the said terme haue trade or trafique for any maner of Marchandizes, +to, or from the said countrey of Barbary, or to, or from any Citie, town, +place, port, harbor or creeke within the said countrey of Barbary, to, or +out of our said Realmes and dominions, wee doe by these presents straightly +charge, commaund, and prohibite all and euery our Subiects whatsoeuer, +other then only the said Erles of Warwike and Leicester, Thomas Starkie, +and the rest abouesaid, and euery of them by themselues, or by their +Factors or seruants during the saide terme, to trade or trafique, for or +with any marchandize, to, or from the saide Countrey of Barbary, or to, or +from any the dominions of the same, as they tender our fauour, and will +auoyde our high displeasure, and vpon paine of imprisonment of his and +their bodies, at our will and pleasure, and of forfeiting all the +marchandizes, or the full value thereof, wherewith they or any of them +during the saide terme, shall trade or trafique to or from the said +countrey of Barbary, or to, or from the dominions of the same, contrary to +this our priuilege and prohibition, vnlesse it be by and with the expresse +licence, consent, and agreement of the saide Erles of Warwike and +Leicester, Thomas Starkie, Ierard Gore the elder, and all his sonnes, +Thomas Gore the elder, Arthur Atie Gentleman, Alexander Auenon, Richard +Straper, William Iennings, Arthur Dawbnie, William Sherington, Thomas +Bramlie, Anthonie Gerrard, Robert Howe, Henry Colthirst, Edward Holmden, +Iohn Swinnerton, Robert Walkaden, Simon Lawrence, Nicholas Stile, Oliuer +Stile, William Bond, Henry Farington, Iohn Tedcastle, Walter Williams, +William Brune, Iohn Suzan, Iohn Newton, Thomas Owen, Roger Afield, Robert +Washborne, Rainold Guy, Thomas Hitchcock, George Lidiate, &c. or by, and +and with the expresse licence and consent of the more part of them then +liuning and trading, first had and obtained, so alwayes, that the sayd +Earle of Leicester be one, if hee bee liuing. + +And we further for vs, our heires and successors of our speciall grace, +meere motion and certaine knowledge, do graunt to the said Erles of Warwike +and Leicester, Thomas Starkie, and the rest abouesaid, and to euery of +them, that nothing shall be done, to be of force or validitie touching the +said trade or trafique, or the exercise thereof, without or against the +consent of the saide Erles, Thomas Starkie, (and the others before named) +during the time of these our Letters patents for 12. yeeres as aforesaid. + +And for that the said Erles, Thomas Starkie, &c. and euery of them +aforesaid should not be preuented or interrupted in this their said trade, +we do by these presents for vs, our heires and successours, straightly +prohibite and forbid all maner of person or persons, as well strangers of +what nation or countrey soeuer, as our owne Subiects, other then onely the +said Erles, Thomas Starkie, &c. and euery of them as aforesaid, that they +nor any of them from hencefoorth during the said terme of 12. yeeres, do or +shall bring, or cause to be brought into this our Realme of England, or to +any the dominions thereof, any maner of marchandizes whatsoeuer growing, or +being made within the said Countrey of Barbary, or within any the dominions +thereof, vnlesse it be by and with the license of the more part of them +then liuing, first had and obtained, so alwayes that the sayd Erle of +Leicester (if hee be liuing) be one, vnder the paine that euery one that +shall offend or doe against this our present prohibition here last aboue +mentioned in these presents, shall forfeite and lose all and singular the +said marchandizes to be landed in any our realmes and dominions, contrary +to the tenor and true meaning of this our prohibition in that behalfe +prouided: the one moitie of all and euery which said forfaitures whatsoeuer +mentioned or specified in these our present Letters patents, shalbe to vs, +our heires and successors: And the other moity of al and euery the said +forfaitures, we doe by these presents of our certaine knowledge and meere +motion clearely and wholy for vs, our heires and successors giue and graunt +vnto the said Erles, Thomas Starkie, &c. And these our Letters patents, +vpon the onely sight thereof, without any further warrant, shal bee +sufficient authoritie to our Treasurer of England for the time being, to +our Barons of the Exchequer, and to all other our officers that shall haue +to deale in this behalfe, to make full allowance vnto the said Erles, +Thomas Starkie, &c. their deputies or assignes of the one moitie of all and +singular the goods, marchandizes and things whatsoever mentioned in these +our present Letters patents, to be forfaited at any time or times during +the said terme of twelue yeres: which said allowance we doe straightly +charge and commaund from time to time to be made to the sayd Erles, Thomas +Starkie, &c. and to euery of them accordingly, without any maner of delay +or deniall or any of our officers whatsoever, as they tender our fauour and +the furtherance of our good pleasure. And wee doe straightly charge and +commaund, and by these presents prohibite all and singular Customers and +Collectors of our customes and subsidies, and comptrollers, of the same, of +and within our Citie and port of London, and all other portes, creekes, and +places within this our Realme of England, and euery of them, that they ne +any of them take or perceiue, or cause, or suffer to be taken, receiued, or +perceiued for vs and in our name, or to our vse, or to the vses of our +heires or successors of any person or persons, any sum or summes of money, +or other things whatsoeuer during the said terme of 12. yeeres, for, and in +the name and liew or place of any custome, subsidy and other thing or +duties to vs, our heires or successors due or to be due for the customes +and subsidies of any marchandizes whatsoeuer growing, being made or comming +out of the said countrey of Barbary, or out of the dominions thereof, nor +make, cause, nor suffer to be made any entrie into our or their books of +customs and subsidies, nor make any agreement for the subsidies and +customs, of, and for any the said marchants, sauing onely with, and in the +name of the said Erles, Thomas Starkie, &c. or the most part of them, as +they and euery of them will answers at their vttermost perils to the +contrary. And for the better and more sure obseruation of this our graunt, +wee will, and grant for vs, our heires and successors by these presents, +that the Treasurer and barons of our Exchequer for the time being, by force +of this our graunt or enrolment thereof in the said court at al and euery +time and times during the said terme of 12 yeeres, at and vpon request made +vnto them by the said Erles, Thomas Starkie, &c. or by the atturneis, +factors, deputies or assignes of them, or the most part of them then liuing +and trading, shall and may make and direct vnder the seale of the said +Exchequer, one or more sufficient writ or writs, close or patents, vnto +euery or any of our said customers, collectors or controllers of our heires +and successors in all and euery, or to any port or ports, creeke, hauens, +or other places within this our realme of England, as the Erles, Thomas +Starkie, &c. or any the atturneis, factors, deputies or assignes of them or +the most part of them then liuing and trading, shall at any time require, +commaunding and straightly charging them and euery of them, that they nor +any of them at any time or times during the said term of 12. yeeres, make +any entrie of any wares or marchandizes whatsoeuer, growing, being made or +comming out or from the said countrey of Barbary, or the dominions thereof, +nor receiue or take any custome, subsidie or other entrie, or make any +agreement for the same, other then with or in the name of the said Erles, +Thomas Starkie, &c, the factor or factors, deputies or assignes of them or +the most part of them then liuing and trading, according to this our +graunt, and the true meaning thereof, and according to our saide will and +pleasure before in these presents declared. In witnesse whereof we haue +caused these our Letters to be made patents. Witnesse our selfe at +Westminster the 5. day of Iuly in the 27. yeere of our reigne. + + * * * * * + +The Ambassage of Master Henry Roberts, one of the sworne Esquires of her + Maiesties person, from her highnesse to Mully Hamet Emperour of Morocco + and the King of Fesse and Sus, in the yeere 1585: who remained there as + Liger for the space of 3. yeeres. Written briefly by himselfe. + +Vpon an incorporation granted to the Company of Barbary Marchants resident +in London, I Henry Roberts one of her Maiesties sworne Esquires of her +person, was appointed her highnesse messenger, and Agent vnto the aforesaid +Mully Hamet Emperor of Marocco, king of Fesse, and Sus. And after I had +receiued my Commission, instructions, and her Maiesties letters, I departed +from London the 14. of August in the yeere 1585. in a tall ship called the +Ascension, in the company of the Minion and Hopewell, and we all arriued in +safetie at Azafi a port of Barbary, the 14. of September next following. +The Alcaide of the towne (being the kings officer there, and as it were +Maior of the place) recalled mee with all humanitie and honour, according +to the custome of the Countrey, lodging me in the chiefest house of the +towne, from whence I dispatched a messenger (which in their language they +call a Trottero) to aduertise the Emperour of my arriuall: who immediately +gaue order, and sent certaine souldiers for my guard and conduct, and +horses for my selfe, and mules for mine owne and my companies carriages. +Thus being accompanied with M. Richard Euans, Edward Salcot, and other +English Marchants resident there in the Countrey, with my traine of Moores +and carriages, I came at length to the riuer of Tensist, which is within +foure miles of Marocco: and there by the water side I pitched my tents +vnder the Oliue trees: where I met with all the English Marchants by +themselues, and the French and Flemish, and diuers other Christians, which +attended my comming. And after we had dined, and spent out the heat of the +day, about foure of the clocke in the afternoone we all set forward toward +the Citie of Marocco, where we arriued the said day, being the 14. of +September, and I was lodged by the Emperours appointment in a faire house +in the Iudaria or Iurie, which is the place where the Iewes haue their +abode, and is the fairest place, and quietest lodging in all the Citie. + +After I had reposed my selfe 3 dayes, I had accesse to the kings presence, +delinered my message and her Maiesties letters, and was receiued with all +humanitie, and had fauourable audience from time to time for three yeeres: +during which space I abode there in his Court, as her Maiesties Agent and +Ligier: and whensoeuer I had occasion of businesse, I was admitted either +to his Maiestie himselfe, or to his vice Roy, whose name was Alcayde Breme +Saphiana, a very wise and discreet person, and the chiefest about his +Maiestie. The particulers of my seruice, for diuers good and reasonable +causes, I forbeare here to put downe in writing. + +After leaue obtained, and an honourable reward bestowed by the Emperour +vpon me, I departed from his Court at Marocco the 18. of August 1588. +toward a garden of his, which is called Shersbonare, where he promised mee +I should stay but one day for his letters: howbeit, vpon some occasion I +was stayed vntil the 14. of September at the kings charges, with 40. or 50. +shot attending vpon me for my guard and safetie. + +From thence at length I was conducted with all things necessary to the port +of Santa Cruz, being sixe dayes iourney from Marocco, and the place where +our shippes do commonly take in their lading, where I arriued the 21. of +the same moneth. In this port I stayed 43. dayes, and at length the second +of Nouember I embarqued my selfe, and one Marshok Reiz a Captaine and a +Gentleman, which the Emperour sent with mee vpon an Ambassage to her +Maiestie: and after much torment and foule weather at Sea, yet New-yeres +day I came on land at S. Iues in Cornwall, from whence passing by land both +together vp towards London, we were met without the Citie with the chiefest +marchants of the Barbary Company, well mounted all on horsebacke, to the +number of 40. or 50. horse, and so the Ambassadour and myselfe being both +in Coche, entred the citie by torchlight, on Sunday at night the 12. of +Ianuary 1589. + + * * * * * + +Este es vn traslado bien y fielmente sacado da vna carta real del Rey Muley + Hamet de Fes y Emperador de Marruecos, cuyo tenor es este, que Segue. + +Con el nombre de Dios piadoso y misericordioso, &c. El sieruo de Dios +soberano, el conquistador per su causa, el successor ensalcado por Dios, +Emperador de los Moros, hijo del Emperador de los Moros, Iariffe, Haceni, +el que perpetue su honora, y ensalce su estado. Se pone este nuestro real +mandado en manos de los criados de neustras altas puertas los mercadores +Yngleses; para que por el sepan todos los que la presente vieren, come +nuestro alto Conseio les anpara con el fauor de Dios de todo aquello, que +les enpeciere y dannare en qualquiera manera, que fueren offendidos, y en +qualquiera viaie, que fueren, ninguno les captinara en estos nuestros +reynos, y puertos, y lugares, que a nos pertenescen: y que les cubre el +anporo de nuestro podor de qualquiera fatiga; y ningun los impida commano +de enemistad, ni se dara causa, de que se agrauien en qualquiera manera con +el fauor de Dios y de sua comparo. Y mandamos a los Alcaydes de los +nuestros puertos y fortalezas, y a los que en estos nuestros reynos tienen +cargo, y a toda la gente commun, que no les alleguen en ninguna manera, con +orden, de que sean offendidos en ninguna manera; y esto sera +necessariamente: Que es escrita en los medios dias de Rabel, segundo anno +de nueue cientos, y nouenta y seys. + +Concorda el dia d'esta cara con veynte dias de Marco del anno de mil y +quiniento y ochenta y siete, lo qual yo Abdel Rahman el Catan, interprete +per su Magestad saque, y Romance de verbo ad verbum, como en el se +contiene, y en Fee dello firmo de my nombre, fecho vt supra. + +Abdel Rahman el Catan. + + +The same in English. + +This is a copy well and truely translated of an edict of Muley Hamet king + of Fez and Emperour of Marocco, whose tenor is as followeth: To wit, that + no Englishmen should be molested or made slaues in any part of his + Dominions, obtained by the aforesaid M. Henry Roberts. + +In the name of the pitifull and the mercifull God, &c. The seruant of the +supreme God, the conqueror in his cause, the successor aduanced by God, the +Emperour of the Moores, the sonne of the Emperour of the Moores, the +Iariffe, the Haceny, whose honour God long increase and aduance his estate. +This our princely commandement is deliuered into the hands of the English +marchants, which remaine in the protection of our stately palaces: to the +ende that all men which shall see this present writing, may vnderstand that +our princely counsaile wil defend them by the fauor of God, from any thing +that may impeach or hurt them in what sort soeuer they shalbe wronged: and +that, which way soeuer they shall trauaile, no man shall take them captiues +in these our kingdomes, ports, and places which belong vnto vs, which also +may protect and defend them by our authoritie from any molestation +whatsoeuer: and that no man shall hinder them by laying violent hand vpon +them, and shall not giue occasion that they may be grieued in any sort by +the fauour and assistance of God. And we charge and command our officers of +our hauens and fortresses, and all such as beare any authority in these our +dominions, and likewise all the common people, that in no wise they do +molest them, in such sort that they be no way offended or wronged. And this +our commandement shall remaine inuiolable, being registred in the middest +of the moneth of Rabel in the yeere 996. + +The date of this letter agreeth with the 20. of March 1587. which I Abdel +Rahman el Catan, interpretour for his Maiestie, haue translated and turned +out of the Arabian into Spanish word for word as is conteined therein: and +in witnesse thereof haue subscribed my name as aforesaid. + +Abdel Rahman el Catan. + + * * * * * + +En nombre de Dios el piadoso piadador. + +Oracion de Dios sobre nuestro Sennor y Propheta Mahumet, y los allegados a +el. + +[Sidenote: A letter of Mully Hamet to the Earle of Leicester.] El sieruo de +Dios, y muy guerrero, y ensalsado por la gracia de Dios, Myra Momanyn, hijo +de Myra Momanyn, nieto de Myra Momanyn, el Iarif, el Hazeny, que Dios +sustenga sus reynos, y enhalse sus mandados, para el Sennor muy affamado y +muy illustre, muy estimado, el Conde de Leycester, despues de dar las +loores deuidas a Dios, y las oraciones, y saludes deuidas a le propheta +Mahumet. Seruira esta por os hazer saber que llego a qui a nuestra real +Corte vuestra carta, y entendimos lo que en ella se contiene. Y vuestro +Ambaxador, que aqui esti en nuestra corte me dio a entender la causa de la +tardanca de los rehenes hasta agora: el qual descuento recebimos, y nos +damos por satisfechos. Y quanta a lo que a nos escriueys por causa de Iuan +Herman, y lo mesmo que nos ha dicho el Ambaxador sobre el, antes que +llegasse vuestra carta por la quexa del ambaxador, que se auia quexado del, +ya auiamos mandado prender lo, y assi que da aora preso, y quedera, hasta +que se le haga la iusticia que mas se le ha de hazer. Y con tanto nuestro +Sennor os tenga en su guardia. Hecha en nuestra corte real en Marruecos, +que Dios sostenga, et 28. dias del mes de Remodan anno 996. + + +The same in English. + +In the Name of the mercifull and pitifull God. + +The blessing of God light vpon our Lord and prophet Mahumet, and those that +are obedient vnto him. + +The seruant of God both mightie in warre and mightily exalted by the grace +of God Myra Momanyn, the son of Myra Momanyn, the Iarif, the Hazeni, whose +kingdoms God maintaine and aduance his authoritie: Vnto the right famous, +right noble, and right highly esteemed Erle of Leicester, after due praises +giuen vnto God, and due blessings and salutations rendered vnto the prophet +Mahumet. These are to giue you to vnderstand, that your letters arriued +here in our royal Court, and we wel perceiue the contents thereof. And your +Ambassador which remaineth here in our Court told me the cause of the +slownesse of the gages or pledges vntil this time: which reckoning we +accept of, and holde our selues as satisfied. And as touching the matter +wherof you write vnto vs concerning Iohn Herman, and the selfe same +complaint which your Ambassador hath made of him, before the comming of +your letter, we had already commaunded him to be taken vpon the complaint +which your Ambassadour had made of him, whereupon he still remaineth in +hold, and shall so continue vntil further iustice be done vpon him +according to his desert. And so our Lord keepe you in his safeguard. +Written at our royall court in Marocco, which God maintaine, the 28. day of +the moneth Remodan, Anno 996. [Marginal note: Which is with vs 1587.] + + * * * * * + +The Queenes Maiesties letters to the Emperour of Marocco. + +[Sidenote: The Queenes letters to the Emperour.] Muy alto, y muy poderoso +Sennor, + +Auiendo entendido de parte de nuestro Agente la mucha aficion, y volontad, +que nos teneys, y quanta honta, y fauor le hazeys por amor nuestro, para +dar nos tanto mayor testimonio de vuestra amistad, hemos recebido de lo vno +y de le otro muy grande contento, y satisfacion; y assy no podemos dexar de +agradesceroslo, como mereceys. Vuestras cartas hemos tambien recibido, y +con ellas holgadonos infinitamente, por venir de parte de vn Principe, a +quien tenemos tanta obligacion. Nuestro Agente nos ha escripto sobre +ciertas cosas, que desseays ser os embiadas de aqui: Y, aunque queriamos +poder os en ello puntualmente conplazer, como pidiz, ha succedido, que las +guerras, en que stamos al presente occupadas, no nos lo consienten del +todo: Hemos pero mandado que se os satisfaga en parte, y conforme a lo que +por agora la necessitad nos permite, como mas particularmente os lo +declarara nuestro Agente: esperando, que lo reciberreys en buena parte y +conforme al animo, con que os lo concedemos. Y porque nos ha sido referido, +que aueys prometido de proceder contra vn Iuan Herman vassallo nuestro, (el +qual nos ha grauemente offendido) de la manera, que os lo demandaremos, +auemos dado orden a nuestro dicho Agente de deziros mas parcularmente lo +que desseamos ser hecho a cerca deste negocio, rogando os, que lo mandeys +assi complir: y que seays seruido de fauorescer siempre al dicho Agente, y +tener lo en buen credito, como hasta agora aueys hecho, sin permiter, que +nadie os haga mudar de parecer a cerca de las calumnias, que le podran +leuantar, ny dudar, que no complamos muy por entero todo, lo que de nuestra +parte os prometiere. Nuestro Sennor guarde vostra muy alta y muy poderosa +persona: Hecha en nuestra Corte Real de Grenewich a 20. de Iulio 1587. + + +The same in English. + +Right high and mightie Prince, Hauing vnderstood from our Agent the great +affection and good wil which you beare vs, and how great honour and fauor +you shew him for our sake, to the end to giue vs more ample testimonie of +your friendship, we haue receiued very great contentment and satisfaction, +as wel of the one as of the other: and withall we could not omit to +magnifie you, according to your desert. We haue also receiued your letters, +and do not a litle reioyce thereof, because they come from a prince vnto +whom we are so much beholden. Or Agent hath written vnto vs concerning +certaine things which you desire to bee sent vnto you from hence. And +albeit we wish that we could particularly satisfie you, as you desire, yet +it is fallen out, that the warres, wherein at this present we be busied wil +not suffer vs fully to doe the same: neuerthelesse, wee haue commaunded to +satisfie you in part, and according as the present necessitie doeth permit +vs, as our Agent will declare vnto you more particularly, hoping you will +receiue it in good part, and according to the good will wherewith wee +graunt the same. [Sidenote: Iohn Herman an English rebel.] And because it +hath bene signified vnto vs that you haue promised to proceed in iustice +against one Iohn Herman our subiect, which hath grieuously offended vs, in +such sort as wee haue sent word vnto you, wee haue giuen order to our said +Agent, to informe you more particularly in that which we desire to be done +in this busines, praying you also to command the same to be put in +execution: and that it would please you alwayes to fauour our said Agent +and to hold him in good credite, as you haue done hitherto, not suffering +your selfe to be changed in your opinion, for all the false reports which +they may raise against him, nor to doubt that wee will not accomplish at +large all that he shall promise you on our behalfe. Our Lord keepe and +preserue your right high and mightie person. Written in our royall Court at +Greenwich the 20. of Iuly 1587. + + * * * * * + +A Patent granted to certaine Marchants of Exeter, and others of the West + parts, and of London, for a trade to the Riuer of Senega and Gambia in + Guinea, 1588. + +Elizabeth by the grace of God Queene of England, France and Ireland, +defender of the faith, &c. To our Treasurer and Admirral of England, our +Treasurer and Barons of our Exchequer, and all and euery our Officers, +ministers and subiects whatsoeuer, greeting. Whereas our welbeloued +subiects William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicolas Spicer, and Iohn Doricot +of our City of Exeter marchants, Iohn Yong of Coliton in our county of +Deuon marchant, Richard Doderige of Barnstable in our saide County of Deuon +Marchant, Anthonie Dassell, and Nicolas Turner of our Citie of London +Marchants, haue bene perswaded and earnestly moued by certaine Portugals +resident within our Dominions, to vndertake and set forward a voyage to +certaine places on the coast of Guinea; Videlicit, from the Northermost +part of the Riuer commonly called by the name of the Riuer of Senega, and +from and within that Riuer all along that coast vnto the Southermost part +of another Riuer commonly called by the name of Gambra, and within that +Riuer: [Sidenote: A former voyage to Gambra.] which, as we are informed +they haue already once performed accordingly: And for that we are credibly +giuen to vnderstand that the further prosecuting of the same voyage, and +the due and orderly establishing of an orderly trafique and trade of +marchandize into those Countries, wil not only in time be very beneficial +to these our Realmes and dominions, but also be a great succour and reliefe +vnto the present distressed estate of those Portugals, who by our princely +fauour liue and continue here vnder our protection: And considering that +the aduenturing and enterprising of a newe trade cannot be a matter of +small charge and hazard to the aduenturers in the beginning: we haue +therefore thought it conuenient, that our said louing subiects William +Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Young, Richard +Doderige, Anthonie Dassell, and Nicholas Turner, for the better +incouragement to proceede in their saide aduenture and trade in the said +Countreis, shal haue the sole vse and exercise thereof for a certaine time. +In consideration whereof, and for other waightie reasons and +considerations, vs specially moouing, of our speciall grace, certaine +knowledge and meere motion, we haue giuen and graunted, and by these +presents for vs, our heires and successors doe giue and graunt vnto the +said William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn +Young, Richard Doderide, Anthony Dassell and Nicholas Turner, and to euery +of them, and to such other our Subiects as they or the most part of them +shall thinke conuenient to receiue into their Company and society, to be +the traders with them into the said Contreis, that they and euery of them +by themselues or by their seruants or Factors and none others, shall and +may for and during the full space and terme of tenne yeeres next ensuing +the date of these presents, haue and enioy the free and whole trafique, +trade and feat of marchandise, to and from the said Northermost part of the +said Riuer, commonly called by the name of the Riuer of Senega: and from +and within that riuer all along the coast of Guinea, vnto the Southermost +part of the said Riuer, commonly called by the name of the Riuer of Gambra, +and within that Riuer also. And that they the said William Brayley, Gilbert +Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, Richard Doderige, Anthony +Dassel and Nicholas Turner, and euery of them, by themselues or by their +seruants or Factors, and such as they or the most part of them shall +receiue into their Company and societie, to be traders with them into the +sayd Countreis (as is aforesaid) and none others, shall and may, for, and +during the said space and terme of 10. yeres, haue and enioy the sole and +whole trafique or trade of marchandize into and from the said places afore +limitted and described, for the buying and selling, bartering and changing +of and with any goods, wares, and marchandizes whatsoeuer, to be vented had +or found, at or within any the cities, townes, or places situated or being +in the countries, partes and coastes of Guinea before limitted, any law, +statute, or graunt, matter, custome or priuileges to the contrary in any +wise notwithstanding. And for the better ordering, establishing, and +gouerning of the said societie and Company in the said trade and trafique +of marchandizes, and the quiet, orderly, and lawfull exercise of the same, +We for vs, our heires, and successors, do by these presents giue and graunt +full license and authority vnto the said William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, +Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, Richard Doderige, Anthonie +Dassell, and Nicholas Turner, and to such others as they shall receiue into +their saide societie and company to be traders into the said countreis, as +is aforesaid, and to euery of them, that they or the most part of them +shall and may at all conuenient times at their pleasures, assemble and +meete together in any place or places conuenient, aswell within our citie +of Exeter, as elsewhere within this our Realme of England, or other our +dominions, during the said terme of ten yeere, to consult of, for, and +concerning the saide trade and trafique of marchandize, and from time to +time to make, ordaine, and stablish good, necessary, and reasonable orders, +constitutions, and ordinances, for, and touching the same trade. And al +such orders, constitutions, and ordinances so to be made, to put in vse and +execute, and them, or any of them, to alter, change, and make voyd, and, if +neede be, to make new, as at any time, during the said terme of ten yeeres, +to them, or the most part of them then trading, as is aforesaide, shall be +thought necessary and conuenient. Vnto all and euery which said orders, +constitutions, and ordinances, they, and euery of them, and all other +persons which shall hereafter be receiued into the saide societie and +Company, shall submit themselues, and shall well and duely obserue, +performe, and obey the same, so long as they shall stand in force, or else +shall pay and incurre such forfeitures, paines, and penalties, for the +breach thereof, and in such maner and forme, and to such vses and intents, +as by the saide orders, constitutions, and ordinances shall be assessed, +limitted and appointed. So alwayes, as the same orders, constitutions and +ordinances be not repugnant or contrary to the lawes, statutes, and +customes of this Realme of England, nor any penaltie to exceede the +reasonable forme of other penalties, assessed by the Company of our +Marchants, named Aduenturers. And to the intent that they onely, to whom +the said power and libertie of trafique and trade of marchandize is +graunted by these our letters patent aforesaid, and none others whatsoeuer, +without their speciall consent and license before had, shall, during the +said terme of ten yeeres, vse, or haue trade or trafique, with or for any +maner of goods or marchandizes, to and from the saide coastes or parts of +Guinea afore limited: Wee doe by these presents, by our royall and supreme +authoritie, straightly charge and commaund, that no person or persons +whatsoeuer, by themselues, or by their factors, or seruants, during the +said terme of 10. yeres, shall in any wise trade or trafique, for or with +any goods or marchandizes, to or from the said coasts and parts of Guinea +afore limitted, other then the said William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, +Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, Richard Doderige, Anthony +Dassell, and Nicholas Turner, and such as from time to time, they, or the +most part of them, shall receiue into their societie and company, to be +traders with them, as is aforesaid, as they tender our fauour, and will +auoyde our high displeasure, and vpon paine of imprisonment of his or their +bodies, at our will and pleasure, and to lose and forfeit the ship or +shippes, and all the goods, wares, and marchandizes, wherewith they, or any +of them, shal, during the said terme of 10. yeres, trade, or trafique to or +from the said Countries, or any part thereof, according to the limitation +aboue mentioned, contrary to our expresse prohibition and restraint, in +that behalfe. And further, we do by these presents giue and graunt full +power and authoritie to the said William Braily, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas +Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, Richard Doderige, Anthony Dassell, and +Nicholas Turner, and to such other persons, as they shal receiue into their +society and company, to be traders with them, as is aforesaid, and the most +part of them, for the time being: that they, and euery of them, by +themselues, their factors, deputies, or assignes, shall and may, from time +to time, during the said terme of 10. yeres, attach, arrest, take, and +sease all, and all maner of ship, and ships, goods, wares, and marchandizes +whatsoeuer, which shall be brought from, or caried to the said coasts and +parts of Guinea afore limited, contrary to our will and pleasure, and the +true meaning of the same, declared and expressed in these our letters +patents. Of all and euery which said forfaitures whatsoeuer, the one third +part shall be vnto vs, our heires, and successors, and another thirde part +thereof we giue and graunt by these presents, for and towards the reliefe +of the saide Portugals continuing here vnder our protection, as is +aforesaid. And the other third part of al the same forfaitures, we do by +these presents, of our certaine knowledge and meere motion, for vs, our +heires and successors, giue and grant cleerely and wholy vnto the said +William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, +Richard Doderige, Anthony Dassel, and Nicholas Turner, and such other +persons, as they shall receiue into their societie, and company, as is +aforesaid. And these our letters patents, or the inrolment or +exemplification of the same, without any further or other warrant, shall +from time to time, during the said tenne yeeres, be a sufficient warrant +and authoritie to our Treasurer of England, for the time being, and to the +barons of our Exchequer, and to all other our officers and ministers +whatsoeuer, to whom it shall or may appertaine, to allow, deliuer, and pay +one thirde part of all the said forfeitures, to the vse of the said +Portugals, and one other thirde part of the same forfeitures, to the saide +William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, +Richard Doderige, Anthony Dassell, and Nicholas Turner, and such other +persons, as they shall receiue into their societie and Company, to be +traders with them, as aforesaide, to their owne proper vse and behoofe: +which said allowances and paiments thereof, our will and pleasure is, and +we do straightly charge and commaund, to bee from time to time duely made +and performed accordingly, without any delay or denial of any our officers +aforesaid, or any other our officers or ministers whatsoeuer. And we do +straightly charge and command, and by these presents probibite all and +singular our customers, collectors, and farmers of our Customes and +subsidies, and controllers of the same, of and within our ports of the +citie of London, and the Citie of Exeter, and all other ports, creekes, and +places, within this our Realme of England, and euery of them, and all other +our officers and ministers whatsoeuer, which haue or shall haue any dealing +or intermedling, touching our said Customes and subsidies, that they, ne +any of them by themselues, their clearks, deputies, or substitutes, or any +of them take or receiue, or in any wise cause or suffer to be taken or +receiued for vs, or in our name, or to our vse, or for, or in the names or +to the vses of our heires or successors, or any person, or persons, any +summe or summes of money, or other things whatsoeuer, during the saide +terme of ten yeeres, for, or in the name, lieu, or place of any Custome, +subsidie, or other thing or duetie, to vs, our heires, or successors, due, +or to be due, for the Customes or subsidies of any such goods, wares, or +marchandizes, to be transported, caried, or brought to or from the +priuileged places, before in these presents mentioned, or any of them: nor +make, nor cause to be made any entry into, or of the bookes of subsidies or +customes, nor make any agreement for the Customes or subsidies, of, or for +any goods, wares or merchandizes, to bee sent to, or returned from any the +priuleged places, before in these presents mentioned, sauing onely with, +and in the name, and by the consent of the saide William Brayley, Gilbert +Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, Richard Doderige, Antonie +Dassel, and Nicholas Turner, or of some of them, or of such as they or the +most part of them shall receiue into their societie and Company, as +aforesaid. Prouided alwaies, that if at any time hereafter, we our selves, +by our writing signed with our proper hand, or any sixe or more of our +priuie Counsell, for the time being, shall by our direction, and by writing +signed and subscribed with their hands, signifie and notifie to the said +William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, +Richard Doderige, Anthony Dassell, and Nicholas Turner, or to any of them, +or to any other, whom they or the most part of them shal receiue into their +Companie and society, as is aforesaid, or otherwise to our officers in our +ports of Exeter, or Plimouth, by them to be notified to such as shall haue +interest in this speciall priuilege, that our will and pleasure is, that +the said trade and trafique shal cease, and be no longer continued into the +saide coastes and partes of Guinea before limited: then immediatly from and +after the ende of sixe moneths next insuing, after such signification and +notification so to be giuen to any of the said Company and societie, as is +aforesaid, or otherwise to our Officers in our ports of Exeter or Plimouth, +by them to be notified to such as shall haue interest in this speciall +priuilege, these our present letters Patents, and our graunt therein +contained shall be vtterly voyde, and of none effect, ne validitie in the +lawe, to all intents and purposes: any thing before mentioned to the +contrary in any wise notwithstanding. Witnesse our selfe at Westminster, +the thirde day of May, in the thirtieth yere of our Reign 1588. + + * * * * * + +A voyage to Benin beyond the Countrey of Guinea, set foorth by Master Bird + and Master Newton Marchants of London, with a shippe called the Richard + of Arundell, and a Pinesse; Written by Iames Welsh, who was chiefe Master + of the said voyage, begunne in the yeere 1588. + +Vpon the twelft of October wee wayed our ankers at Ratcliffe and went to +Blackwall. And the next day sayling from thence, by reason of contrary +winde and weather, wee made it the 25. of October before wee were able to +reach Plimouth, and there we stayed (to our great expense of victuals) for +lacke of winde and weather vnto the 14. of December. + +On Saturday the said 14. of December we put from thence, and about midnight +were thwart of the Lizart. + +[Sidenote: Rio del oro is in 22. degrees and 47. min.] Thursday the second +of Ianuary wee had sight of the land neere Rio del oro, God be thanked, and +there had 22. degrees of latitude, and 47. minutes. + +[Sidenote: Cauo de las Barbas.] The thirde of Ianuary wee had sight of Cauo +de las Barbas, and it bare Southeast fiue leagues off. + +[Sidenote: Crosiers.] The 4. we had sight of the Crosiers in the morning. + +[Sidenote: Cauo Verde in 14. degr. 43. m.] Tuesday the 7. day we had sight +of Cauo verde, and I find this place to be in latitude 14. degrees, and 43. +minutes, being 4. leagues from the shoare. + +[Sidenote: Cauo de Monte.] Friday the 17. Cauo de Monte bare off vs North +Northeast, we sounded and had 50. fathom blacke oase, and at 2. of the +clocke it bare North Northwest 8. leagues off. [Sidenote: Cauo Mensurado.] +And Cauo Mensurado bare of vs East and by South, and wee went Northeast +with the maine: here the current setteth to the East Southeast alongst the +shoare, and at midnight wee sounded and had 26. fathome blacke oase. + +The 18. in the morning we were thwart of a land, much like Cauo verde, and +it is as I iudge 9. leagues from Cauo Mensurado; it is a hill sadlebacked, +and there are 4. or 5. one after another: and 7. leagues to the Southward +of that, we saw a row of hils sadlebacked also, and from Cauo Mensurado are +many mountaines. + +[Sidenote: Rio de Sestos. Cauo dos Baixos.] The 19. we were thwart Rio de +Sestos, and the 20. Cauo dos Baixos was North and by West 4. leagues off +the shoare, [Sidenote: Tabanoo.] and at afternoone there came a boate frome +the shoare with 3. Negroes, from a place (as they say) called Tabanoo. And +towards euening we were thwart of an Island, and a great many of small +Islands or rockes to the Southward, and the currant came out of the +Souther-boord: we sounded and had 35. fathomes. + +[Sidenote: A French ship at Ratire. Crua.] The 21. wee had a flat hill that +bare North Northeast off vs, and wee were from the shoare 4. leagues, and +at 2. a clocke in the afternoone we spake with a Frenchman riding neere a +place called Ratire, and another place hard by called Crua. [Sidenote: A +current to the Southeastward.] This Frenchman caried a letter from vs to M. +Newton: wee layd it on hull while wee were writing of our letter; and the +current set vs to the Southward a good pase alongst the shore South +Southeast. + +The 25. we were in the bight of the Bay that is to the Westward of Capo de +Tres puntas: the currant did set East Northeast. + +The 28. we lay sixe glasses a hull tarying for the pinesse. + +[Sidenote: Caou de tres puntas.] The last of Ianuary the middle part of +Cape de tres puntas was thwart of vs three leagues at seuen of the clocke +in the morning: and at eight the pinnesse came to an anker: and wee prooued +that the current setteth to the Eastward: and at sixe at night the +Vttermost lande bare East and by South 5. leagues, and we went Southwest, +and Southwest and by South. + +Saturday the first of February 1588. we were thwart of a Round foreland, +which I take to be the Eastermost part of Capo de tres puntas: and within +the saide Round foreland was a great bay with an Island in the said bay. + +[Sidenote: The Castle of Mina.] The second of February wee were thwart of +the Castle of Mina, and when the thirde glasse of our Looke-out was spent, +we spied vnder our Larbord-quarter one of their Boates with certaine +Negroes, and one Portugale in the Boate, wee haue had him to come aboord, +but he would not. [Sidenote: Two white watch-houses.] And ouer the castle +upon the hie rockes we did see as it might be two watch-houses, and they +did shew very white: and we went eastnortheast. + +[Sidenote: Monte Redondo.] The 4 in the morning we were thwart a great high +hill, and vp into the lande were more high ragged hilles, and those I +reckoned to be but little short of Monte Redondo. Then I reckoned that we +were 20 leagues Southeastward from the Mina, and at 11 of the clocke I +sawe two hilles within the land, these hils I take to be 7 leagues from the +first hils. And to sea-ward of these hilles is a bay, and at the east end +of the bay another hill, and from the hils the landes lie verie low. We +went Eastnortheast, and East and by North 22 leagues, and then East along +the shore. + +[Sidenote: Villa longa.] The 6 we were short of Villa longa, and there we +met with a Portugall Carauell. + +The 7 a faire temperate day, and all this day we road before Villa longa. + +The 8 at noone we set saile from Villa longa, and ten leagues from thence +we ankered againe and stayed all that night in ten fadom water. + +[Sidenote: Rio de Lagos.] The ninth we set saile, and all alongst the shore +were very thicke woodes, and in the afternoone we were thwart a riuer, and +to the Eastward of the riuer a litle way off was a great high bush-tree as +though it had no leaues, and at night we ankered with faire and temperate +weather. + +The 10 we set sayle and went East, and East and by South 14 leagues along +the shoare, which was so full of thicke woods, that in my iudgement a man +should haue much to doe to passe through them, and towards night we ankered +in 7 fadome with faire weather. + +[Sidenote: Very shallow water.] The 11 we sayled East and by South, and +three leagues from the shore we had but 5 fadome water, and all the wood +vpon the land was as euen as if it had beene cut with a paire of gardeners +sheeres, and in running of two leagues we descerned a high tuft of trees +vpon the brow of a land, which shewed like a Porpose head, and when wee +came at it, it was but part of the lande, and a league further we saw a +head-land very low and full of trees, and a great way from the land we had +very shallow water, then we lay South into the sea, because of the sands +for to get into the deepe water, and when we found it deepe, we ankered in +fiue fadom thwart the riuer of Iaya, in the riuers mouth. + +The 12. in the morning we road still in the riuers mouth. This day we sent +the pinnesse and the boat on land with the marchants, but they came not +againe vntil the next morning. The shallowest part of this riuer is toward +the West, where there is but 4 fadom and a halfe, and it is very broad. +[Sidenote: Rio de Iaya.] The next morning came the boate aboord, and they +also said it was Rio de Iaya. Here the currant setteth Westward, and the +Eastermost land is higher then the Westermost Thursday the 13 we set saile, +and lay South Southeast along the shore, where the trees are wonderfull +euen, and the East shore is higher then the West shore, and when wee had +sayled 18 leagues we had sight of a great riuer, then we ankered in three +fadom and a halfe, and the currant went Westward. [Sidenote: Rio Benin.] +This riuer is the riuer of Benin, and two leagues from the maine it is very +shallowe. + +[Sidenote: A currant Westward.] The 15 we sent the boat and pinesse into +the riuer with the marchants, and after that we set saile, because we road +in shallow water, and went Southsoutheast, and the starboard tacke aboord +vntill we came to fiue fadom water, where we road with the currant to the +Westward: then came our boat out of the harbour and went aboord the +pinnesse. The West part of the land was high browed much like the head of a +Gurnard, and the Eastermost land was lower, and had on it three tufts of +trees like stackes of wheate or corne, and the next day in the morning we +sawe but two of those trees, by reason that we went more to the Eastward. +And here we road still from the 14 of Februarie vntill the 14 of Aprill, +with the winde at Southwest. + +The 16 of Februarie we rode still in fiue fadom, and the currant ranne +still to the Westward, the winde at Southwest, and the boat and pinnesse +came to vs againe out of the riuer, and told vs that there was but ten +foote water vpon the barre. All that night was drowsie, and yet reasonable +temperate. + +The 17 a close day, the winde at Southwest. Our marchants wayed their goods +and put them aboord the pinnesse to goe into the riuer, and there came a +great currant out of the riuer and set to the Westward. + +The 18 the marchants went with the boat and pinnesse into the riuer with +their commodities. This day was close and drowsie, with thunder, raine, and +lightning. + +The 24 a close morning and temperate, and in the afternoone the boat came +to vs out of the riuer with our marchants. + +Twesday the 4 of March, a close soultry hot morning, the currant went to +the Westward, and much troubled water came out of the riuer. + +[Sidenote: Sicknesse among our men.] The 16 our pinnesse came a boord and +Anthonie Ingram in her, and she brought in her 94 bags of pepper, and 28 +Elephants teeth, and the Master of her and all his company were sicke. This +was a temperate day and the winde at Southwest. + +The 17. 18. and 19 were faire temperate weather and the winde at Southwest. +This day the pinnesse went into the riuer againe, and carried the Purser +and the Surgion. + +The 25 of the said moneth 1589 we sent the boate into the riuer. + +[Sidenote: The death of the Captaine. Pepper and Elephants Teeth.] The 30 +our pinnesse came from Benin, and brought sorowfull newes, that Thomas +Hemstead was dead and our Captaine also, and she brought with her 159 +Cerons or sackes of pepper and Elephants teeth. + +[Sidenote: A good note.] Note that in all the time of our abiding here, in +the mouth of the riuer of Benin, and in all the coast hereabout it is faire +temperate weather, when the winde is at Southwest. And when the winde is at +Northeast and Northerly, then it raineth, with lightning and thunder, and +is very intemperate weather. + +The 13 of Aprill 1589 we set saile homewards in the name of Iesus. In the +morning we sayled with the winde at Southwest, and lay West and by North, +but it prooued calme all that night, and the currant Southeast. + +The 14 the riuer of Benin was Northeast 7 leagues from the shore, and there +was little winde and towards night calme. + +The l7 a faire temperate day the winde variable, and we had of latitude +foure degrees and 20 minutes. + +The 25 a faire temperate day the winde variable, and here we had three +degrees and 29 minuts of latitude. + +[Sidenote: A deceiptfll currant.] The 8 of May we had sight of the shore, +which was part of Cauo de Monte, but we did not thinke we had beene so +farre, but it came so to passe by reason of the currant. In this place M. +Towrson was in like maner deceiued with the currant. + +The 9 we had sight of Cauo de monte. + +The 17 a darke drowsie day, this was the first night that I tooke the North +starre. + +The 26 a temperate day with litle winde, and we were in 12 degrees and 13 +minutes of latitude. + +The 30 we met a great sea out of the Northwest. + +The 6 of Iune we found it as temperate as if we had beene in England, and +yet we were within the height of the sunne, for it was declined 23 degrees, +and 26 minuts to the Northward, and we had 15 degrees of latitude. + +The 8 faire and temperate as in England, here we met with a counter sea, +out of the Southborde. + +The 15 a faire temperate day, the winde variable, here we had 18 degrees +and fiftie nine minutes; + +[Sidenote: Rockweed or Saragasso all along the sea.] The 12 of Iuly in 30 +degrees of latitude we met with great store of rockweed, which did stick +together like clusters of grapes, and this continued with vs vntill the 17 +of the said moneth, and then we saw no more, at which 17 day we were in two +and thirtie degrees sixe and fortie minutes of latitude. + +The 25 at sixe of the clocke in the morning, we had sight of the Ile of +Pike, it bare North and by East from vs, we being 15 leagues off. + +The 27 we spake with the poste of London and she told vs good newes of +England. + +The nine and twentieth we had sight of the Island of Cueruo, and the 30 we +saw the Island of Flores. + +The 27 of August in 41 degrees of latitude we saw 9 saile of Britons, and +three of them followed vs vntill noone, and then gaue vs ouer. + +The 30 we had sight of Cape Finisterre. + +The eight of September at night wee put into Plimouth sound, and road in +Causon Bay all night. + +The 9 we put into Catwater and there stayed vntill the 28 of September, by +reason of want of men and sicknesse. + +The nine and twentieth we set sayle from Plimouth, and arriued at London +the second of October 1589. + +The commodities that we caried in this voyage were cloth both linnen and +woollen, yron worke of sundry sorts, Manillios or bracelets of copper, +glasse beades, and corrall. + +The commodities that we brought home were pepper and Elephants teeth, oyle +of palme, cloth made of Cotton wool very curiously wouen, and cloth made of +the barke of palme trees. Their monie is pretie white shels, for golde and +siluer we saw none. [Sidenote: Inamia, a kind of bread in Benin.] They haue +also great store of cotton growing: their bread is a kind of roots, they +call it Inamia, and when it is well sodden I would leaue our bread to eat +of it, it is pleasant in eating, and light of digestion, the roote thereof +is as bigge as a mans arme. Our men vpon fish-dayes had rather eate the +rootes with oyle and vineger, then to eate good stockfish. [Sidenote: Wine +of palm trees.] There are great store of palme trees, out of which they +gather great store of wine, which wine is white and very pleasant, and we +should buy two gallons of it for 20 shels. They haue good store of sope, +and it smelleth like beaten violets. Also many pretie fine mats and baskets +that they make, and spoones of Elephants teeth very curiously wrought with +diuers proportions of foules and beasts made vpon them. There is vpon the +coast wonderfull great lightning and thunder, in so much as I neuer hard +the like in no Countrey, for it would make the decke or hatches tremble +vnder our feete, and before we were well acquainted with it, we were +fearefull, but God be thanked we had no harme. The people are very gentle +and louing, and they goe naked both men and women vntill they be married, +and then they goe couered from the middle downe to the knees. [Sidenote: +Abundance of honey.] They would bring our men earthen pottes of the +quantitie of two gallons, full of hony and hony combes for 100 shelles. +They would also bring great store of Oranges and Plantans which is a fruit +that groweth upon a tree, and is like vnto a Cucumber but very pleasant in +eating. It hath pleased God of his mercefull goodnesse to give me the +knowledge how to preserue fresh water with little cost, [Marginal note: +This preseruatiue is wrought by casting into an hogshead of water an +handful of bay-salt, as the author told me.] which did serve vs sixe +moneths at the sea, and when we came into Plimmouth it was much wondered +at, of the principal men of the towne, who said that there was not sweeter +water in any spring in Plimmouth. Thus doth God prouide for his creatures, +vnto whom be praise now and for euermore, Amen. + + * * * * * + +The voiage set forth by M. Iohn Newton, and M. Iohn Bird marchants of + London to the kingdome and Citie of Benin in Africa, with a ship called + the Richard of Arundell, and a pinnesse, in the yere 1588. briefly set + downe in this letter following, written by the chiefe Factor in the + voyage to the foresaid Marchants at the time of the ships first arriual + at Plimouth. + +Worshipful Sirs, the discourse of our whole proceeding in this voyage wil +aske more time and a person in better health then I am at this present, so +that I trust you will pardon me, till my comming vp to you: in the meane +time let this suffice. Whereas we departed in the moneth of December from +the coast of England with your good ship the Richard of Arundell and the +pinnesse, we held on our direct course towards our appointed port, and the +14 day of Februarie following we arriued in the hauen of Benin, where we +found not water enough to carry the ship ouer the barre, so that we left +her without in the road, and with the pinnesse and ship boat, into which we +had put the chiefest of our marchandise, [Sidenote: Goto in Benin.] we went +vp the riuer to a place called Goto, where we arriued the 20 of February, +the foresaid Goto being the neerest place that we could come to by water, +to go for Benin. [Sidenote: The great citie of Benin.] From thence we +presently sent Negroes to the king, to certifie him of our arriuall, and of +the cause of our comming thither: who returned to vs againe the 22 day with +a noble man in their company to bring vs vp to the Citie, and with 200 +Negroes to carrie our commodities: hereupon the 23 day we deliuered our +marchandize to the Kings Factor, and the 25 day we came to the Citie of +Benin, where we were well intertained: The sixe and twenty day we went to +the Court to haue spoken with the king, which (by reason of a solemne feast +then kept amongst them) we could not doe: but yet we spake with his +Veadore, or chiefe man, that hath the dealing with the Christians: and we +conferred with him concerning our trading, who answered vs, that we should +have all thing to our desire, both in pepper and Elephants teeth. + +The first of March, we were admitted to the kings presence, and he made vs +the like courteous answere for our traffike: the next day we went againe to +the Court, where the foresaid Veadore shewed vs one basket of greene +pepper, and another of dry in the stalkes: wee desired to haue it plucked +from the stalks and made cleane, who answered, that it would aske time, but +yet it should be done: and that against another yeere it should be in +better readines, and the reason why we found it so vnprepared was, because +in this kings time no Christians had euer resorted thither, to lade pepper. +The next day there were sent vs 12 baskets, and so a litle euery day vntill +the 9 of March at which time we had made vpon 64 serons of pepper, and 28 +Elephants teeth. In this time of our being at Benin (our natures at this +first time not so well acquainted with that climate) we fell all of vs into +the disease of the feuer, whereupon the Captaine sent me downe with those +goods which we alreadie had receiued, to the rest of our men at Goto: where +being arriued, I found all the men of our pinnesse sicke also, and by +reason of their weaknes not able to conuey the pinnesse and goods downe to +the place where our ship road: but by good hap within two houres after my +comming to Goto, the boate came vp from the ship, to see how all things +stood with vs, so that I put the goods into the boat, and went downe +towards the ship: but by that time I was come aboord, many of our men died: +namely, Master Benson, the Cooper, the Carpenter, and 3 or 4 more, and my +selfe was also in such a weake state that I was not able to returne againe +to Benin. Whereupon I sent vp Samuel Dunne, and the Chirurgian with him to +our men, that were about to let them blood, if it were thought needfull: +who at their comming to Benin, found the Captaine and your sonne William +Bird dead, and Thomas Hempsteede very weake, who also died within two dayes +after their comming thither. This sorrowfull accident caused them with such +pepper and teeth, as they could then find, speedily to returne to the ship, +as by the Cargason will appeare: at their comming away the Veadore tolde +them, that if they could or would stay any longer time, he would vse all +possible expedition to bring in more commodities: but the common sicknesse +so increased and continued amongst vs all, that by the time our men which +remained were come aboord, we had so many sicke and dead of our companie, +that we looked all for the same happe, and so thought to loose both our +ship, life, countrey and all. Very hardly and with much adoe could we get +vp our ankers, but yet at last by the mercie of God hauing gotten them vp, +but leauing our pinnesse behind vs, we got to sea, and set saile, which was +vpon the 13 of Aprill. After which by little and little our men beganne to +gather vp their crums and to recouer some better strength: and so sailing +betwixt the Ilands of Cape Verde, and the maine we came to the Islands of +the Azores vpon the 25 of Iuly, where our men beganne a fresh to grow ill, +and divers died, among whom Samuel Dun was one, and as many as remained +liuing were in a hard case: but in the midst of our distresse, it fell so +well out, by Gods good prouidence, that we met with your ship the Barke +Burre, on this side the North cape, which did not only keepe vs good +companie, but also sent vs sixe fresh men aboord, without whose helpe, we +should surely haue tasted of many inconueniences. But by this good meanes +we are now at the last arriued in Plimouth, this 9 day of September: and +for want of better health at this time, I referre the further knowledge of +more particularities till my comming to London. Yours to commaund Antony +Ingram. + + * * * * * + +The second voyage to Benin, set foorth by Master Iohn Newton, and Master + Iohn Bird Marchants of London in the yeere 1590 with a ship called the + Richard of Arundell of the burthen of one hundreth tunnes, and a small + pinnesse, in which voyage Master Iames Welsh was chiefe Maister. + +The third of September 1590 we set saile from Ratclife, and the 18 of the +said moneth we came into Plimouth sound, and the two and twentieth we put +to sea againe, and at midnight we were off the Lisart, and so passed on our +voyage vntill the 14 of October, on which day we had sight of Forteuentura +one of the Canarie Islands, which appeared very ragged as we sailed by it. + +The 16 of October, in the latitude of 24 degrees and nine minutes we met +with a great hollow sea, the like whereof I neuer saw on this coast, and +this day there came to the ships side a monstrous great fish (I thinke it +was a Gobarto) which put vp his head to the steepe tubs where the cooke was +in shifting the victuals, whom I thought the fish would haue caried away. + +The 21 in this latitude of 18 degrees we met with a countersea out of the +North boord, and the last voyage in this very place we had the countersea +out of the South, being very calme weather as now it is also. + +[Sidenote: A token of a Northerly winde.] The 24 we had sight of Cauo +Verde, and the 25 we met with a great hollow sea out of the North, which is +a common signe that the winde will be Northerly, and so it prooued. + +The 15 of Nouember we met with three currants out of the West and +Northwest, one after another, with an houres time betweene each currant. +This was in the latitude of 6 degrees and 42 minutes. + +[Sidenote: Great currants.] The 18 day we met with two other great currants +out of the Southwest, and the 20 we saw another current out of the +Northeast, and the 24 we had a great current out of the Southsouthwest, and +at 6 of the clocke towards night we had 3 currents more. + +The 27 we thought that we had gone at the least 2 leagues and a halfe euery +watch, and it fell out that we sailed but one league euery watch for the +space of 24 houres, by meanes of a great billow and current that came still +out of the South. + +The 5 of December in setting the watch we cast about and lay East +Northeast, and Northeast, and here in 5 degrees and a halfe our pinnesse +lost vs wilfully. + +The 7 at the going downe of the Sunne we saw a great blacke spot in the +Sunne, and the 8. day both at rising and setting we saw the like, which +spot to our seeming was about the bignesse of a shilling, being in 5 +degrees of latitude, and still there came a great billow of the +southerboord. + +The 14 we sounded and had 15 fadom water and grosse red sand, and 2 leagues +from the shore the currant set Southeast along the shore with a billow +still out of the southerboord. + +[Sidenote: Two rocks.] The 15 we were thwart a rocke somewhat like the +Mewstone in England, it was 2 leagues from vs, here we sounded and had 27 +fadom, but the rocke is not aboue a mile from the shore, and a mile farther +we saw another rocke and betweene them both broken ground; here we sounded +and had but 20 fadome and blacke sand, and we might see plaine that the +rockes went not along the shore, but from the land to the seaward, and +about 5 leagues to the Southwards we sawe a great bay, here we had 4 +degrees and 27 minuts. + +[Sidenote: A French ship of Hunfleur.] The 16 we met with a French ship of +Hunfleur, who robbed our pinnesse, we sent a letter by him, and this night +we saw another spot in the sunne at his going downe. And towards euening we +were thwart of a riuer, and right ouer the riuer was a high tuft of trees. + +[Sidenote: Cauo del las Palmas.] The 17 we ankered in the riuers mouth, and +then we found the land to be Cauo de las Palmas, and betweene vs and the +cape was a big ledge of rockes, one league and a halfe into the sea, and +they bare to the West of the Cape, we saw also an Island off the point of +the foreland, thus it waxed night that we could perceiue no more of the +lande, but onely that it trended in like a bay, where there runneth a +streame as if it were in the riuer of Thames, and this was the change day +of the Moone. + +The 19 a faire temperate day, and the wind South, we went East, and the +lande a sterne of vs West, and it shewed low by the water side like +Islands, this was the East of Cauo de las Palmas, and it trended in with a +great sound, and we went East all night, and in the morning wee were but 3 +or 4 leagues from the shore. + +The 20 we were thwart of a riuer railed Rio de los Barbos. + +The 21 we went along the shore East, and 3 or 4 leagues to the West of Cauo +de tres puntas, I find the bay to be set deeper then it is by 4 leagues, +and at 4 of the clocke the land begun to shewe high, and the first part of +it full of Palme trees. + +The 24 still going by the shore, the land was very low and full of trees by +the water side, and at 12 of the clocke we ankered thwart of the riuer +called, Rio de Boilas. Here we sent our boate a shore with the marchants, +but they durst not put into the riuer because of a great billow that +continually brake at the entrance vpon the barre. + +The 28 we sailed alongst the shore, and ankered at night in seuen fadom +because a great current would haue put vs backe, which came from the East +Southeast from Papuas. + +[Sidenote: Arda.] The 29 at noone we were thwart of Arda, and there we +tooke a Carauel but the men were fled on land, then we went aboord her, but +she had nothing in her but only a litle oyle of Palme trees, and a few +roots. The next morning, our Captaine and marchants went to meete +Portugals, that came in a boate to speake with vs, where they communed +about the buying of the Carauell of our men againe, and the Portugals +promised that we should haue for the Carauell, certaine bullocks and +Elephants teeth, and they gaue vs one tooth and one bullocke presently, and +sayd they would bring vs the rest the next day. + +[Sidenote: Ianuarie.] The first of Ianuarie our Captaine went on land to +speake with the Portugales, but when he saw they did dissemble, he came +aboord againe, and presently we vnrigged the Carauell, and set her on fire +before the towne. Then we set saile and went along the coast, where we saw +a Date tree, the like whereof is not in all that coast vpon the water side, +also we fell on ground a litle in one place: [Sidenote: Villa longa.] Thus +we went to Villa longa, and there ankered. + +[Sidenote: Rio de Lagoa.] The third we were as far shot as Rio de Lagoa, +where our marchants went a shore and vpon the barre they found 3 fadom +flat, but they went not in because it was late. There is also to the +Eastward of this riuer a Date tree higher than all the rest of the other +trees thereabout. Thus we went along the coast, and euery night ankered, +and al the shore as we went was full of trees and thicke woods. + +[Sidenote: The riuer Iaya.] The 6 day in the morning it was very foggy, so +that we could not see the land, and at three of the clocke in the +afternoone it cleared vp, and then we found our selues thwart of the riuer +of Iaya, and when we found the shallow water, we bare into the sea South, +as we did the voyage before, and came to an ancre in fiue fadom water. +[Sidenote: The riuer Benin.] The next day we set saile againe, and towards +noone we were thwart of the riuer of Benin in foure fadom water. + +The 10 day our Captaine went on land with the shallop at 2 a clocke in the +afternoone. All this weeke it was very foggy euery day vntill ten a clocke, +and all this time hitherto hath beene as temperate as our summer in +England. This day we went into the road and ankered, and the west point of +the road bare East northeast off vs, wee riding in foure fadome water. + +[Sidenote: Goto.] The 21 a faire temperate day, this day M. Hassald went to +the towne of Goto, to heare newes of the Captaine. + +The 23 came the Carauell, and Samuell in her, and she brought 63 Elephants +teeth, and three bullocks. + +The 28 a faire temperate day, and towards night there fell much raine, +lightning, and thunder, this day our boate came aboord from Goto. + +The 24 of Februarie, we tooke in 298 Cerons or sackes of pepper, and 4 +Elephants teeth, and the winde was at Southeast. And the 26 we put the rest +of our goods into the Carauell, and M. Hassald went with her to Goto. + +The 5 of March the Carauel came againe and brought 21 Cerons of pepper, and +4 Elephants teeth. + +The 9 of Aprill our Carauell came aboord with water for our prouision for +the sea, and this day also we lost our shallope. + +The 17 a drowsie rainie day, and in the afternoone we saw 3 great spoutes +of raine, two on our larbord side, and one right with the ships head, but +God be thanked, they came not at vs, and this day we tooke in the last of +our water for the sea, and the 26 we victualed our Carauell to go with vs +to the sea. + +The 27 we set saile to goe homewarde with the winde at Southwest, and at +two a clocke in the afternoone, the riuer of Benin was Northeast 8 leagues +from vs. + +The 3 of May we had such a terrible gust with raine, lightning and thunder, +that it tore and split our fore saile, and also the Carauels foresayle and +maine-sayle, with the wind at Southeast. + +The 12 a faire temperate day, much like our sommer mornings in England, +being but one degree and a halfe from the line, but at midnight we had a +cruell gust of raine; and the wind at northeast. + +The 24 we were South from Cauo de las Palmas 37 leagues. + +The first of Iuly we had sight of the Iland of Braua, and it bare East 7 +leagues off, and this Island is one of the Islands of Cauo Verde. + +The 13 of August we spake with the Queenes ships, the Lord Thomas Howard +being Admirall, and sir Richard Greeneuill Viceadmirall. They kept vs in +their company vntill the 15 day night, themselues lying a hull, in waight +for purchase 30 leagues to the Southwest of the Island of Flores. + +[Sidenote: We departed in company of a prise.] The 15 we had leaue to +depart with a fly-boat laden with sugar that came from Sant Thome, which +was taken by the Queenes ships, whereof my Lord Admirall gaue me great +charge, not to leaue her vntill she were harbored in England. + +The three and twentieth the Northeast part of the Island of Coruo bare of +vs East and by South sixe leagues off. + +The 17 of September we met with a ship of Plimouth that came out of the +West Indies, but she could tell vs no newes. The next day we had sight of +another sayle, this day also one of our company named M. Wood died. + +The 23 we spake with the Dragon of my Lord of Cumberland, whereof Master +Iuie was Maister. + +The second of October we met with a ship of New-castle which came from +Newfoundland, and out of her we had 300 couple of Newland fish. + +The 6 we had sight of Sillie, and with raine and winde we were forced to +put into S. Maries sound, where we staied all night, and 4 dayes after. + +The 11 we set saile againe, and comming out had three fadom vpon the barre +at a high water, then we lay out Southeast, through Crow-sand, and shortly +after we had sight of the lands end, and at ten of the clocke we were +thwart of the Lysart. + +The 13 we were put into Dartmouth, and there we stayd vntill the 12 of +December. From thence we put out with the winde at West, and the 18 of +December, God be praised, we ankered at Limehouse in the Thames, where we +discharged 589 sacks of Pepper, 150 Elephants teeth, and 32 barrels of oile +of Palme trees. + +The commodities that we caried out this second voyage were Broad cloth, +Kersies, Bayes, Linnen cloth, Yron vnwrought, Bracelets of Copper, Corall, +Hawks belles, Horsetails, Hats, and such like. + +This voyage was more comfortable vnto vs then the first, because we had +good store of fresh water, and that very sweet: for as yet we haue very +good water in the shippe which we brought out of the riuer of Benin the +first day of Aprill 1591. and it is at this day (being the 7 of Iune 1592.) +to be seene aboord the ship as cleare and as sweet as any fountaine can +yeeld. + +In this voyage we sailed 350 leagues within halfe a degree of the +equinoctiall line, and there we found it more temperate than where we rode. +[Marginal note: It is more temperate vnder the equinoctiall, then on the +coast of Guinie and Benin.] And vnder the line we did kill great store of +small Dolphines, and many other good fishes, and so did we all the way, +which was a very great refreshing vnto vs, and the fish neuer forsooke vs +vntil we were to the Northwards of the Ilands of Azores, and then we could +see no more fish, but God be thanked wee met with good company of our +countrey ships which were great comfort vnto vs, being fiue moneths before +at Sea without any companie. By me Iames Welsh master of the Richard of +Arundell, in both these voyages to the riuer of Benin. + + * * * * * + +An Aduertisement sent to Philip the second king of Spaine from Angola by + one Baltazar Almeida de Sousa, touching the state of the forsayd + countrey, written the 21 of May. 1591. + +The 26 of Iuly I certified your maiestie by Iohn Frere de Bendanha your +majesties pay-master and commissioner, with the gouernour Paulo Dias, which +is lately deceased, of all things that happened the 28 of December in the +yere last past 1590. Now I thought it conuenient to aduertise your maiestie +what hath fallen out since that time, which is as foloweth. The gouernour +Luis Serrano encamped himselfe eight leagues from Cabasa, where the Negro +king dwelleth with 350 Portugal souldiers: and afterward being there +encamped, it hapned that the King of Matamba sent a strong and mightie +army, and in warlike maner, with strange inuentions for the sayd purpose. +[Sidenote: 114 Portugals slaine in Angola.] So the king of Angola gaue this +other king battell, and the gouernour sent 114 souldiers Portugals to helpe +the said king of Angola: in which battell it was the will of God that our +army was ouerthrown and all slaine, as well our Portugals as the Moores +which tooke part with them. So with this ouerthrow it happened that this +realme the second time hath rebelled against your maiestie. Herevpon the +Governour assembling the rest of his Portugal souldiers, to the number of +250 altogether, went to Amasanguano, which is now his place of abode. +Moreouer, besides the manifold losses which haue befallen the Portugals in +this realme, your maiestie hath sustained other great misfortunes in your +lands and goods. And because I cannot personally come to certifie your +maiestie thereof, I thought it good to write some part of the same whereby +your maiestie may vnderstand the estate of this countrey. This realme for +the most part thereof hath twise benne wonne, and twise lost for want of +good gouernment For here haue bene many gouernours which haue pretended to +do iustice, but haue pitifully neglected the same, and practised the cleane +contrary. + +[Sidenote: The only way to reduce a rebellous kingdom vnto obedience.] And +this I know to be most true. But the onely way to recouer this realme, and +to augment your maiesties lands, goods and treasure, must be by sending +some noble and mighty man to rule here, which must bring authoritie from +your maiestie, and by taking streight order that euery captaine which doeth +conquere here may bee rewarded according to his deserts. Likewise your +maiestie must send hither 2000 good souldiers, with munition and sufficient +store of prouision for them. And by this means your highnesse shall know +what yeerely reuenue Angola will yeeld vnto your coffers, and what profit +will grow thereof. Otherwise your maiestie shall reape but litle benefit +here. If with my presence I may doe your maiestie any seruice in giuing +information of the state of this realme, as one which haue had experience +thereof, and haue seene the order of it, vpon the vnderstanding of your +maiesties pleasure herein, I will do my best endeuour. [Sidenote: An vsuall +trick of lewd gouernours.] And the cause whereof I haue not done this +heretofore hath bene, by reason that the Gouernors of this realme would +suffer none of the captaines which haue conquered this countrey to informe +your maiestie of that which is needfull for your seruice, and the +augmenting of this conquest. Our lord preserue your catholique person with +increase of many kingdomes, and the augmentation of youre crowne. Written, +in the conquest of the realme of Angola the 21 of May 1591. Your majesties +most loiall subiect, Baltazar Almeida de Souza. + + * * * * * + +Confimatio treugarum inter Regem Angliae Eduardum quartum, et Ioannem + secundum Regem Portugalliae, datarum in oppido montis Maioris 8 + Februarij, et apud Westmonasterium 12 Septembris, 1482, anno regni 22 + Regis Eduardi quarti, lingua Lusitanica ex opere sequenti excerpta. + +Libro das obras de Garcia de Resende, que tracta da vida e feitos del Rey + dom Ioham secundo. + +Embaixada que el Ray mandou a el Rey d'Inglaterra, cap.33 + +Eda qui de Monte Mor mandou el Rey por embaixadores a el rey dom Duarte de +Inglaterra Ruy de Sousa pessoa principal e de muyto bon saber e credito, de +que el Rey muyto confiaua, e ho doutor Ioam d'Eluas, e Fernam de Pina por +secretario. E foram por mar muy honradamente com muy boa companhia: hos +quaes foram en nome del Rey confirmar as ligas antiquas com Inglaterra, que +polla condisan dellas ho nouo Rey de hum reyno e do outro era obrigado a +mandar confirmar: e tambien pera mostrarem ho titolo que el rey tinha no +senhorio de Guinee, pera que depois de visto el rey d'Inglaterra defendesse +em todos seus reynos, que ninguen armasse nem podesse mandar a Guinee: e +assi mandasse desfazer buna armada, que pera las faziam, per mandado do +Duque de Medina Sidonia, hum Ioam Tintam e hum Guilherme Fabiam Ingreses. +Com ha qual embaixada el rey d'Inglaterra mostrou receber grande +contentamento, e foy delle com muyta honra recebida, e em tudo fez +inteiramente ho que pellos embaixadores lhe foy requerido. De que elles +trouxeran autenticas [Marginal note: These writings are in the tower.] +escrituras das diligencias que con pubricos pregones fizeram: e assi as +prouisones das aprauasones que eran necessarias: e com tudo muyto ben +acabado, e ha vontade del rey se vieram. + + +The Ambassage which king Iohn the second, king of Portugall, sent to Edward + the fourth king of England, which in part was to stay one Iohn Tintam, + and one William Fabian English men, from proceeding in a voyage which + they were preparing fot Guinea, 1481, taken out of the booke of the + workes of Garcias de Resende, which intreateth of the life and acts of + Don Iohn the second, king of Portugall. Chap. 33. + +And afterwards the king sent as Ambassadours from the towne of Monte maior +to king Edward the fourth of England, Ruy de Sousa, a principall person, +and a man of great wisedome and estimation, and in whom the king reposed +great trust, with doctor Iohn d'Eluas, and Ferdinand de Pina, as +secretarie. And they made their voyage by sea very honourably, being very +well accompanied. [Sidenote: The first cause of this ambassage.] These men +were sent on the behalfe of their king, to confirme the ancient leagues +England, wherein it was conditioned that the new king of the one and of the +other kingdome, should be bound to send to confirme the olde leagues. +[Sidenote: The second cause.] And likewise they had order to shew and make +him acquainted with the title which the king held in the segneury of +Ginnee, to the intent that after the king of England had seene the same, he +should giue charge thorow all his kingdomes, that no man should arme or set +foorth ships to Ginnee: [Sidenote: The third cause.] and also to request +him, that it would please him to giue commandement to dissolue a certaine +fleet, which one Iohn Tintam and one William Fabian, English men, were +making, by commandement of the duke of Medina Sidonia, to goe to the +aforesayd parts of Ginnee. With which ambassage the king of England seemed +to be very well pleased, and they were receiued of him with very great +honour, and he condescended vnto all that the ambassadours required of him, +at whose hands they receiued authenticall writings of the diligence which +they had performed, with publication thereof by the heralds: and also +prouisoes of those confirmations which were necessary. And hauing +dispatched all things well, and with the kings good will, they returned +home into their countrey. + + * * * * * + +A relation sent by Melchior Petoney to Nigil de Moura at Lisbon, from the + Iland and Castle of Arguin, standing a little to the southward of Cape + Blanco, in the Northerly latitude of 19 degrees, concerning the rich and + secret trade from the inland of Africa thither: Anno 1591. + +[Sidenote: Commodities fit for Arguin.] As concerning the trade to this +Castle and Iland of Arguin, your worship is to vnderstand, that if it would +please the kings maiesty to send hither two or three carauels once in a +yeere with Flanders and Spanish commodities, as Bracelets of glasse, +Kniues, Belles, Linnen-cloth, Looking-glasses, with other kindes of small +wares, his hignesse might do great good here. For 50 leagues vp into the +land the Moores haue many exceedingly rich golde mines; insomuch that they +bring downe their golde to this Castle to traffique with vs: and for a +small trifle they will give vs a great wedge of gold. And because here is +no trade, the sayd Moores cary their golde to Fez being 250 leagues distant +from hence, and there doe exchange the same for the forsayd kindes of +commodities. By this meanes also his maiesty might stop that passage, and +keepe the king of Fez from so huge a mass of golde. [Sidenote: Scarlet and +fine Purple cloth greatly accepted.] Scarlet-clothes, and fine Purples are +greatly accepted of in these parts. It is a most fertile country within the +land, and yeeldeth great store of Wheat, flesh of all kindes, and abundance +of fruits. [Sidenote: A good harbor before the Castle of Arguin.] Therefore +if it were possible, you should do well to deale with his maiesty, either +himselfe to send a couple of carauels, or to giue your worship leaue to +traffique here: for here is a very good harbour where ships may ride at +ancre hard by the Castle. The countrey where all the golde-mines are is +called The kingdome of Darha. [Marginal note: Concerning this kingdome +reade Leo Africanus a little after the beginning of his 6 booke.] In this +kingdome are great store of cities and townes; and in euery city and towne +a Captaine with certaine souldiers; which Captaines are lords and owners of +the sayd townes. One city there is called Couton, another Xanigeton, as +also the cities of Tubguer, Azegue, Amader, Quaherque, and the towne of +Faroo. The which townes and cities are very great and fairely built, being +inhabited by rich Moores, and abounding with all kinde of cattell, Barley +and Dates. And here is such plenty of golde found vpon the sands by the +riuers side, that the sayd Moores usually cary the same Northward to +Marocco, and Southward to the city of Tombuto in the land of Negros, which +city standeth about 300 leagues from the kingdome of Darha; and this +kingdome is but 60 leagues from this Iland and Castle of Arguin. Wherefore +I beseech your worship to put his maiesty in remembrance hereof; for the +sayd cities and townes are but ten dayes iourney from hence. I heartily +wish that his maiesty would send two or three marchants to see the state of +the Countrey, who might trauell to the aforesayd cities, to understand of +their rich trade. For any man may go safe and come safe from those places. +And thus without troubling of your worship any further, I humbly take my +leaue. From the Iland and Castle of Arguin the 20 of Ianuary 1591. + +Your worships seruant + +Melchior Petoney. + + * * * * * + +The voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to the riuers of Senega + and Gambra adioning vpon Guinea, 1591 with a discourse of the treasons of + certaine of Don Antonio his seruants and followers. + +By vertue of her Maiesties most gracious charter giuen in the yeere 1588, +and in the thirtieth yeere of her Highnesse reigne, certaine English +marchants are granted to trade, in and from the riuer of Senega to and in +the riuer of Gambra, on the Westerne coast of Africa. The chiefest places +of traffique on that coast betweene these riuers, are these: + +[Sidenote: The names of the chiefe places of traffike between Senega and +Gambra.] 1 Senega riuer: The commodities be hides, gumme, elephants teeth, +a few graines, ostrich feathers, amber-griece, and some golde. + +2 Beseguiache, a towne by Capo Verde * [sic--KTH] leagues from Senega +riuer: The commodities be small hides, and a few teeth. + +3 Refisca Vieio, a towne 4 leagues from Beseguiache: The commodities be +small hides, and a few teeth now and then. + +4 Palmerin, a towne 2 leagues from Refisca: The commodities be small hides, +and a few elephants teeth now and then. + +5 Porto d'Ally, a towne 5 leagues from Palmerin: The commodities be small +hides, teeth, amber-griece, and a little golde: and many Portugals are +there. + +6 Candimal, a towne halfe a league from Porto d'Ally: The commodities be +small hides, and a few teeth now and then. + +7 Palmerin, a towne 3 leagues from Candimal: The commodities be small +hides, and a few teeth now and then. + +8 Ioala, a towne 6 leagues from Palmerin: The commodities be hides, waxe, +elephants teeth, rice, and some golde: and many Spaniards and Portugals are +there. + +9 Gambra riuer: The commodities are rice, waxe, hides, elephants teeth, and +golde. + +The Frenchmen of Diepe and New-hauen haue traded thither aboue thirty +yeres: and commonly with four or five ships a yere, whereof two small barks +go into the riuer of Senega. The other were wont (vntill within these foure +yeres, that our ships came thither) to ride with their ships in the road of +Porto d'Ally and so sent their small shaloups of sixe or eight tunnes to +some of these places on the Sea coast before repeated. Where in all places +generally they were well beloued and as courteously entertained of the +Negros, as if they had been naturally borne in the country. And very often +the Negros come into France and returne againe, which is a further +increasing of mutuall loue and amity. Since our comming to that coast the +Frenchmen ride with their shippes at Refisca Vieio and suffered vs to ancre +with our shippes at Porto d'Ally. The Frenchmen neuer vse to go into the +riuer of Gambra: which is a riuer of secret trade and riches concealed by +the Portugals. For long since one Frenchman entered the riuer with a small +barke which was betrayed, surprised and taken by two gallies of the +Portugals. + +In our second voyage and second yeere there were by vile treacherous meanes +of the Portugals and the king of the Negros consent in Porto d'Ally and +Ioala about forty Englishmen cruelly slaine and captiued, and most or all +of their goods confiscated: whereof there returned onely two, which were +marchants. And also by procurement of Pedro Gonsalues, one of Don Antonio +the kings seruants, Thomas Dassel and others had bene betrayed, if it had +not pleased Almighty God to reueale the same, whereby it was preuented. + +From the South side of Senega riuer on the Sea coast vnto about Palmerin is +all one kingdome of Negros. The kings name is Melick Zamba, who dwelleth +two dayes iourney within the land from Refisca. + +The 12 of Nouember 1591, I Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel factors in a +ship called the Nightingale of London 125 tunnes, and a pinnesse called the +Messenger of 40 tonnes arriued neere vnto Capo Verde at a little Iland +called The Iland of liberty. At this Iland we set vp a small pinnesse, with +which we cary our marchandise on land when wee traffique. And in the meane +time Thomas Dassel went with the great pinnesse to traffike with Spaniards +or Portugals in Porto d'Ally or Ioala. Ouer against the sayd Iland on the +maine is an habitation of the Negros called Besegueache. The alcaide or +gouernor thereof with a great traine came aboord in their canoas to receiue +the kings dueties for ankerage and permitting the quiet setting vp of our +pinnesse: who liked passing well that no Portugall came in the shippe, +saying, we should be better thought of by the king and people, if we neuer +did bring Portugall, but come of our selues as the Frenchmen euer did and +doe. And to purchase the more loue, I Richard Rainolds gaue him and all his +company courteous entertainment. Also vpon his intreaty, hauing sufficient +pledge aboord, I and others went on land with him. At this instant there +was great warre betweene this alcaide and another gouernor of the next +prouince. Neuerthelesse vpon our arriuall truce was taken for a space; and +I with our company conducted among both enemies to the gouernors house in +Besegueache, and were gently and friendly feasted after their maner, and +with some presents returned safe aboord againe. The next day the alcaide +came aboord againe, to wil me to send some yron and other commodities in +the boat to traffike with the Negros, and also requested me that I would go +to Refisca with the ship; which I did. And one thing I noted, that a number +of Negros attended the alcaides landing in warlike maner with bowes and +poisoned arrowes, darts poisoned, and swords, (because that the enemies by +reason of the truce taken were there also to view the ship) who for the +most part approched to him kneeling downe and kissed the backe of his hand. + +The 17 of Nouember we weyed anker; and by reason no French ship was yet +come, I went to the road of Refisca: where I sent for the alcaides +interpreters, who came thither aboord, and receiued of me the kings duties +for to haue free traffike with the Negros, with whom dayly I exchanged my +yron and other wares for hides and some elephants teeth, finding the people +very friendly and tractable. And the next day after our arriuall I went vp +into the land about three miles to the towne of Refisca, where I was +friendly vsed and well entertained of the alcaide, and especially of a +yoong nobleman called Conde Amar Pattay, who presented me with an oxe for +my company, goats and some yoong kids, assuring me that the king would be +glad to heare of the arriuall of a Christians ship, whom they called +Blancos, that is, white men: especially of an English ship. And so dayly +the yong Conde came with a small company of horsemen to the sea side, +feasting me very kindly and courteously. And the fift of December he with +his traine came aboord to see the ship; which to them seemed woonderfull, +as people that seldome had seene the like: who tolde me that his messenger +from the king was returned; and the king reioyed much to heare that English +men were come with a ship to trade in his ports; and being the first +Englishman that euer came with a ship, I was the better welcome; promising +that I or any Englishman hereafter should be wel intreated and find good +dealing at their hands. And further the Conde on the kings behalfe and his +owne, earnestly requested, that before my departure off the coast I would +returne againe to his road to conferre with him for the better continuance +and confirming of amity betweene them and Englishmen: which I agreed vnto. +And so shewing him and his company the best friendship and courtesie I +could, he went on shore, and should haue had the honor of our ordinance but +that he desired the contrary, being amazed at the sight of the ship and +noise of the gunnes, which they did greatly admire. + +The 13 of December at night we weighed anker, and arriued the 14 day at the +road of Porto d'Ally, which is another kingdome: the king thereof is called +Amar Meleck, and sonne to Meleck Zamba the other king, and dwelleth a dayes +iourney and an halfe from Porto d'Ally. When we had ankered, the kings +kinsmen being gouernors, with all the officers of that towne came aboord to +receiue all duties for the ship and licence to traffike due to the king; +who there generally seemed to be very glad that no Portugall was come in +our ship out of England; saying it was the kings pleasure we should bring +none hereafter; for that the king did esteeme them as people of no truth; +and complained of one Francisco de Costa seruant to Don Antonio, how he had +often and the last yere also abused and deluded their king Amar Meleck in +promising to bring him certaine things out of England, which he neuer +performed, and deemed that to be the cause of his staying behinde this +voyage, and that neither Spaniard nor Portugall could abide vs, but +reported very badly and gaue out hard speeches tending to the defamation +and great dishonour of England: [Sidenote: The monstrous lies of a +Portugall.] and also affirmed that at the arriuall of an English ship +called The Command, of Richard Kelley of Dartmouth, one Pedro Gonsalues a +Portugall that came in the sayd ship from Don Antonio reported vnto them, +that we were fled out of England and come away vpon intent to rob and do +great spoile vpon this coast to the Negros and Portugals, and that Thomas +Dassel had murdered Francisco de Acosta since our comming from England, who +was comming to their king in our ship with great presents from Don Antonio, +and desired that at our arriuall stay might be made of our goods and our +selues in secret maner; which they denied, not giuing credit to his report, +hauing bene often abused by such friuolous and slanderous speeches by that +nation; telling me their king was sory for the former murder and captiuity +of our nation, and would neuer yeeld to the like, hauing the Portugals and +Spaniards in generall hatred euer since, and conceiueth much better of our +countrey, and vs, then these our enemies report of. [Sidenote: Port Dally +the chief place of trade.] For which I yeelded them hearty thanks, assuring +them they should finde great difference betweene the loyalty of the one and +disloyalty of the other; and so payed their dueties: and for that it was +the chiefe place of trade, I shewed them how I was resolued to goe to their +king with certaine presents which we had brought out of England; which we +determined for the more honor and credit of our countrey, and augmenting of +their better affection toward vs. + +All this while Thomas Dassel was with our great pinnesse at the towne of +Ioala, being in the kingdome of king Iocoel Lamiockeric, traffiking with +the Spaniards and Portugals there. And the forenamed Pedro Gonsalues, which +came out of England, was there also with other English marchants about the +busines of Rich. Kelley; and as it should seeme, for that he could not +obtaine his mischieuous pretended purpose against Thomas Dassel and others +at the towne of Porto d'Ally, where I Richard Rainolds remained, he +attempted with consent of other Portugals which were made priuy to his +intent to betray the sayd Thomas Dassel at this towne, and had with bribes +seduced the chiefe commanders and Negros to effect his wicked and most +villanous practise: which as God would, was reuealed to the sayd Thomas +Dassel by Rich. Cape an Englishman and seruant to the forenamed Rich. +Kelley: to whom this sayd Pedro Gonsalues had disclosed his secret +treachery, willing him with all expedition to stand vpon his guard. [The +Cherubin of Lime at Ioala.] Whereupon Thomas Dassel went aboard a small +English barke called The Cherubin of Lime, and there one Iohn Payua a +Portugall and seruant of Don Antonio declared, that if he and one Garcia a +Portugall of the sayd towne would haue consented with Pedro Gonsalues, the +sayd Thomas Dassel had bene betrayed long before. And vpon this warning +Thomas Dassel the next day hauing gotten three Portugals aboord, aduised +for our better securities to send two on land, and detained one with him +called Villa noua, telling them that if the next day by eight of the +clocke, they would bring Pedro Gonsalues aboard to him, he would release +the sayd Villa noua, which they did not. And Thomas Dassel hauing +intelligence that certaine Negros and Portugals were ridden post ouerland +to Porto d'Ally with intent to haue Richard Rainolds and his company stayd +on land, being doubtfull what friendship soeuer the vnconstant Negros +professed (by reason they be often wauering being ouercome with drinking +wine) how they would deale, to preuent the dangerous wiles that might be +effected in the road by Portugals, and for better strength, the 24 of +December he came with his pinnesse and Portugall to ride in the road of +Porto d'Ally, where our great shippe the Nightingall was: who was no sooner +arriued but he had newes also from the shore from Iohn Baily Anthony +Dassels seruant, who was there with our goods detained by the Portugals +means, that aboue 20 Portugals and Spaniards were come from Ioala by land, +and Pedro Gonsalues in their company, to take order for the releasing of +Villa noua. So hauing had conference two or three dayes with the +Commanders, the Negros, some Spaniards, and some Portugals, in the end by +due examination of the matter the Negros seeing how vilely Pedro Gonsalues +had delt, he being in their power, sayd he should suffer death or be +tortured, for an example to others. But we in recompense of his cruelty +pitied him and shewed mercy, desiring the Negros to intreat him well though +vndeserued: and therevpon the Commanders brought him aboord the pinnesse to +Thomas Dassel to do with him what he would: where at his comming from the +shore, for lauish speeches which he used of Princes, he was well buffetted +by a Spaniard, and might haue bene slaine, if for our sakes he had not bene +rescued. + +[Sidenote: Note.] While I went on shore with Villa noua, the sayd Pedro +Gonsalues confessed vnto Thomas Dassel that he did enquire of some Negros +and Portugals if he might not stay him and his goods in the land, and that +he did nothing but by commission from his king by his letters which he +receiued from London in Dartmouth after we were departed from London, for +that we presumed to come to Guinea to traffike without a seruant of his: +and further, that he had power or procuration from Francisco de Costa the +Portugall that stayed behinde in England to detaine the goods of Anthony +Dassel in Guinea. + +By consent of M. Francis Tucker, Iohn Browbeare, and the rest of the +factours of Richard Kelley, with whom this Pedro Gonsalues came, for +auoiding further mischiefe that might be practised, we agreed that the sayd +Pedro Gonsalues should stay aboord our shippe, and not goe any more on land +vntill they departed. So the ninth of Ianuary he was deliuered aboord to +goe for England in the same ship wherein he came: who was all the time of +his abode in our shippe both courteously and friendly vsed at my hands, +much against the mariners willes, who could not abide such a wicked +creature and caitiue, that is nourished and relieued in our countrey, and +yet by villanous meanes sought the destruction of vs all. + +The Spaniards and Portugals though they be dissemblers and not to be +trusted, when they perceiued how king Amar Melicks Negros befriended and +fauored vs, and that it would be preiudiciall to their trade for diuers +respects, if we should any way be iniuried, renounced the sayd practises, +detesting the author, and protested to defend vs in such cases with all +faithfulnesse: desiring we would, as the king of Negros had commanded vs, +neuer bring Portugal with vs more: vsing this phrase in disdaine of such as +came out of England, let your Portugals be barres of yron: for in trueth in +regard of the rich trade maintained by Frenchmen and by vs of late, they +esteeme more of one barre of yron then of twenty Portugals which we should +bring out of England: who at their comming thither very subtilly +disaduantage vs, and doe great hurt to euery party. + +At the beginning of these broiles the king Amar Melick had sent his chiefe +secretary and three horses for me Richard Rainolds: but I denied to goe by +reason of the hurley burley, though I might haue had Negros of account for +pledges aboord: yet we sent the presents vnto the king; who so soone as he +vnderstood the cause why I came not to him, being sory and offended +thereat, commanded presently by proclamation, that no iniury should be +offered vs in his dominions by his owne people, or suffered to be done by +Spaniards or Portugals. And if the Negros ioyning to his kingdome should +confederate with the Spaniards and Portugals to molest or trouble vs; that +his subiects the Negros should be ready to ayde, succor and defend vs. In +which people appeared more confident loue and good will toward vs, then +euer we shall finde either of Spaniards or Portugals, though we should +relieue them of the greatest misery that can be imagined. + +In the riuer of Senega no Spaniard or Portugall vse to trade: and onely one +Portugall called Ganigoga dwelleth farre within the riuer, who was maried +to a kings daughter. + +[Sidenote: Note this trade.] In the townes of Porto d'Ally and Ioala, being +townes of chiefest trade, and in the townes of Canton and Cassan in the +riuer of Gambra are many Spaniards and Portugals resident by permission of +the Negros; who haue rich trades there along the coast, especially to San +Domingo and Rio grande, not far distant from Gambra riuer; whither they +transport the yron which they buy of Frenchmen and vs, and exchange it for +Negros; which be caried continually to the West Indies in such ships as +came from Spaine. [Sidenote: A rich trade for golde in Rio grande.] Also by +the gouernors order and Renters of Castel de Mina and other places, where +golde is, vpon the coast of Guinea, they haue a place limited how farre +they must go to trade within the riuer of Gambra; and further they may not +go vpon paine of confiscation of their goods, and losse of life: for that +the Renters themselues send at certaine times their owne barkes within the +riuer to such places, where as they haue great store of golde. And in all +these places hereabouts, where we vse to trade, they haue no Fort, Castle, +or place of strength, but onely trading by the Negros safeconduct and +permission. And the most part of the Spaniards and Portugals that be +resident in these places be banished men or fugitiues, for committing most +hainous crimes and incestuous acts, their life and conuersation being +agreeable; and they are of the basest behauiour that we haue euer seene of +these nations in any other countrey. + + * * * * * + +A briefe relation concerning the estate of the cities and prouinces of + Tombuto and Gago written in Marocco the first of August 1594, and sent to + M. Anthony Dassel marchant of London. + +My hearty commendations premised: your letter of late I receiued, and found +that you would haue me discouer vnto you the estate and quality of the +countreyes of Tombuto and Gago. And that you may not thinke me to slumber +in this action, wherein you would be truely and perfectly resolued, you +shall vnderstand, that not ten dayes past here came a Cahaia of the +Andoluzes home from Gago, and another principall Moore, whom the king sent +thither at the first with Alcaide Hamode, and they brought with them thirty +mules laden with gold. I saw the same come into the Alcasaua with mine owne +eies: and these men themselues came not poore, but with such wealth, that +they came away without the kings commandement; and for that cause the king +will pay them no wages for the time they haue beene there. On the other +side they dare not aske the king for any wages. And when Alcaide Hamode saw +that the Cahaia of the Andoluzes would not stay in Gago with him, he +thought good to send these thirty mules laden with golde by him, with +letters of commendations, by which the king smelled their riches that they +brought with them: and this was the cause of the kings displeasure towards +them. So now there remaineth in Gago Alcaide Hamode, and Alcaide Iawdara, +and Alcaide Bucthare. And here are in a readinesse to depart in the end of +next September Alcaide Monsor, Ben Abdrahaman Allies, Monsor Rico with fiue +thousand men, most of the fettilase, that is to say, of fier match, and +muskets. [Sidenote: Commodities for Gago.] There is gone good store of reds +and yellowes: and this yere here was want of the same commodity; but I +trust the next yere wil be no want. But in fine the king doth prosper wel +in those parts, and here are many pledges come hither, and namely three of +the kings sonnes of Gago and the Iustice; I saw them come in with the +treasure. Now when Alcaide Monsor commeth to Gago, the which will be in +Ianuary next, then returneth hither Alcaide Hamode with all the treasure, +and Alcaide Monsor is to keepe Gago vntill the king take further order. And +thus much for Gago. Thus not hauing any other thing to write at this +present, I commend you to the mercifull tuition of the almighty. + +From Marocco the first of August 1594. + +Your assured friend Laurence Madoc. + + * * * * * + +Another briefe relation concerning the late conquest and exceeding great + riches of the cities and prouinces Tombuth and Gogo, written from Morocco + the 30 August 1594, to M. Anthony Dassel marchant of London aforesayd. + +Louing friend M. Dassel, two of your letters I haue receiued, one by the +shippe called The Amity, the other by the Concord: the chiefest matter +therein was to be satisfied of the king of Morocco his proceedings in +Guinea. Therefore these are to let you vnderstand that there went with +Alcaide Hamode for those parts seuenteene hundred men: who passing ouer the +sands, for want of water perished one third part of them: [Sidenote: +Tombuto taken.] and at their comming to the city of Tombuto, the Negros +made some resistence: but to small purpose, for that they had no defence +but with their asagaies or iauelings poisoned. [Sidenote: Gago taken.] So +they tooke it, and proceeded to the city of Gago, where the Negros were in +numbers infinite, and meant to stand to the vttermost for their countrey: +but the Moores slew them so fest, that they were fain to yeeld, and do pay +tribute by the yere. The rent of Tombuto is 60 quintals of golde by the +yeere: the goodnesse whereof you know. What rent Gago will yeeld, you shall +know at the Spring, for then Alcaide Hamode commeth home. The rent of +Tombuto is come by the cafelow or carouan, which is, as aboue mentioned, 60 +quintals. The report is, that Mahomed bringeth with him such an infinite +treasure as I neuer heard of: it doth appeare that they haue more golde +then any other parte of the world beside. The Alcaide winneth all the +countrey where he goeth without fighting and is going downe towards the sea +coast. The king of Marocco is like to be the greatest prince in the world +for money, if he keepe this countrey. But I make account assoone as the +king of Spaine hath quietnesse in Christendome, he wil thrust him out: for +that the kings force is not great as yet; but he meaneth to be stronger. +There is a campe ready to go now with a viceroy: the speech is with 3000 +men: but I thinke they will be hardly 2000; for by report, 3000 men are +enough to conquer all the countrey: for they haue no defence of importance +against an enemy. I thinke Hamode will be returned home in Ianuary or +thereabout: for he stayeth but for the comming of the viceroy. Mulley +Balasen the kings sonne of Marocco was slaine in Guinea by his own men, and +they were presently killed, because they should tell no tales. And thus +leauing to trouble you, I commit you to God, who prosper you in all your +proceedings. From Marocco the first of August 1594. + +Yours to command for euer Laurence Madoc. + +Of these two rich cities and kingdomes of Tombuto and Gago Leo Africanus +writeth at large in the beginning of his seuenth booke of the description +of Africa, which worthy worke is to be annexed vnto the end of this second +volume. + + * * * * * + +A briefe extract of a patent granted to M. Thomas Gregory of Tanton, and + others, for traffique betweene the riuer of Nonnia and the riuers of + Madrabumba and Sierra Leona on the coast of Guinea, in the yeere 1592. + +In May the 34 yeere of our gracious soueraigne Queene Elizabeth, a patent +of speciall licence was granted to Thomas Gregory of Tanton in the county +of Somerset, and to Thomas Pope, and certaine other marchants to traffique +into Guinea from the Northermost part of the riuer of Nonnia to the +Southermost parts of the riuers of Madrabumba and Sierra Leona, and to +other parts as well to the Southeast as to the Northwest, for a certaine +number of leagues therein specified which amount to an hundred or +thereabout. Which patent was granted for the terme of ten yeeres: as +appeareth at large in the sayd patent recorded in the Rolles in her +Majesties Chancery. + + * * * * * + +The maner of the taking of two Spanish ships laden with quicksiluer and the + Popes bulles, bound for the West Indies, by M. Thomas White in the Amity + of London, 1592. + +The 26 of Iuly 1592, in my returning out of Barbary in the ship called the +Amity of London, being in the height of 36 degrees or thereabout, at foure +of the clocke in the morning we had sight of two shippes, being distant +from vs about three or foure leagues: by seuen of the clocke we fetched +them vp, and were within gunshot: whose boldnesse, hauing the king of +Spaines armes displayed, did make vs judge them rather ships of warre then +laden with marchandise. And as it appeared by their owne speeches, they +made full account to haue taken vs: it being a question among them, whether +it were best to cary vs to S. Lucar, or to Lisbon. We waued ech other a +maine. They hauing placed themselues in warlike order one a cables length +before another, we began the fight. In the which we continued, so fast as +we were able to charge and discharge, the space of fiue houres, being neuer +a cables length distant either of vs from other. In which time we receiued +diuers shot both in the hull of our ship, masts, and sailes, to the number +of 32 great, besides 500 musket shot and harquebuzes a crocke at the least, +which we tolde after the fight. And because we perceiued them to be stout, +we thought good to boord the Biscaine, which was on head the other: where +lying aboord about an houre, and plying our ordinance and small shot; in +the end we stowed all his men. Now the other in the flieboat, thinking we +had entred our men in their fellow, bare roome with vs, meaning to haue +layed vs aboord, and so to haue intrapped vs betwixt them both: which we +perceiuing, fitted our ordinance so for him, as we quitted our selues of +him, and he boorded his fellow: by which meanes they both fell from vs. +Then presently we kept our loofe, hoised our top-sailes, and weathered +them, and came hard aboord the flieboat with our ordinance prepared, and +gaue her our whole broad side, with the which we slew diuers of their men; +so as we might see the blood run out at the scupper holes. After that we +cast about, and new charged all our ordinance, and came vpon them againe, +willing them to yeeld, or els we would sinke them: whereupon the one would +haue yeelded, which was betweene winde and water; but the other called him +traitor. Vnto whom we made answere, that if he would not yeeld presently +also, we would sinke him first. [Sidenote: Marke this othe.] And thereupon +he understanding our determination, presently put out a white flag, and +yeelded, and yet refused to strike their own sailes, for that they were +sworne neuer to strike to any Englishman. We then commanded their captaines +and masters to come aboord vs; which they did. And after examination and +stowing them, we sent certaine of our owne men aboord them, and strook +their sailes, and manned their ships: finding in them both 126 persons +liuing, and 8 dead, besides those which they themselues had cast ouerboord. +So it pleased God to giue vs the victory being but 42 men and a boy, +whereof 2 were killed and 3 wounded: for the which good successe we giue +God the only praise. These two rich prizes laden with 1400 cheste of +quicksiluer with the armes of Castile and Leon fastened vpon them, and with +a great quantity of bulles or indulgences, and gilded Missals or Seruice +books, with an hundred tonnes of excellent wines, we brought shortly after +into the riuer of Thames vp to Blacke-wall. + +By the taking of this quicksiluer, about 1400 chests, the king of Spaine +loseth for euery quintall of the same a quintall of siluer that should haue +beene deliuered him by the masters of the mines there, which amounteth to +600000 pounds. + +More by taking of his bulles, to wit, two millions and 72 thousand for +liuing and dead persons for the prouinces of Noua Hispania, Iucatan, +Guatimala, the Honduras, and the Phillippinas, taxed at two reals the +piece. And more for eighteene thousand bulles taxed at foure reals, +amounteth all to 107700 pounds. Summa totalis 707700 li. + +More there were taken ten fardels of gilt missals and breuiaries sent for +the kings account. + +So the hindrance that the king receiueth by the losse of his bulles and +quicksiluer amounteth as is abouesaid: besides the sacking of his wines, +about 100 tunnes, whereby his fleet is disappointed of a great part of +their prouision. + + * * * * * + +A true report of the honourable seruice at Sea perfourmed by Sir Iohn + Burrough Knight, Lieutenant generall of the fleet prepared by the honour. + Sir Walter Ralegh Knight, Lord warden of the Stanneries of Cornwall and + Deuon. Wherein chiefly the Santa Clara of Biscay, a ship of 600 tunnes + was taken, and the two East Indian caraks, the Santa Cruz and the Madre + de Dios were forced, the one burnt, and the other taken and brought into + Dartmouth the seuenth of September, 1592. + +Sir Walter Ralegh vpon commission receiued from her Maiesty for an +expedition to be made to the West Indies, slacked not his vttermost +diligence to make full prouision of all things necessary, as both in his +choise of good ships, and sufficient men to performe the action euidently +appeared. For his shippes which were in numbre 14 or 15, those two of her +Maiesties, the Garland and the Foresight were the chiefest; the rest either +his owne or his good friends or aduenturers of London. For the gentlemen +his consorts and officers, to giue them their right, they were so well +qualited in courage, experience, and discretion, as the greatest prince +might repute himselfe happy to be serued with their like. The honor of +Lieutenant generall was imposed vpon sir Iohn Burrough, a gentleman, for +his manifold good and heroicall parts, thought euery way worthy of that +commandement: with whom after sir W. R. returned was ioyned in commission +sir Martin Frobisher, who for his speciall skill and knowledge in marine +causes had formerly caried imploiments of like or greater place. The rest +such as heretofore had giuen to the world sufficient proofe of their valour +in diuers seruices of the like nature. With these ships thus manned sir +Walter Ralegh departed towards the West countrey, there to store himselfe +with such further necessaries as the state of his voyage did needfully +require: where the Westerly windes blowing for a long time contrary to his +course, bound and constrained him to keepe harborough so many weeks, that +the fittest season for his purpose was gone, the mindes of his people much +altered, his victuals consumed: and withall, her Maiesty vnderstanding how +crosly all this sorted, began to call the proceeding of this preparation +into question: insomuch that, whereas the sixt of May was first come before +sir Walter could put to sea, the very next day sir Martin Frobisher in a +pinnesse of my lord Admirals called The Disdaine, met him, and brought to +him from her Maiesty letters of reuocation, with commandement to relinquish +(for his owne part) the intended attempt, and to leaue the charge and +conduct of all things in the hands of sir Iohn Burrough and sir Martin +Frobisher, But sir Walter finding his honor so farre engaged in the +vndertaking of this voyage, as without proceeding he saw no remedy either +to salue his reputation, or to content those his friends which had put in +aduentures of great summes with him; and making construction of the Queenes +letters in such sort as if her commandement had bene propounded in +indifferent termes, either to aduance forward or to retire, at his owne +discretion; would in no case yeeld to leaue his fleet now vnder saile. +Wherefore continuing his course into the sea, he met within a day or two, +with certaine sailes lately come from Spaine: among which was a ship +appertaining to Monsieur Gourdon gouernor of Caleis, and found aboord her +one M. Neuel Dauies an Englishman, who hauing endured a long and miserable +captiuity for the space of twelue yeeres, partly in the inquisition in +Spaine, was now by good fortune escaped, and vpon returne to his countrey. +This man, among other things, reported for certaine, that there was little +hope of any good this yeere to be done in the West India; considering that +the king of Spaine had sent expresse order to all the Ports both of the +Ilands and of Terra firma, that no ship should stirre that yeere, nor any +treasure be layed aboord for Spaine. But neither this vnpleasant relation +nor ought els could stay his proceedings, vntill a tempest of strange and +vncouth violence arising vpon Thursday the 11 of May, when he was athwart +the Cape Finister, had so scattered the greater part of the fleet, and +sunke his boats and pinnesses, that as the rest were driuen and seuered, +some this way and some that, sir Walter himselfe being in the Garland of +her Maiesty was in danger to be swallowed vp of the Sea. Whereupon sir W. +Ralegh finding that the season of the yere was too farre gone to proceed +with the enterprise which he had vpon Panama, hauing bene held on the +English coast from February till May, and thereby spent three moneths +victuals; and considering withall, that to lie vpon the Spanish coast or at +the Ilands to attend the returne of the East or West Indian fleets was +rather a worke of patience then ought els: he gaue directions to sir Iohn +Burgh and sir M. Frobisher to diuide the fleet in two parts; sir M. with +the Garland, cap. George Gifford, cap. Henry Thin, cap. Grenuile and others +to lie off the South cape, thereby to amaze the Spanish fleet, and to holde +them on their owne coast; while sir I. Burgh, capt. Robert Crosse, capt. +Tomson, and others should attend at the Ilands for the caraks or any other +Spanish ships comming from Mexico or other parts of the West Indies. Which +direction tooke effect accordingly; for the king of Spaines Admirall +receiuing intelligence that the English fleet was come on the coast, +attended to defend the South parts of Spaine, and to keepe himselfe as nere +sir Mart. Frobisher as he could, to impeach him in all things which he +might vndertake; and thereby neglected the safeconduct of the caraks, with +whom it fared as hereafter shall appeare. Before the fleet seuered +themselues they mette with a great Biscain on the Spanish coast called +Santa Clara a ship of 600 tunnes. + +The noise of the artillery on both sides being heard, immediatly they drew +to their fleet; where after a reasonable hot fight, the ship was entred and +mastered, which they found freighted with all sorts of small yron-worke, as +horse shoes, nailes, plough-shares, yron barres, spikes, boults, locks, +gimbols, and such like, valued by vs at 6000 or 7000 li. but woorth to them +treble the value. This Biscain was sailing towards S. Lucar, there to take +in some further prouision for the West India. This ship being first +roomaged, and after sent for England, our fleet coasted along towards the +Southcape of S. Vincent, and by the way about the Rocke neere Lisbon, sir +Iohn Burrough in the Robucke spying a saile a farre off, gaue her present +chase; which being a flieboat and of good saile, drew him farre Southwards +before he could fetch her; but at last she came vnder his lee and strooke +saile. The master of which flieboat comming aboord him, confessed that the +king indeed had prepared a great fleet in S. Lucar and Cadiz, and (as the +report in Spaine was currant) for the West Indies. But indeed the Spanish +king had prouided this fleet vpon this counsell. He receiued intelligence, +that sir Walter Ralegh was to put out strong for the West India: to impeach +him, and to ranconter his force he appointed this fleet; although looking +for the arriuall of his East Indian caraks, he first ordained those ships +to waft them from the Acores. But perswading himselfe, that if the fleet of +sir Walter Ralegh did go for the West India, then the Ilands should haue +none to infest them but some small men of warre, which the caraks of +themselues would be well able to match; his order was to Don Alonso de +Bacan brother to the Marques of Santa Cruz, and Generall of his armada, to +pursue sir Walters fleet, and to confront him, what course soeuer he held. +[Sidenote: Sir Iohn Burrough in great danger of the Spanish fleet.] And +that this was true, our men in short time by proofe vnderstood: for sir +Iohn Burrough, not long after the taking of his last prize the flieboat, as +he sailed backe againe towards the rest of his company, discouered the +Spanish fleet to sea-ward of him: which hauing likewise espied him betwixt +them and the shore, made full account to bring him safe into Spanish +harbour; and therefore spred themselues in such sort before him, that +indeed his danger was very great: for both the liberty of the sea was +brought into a narrow straight, and the shore being enemy could giue him no +comfort of reliefe: so that trusting to Gods helpe onely and his good +saile, he thrust out from among them in spight of all their force, and to +the notable illusion of all their cunning, which they shewed to the +vttermost, in laying the way for his apprehension. [Sidenote: The Ile of S. +Michael.] But now sir Iohn Burrough hauing happily escaped their clouches, +finding the coast guarded by this fleet, and knowing it was but folly to +expect a meeting there with sir Martin Frobisher (who vnderstanding of this +armada aswell as himselfe, would be sure not to come that way) beganne to +shape his course to the Acores according to sir W. Raleghs direction, and +came in sight of S. Michael, running so neere by Villa Franca, that he +might easily discerne the shippes lying there at anker. [Sidenote: Diuers +small ships taken.] Diuers small carauels both here and betweene S. Georges +and the Pike in his course towards Flores he intercepted; of which no great +intelligence for his affaires could be vnderstood. [Sidenote: Santa Cruz a +village in the Ile of Flores.] Arriuing before Flores vpon Thursday the 21 +of Iune, towards euening, accompanied onely with captaine Caufield and the +Master of his shippe, the rest not being yet arriued, he made towards the +shore with his boat, finding all the people of Santa Cruz, a village of +that Iland, in armes, fearing their landing, and ready marshalled to defend +their towne from spoile. Sir Iohn contrariwise made signes of amity vnto +them by aduancing a white flagge, a common token of peace, which was +answered againe of them with the like: whereupon ensued entercourses of +good friendship; and pledges were taken on both sides, the captaine of the +towne for them, and captaine Caufield for our: so that whatsoeuer our men +wanted, which that place could supply either in fresh water, victuals, or +the like, was very willingly granted by the inhabitants; and good leaue had +they to refresh themselues on shore as much and as oft as they would +without restraint. [Sidenote: Newes of the East Indian caraks.] At this +Santa Cruz sir Iohn Burrough was informed, that indeed there was among them +no expectation of any fleet to come from the west, but from the East, that +no longer since then three dayes before his arriuall a carak was passed by +for Lisbon, and that there were foure carafes more behinde, of one consort. +Sir Iohn being very glad of this newes, stayed no longer on shore, but +presently imbarqued himselfe, hauing onely in company a small barke of +threescore tunnes belonging to one M. Hopkins of Bristoll. In the meane +while that these things thus passed at Flores, part of the rest of the +English fleet, which sir Iohn Burrough had left vpon the coast of Spaine, +drew also towards the Acores: and whereas he quickly at sea had discouered +one of the caraks, the same euening he might descry two or three of the +Earle of Cumberlands ships (whereof one M. Norton was captaine) which +hauing in like sort kenned the carak, pursued her by that course which they +saw her to runne towards the Ilands. But on no side was there any way made +by reason of a great calme which yeelded no breath to spread a saile. +Insomuch that fitly to discouer her what she was, of what burthen, force, +and countenance sir Iohn Burrough tooke his boat, and rowed the space of +three miles, to make her exactly: and being returned, he consulted with the +better sort of the company then present, vpon the boording her in the +morning. [Sidenote: A carak called The Santa Cruz set on fire.] But a very +mighty storme arising in the night, the extremity thereof forced them all +to wey ankers, yet their care was such in wrestling with the weather not to +lose the carak, that in the morning the tempest being qualified, and our +men bearing againe with the shore, they might perceiue the carak very neere +the land, and the Portugals confusedly carrying on shore such things as +they could any maner of way conuey out of her; and seeing the haste our men +made to come vpon them, forsook her; but first, that nothing might be left +commodious to our men, set fire to that which they could not cary with +them, intending by that meanes wholly to consume her; that neither glory of +victory nor benefit of shippe might remaine to ours. And least the approch +and industry of the English should bring meanes to extinguish the flame, +thereby to preserue the residue of that which the fire had not destroyed; +being foure hundred of them in number and well armed, they entrenched +themselues on land so neere to the carak, that she being by their forces +protected, and our men kept aloofe off, the fire might continue to the +consumption of the whole. This being noted by sir Iohn Burrough he soone +prouided a present remedy for this mischiefe. [Sidenote: An hundred of our +men land.] For landing one hundred of his men, whereof many did swim and +wade more then brest high to shore, and easily scattering those that +presented themselues to guard the coast, he no sooner drew toward their new +trenches, but they fled immediatly, leauing as much as the fire had spared +to be the reward of our mens paines. Here was taken among others one +Vincent Fonseca a Portugall, Purser of the carak, with two others, one an +Almaine and the second a Low-dutchman, canoniers: who refusing to make any +voluntary report of those things, which were demanded of them, had the +torture threatened, the feare whereof at the last wrested from them this +intelligence, that within fifteene dayes three other greater caraks then +that lately fired would arriue at the same Iland: and that being fiue +caraks in the fleet at their departure from Goa, to wit, the Buen Iesus +admirall, the Madre de Dios, the S. Bernardo, the S. Christophoro, and the +S. Cruz, (whose fortune you haue already heard) they had receiued speciall +commandement from the king not to touch in any case at the Iland of S. +Helena, where the Portugall caraks in their returne from the East India +were alwayes till now woont to arriue to refresh themselues with water and +victuals. And the kings reason was; because of the English men of warre, +who (as he was informed) lay there in wait to intercept them. [Sidenote: +Angola a new watering place for caraks.] If therefore their necessity of +water should driue them to seeke supply any where, he appointed them Angola +in the maine of Africa, with order there to stay onely the taking in of +water to auoid the inconuenience of infections where unto that hot latitude +is dangerously subiect. The last rendeuous for them all was the Iland of +Flores, where the king assured them not to misse of his armada thither sent +of purpose for their wafting to Lisbon. Vpon this information sir Iohn drew +to counsel, meeting there Captaine Norton, captain Dountain, captain +Abraham Cocke, captaines of three ships of the Earle of Cumberland, M. +Tomson of Harwich cap. of the Dainty of sir Iohn Haukins, one of sir W. +Raleghs fleet, and M. Christopher Newport cap. of the Golden dragon newly +returned from the West India, and others. These being assembled, he +communicated with them what he had vnderstood of the foresaid examinates, +and what great presumptions of trueth their relation did cary: wishing that +forasmuch as God and good fortune had brought them together in so good a +season, they would shew the vttermost of their indeuors to bring these +Easterlings vnder the lee of the English obedience. Hereupon a present +accord on all sides followed not to part company or leaue of those seas +till time should present cause to put their consultations in execution. The +next day her Maiesties good ship the Foresight commanded by sir Rob. Crosse +came in to the rest: and he likewise informed of the matter was soone +drawen into this seruice. Thus sir Iohn with al these ships departing +thence 6 or 7 leagues to the West of Flores, they spread themselues abroad +from the North to the South, ech ship two leagues at the least distant from +another. By which order of extension they were able to discouer the space +of two whole degrees at sea. In this sort they lay from the 29 of Iune to +the third of August, what time cap. Thomson in the Dainty had first sight +of the huge carak called the Madre de Dios, one of the greatest receit, +belonging to the crowne of Portugall. The Dainty being of excellent saile +got the start of the rest of our fleet, and begun the conflict somewhat to +her cost, with the slaughter and hurt of diuers of her men. Within a while +after, sir Iohn Burrough in the Robucke of sir W. Raleghs, was at hand to +second her, who saluted her with shot of great ordinance, and continued the +fight within musket shot assisted by cap. Tomson and cap. Newport till sir +R. Crosse viceadmirall of the fleet came vp being to leeward, at whose +arriuall sir I. Burgh demanded of him what was best to be done, who +answered, that if the carak were not boorded she would recouer the shore +and fire herselfe as the other had done. Whereupon sir I. Burgh concluded +to entangle her; and sir R. Crosse promised also to fasten himselfe to her +together at the instant; which was performed: but after a while sir Iohn +Burgh receiuing a shot with a canon perier vnder water and ready to sinke, +desired sir R. C. to fall off, that he might also cleere himselfe, and saue +his ship from sinking, which with difficulty he did: for both the Roebucke +and the Foresight were so intangled, as with much adoe could they cleere +themselues. + +[Sidenote: The Madre de Dios taken.] The same euening sir R. Crosse finding +the carak then sure and drawing neere the Iland perswaded his company to +boord her againe, or els there was no hope to recouer her: who after many +excuses and feares, were by him incouraged, and so fell athwart her +foreships all alone; and so hindered her sailing that the rest had time to +come vp to his succour, and to recouer the carak yer she recouered the +land: and so toward the euening after he had fought with her alone three +houres single, my lord of Cumberlands two ships came vp, and with very +little losse entred with sir R. Crosse, who had in that time broken their +courages, and made the assault easie for the rest. + +The generall hauing disarmed the Portugals, and stowed them for better +security on all sides, first had presented to his eyes the true proportion +of the vast body of this carak, which did then and may still iustly prouoke +the admiration of all men not formerly acquainted with such a sight. But +albeit this first apparance of the hugenesse thereof yeelded sights enough +to entertaine our mens eyes: yet the pitifull obiect of so many bodies +slaine and dismembred could not but draw ech mans eye to see, and heart to +lament, and hands to helpe those miserable people, whose limnes were so +torne with the violence of shot, and paine made grieuous with the multitude +of woundes. No man could almost steppe but vpon a dead carkase or a bloody +floore, but specially about the helme, where very many of them fell +suddenly from stirring to dying. For the greatnesse of the stirrage +requiring the labour of twelue or fourteene men at once, and some of our +shippes beating her in at the sterne with their ordinance often times with +one shot slew foure or fiue labouring on either side of the helme; whose +roomes being still furnished with fresh supplies, and our artillery still +playing vpon them with continuall volleys, it could not be but that much +bloud should be shed in that place. [Sidenote: Exceeding humanity shewed to +the enemy.] Whereupon our Generall moued with singular commiseration of +their misery, sent them his owne chyrurgions, denying them no possible +helpe or reliefe that he or any of his company could affoord them. Among +the rest of those, whose state this chance had made very deplorable, was +Don Fernando de Mendoca Grand captaine and Commander of this Carake: who +indeed was descended of the house of Mendoca in Spaine; but being married +into Portugall, liued there as one of that nation; a gentleman well +stricken in yeeres, well spoken, of comely personage, of good stature, but +of hard fortune. In his seuerall seruices against the Moores he was twise +taken prisoner, and both times ransomed by the king. In a former voyage of +returne from the East India he was driuen vpon the Baxos or sands of Iuda +nere the coast of Cephala, being then also captaine of a caracke which was +there lost, and himselfe, though escaping the sea-danger, yet fell into the +hands of infidels on land; who kept him vnder long and grieuous seruitude. +Once more the king carying a louing respect to the man, and desirous to +better his condition, was content to let him try his fortune in this +Easterly nauigation, and committed vnto him the conduct of this caracke, +wherein he went from Lisbon Generall of the whole fleet, and in that degree +had returned, if the Vice-rey of Goa embarked for Portugall in the Bon +Iesus had not, by reason of his late office, bene preferred. Sir Iohn +intending not to adde too much affliction to the afflicted, moued with pity +and compassion of humane misery, in the end resolued freely to dismisse +this captaine and the most part of his followers, to their owne countrey, +and for the same purpose bestowed them in certaine vessels furnished with +all kindes of necessary prouision. This businesse thus dispatched, good +leasure had he to take such view of the goods as conueniency might affoord. +And hauing very prudently (to cut off the vnprofitable spoile and pillage +whereunto he saw the minds of many inclined) seised vpon the whole to her +Maiesties vse, after a short and slender romaging and searching of such +things as first came to hand, he perceiued that the wealth would arise +nothing disanswerable to expectation; but that the variety and grandure of +all rich commodities would be more then sufficient to content both the +aduenturers desire and the souldiers trauell. And here I cannot but enter +into the consideration and acknowledgement of Gods great fauor towards our +nation, who by putting this purchase into our hands hath manifestly +discouered those secret trades and Indian riches, which hitherto lay +strangely hidden, and cunningly concealed from vs; whereof there was among +some few of vs some small and vnperfect glimse onely, which now is turned +into the broad light of full and perfect knowledge. Whereby it should seeme +that the will of God for our good is (if our weaknesse could apprehend it) +to haue vs communicate with them in those East Indian treasures, and by the +erection of a lawfull traffike to better our meanes to aduance true +religion and his holy seruice. The caracke being in burden by the +estimation of the wise and experienced no lesse then 1600 tunnes had full +900 of those stowed with the grosse bulke of marchandise, the rest of the +tunnage being allowed, partly to the ordinance which were 32 pieces of +brasse of all sorts, partly to the passengers and the victuals, which could +not be any small quantity, considering the number of the persons betwixt +600 and 700, and the length of the nauigation. To giue you a taste (as it +were) of the commodities, it shall suffice to deliuer you a generall +particularity of them, according to the catalogue taken at Leadenhall the +15 of September 1592. [Sidenote: A briefe catalogue of the sundry rich +commodities of the Madre de Dios.] Where vpon good view it was found, that +the principall wares after the iewels (which were no doubt of great value, +though they neuer came to light) consisted of spices, drugges, silks, +calicos, quilts, carpets and colours, &c. The spices were pepper, cloues, +maces, nutmegs, cinamom, greene ginger: the drugs were beniamin, +frankincense, galingale, mirabolans, aloes zocotrina, camphire: the silks, +damasks, taffatas, sarcenets, altobassos, that is, counterfeit cloth of +gold, vnwrought China silke, sleaued silke, white twisted silke, curled +cypresse. The calicos were book-calicos, calico-launes, broad white +calicos, fine starched calicos, course white calicos, browne broad calicos, +browne course calicos. There were also canopies, and course diaper-towels, +quilts of course sarcenet and of calico, carpets like those of Turky; +whereunto are to be added the pearle, muske, ciuet, and amber-griece. The +rest of the wares were many in number, but lesse in value; as elephants +teeth, porcellan vessels of China, coco-nuts, hides, eben-wood as blacke as +iet, bedsteads of the same, cloth of the rindes of trees very strange for +the matter, and artificiall in workemanship. All which piles of commodities +being by men of approued iudgement rated but in reasonable sort amounted to +no lesse then 150000 li. sterling, which being diuided among the +aduenturers (whereof her Maiesty was the chiefe) was sufficient to yeeld +contentment to all parties. [Sidenote: The capacity and dimensions of the +Madre de Dios.] The cargazon being taken out, and the goods fraighted in +tenne of our ships sent for London, to the end that the bignesse, heigth, +length, bredth, and other dimensions of so huge a vessell might by the +exact rules of Geometricall obseruations be truly taken, both for present +knowledge, and deriuation also of the same vnto posterity, one M. Robert +Adams, a man in his faculty of excellent skill, omitted nothing in the +description, which either his arte could demonstrate, or any mans iudgement +thinke woorthy the memory. After an exquisite suruey of the whole frame he +found the length from the beak-head to the sterne (whereupon was erected a +lanterne) to containe 165 foote. The breadth in the second close decke +whereof she had three, this being the place where there was most extension +of bredth, was 46 feet and ten inches. She drew in water 31 foot at her +departure from Cochin in India, but not aboue 26 at her arriual in +Dartmouth, being lightened in her voyage by diuers meanes some 5 foote. She +caried in height 7 seuerall stories, one maine Orlop, three close decks, +one fore-castle, and a spar-decke of two floores a piece. The length of the +keele was 100 foote, of the maine-mast 121 foot, and the circuite about at +the partners 10 foote 7 inches, the maine-yard was 106 foote long. By which +perfect commensuration of the parts appeareth the hugenesse of the whole, +farre beyond the mould of the biggest shipping vsed among vs either for +warre or receit. + +Don Alonso de Bacan hauing a great Fleet and suffering these two caraks, +the Santa Cruz to be burnt, and the Madre de Dios to be taken, was +disgraced by his prince for this negligence. + + * * * * * + +The firing and sinking of the stout and warrelike Carack called Las Cinque + Llaguas, or, The fiue Wounds, by three tall Ships set foorth at the + charges of the right honorable the Erle of Cumberland and his friends: + Written by the discreet and valiant captaine M. Nicholas Downton. + +In the latter ende of the yeere 1593. the right honourable Erle of +Cumberland, at his owne charges and his friends, prepared 3 ships, all at +equall rate, and either of them had like quantitie of victuals, and like +numbers of men, there being embarked in all 3 ships 420 men of al sorts. +[Marginal note: Besides these three ships there was a pinnas called the +Violet, or the Why not I.] The Roial Exchange went as Admirall, wherein M. +George Caue was captaine. The May-flower Viceadmirall vnder the conduct of +William Anthonie: and the Sampson, the charge whereof it pleased his honour +to commit vnto me Nicholas Dounton. Our directions were sent vs to +Plimmouth, and we were to open them at sea. + +The sixt of Aprill 1594 we set sayle in the sound of Plimmouth, directing +our course toward the coast of Spaine. + +The 24 of the sayd moneth at the Admirals direction wee diuided our selues +East and West from ech other, being then in the heigth of 43 degrees, with +commaundement at night to come together againe. + +The 27 day in the morning we descried the May-flower and the litle Pinnasse +with a Prise that they had taken, being of Viana in Portugall, and bound +for Angola in Africa. This Barke was of 28 tunnes, hauing some 17 persons +in the same. [Sidenote: Commodities fit for Angola.] There were in her some +12 Buts of Galicia wine, whereof we tooke into euery shippe a like part, +with some Ruske in chests and barrels, with 5 buts of blew course cloth, +and certaine course linnen-cloth for Negros shirts, which goods were +diuided among our fleet. + +The 4 of May we had sight of our Pinnasse, and the Admirals Shallop which +had taken three Portugall Carauels, whereof they had sent two away and kept +the third. + +The second of Iune we had sight of S. Michael. The third day in the morning +we sent our small pinnasse, which was of some 24 tunnes, with the small +Carauell which we had taken at the Burlings to range the road of all the +Ilands, to see if they could get any thing in the same: appointing them to +meet vs W. S. W. 12 leagues from Faiall. Their going from vs was to no +purpose. They missed comming to vs when we appointed, as also we missed +them, when we had great cause to haue vsed them. + +The 13 of Iune we met with a mightie Carack of the East. Indies, called Las +cinque Llagas, or The fiue wounds. The May-flower was in fight with her +before night. I, in the Sampson, fetched her vp in the euening, and as I +commanded to giue her the broad side, as we terme it, while I stood very +heedefully prying to discouer her strength: and where I might giue counsel +to boord her in the night when the Admirall came vp to vs, and as I +remember at the very first shot she discharged at vs, I was shot in a litle +aboue the belly, whereby I was made vnseruiceable for a good while after, +without touching any other for that night. Yet by meanes of an honest +truehearted man which I had with me, one captaine Grant, nothing was +neglected: vntill midnight when the Admirall came vp, the May-flower, and +the Sampson neuer left by turnes to ply her with their great ordinance; but +then captaine Caue wished vs to stay till morning, at what time each one of +vs should giue her three bouts with our great ordinance, and so clap her +aboord: but indeed it was long lingered in the morning vntil 10 of the +clocke before wee attempted to boord her. The Admirall laid her a boord in +the mid ship: the May-flower comming vp in the quarter, as it should seeme, +to lie at the sterne of the Admirall on the larboord-side. The captaine of +the sayd May-flower was slaine at the first comming vp: whereby the ship +fell to the sterne of the out-licar of the Carack, which (being a piece of +timber) so wounded her foresaile, that they sayd they could come no more to +fight, I am sure they did not, but kept aloofe from vs. The Sampson went +aboord on the bow, but hauing not rome enough, our quarter lay on the +Exchanges bow, and our bowe on the Caracks bowe. The Exchange also at the +first comming had her captaine M. Caue shot into both the legs, the one +whereof he neuer recouered, so he for that present was not able to doe his +office, and in his absence he had not any that would vndertake to lead out +his company to enter vpon the enemie. My friend captaine Grant did lead my +men on the Caracks side, which being not manfully backed by the Exchanges +men, his forces being smal, made the enemie bolder than he would haue bene, +whereby I had sixe men presently slaine and many more hurt, which made them +that remained vnhurt to returne aboord, and would neuer more giue the +assault. I say not but some of the Exchanges men did very well, and many +more (no doubt) would haue done the like, if there had bene any principall +man to haue put them forward, and to haue brought all the company to the +fight, and not to haue run into corners themselues. But I must needs say, +that their ship was as well prouided for defence, as any that I haue seene. +And the Portugals peraduenture encouraged by our slacke working, plaied the +men and had Barricados made, where they might stand without any danger of +our shot. They plied vs also very much with fire, so that most of our men +were burnt in some place or other: and while our men were putting out of +the fire, they would euer be plying them with small shot or darts. This +vnusuall casting of fire did much dismay many of our men and made them draw +backe as they did. When we had not men to enter, we plied our great +ordinance much at them as high vp as they might be mounted, for otherwise +we did them little harme, and by shooting a piece out of our forecastle +being close by her, we fired a mat on her beak head, which more and more +kindled, and ran from thence to the mat on the bow-sprit, and from the mat +vp to the wood of the bow-sprit, and thence to the top saile yard, which +fire made the Portugals abaft in the ship to stagger, and to make shew of +parle. But they that had the charge before encouraged them, making shew, +that it might easily be put out, and that it was nothing. Whereupon againe +they stood stifly to their defence. Anone the fire grew so strong, that I +saw it beyond all helpe, although she had bene already yeelded to vs. Then +we desired to be off from her, but had little hope to obtaine our desire; +neuerthelesse we plied water very much to keep our ship well. Indeed I made +little other reckoning for the ship, my selfe, and diuers hurt men, then to +haue ended there with the Carak, but most of our people might haue saved +themselues in boats. And when my care was most, by Gods prouidence onely, +by the burning asunder of our spritsaile-yard with ropes and saile, and the +ropes about the spritsaile-yarde of the Carack, whereby we were fast +intangled, we fell apart, with burning of some of our sailes which we had +then on boord. The Exchange also being farther from the fire, afterward was +more easily cleared, and fell off from abaft And as soone as God had put vs +out of danger, the fire got into the fore-castle, where, I think, was store +of Beniamin, and such other like combustible matter, for it flamed and ran +ouer all the Carack at an instant in a maner. The Portugals lept ouer-boord +in great numbers. Then sent I captaine Grant with the boat, with leaue to +vse his owne discretion in sauing of them. So he brought me aboord two +gentlemen, the one an old man called Nuno Velio Pereira, which (as +appeareth by the 4 chapter in the first booke of the woorthy history of +Huighen de Linschoten) was gouernour of Mocambique and Cefala, in the yeere +1582. and since that time had bene likewise a gouernour in a place of +importance in the East Indies. And the shippe wherein he was comming home +was cast away a little to the East of the Cape of Buona Speranza, and from +thence be traueiled ouer-land to Mocambique, and came as a passenger in +this Carack. The other was called Bras Carrero, and was captaine of a +Carack which was cast away neere Mocambique, and came likewise in this ship +for a passenger. Also three men of the inferior sort we saued in our boat, +onely these two we clothed and brought into England. The rest which were +taken vp by the other ship boats, we set all on shore in the Ile of Flores, +except some two or three Negros, whereof one was borne in Mocambique, and +another in the East Indies. This fight was open off the Sound between Faial +and Pico 6 leagues to the Southward. The people which we saued told vs that +the cause why they would not yeeld, was, because this Carack was for the +king, and that she had all the goods belonging to the king in the countrey +for that yeere in her, and that the captaine of her was in fauor with the +king, and at his returne into the Indies should haue bene Viceroy there. +And withall this ship was nothing at all pestered neither within boord nor +without, and was more like a ship of warre then otherwise: moreouer she had +the ordinance of a Carak that was cast away at Mocambique, and the company +of her, together with the company of another Carack that was cast away a +little to the Eastwards of the Cape of Buona Speranza. Yet through +sicknesse which they caught at Angola, where they watered, they say, they +had not now aboue 150 white men, but Negros a great many. They likewise +affirmed that they had three noblemen and three ladies in her, but we found +them to differ in most of their talke. All this day and all the night she +burned, but the next morning her poulder which was lowest being 60 barrels +blew her abroad, so that most of the ship did swim in parts aboue the +water. Some of them say, that she was bigger then the Madre de Dios, and +some, that she was lesse: but she was much vndermastered, and vndersailed, +yet she went well for a ship that was so foule. The shot which wee made at +her in great Ordinance before we layde her aboord might be at seuen bouts +which we had, and sixe or 7 shot at a bout, one with another, some 49 shot: +the time we lay aboord might be two houres. The shot which we discharged +aboord the Carack might be some twentie Sacars. And thus much may suffice +concerning our daungerous conflict with that vnfortunate Carack. + +The last of Iune after long traversing of the seas we had sight of another +mightie Carack which diuerse of our company at the first tooke to be the +great S. Philip the Admiral of Spaine, but the next day being the first of +Iuly fetching her vp we perceiued her indeede to be a Carack, which after +some few shot bestowed vpon her we summoned to yeeld; but they standing +stoutly to their defence vtterly refused the same. Wherefore seeing no good +could be done without boording her I consulted what course we should take +in the boording. But by reason that wee which were the chiefe captaines +were partly slaine and partly wounded in the former conflict, and because +of the murmuring of some disordered and cowardly companions, our valiant +and resolute determinations were crossed: and to conclude a long discourse +in few words, the Carack escaped our hands. After this attending about +Coruo and Flores for some West Indian purchase, and being disappointed of +our expectation, and victuals growing short, we returned for England, where +I arriued at Portesmouth the 28 of August. + + * * * * * + +The casting away of the Tobie neere Cape Espartel corruptly called Cape + Sprat, without the Straight of Gibraltar on the coast of Barbarie. 1593. + +The Tobie of London a ship of 250 tunnes manned with fiftie men, the owner +whereof was the worshipful M. Richard Staper, being bound for Liuorno, +Zante and Patras in Morea, being laden with marchandize to the value of 11 +or 12 thousand pounds sterling, set sayle from Black-wall the 16 day of +August 1593, and we went thence to Portesmouth where we tooke in great +quantine of wheate, and set sayle foorth of Stokes bay in the Isle of +Wight, the 6. day of October, the winde being faire: and the 16 of the same +moneth we were in the heigth of Cape S. Vincent, where on the next morning +we descried a sayle which lay in try right a head off vs, to which we gaue +chase with very much winde, the sayle being a Spaniard, which wee found in +fine so good of sayle that we were faine to leaue her and giue her ouer. +Two dayes after this we had sight of mount Chiego, which is the first +high-land which we descrie on the Spanish coast at the entrance of the +Straight of Gibraltar, where we had very foule weather and the winde scant +two dayes together. Here we lay off to the sea. The Master, whose name was +George Goodley, being a young man, and one which neuer tooke charge before +for those parts, was very proud of that charge which he was litle able to +discharge, neither would take any counsel of any of his company, but did as +he thought best himselfe, and in the end of the two dayes of foule weather +cast about, and the winde being faire, bare in with the straights mouth. +The 19 day at night he thinking that he was farther off the land than he +was, bare sayle all that night, and an houre and an halfe before day had +ranne our shippe ypon the ground on the coast of Barbarie without the +straight foure leagues to the South of Cape Espartel. Whereupon being all +not a litle astonied, the Master said vnto vs, I pray you forgiue me; for +this is my fault and no mans else. The company asked him whether they +should cut off the main mast: no said the Master, we will hoyse out our +boate. But one of our men comming speedily vp, said, Sirs, the ship is full +of water, well sayd the Master, then cut the mayne-mast ouer boord: which +thing we did with all speede. But the afterpart suddenly split a sunder in +such sort that no man was able to stand vpon it, but all fled vpon the +foremast vp into the shrouds thereof; and hung there for a time: but seeing +nothing but present death approch (being so suddenly taken that we could +not make a raft which we had determined) we committed our selues vnto the +Lord and beganne with dolefull tune and heauy hearts to sing the 12 Psalme. +Helpe Lord for good and godly men &c. Howbeit before we had finished foure +verses the waues of the sea had stopped the breathes of most of our men. +For the foremast with the weight of our men and the force of the sea fell +downe into the water, and vpon the fall thereof there were 38 drowned, and +onely 12 by Gods prouidence partly by swimming and other meanes of chests +gote on shoare, which was about a quarter of a mile from the wracke of the +ship. The master called George Goodley, and William Palmer his mate, both +perished. M. Caesar also being captaine and owner was likewise drowned: +none of the officers were saued but the carpenter. + +We twelue which the Lord had deliuered from extreme danger of the Sea, at +our comming ashore fell in a maner into as great distresse. At our first +comming on shore we all fell downe on our knees, praying the Lord most +humbly for his merciful goodnesse. Our prayers being done, we consulted +together what course to take, seeing we were fallen into a desert place, +and we traueled all that day vntill night, sometimes one way and sometimes +another, and could finde no kinde of inhabitants; onely we saw where wilde +beasts had bene, and places where there had bene houses, which after we +perceiued to haue bene burnt by the Portugals. So at night falling into +certaine groues of oliue trees, we climed vp and sate in them to auoid the +danger of lions and other wilde beasts, whereof we saw many the next +morning. The next day we trauelled vntill three of the clocke in the +afternoone without any food but water and wilde date roots: then going ouer +a mountaine, we had sight of Cape Espartel; whereby we knew somewhat better +which way to trauell, and then we went forward vntill we came to an +hedgerow made with great long canes; we spied and looked ouer it, and +beheld a number of men aswell horsemen as footmen, to the number of some +fiue thousand in skirmish together with small shot and other weapons. And +after consultation what we were best to do, we concluded to yeeld our +selues vnto them, being destitute of all meanes of resistance. So rising vp +we marched toward them, who espying vs, foorthwith some hundred of them +with their iauelings in their hands came running towards vs as though they +would haue run vs thorow: howbeit they onely strooke vs flatling with their +weapons, and said that we were Spaniards: and we tolde them that we were +Englishmen: which they would not beleeue yet. By and by the conflict being +ended, and night approching, the captaine of the Moores, a man of some 56 +yeres olde, came himselfe vnto vs, and by his interpreter which spake +Italian, asked what we were and from whence we came. One Thomas Henmer of +our company which could speake Italian, declared vnto him that we were +marchants, and how by great misfortune our ship, marchandise, and the +greatest part of our company were pitifully cast away vpon their coast. But +he void of all humainity and all manhood, for all this, caused his men to +strip vs out of our apparel euen to our shirts to see what money and iewels +we had about vs: which when they had found to the value of some 200 pounds +in golde and pearles they gaue vs some of our apparel againe, and bread and +water onely to comfort vs. The next morning they carried vs downe to the +shore where our shippe was cast away, which was some sixteene miles from +that place. In which iourney they vsed vs like their slaues, making vs +(being extreame weake,) to carry their stuffe, and offering to beat vs if +we went not so fast as they. We asked them why they vsed vs so, and they +replied, that we were their captiues: we said we were their friends, and +that there was neuer Englishman captiue to the king of Marocco. So we came +downe to the ship, and lay there with them seuen dayes, while they had +gotten all the goods they could, and then they parted it amongst them. +After the end of these seuen dayes the captaine appointed twenty of his men +wel armed, to bring vs vp into the countrey: and the first night we came to +the side of a riuer called Alarach, where we lay on the grasse all that +night: so the next day we went ouer the riuer in a frigate of nine oares on +a side, the riuer being in that place aboue a quarter of a mile broad: and +that day we went to a towne of thirty houses, called Totteon: there we lay +foure dayes hauing nothing to feed on but bread and water: and then we went +to a towne called Cassuri, and there we were deliuered by those twenty +souldiers vnto the Alcaide, which examined vs what we were: and we tolde +him. He gaue vs a good answere, and sent vs to the Iewes house, where we +lay seuen dayes. In the meane while that we lay here, there were brought +thither twenty Spaniards and twenty Frenchmen, which Spaniards were taken +in a conflict on land, but the Frenchmen were by foule weather cast on land +within the Straights about Cape de Gate, and so made captiues. Thus at the +seuen dayes end we twelue Englishmen, the twelue French, and the twenty +Spaniards were all conducted toward Marocco with nine hundred souldiers +horsemen and fotmen, and in two dayes iourney we came to the riuer of Fez, +where we lodged all night, being prouided of tents. The next day we went to +a towne called Salle, and lay without the towne in tents. From thence we +trauelled almost an hundred miles without finding any towne, but euery +night we came to fresh water, which was partly running water and sometime +raine water. So we came at last within three miles of the city of Marocco, +where we pitched our tents: and there we mette with a carrier which did +trauel in the countrey for the English marchants: and by him we sent word +vnto them of our estate; and they returned the next day vnto vs a Moore, +which brought vs victuals, being at that instant very feeble and hungry: +and withall sent vs a letter with pen, inke, and paper, willing vs to write +vnto them what ship it was that was cast away, and how many and what men +there were aliue. For said they we would knowe with speed, for to morow is +the kings court: and therefore we would know, for that you should come into +the citie like captiues. But for all that we were carried in as captiues +and with ropes about our neckes as well English as the French and +Spaniards. And so we were carried before the king: and when we came before +him he did commit vs all to ward, where wee lay 15 dayes in close prison: +and in the end we were cleared by the English Marchants to their great +charges; for our deliuerance cost them 700 ounces, euery ounce in that +country contayning two shillings. And when we came out of prison we went to +the Alfandica, where we continued eight weekes with the English marchants. +At the end of which time being well apparelled by the bountie of our +marchants we were conueyed downe by the space of eight dayes iourney to S. +Cruz, where the English ships road: where we tooke shipping about the 20 of +March, two in the Anne Francis of London, and fiue more of vs fiue dayes +after in the Expedition of London, and two more in a Flemish flie-boat, and +one in the Mary Edward also of London, other two of our number died in the +countrey of the bloodie-fluxe: the one at our first imprisonment at +Marocco, whose name was George Hancock, and the other at S. Cruz, whose +name was Robert Swancon, whose death was hastened by eating of rootes and +other vnnatural things to slake their raging hunger in our trauaile, and by +our hard and cold lodging in the open fields without tents. Thus of fiftie +persons through the rashnesse of an vnskilfull Master ten onely suruiued of +vs, and after a thousand miseries returned home poore, sicke, and feeble +into our countrey. + +Richard Iohnson. +William Williams Carpenter. +Iohn Durham. +Abraham Rouse. +Iohn Matthewes. +Thomas Henmore. +Iohn Siluester. +Thomas Whiting. +William Church. +Iohn Fox. + + * * * * * + +The letters of the Queenes most excellent Maiestie sent by one Laurence + Aldersey vnto the Emperour of Aethiopia, 1597. + +Inuictissimo potentissimoque Abassenorum regi, magnoque vtriusque +Aethiopiae imperatori &c. + +Elizabetha Dei gratia Angliae, Franciae, et Hiberniae regina, fidei +defensor &c. summo ac potentissimo AEthiopiae imperatori salutem. Quod ab +omnibus qui vbiuis terrarum ac gentium sunt regibus principibusque +praestari par et aequum est, vt quanquam maximo locorum interuallo +dissiti, et moribus ac legibus discrepantes, communem tamen generis humani +societatem tueri et conseruare, mutuaque vt occasio ferret, charitatis et +beneuolentiae officia velint exercere: in eo nos de vestra fide atque +humanitate spem certissimam concipientes huic subito nostro Laurentio +Alderseio in regnum vestrum proficiscenti, hasce literas nostras, quibus +et nostra erga vos beneuolentia testata sit, et illum hinc profectum esse +constet, potissimum vobis indicandus dedimus. Qui cum orbis terrarum +perscrutandi cognoscendique studio permotus, multis antehac regionibus +peragratis, iam tandem in eas regiones, quae vestrae ditionis sunt, +longum, periculosumque iter instituat: cum ipse existimauit, tum nos etiam +sumus in eadem opinione, ad incolumitatem suam, atque etiam ad gratiam +apud vos, plurimum illi prafuturum, si diplomate nostro munitus, +beneuolenentiae nostrae et profectionis hinc suae testimonium ad vos +deferret. Nam cum summus ille mundi conditor rectorque praepotens Deus, +regibus principibusque qui suam vicem gerunt, orbem terrarum, suis cuique +finibus pro rata portione designatis, regendum atque administrandum +dederit; eoque munere ius quoddam inter eos fraternae necessitudinis, +aeternumque foedus ab illis colendum sanxerit: non erit (vt arbitramur) +ingratum vobis, cum beneuolentiae nostrae significationem, tam immensa +maris ac terrarum spatia transgressam, ab vltima Britannia ad vos in +Aetheiopiam perferri intellexeritis. Nobisque rursus erit incundum, cum +subditorum nostrorum praedicatione, ab ipsis Nili fontibus, et ab ijs +regionibus quae solis cursum definiunt, fama vestri nominis ad nos +recurret. Erit igitur humanitatis vestrae huic subdito nostro eam largiri +gratiam, vt in ditionem vestram sub praesidio ac tutela vestri nominis +intrare, ibique saluus et incolumis manere possit: quod ipsum etiam +ab aliis principibus, per quorum regiones illi transeundum erit magnopere +petimus, nobisque ipsis illud honoris causa tributum existimabimus: neque +tamen maiorem hac in re gratiam postulamus, quam vicissim omnium principum +subditis, omniumque gentium hominibus ad nos commeantibus liberrime +concedimus. Datum Londini quinto die Nouembris: anno regni nostri +tricesimo nono: annoque Dom. 1597. + + +The same in English. + +To the most inuincible and puissant king of the Abassens, the mightie +Emperour of Aethiopia the higher and the lower. + +Elizabeth by the grace of God Queene of England, France and Ireland, +defender of the faith, &c. To the most high and mightie Emperour of +Aethiopia greeting. Whereas it is a matter requisite and well beseeming all +kings and princes of what lands or nations soeuer, be they neuer so much +disseuered in place or differing in customes and lawes, to maintaine and +preserue the common societie of mankinde, and, as occassion shall be +offered, to performe mutuall duties of charitie and beneuolence: we for +that cause concerning most undoubted hope of your princely fidelity and +courtesie, haue giuen vnto this our subiect Laurence Aldersey intending to +trauell into your dominions, these our letters to be deliuered without +faile vnto your Highnesse, to the end they may be a testimony of our good +will towards you and of our saide subiect his departure from England. Who, +after his trauels in many forren countreys, being as yet enflamed with a +desire more throughly to surueigh and contemplate the world, and now at +length to vndertake a long and daungerous iourney into your territories and +regions: both the sayd Laurence thought, and our selues also deemed, that +it would very much auaile him, as well for his owne safetie as for the +attayning of your fauour, if, being protected with our broad seale, hee +might transport vnto your Highnesse a testimony of our louing affection and +of his departure from hence. For sithence almightie God the highest +creatour and gouernour of the world hath allotted vnto kings and princes +his vicegerents [sic--KTH] ouer the face of the whole earth, their designed +portions and limits to be ruled and administred by them; and by this his +gift hath established among them a certaine law of brotherly kindnesse, and +an eternall league by them to be obserued: it will not (we hope) seeme +vnpleasant vnto your highnesse, when you shall haue intelligence of our +louing letters sent so huge a distance ouer sea and land, euen from the +farthest realme of England vnto you in Aethiopia. On the other side our +selues shall take great solace and delight, when as by the relation of our +owne subiects, the renowme of your name shall be brought vnto vs from the +fountains of Nilus, and from those regions which are situate vnder the +Southerne Tropike. May it please you therefore of your princely clemencie +to vouchsafe so much fauour on this our subiect, that he may, vnder the +safeguard and protection of your name, enter into your highnesse dominions, +and there remaine safe and free from danger. Which fauour and courtesie wee +doe likewise most earnestly request at the hands of other princes, through +whose Seigniories our said subject is to passe; and we shall esteeme it as +done vnto our selfe and for our honours sake. + +Neither do we require any greater fauour in this behalfe, then we are vpon +the like occasion most ready to graunt unto the subiects of all princes and +the people of all Nations, trauelling into our dominions. Given at London +the fift day of Nouember, in the thirtie and ninth yeere of our reigne: and +in the yeare of our Lord 1597. + + + + +APPENDIX + +THE OMISSIONS OF CALES VOYAGE. + +[Footnote: The Editor takes this opportunity of making grateful +acknowledgements to the Marquis of Stafford, for his permission to print +this Tract from his curious Manuscript; and to the Reverend H. J. Todd, for +furnishing him with the accurate transcript from which it is printed.] + +The first and greatest occasion let slip in our Voyage was, that we did not +possess ourselues of the fleete that was bound for the Indies, the lading +whereof would not onelie haue paid all charges of the iorneie, but haue +enabled vs a great while to wage warre with Spaine, with the meanes of +Spaine. To which I aunswere, that if either I had ben followed the first +morning of our comminge before the harbor when I bare with it, or if we had +entred the same Sundaie in the afternoone when we were vnder saile, and +within cannon shot of the enemies fleete, or after the men of warre were +taken and burnt, the nexte daie if anie shipping had gone vp as I vrged by +mine owne speech sent by Sir Anthonie Ashlie, who being secretaire at wars +was to record euerie mans seruice or omission; if anie of these had ben +don, then I saie had that fleete ben easilie possessed. For the first +morning they had neither their men aboard, as it was since confessed by our +prisoners, nor were provided of any counsel what to doe. In the afternoone +the same daie we had found the men of warre and the Marchaunts fleet +altogether in one bodie, and engaged them both at once, so as at the same +time we had defeated the one, we had possessed the other. And the next daie +presentlie vpon the fight and victorie against the Kings shipps, we had +found them all so amazed and confounded as they would haue thought of +nothing but of sauing themselues, and we had taken the ships, the riches in +them, and the fleet of gallies, without striking a blow; as both our +prisoners and captaines out of the gallies haue assured vs. But the first +morninge when I boare with the harbor, almost all the fleet came to an +ancker by the point Saint Sebastian a league wide of me, and gaue the +enemie leasure to send men and all necessaries aboard. When I was gon in, I +could neither get my companion to waigh his anckor, nor most of those that +were waied to goe in with me. And the next daie I had much a do to make our +ships fight at all. And when God had giuen vs victorie, my perswasions nor +protestations could make them that were sea-commaunders go or send vp to +possess the fleet of the Indies, whiles we assailed the towne, so as the +enemie had almost 48. howers to burne his owne shipps. + +The second imputation that maie be laid to vs, was, that we did abandon +Cales, when we were possesst of it, whereas the holding of it would haue +ben a naile not in the foote of this great monarch but in his side, and +haue serued for a diversion of all the wars in these parts. To which I +aunswere, that some of our sea-commaunders, and especiallie my colleague, +did not onelie oppose themselues to that designe, (whose oppositions mine +instructions made an absolute barre,) but when we came to see how the +forces that should be left there might be victualed till succours came, the +victualls were for the most part hidden and embeazled, and euery ship began +at that instant to feare their wants, and to talke of goeing home; soe as I +should neither haue had one ship to staie at Cales, nor victualls for the +garrison for 2. moneths. And therefore I was forced to leaue Cales, and did +not choose to abandon it. + +The third obiection we haue to aunswere is, whie we did not lie for the +carricks and Indian ships, seing we were on the coast the verie time that +is thought fittest for their intercepting and vsual of their retourne. In +which I must first cite the testimonie of all our commanders by land and +sea, that when we had in our retourne from Cales doubled the Cape St. +Vincent comonlie called the South Cape, I vrged our going to th' Islands of +Ozores, founding my selfe vpon these reasons: first, that it was more +certaine to attend them at the land-fall where theie must needs touch, then +to seeke them in the wide sea; and next, that the aduises sent out of +Spaine and Portingall since our being of myght meete them at the Islands, +and make them divert from coming thither. Besides, the Spaniards after +theie saw vs engaged at Cales would neuer suspect or dreame of our goeing +to the Islands. And when this counsell was reiected, and we come in the +sight of Lisbon, I there againe pressed the lieing for them with a selected +fleet, and offered vpon that condition to send home the land-forces, and +all such ships as want of victualls, leaks sickness, or anie thing els had +made vnfit to staie out at sea. But first the L. Admirall and Sr. Wa[l]ter +Rawligh did directlie by attestation vnder their hands contradict the first +proposition that I made, that some ships should attend that seruice. And +when we came to the hypothesis, which were fitt and their captaines content +to staie out in all the fleet, except the Low Countrie Squadron, there +could be found but two, my L. Thom. Howard and my selfe; so as by the whole +counsell at wars, it was resolued that as well my offer and opinion, as +euerie mans els amongst vs, should be kept vnder his hand, for our +particuler discharges, and I be barred of staieing, except my L. Admirall +would assent to leaue some 8. or 10. of the Marchaunts ships besides 2. of +the Queenes: which he refused to doe: and soe our dessigne brake of. + +The last omission maie seeme to be in this, that since all our seruice +consisted in taking or distroyinge the Spanish shipping and sea prouisions, +that we did not looke into all his chiefe ports, and do him in that kind as +much hurt as we might haue done. To which I aunswere, that first my end in +going to Cales was not onlie because it was a principall port and the +likeliest to be held by vs, by cause of the seat and naturall strength of +it; but also for that it was the farthest good porte south-ward; so as +beginning with it we might, if some greater seruice did not diuert vs, goe +to all the good ports betwixt that and the northmost ports of Biskaie: +which was a better waie then to haue begonne or giuen the enemie an alarum +in the middest of his Countrie, or the neerest ports to vs; for so our +attempts would haue ben more difficile, and our retreats at last from those +farthest ports less safe; considering the wants, infections, and other +inconveniences that for the most parte doe accompanie the retraicts of our +fleet and armies in long iourneies. But after we had ended at Cales, it was +by all our seamen thought a capitall offence to name the goeing ouer the +Barre at St. Lucars. Betwixt St Lucars and Lisbone there is no good porte. +From Lisbone I was barred by name, if it had bene free for vs to haue gone. +Yet our seamen are made of the same stuffe, Sr. Francis D: and his companie +was, when theie lost the occasion of his taking Lisbone, for feare of +passing by the castle of St. Iulian's. From Lisbone to the Groine there is +no port to hold the Kings or anie other great shipping. To the Groin with +cart-ropes I drew them: for both I vowed and protested against their +refusall, and parted companie with them when they offered to hold another +course. But when we came to the mouth of the harbor, and sent in some of +our small vessells, we saw there was nothing there, nor yet at Furroll; for +into that port also we made our discouveries to looke. + +After which discouverie we held our last counsell. And then I vrged our +goeing to St. Audica, the passage St. Sebastian, and all other good ports +all along the coast. But mine associat did altogether refuse to goe farther +alonge the coaste, complaininge of wants, and obiecting our being embayed, +and I know not what. In which opinion Sir Walter Rawlighe strengthened him; +and theie were both desirous to take vpon them the honnor of breaking that +dessigne. And of landing at the Groyne, or attempting the towne, theie +would not heare by anie meanes. And presentlie euery man cried to set saile +homewards. Since which time theie haue made such haste, as I, tarieing +behind to bring along with me the St. Andrew taken at Cales and the flie +boate that carries our artillarie haue lost them all, sauing Monsieur +Oauerworme and his squadron, and some few small shipps. + +[These "Omissions" were not included in the early editions, but appeared in +Woodfall's edition of 1812]. + + + + +INDICES. + +Where the same Document a given in Latin and English, the reference is +to the English Version. + +N.B. The large print indicates that the _whole_ section refers to the +subject mentioned. + + +INDEX TO VOL. VIII. + +ACHIM, (Sultan of Egypt). +ACRE. +AIGUES MORTES. +AILWIN, founds Ramsey Abbey. +ALBEMARLE (John, Earl of). +ALCAYR. See _Cairo_. +ALFRED, (King), sends Sighelmus to India. +ALURED, (Bishop of Worcester). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM. +AMAZONS. +AMBASSADORS SENT TO CONSTANTINOPLE BY EDWARD THE CONFESSOR. +ARABIA. +ARUNDEL (Earl of), HIS VOYAGE. +ASSUR. +ATHELARD. HIS TRAUAILES. + +BABYLON. +BALDWIN (Archbishop of Canterbury), HIS LIFE AND TRAUAILES. +BALDWIN (of Bouillon). +BALDWIN (King of Jerusalem), defeats Saracens. +BALE, quoted, + --HIS LIFE OF MANDEVILLE. +BANGOR COLLEGE, Pelagius its head. +BASSET (William). +BATH (Abbey of). +BAUGIE (F. de). +BEAUCHAMP, family. +BEDA, quoted. +BETHLEHEM. +BOHUN (Henry), his death. +BRENSE (Peter de). +BRUNO, murdered by Sweyn. + +CAELIUS (Mount). +CAESARIA. +CAIRO. +CANUTE. +CAYPHAS (city). +CELESTINE. +CHANTENAY (P. de). +CHAPMAN, quoted. +CHESTER. +CHESTER (Earl of). HIS VOYAGE. +CHRONICON HIEROSOLYMITANUM, quoted. +CLERMONT. +CONRAD, Emperor of Germany. +CONSTANTINOPLE. +CROYLAND (Abbey). +CRUSADE, preached by Urban. +CURSON, (Robert). HIS TRAUAILES. +CYPRUS. + +DAMIETTA, (Siege of). +DES ROCHES, (Pierre). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM. +DEWIN, (P. de). +DEWIN, (W. de). + +EARTH, its form. +EDGAR (Prince). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM. +EDMUND (Prince). +EDWARD (The Confessor). SENDS AMBASSADORS TO CONSTANTINOPLE. +EDWARD I. HIS VOYAGE INTO ASIA. +EGYPT. +EPHESUS (Seven Sleepers of). + +FONTENELLE (Abbey). +FORTIS (W.). +FURNIVALL (Gerard). +FURNIVALL (Thomas). +FURNIVALL (William). + +GENNADIUS, quoted. +GIRALDUS CAMBRENSIS, quoted. +GLOUCESTER Cathedral founded. +GODERICUS; HIS ADVENTURES IN HOLY LAND. +GODFREY (de Bouillon). +GODWIN (Earl). +GREEK ALPHABET. +GUIMUNDE, Patriarch of Jerusalem. +GUTUERE, HER VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM. + +HADERWERCK (of Westphalia). +HARDINE. HIS ADVENTURES IN HOLY LAND. +HAROLD (King). +HEBREW ALPHABET. +HENRY II. ASSIGNS MONEY TO THE CRUSADES. +HERMANNUS, companion of Robertus Kettenensis. +HOLINSHED, quoted. +HOLY LAND, _passim_. +HONORIUS, quoted, + --pope. +HOVEDEN (Roger), quoted. +HUGH of Tabaria, Patriarch, + --Killed. +HUNGARY. + +ICONIUM, + --Battle of. +INGULPHUS'S Journey to Jerusalem, + --quoted, + --notice of. + +JAVA, Mandeville's account of. +JERUSALEM. SWEYN'S JOURNEY to, + --ALURED'S JOURNEY, + --JOURNEY OF INGULPHUS, + --JOURNEY OF ROBERT CURTHOSE, + --VOYAGE OF GUTUERE, + --VOYAGE OF PRINCE EDGAR, + --VOYAGE OF JOHN LACY, + --W. MANDEVILLE'S VOYAGE, + --VOYAGE OF PIERRE DES ROCHES, + --described by Mandeville. + +JOHN (King). HIS CONTRIBUTION TO THE HOLY LAND. +JOPPA, + --VISITED BY A FLEET OF ENGLISH, DANES, ETC. +JULIAN (the Apostate). + +LACY (John). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM. +LEDET (W.). +LELAND, quoted. +LIEGE. +LOUIS (King of France). +LUCY (Geoffrey de). +LYNN. + +MAHOMET. +MALLOW, (P. De). +MANDEVILLE, (Sir J). HIS LIFE BY BALE, + --HIS EPITAPH, + --CONTENTS OF HIS BOOK, + --HIS VOYAGES IN LATIN BEGIN, + --IN ENGLISH, + --Prologue, + --From England to Constantinople, + --Of the cross and crown of Jesu Christ, + --Of the city of Constantinople and the faith of the Greeks, + --From Constantinople to Jerusalem, + --Of St John the Evangelist, + --Legend of the daughter of Hippocrates, + --Of the Soudans and the tower of Babiloyn, + --Of the desert between the church of St Catherine and Jerusalem, + --Of the dry tree, + --How roses came first in the world, + --Of the pilgrimages in Jerusalem and of the holy places thereabout, + --Of the temple of our Lord, Of the crueltie of King Heroud, + --Of Mount Syon, + --Of Probatica Piscina, + --Of Natatorium Siloe, + --Of the Dead Sea, + --Of Jordan, + --Of the Head of St. John the Baptist, + --Of the Samaritans, + --Of Galilee, + --Of Antichrist, + --Of Nazareth, + --Of the age of our Lady, + --Of the day of Doom, + --Of the Jacobites, + --Of the Surryenes, + --Of the Georgians, + --Of Damascus, + --Of three ways to Jerusalem, + --Of the Saracens, + --Of Mahomet, + --Of Albany and Lybia, + --Of the Wisshinges for Wacchinge of the Sperhauk, + --Of Noah, + --Of the land of Job, + --Of the Chaldeans, + --Of Amazons, + --Of the true diamond, + --Of Indian islands, + --Of idols, + --Of pepper, + --Of a marvellous well, + --Of St Thomas, + --Of the citie Of Calamye, + --Of the isle of Lamary, + --Of the form of the Earth, + --Of Java, + --Of Oracles, + --Some wonderful nations, + --Of the Great Khan of Cathay. +MANDEVILLE, (William), Earl of Essex. HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM. +MANICHES, Emperor of Constantinople. +MANUEL, Emperor of Constantinople. His LETTER TO HENRY II. +MARASIA. +MARSEILLES. +MATTHEW OF WESTMINSTER, quoted. +MAXIMUS, King of Britain. +MONTFORT, (Simon de). + +NAZARETH, + --taken. +NEVEL or NEVILLE (John). + +OCTOBONUS. +OLYMPIC games. +OLYMPUS. +ORIEL COLLEGE,(_note_). +OTHO (of Roges). + +PAMPELUNA, 30. +PARIS (Matthew), quoted. +PASHED, meaning of word. +PELAGIAN HERESY, hatched. +PELAGIUS, LIFE AND TRAUAILES OF. +PESMES (Gerald). +PETRUS DE RUPIBUS, _see Des Roches_. + +RAMA, Siege of. +RAMSEY ABBEY, + --Its foundation. +RICHARD, (Canonicus), HIS TRAUAILES. +RICHARD, (Earl of Cornwall). HIS VOYAGE TO SYRIA. +ROBERT, (Curthose); HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM. +ROBERT (son of Godwin), accompanies Prince Edgar to Jerusalem. +ROBERTUS KETENENSIS. HIS TRAUAILES. + +ST. ALBANS. +ST. AUMOND (A. de). +SALISBURY (William Longespee, Earl of), HIS VOYAGE TO SYRIA, + --his death. +SHERBORNE Abbey. +SIGHELMUS (Bishop of Sherborne). A TESTIMONIE OF HIS + MISSION TO INDIA, + --A SECOND TESTIMONY. +STANLAW Abbey, founded. +SWANUS, HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM. +SYRIA. + +TABARIA (see TIBERIAS). +TABOR (Mount). +TEMPLARS (Knights). +TIBERIAS. +TILNEY, (Sir Frederick). A NOTE CONCERNING HIM. +TILNEY, (Thomas). +TRAPANI. +TURNEHAM (R.), HIS TRAUAILL. +TYRE. + +URBAN (Pope). + +VIRGIL (Polydore), quoted. +VOISIE (J.). + +WAKE (Hugh). +WALDEN'S epistle to Martin the fifth, quoted. +WALTER (Hubert). HIS TRAUAILES. +WHITEMAN, (Andrew). HIS TRAUAILES. +WILLIAM OF MALMESBURY, quoted. +WILLIAM OF NEWBURY, quoted. +WILLIAM OF TYRE, quoted, + --HIS LIFE AND TRAUAILES. +WINCHESTER, (Earl of). HIS VOYAGE. +WITRAZH, (Bernard). +WOLSTAN, Abbot of Gloucester. + + + +VOL. IX. + +ADAM'S MOUNT. +ALDERSEY, (Laurence). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM. +ALDRIDGE, (M.). +ALEXANDRIA. +ASCENSION, (Ship). +ASSASSINS, (nation). +AUGUSTA, (island). +AZARON. + +BABEL, (Tower of). +BABYLON, + --coins and measures. +BARNACLES, growing on trees. +BARNARD CASTLE. +BARRETT (W). HIS ACCOUNT OF THE MONEY AND MEASURES + OF THE EAST. +BARTON, (E.). HIS VOYAGE TO SYRIA. +BASAN. +BASSORA, + --coins and measures. +BECK (Anthony). MADE PATRIARCH OF JERUSALEM. +BETHLEHEM. +BEZENEGAR. +BIR. +BODIN OR DADIN, (island). +BOLINGBROKE, (Henry, Earl of). His quarrel with Thomas + Mowbray. +BROADBANK, (W.). +BUSHELL, (E.). + +CADIZ. +CAESAR, (F.), quoted. +CAIDO. +CAIRO. +CAKAM. +CALVARY. +CAMBAIA. +CAMBALETH. +CAMPA. +CANDIA. +CARMEL. (mount). +CASSAN or CASSIBIN. +CASTLER, (N.). +CATZA. +CEPHALONIA, (island). +CEUSKALA. +CEYLON. +CHALDEANS. Their manners. +CHARGES FROM ALEPPO TO GOA. +CHATAGAN. +CHAUL. +CHILENSO. +CHIO. +CICERO. His tomb. +CLEMENT V., Pope. +CLOVES. +COCHIN + --Coins and measures. +COINS + --ancient. +COMUM. +CORFU. +CORNARI FAMILY. +CREMATION of dead. +CROCODILES +CUSTOMS, (strange). +CYPRUS + --ruins in. + +DAMAN. +DIAMONDS. +DIU. + +ELIZABETH (Queen), a present from the Sultan of Turkey's wife. +ELTHAM. + +FAMAGUSTA. +FEASTS of the Tartars. +FILA CAVENNA (ship). +FILLIE (D.). + +FISH, an abundance of + --Caught by birds. +FOSTER (R.), appointed Consul in Syria + --Letter of directions to. +FREDERICK (Caesar), HIS VOYAGE TO THE EAST. +FROISSART, quoted. +FUCO. + +GANGES (river). +GELBER, (A.), death of. +GESTE. +GINGER. +GIRALDUS CAMBRENSIS, quoted. +GOA + --Besieged + --Coins and measures. +GREECE (Patriarch of). +GRIDA. + +HAKLUYT'S NOTE TO MANDEVILLE'S VOYAGE. +HAREBORNE, (W.). +HENRY IV. HIS INTENDED VOYAGE TO THE HOLY LAND. +HEWISH (R.). +HICKOCKE (T.), HIS TRANSLATION OF FREDERICK'S VOYAGE. +HOLLINSHED, quoted. +HUNTINGTON (Earl of), HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM. + +IANZU. +IDOL (a strange). +INDIA (Upper). +INNS. + +JAVA. +JENISE, (M.). +JERUSALEM + --JOHN LOCKE'S VOYAGE + --L. Aldersey's voyage. +JOPPA. + +KARAMORON river. +KEELE (J.). + +LELAND, quoted. +LEZINA (island). +LINDSEY. +LISSA (island). +LOCKE, (J.), HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM + --Testimonial to him from the vicar of Mount Syon. + +MAHOMET, his dress. +MALABAR. +MALACCA + --Coins and measures. +MALIAPOR. +MANCY (province). +MANDEVILLE, HIS VOYAGE CONTINUED + --Of the Tartars + --Of the Emperor of Persia + --Of various countries + --Of Prester John + --Of the Valley Perilous + --Some curious nations + --Of the Isle of + Bragman + --of King Alexander + --Of the name of Prester John + --Of Pissemyres + --Of the rivers of Paradise + --Of various islands + --Conclusion + --Hakluyt's note on Mandeville's voyage + --Passage of Pliny illustrating above. +MANNA. +MARTAVAN. +MATAPAN (cape). +MATTHEW GONSON (ship). +MECCA, A DESCRIPTION OF THE PILGRIMAGE TO + --Described. +MEDINA. +MELEDA (island). +MELISTORTE. +MERCHANDISE, WHENCE VARIOUS KINDS ARE PROCURED. +MONSOON. +MOUMORAN (island). +MURAD KHAN, Emperour of Turkey. + +NEGAPATAN. +NESTORIANS. +NORFOLK (Thomas Mowbray, duke of). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM. +NUTMEGS. + +ODORICUS. HIS JOURNEY AMONG THE TARTARS. + --His journey from Pera to Thana + --To further India + --His return + --His death. +OLD MAN of the Mountains + --His death. +OPIUM. +ORISA. +ORMUS + --coins and measures. +OSBORNE, (E.). + +PALM TREES. +PEARL FISHERIES. +PEGU. +PELAGOSA (island). +PELICANS. +PEPPER, how grown. +PERA. +PIGMIES. +PLINY, quoted. +POLUMBRUM. + +QUINZAI. + +RAGUSA, tributary of Turkey. +RAMUSIUS, quoted. +RAYNOLDS (ship). +ROSETTO. +ROVIGNIO. +RUBIES. +RUBRICIS, (W de), quoted. + +SAILS made of reeds. +ST. THOMAS + --His tomb. +SALARIES OF OFFICERS OF GRAND SIGNOR'S COURT. +SATAGAN. +SIAM. +SOBISSACLAO. +STAPER, (R.). +SULTANIA. +SUMACOTO. +SUMATRA. +SYLAN (island). See _Ceylon_. + +TATHALAMASIN (island). +TAURIS. +THALAY, a river. +THANA. +THIBET. +TORTOISES. +TREBIZONDE. +TREES, (curious). +TRIPOLIS. +TURKS, number of soldiers sent against Emperor. +TYPHOON. + +VENICE. +VIRGILE, (P.) quoted. + +WALSINGHAM (T.) quoted. +WILKINSON (T.). +WINCHESTER (Bishop of). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM. +WRAG (Richard). HIS LETTER TO ROWLAND HEWISH. + +ZAITON. +ZANTE. + + + +INDEX TO VOL. X. + +ABILFADA ISMAEL, quoted. +AGRA. +ALDWORTH, (R). +ALEPPO, ENTERED BY SOLIMAN, + --Mentioned. +AMURATH I. +AMURATH II. +ANDERSON, (H.). +ANSELL, (E.). +ANTOGIL (Bay of). +ARCULFUS. +ARTILLERY, of Mahomet II. +ASHLEY, (R.). +ASPLEY, (W.), Bookseller. + +BABEL (Tower of). +BABYLON. +BAJAZET I. +BALSARA. +BALY (island). +BANNING, (A.). +BANNING, (P.). +BANTAM + --described. +BARNE, (George). +BARNES, (P.). +BARRETT, (W.). +BATE, (R.). +BEAUVAIS, (V. de). +BELLAPORE. +BELLERGAN. +BIRRA. +BISAPORE. +BLUNT, (J.). +BOND, (G.). +BONDE, (M.). +BORROUGH, (W.). +BOSTOCK, (T.). +BRAHMINS. +BROOKE, (R.). +BURSE. + +CAMBAIETTA. +CAPE OF GOOD HOPE. +CARPINI, (J. de P.). +CAVIARE. +CEYLON. +CHAUL. +CHINA (King of). +CLARKE, (R.). +CLAUDIAN, quoted. +COMMENUS, family. +COMORIN, (cape). +CONSTANTINOPLE. +CORDALL, (T.). +COUCHE, (? Quichew). +COWLTHIRST, (H.). +COXE, (R.). +CREMATION, of dead. +CUSTOMS, (curious). + +DALKINS (T.). +DANSEY (A.). +DARSALL (R.). +DIU. +DOFFIE (C.). +DORRINGTON (F.). +DOWE (R.). +DRAKE (Sir Francis). +DUCANGE quoted. + +EBONY. +ELDRED (John), + --HIS VOYAGE TO TRIPOLIS +ELEPHANTS. +ELIZABETH (Queen), HER LETTER TO ZELABDIN ECHEBAR + --TO THE KING OF CHINA + --HER SECOND CHARTER TO THE LEVANT COMPANY. +EMANTUEL (ship). +EUPHRATES (river). + +FAITH (C.). +FARRINGTON (T.). +FATEPOR. +FELUGIA. +FITCH (Ralph), mentioned + --A LETTER TO LEONARD POORE + --HIS VOYAGE TO THE EAST + --Imprisoned. +FLORIDA. +FONES (A.). +FONSECA (V.), Archbishop of Goa. + +GALVANO (A.), quoted. +GANGES. +GARROWAY (T.). +GARROWAY (W.). +GERMAIN (J.), biographical notice. +GIBBON, quoted. +GOA. +GOLCONDA or GULCONDA. +GRIMES (P.). +GUILLAME (P.). + +HAKLUYT (R.) +HAREBORNE (W.) +HARTE (J.) +HAWKINS (Sir John) +HETTON +HEWET (H.) +HOLMEDEN (E.) +HUIGHEN (J.) + --HIS ACCOUNT OF NEWBURY AND FITCH + +INDIES, A VOYAGE OF CERTAIN SHIPS OF HOLLAND + +JACKSON (A.) +JANISSARIES +JAPAN +JAVA, currency of + --THE VOYAGE TO JAVA OF A DUTCH FLEET +JEAN SANS PEUR +JENKINSON (A.), HIS ACCOUNT OF SOLIMAN'S ENTRY INTO + ALEPPO + --HIS SAFE CONDUCT FROM SOLIMAN +JERUSALEM, VOYAGE OF LA BROCQUIERE +JOHN PALAEOLOGUS (Emperor) +JONES (P.) + +LA BROCQUIERE, (B. de). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM + --Discours preliminaire + --Seconde partie + --Quitte la Bourgogne + --Arrive a Turin + --Bologne + --Florence + --Rome + --Venise + --Corfou + --Modon + --Jaffa + --Jerusalem + --Bethlehem + --Vallee d'Hebron + --Retourne a Gaza, + --Visite Nazareth + --Sur + --Bayreuth + --Damas + --Retourne a Nazareth + --Visite Balbec + --Antioch + --Adene + --Therse + --Larande + --Cohonge + --Burse + --Pera + --Constantinople + --Arrive a Andrianople + --Lessere + --Belgrade + --Son opinion des Turcs et de la maniere de les attaquer + --Arrive a Pest + --rencontre Albert II, Duc d'Autriche + --Arrive a Vienne + --Constance + --Bale + --Arrive a Dijon +LAHORE +LANGHENEZ (B.) his account of the Dutch voyage to India +LAURENCE (S.) +LAURENCE (P.) +LEATE (N.) +LEECH (W.). See _Leeds_ +LEEDS (W) +LEGRAND D'AUSSY, his translation of La Brocquiere +LETHLANDE, (E.) +LEVANT COMPANY, their second charter +LINCHOTEN (J. Huighen van). See _Huighen_. + +MAHOMET +MALACCA +MANDEVILLE (Sir J.) +MARRIAGES (strange) +MARTAVAN +MARTIN V. (Pope) +MARTIN (R.) +MARTIN (R. jun.) +MASSAM (W.) +MASULIPATAN +MAURITIUS +MAY (R.) +MEXICO +MIDDLETON (T.) +MOGUL, (the great) +MOLUCCAS +MOSLEY, (N.) + +NEWBURY (John). HIS LETTER TO RICHARD HAKLUYT + --A LETTER TO LEONARD POORE + --ANOTHER LETTER TO THE SAME + --A LETTER TO JOHN ELDRED AND WILLIAM SHALS + --A SECOND LETTER TO THE SAME + --A THIRD LETTER TO LEONARD POORE + --His imprisonment +NEWTON (J.) +NORDEN (T.) + +OFFLEY (R.), 69. +ORMUS +OSBORNE, (Sir E.) + --First Governor of Levant Company + +PARVIS (H.) +PATANAW or PATNA +PEARDE (N.) +PEGU +PEPPER +PERA +PERU +PHILLIP (W.) HIS TRANSLATION OF THE DUTCH VOYAGE TO INDIA +PITCH issues from Earth +POORE (Leonard) +PORTER (E.) +PORTER (G.) +POWER (L.) See _Poore_. + +RATCLIFFE (A.) +RAYNOLDS or REINOLDS (ship) +RUBRUQUIS (W. de) +RUTILIUS quoted + +SADLER (E.) +SADLER (R.) +ST. HELENA (island) +ST. LAURENCE (island) +SALTER (G.) +SALTONSTALL (R.) +SANDIE (R.) +SCANDERBERG +SCUDAMORE (Sir J.) Dedication to +SERREPORE +SERVIDORE +SHALS (W.) +SIAM +SIGISMUND (Emperor) +SIMONS (T.) +SOFIA +SOLIMAN. HIS ENTRY INTO ALEPPO + --HIS SAFE CONDUCT TO ANTHONY JENKINSON +SOME (S.) +SPENCER (J.) +STAPER (J.) +STAPER, (R.) +STEVENS, (T.) Biographical notice +STILE, (N.) +STILE, (O.) +STILICHO +STORY, (J.) +STROPENE, (M.) +SUMATRA + +TARTARS +TRIPOLIS (Syria) +TYGER (ship) + +VIRGINIA + +WARNER (W.) +WATTES (J.) +WILKES, (W.) +WOLFE (J.), Printer + +ZELABDIN ECHEBAR + + + + +INDEX TO VOL. XI. + +ADAMS (R.) +AFRICA, DESCRIBED BY R. EDEN + --nations of +ALDAIE (J.) HIS ACCOUNT OF THE FIRST VOYAGE to MOROCCO +ALDERSEY (L.) HIS SECOND VOYAGE TO EGYPT + --mentioned +ALDRIDGE (W.) +ALEXANDRIA +ALGIERS +AMITY, (ship) +ANGOLA +ASHBIE (F.) +ASHLEY (R.) +ASSAN AGA, A LETTER TO +AUSTINE (P.) +AZORES + +BAKER (R.) +BARBARY, SECOND VOYAGE TO + --CHARTER TOR TRADE TO +BARNE (Sir G.) +BARTHOLOMEW (ship) +BARTON (E.) +BARTON (R.) +BEARE (J.) +BEAUFORT (John de) +BENCE (E.) +BENDS (W.). His account of the loss of the Edward Cotton +BENIN, WELSH'S VOYAGE TO + --NEWTON AND BIRD'S VOYAGE TO + --THEIR SECOND VOYAGE +BERRIN (J.) +BIRD (J.) HIS VOYAGE TO BENIN + --HIS SECOND VOYAGE +BLANCO (cape) +BLONKET (M.) +BRISTOL +BRITON (ship) +BURGES (R.) +BURROUGH (Sir J.) HIS SERVICES AT SEA +BUTLER (Sir J.) +BUTTOLFE (ship) + +CABOT (S.) +CAIRO +CALAIS VOYAGE, OMISSIONS OF +CAMDEN +CANARIES (islands) +CANDIA +CAPE OF GOOD HOPE +CARNABY (R.) +CARTER (W.) +CARTHAGE +CASTELIN (E.) +CASTLE OF COMFORT (ship). +CAVENDISH. +CENTURION (ship). +CEPHALONIA. +CHALONER (Sir Th.), HIS VOYAGE TO ALGER. +CHANCELLOR (R.). +CHARLES V. +CHEESMAN (W.). +CHESTER (Sir W.). +CHIAN. +CHINA, ACCOUNT OF, FROM PORTUGUESE PRISONERS + --described. +CHRISTOPHER (ship). +COCKE (W). +CORDALL (T.). +COREA (cape). +CORRIENTES (cape). +COTTON (E.). +COWEL (W.). +CRAWFORD (R.). +CREMATION. +CRETTON (W.). +CROMPTON (W.). +CYPRUS. + +DALLIMORE (O.). +DARTMOUTH. +DASSEL (T.), HIS VOYAGE TO GUINEA. +DAVIES (N.). +DAVIS (M.). +DAVISON (R.). +DAWED, meaning of. +DEIMOND (R.). +DEWLY (W.). +DICKENSON (M.). +DIER (A.), + --hanged. +DODDINGTON (J.). +DOVER, 84. +DOWNTON (N.), HIS ACCOUNT OF THE SINKING OF LAS CINQUE LLAGAS. +DRAGONS. +DRAKE (Sir F.). + +EDEN (R.) HIS DESCRIPTION OF AFRICA. +EDWARD IV. +EDWARD BONAVENTURE (ship). +EDWARD COTTON (ship). +EGYPT. +ELEPHANTS. +ELIZABETH (Queen), HER LETTERS FOR THE RELEASE OF THE JESUS + --HER CHARTER FOR TRADE TO BARBARY + --HER LETTER TO THE EMPEROR OF MOROCCO + --HER PATENT TO EXETER MERCHANTS FOR A TRADE TO GUINEA + --HER PATENT TO T. GREGORY + --HER LETTER TO THE EMPEROR OF AETHIOPIA. +ELIZABETH (ship). +ELIZABETH STOKES (ship). +ELVERS (A.). +EPITAPH OF P. READ. +ETHIOPIA, Emperor of. +EVESHAM (J.), HIS VOYAGE INTO EGYPT. +EXETER. + +FABIAN (W.). +FALMOUTH. +FENNER (G.), HIS VOYAGE TO GUINEA. +FERRO, (island). +FILLIE (D.). +FORSTER (T.). +FOSTER, (J.). +FOX (J.), HIS ENTERPRISE IN DELIVERING 266 CHRISTIANS + --HIS CERTIFICATE FROM THE PRIOR OF GALIPOLI + --THE BISHOP OF ROME'S LETTERS IN HIS BEHALF + --THE KING OF SPAIN'S LETTERS IN HIS FAVOR. +FRANKE (J.). +FREIGIUS (J.T.), HIS ACCOUNT OF STUKELEY'S VOYAGE TO BARBARY. +FROBISHER (Sir M.). +FROES (A.), Letter of. +FROISSART, quoted. +FUQUIEN. + +GAGO. +GAINSH (R.). +GALIPOLI (Candia). +GARAMANTES have their women in common. +GENOA, chronicles of, quoted. +GEORGE (ship). +GEORGE BONAVENTURE (ship). +GERARD (Sir W.). +GERBI (island). +GIBBEN (R.). +GIBRALTAR (straits of). +GIFFORD (G.). +GILMAN (J.). +GOA. +GOLDEN NOBLE, (ship). +GOMERA (island). +GONSON (B.). +GRAND CANARY. +GRAVESEND. +GREEN DRAGON (ship). +GREGORY (T.), HIS PATENT. +GRENVILLE (Capt.). +GRIFFITH (W.). +GRIMES (Master). +GROLOS (T.), Bishop of Astraphen. +GROVE (Master). +GUINEA. + +HAKLUYT (R.), HIS ACCOUNT OF A VOYAGE TO THE EAST INDIES. +HAMOR (W.). +HARCOURT (Sir J.). +HAREBORNE (W.), + --A LETTER TO THE SULTAN OF TRIPOLIS + --HIS LETTER TO HARVIE MILLERS + --A LETTER TO, FROM ALGIERS + --A LETTER TO MUSTAPHA + --A LETTER TO EDWARD BARTON + --Obtains a commandment from the Grand Signor + --A LETTER TO T. TYPTON + --A LETTER TO ASSAN AGA. +HARISON (A.). +HART (ship). +HARWICH. +HASLEWOOD (R.) +HASLEWOOD (S.). +HASSAN BASSA. +HAWKINS (Sir J.). +HAWKWOOD, HIS VICTORIES IN ITALY. +HELLIER (A.). +HENRY IV. HIS VOYAGE TO TUNIS. +HENRY VIII. +HERCULES (ship). +HERMAN (J.). +HEXASI. +HICKMAN (A.). +HIND (ship). +HOGAN (E.), HIS EMBASSY TO MOROCCO. +HOLINSHED, quoted. +HOOPER (J.). +HOWARD (Lord T.). +HOWEL (H.). +HUDDIE (W.). + +ISHAM (H.). + +JAMES (Leonard). +JANISSARIES. +JAPAN, PORTUGUESE ACCOUNT OF. +JESUS (ship). +JONES (P.). +JOHN II. OF PORTUGAL, + --HIS EMBASSY TO EDWARD IV. +JOHN BAPTIST (ship). +JOHN EVANGELIST (ship). +JUDDE (Sir A.). +JUDITH (ship). + +KERRY (J.). +KING (W.). +KNEVET (Sir H.). +KNOLLES (H.). + +LAMBERT (F.). +LAMBERT (N.). +LANCASTER (J.), HIS VOYAGE TO THE EAST INDIES. +LANDMAN (D.). +LAS BARBAS, (cape). +LEICESTER (Earl of). +LION (ship). +LISNEY (T.). +LISTER (C.). +LOCK (G.), HIS VOYAGE TO GUINEA + --ARTICLES DELIVERED TO. +LOCK, (M.). +LOCK (T.). +LODGE (T.). +LONG (N.). +LUIZ (Don), HIS LETTER TO PINTEADO. + +MACAO. +MADEIRA. +MAFFEIUS (P.), quoted. +MAKEWORTH (J.). +MALACCA. +MALTA. +MALTA, Knights of. +MAUNSELL (R.). +MARCH (P.). +MARCHANT ROYAL (ship). +MARIA MARTIN (ship). +MARTABAN. +MARTIN (Alderman). +MASSE (N.). +MAYFLOWER (ship). +MENSURADO (cape). +MERLIN (ship). +MILLERS (H.). +MILO (island). +MINION (ship). +MOON (ship). +MOONSHINE (ship). +MOORE (R.). +MOORE (W.). +MORE (T.). +MOROCCO, FIRST VOYAGE TO + --Mentioned. +MORRIS (R.). +MOURA (N. de). +MULY HAMET, HIS LETTER TO THE EARL OF LEICESTER. +MURAD KHAN, Sultan of Turkey, + --HIS LETTER TO THE SULTAN OF TRIPOLI FOR THE RESTITUTION OF THE JESUS. + +NAPER (G.). +NELSON (J.). +NEWHAVEN. +NEWTON (J.), HIS VOYAGE TO BENIN, + --HIS SECOND VOYAGE. +NICHOLAS (ship). +NIGRITIS. _See Senegal_. +NORWICH. + +ODORICUS, quoted. +OMISSIONS OF CALES VOYAGE. +OSBORNE (Sir E.), + --HIS LETTER TO THE KING OF ALGIERS. + +PACHIN. +PALMAS (cape). +PALMER (R.). +PALMER (W.). +PALMES (island). +PARKER, (H.). +PATRAS. +PEGU, described. +PENELOPE (ship). +PET (P.). +PETER (ship). +PETERSON (J.). +PETONEY (M.), HIS ACCOUNT OF AFRICAN TRADE. +PHILIP II., King of Spain. +PINTEADO (A.), + --HIS DEATH + --HIS PATENT FROM THE KING OF PORTUGAL + --LETTER FROM DON LUIZ. +PLYMOUTH. +PORTO SANTO (island). +PORTSMOUTH. +PRESTER JOHN. +PRIMROSE (ship). + +QUANCHAI. +QUINTE (J.). +QUINZI. + +RABNET (ship). +RAGSTER (H.). +RAINOLDS (R.), HIS VOYAGE TO GUINEA. +RAINOLDS (W.). +RALEIGH (Sir W.), HIS ACCOUNT OF BURROUGH'S VICTORIES AT SEA + --mentioned. +RALPH (J.). +RAWLINGS (R.). +RAYMOND (G.). +READ (P), HIS EPITAPH. +RESENDE (Garcia de), quoted. +RIBBE (R.). +RICHARD II. +RICKMAN (R.). +RIO DEL ORO. +RIO DULCE. +RIO GRANDE. +ROBERTS (H.), HIS EMBASSY TO MOROCCO. +ROBINSON (M.). +ROSE (ship). +ROSSETTA. +ROWLIE (F.). +RUSSELL (Sir J.). +RUTTER (W.), HIS VOYAGE TO GUINEA. +RYE. + +ST. LUCAR or LUCAS. +ST. SEBASTIAN (island). +ST. THOME (island). +ST. VINCENT (river). +SALOMON (ship). +SANDERS (Thomas), HIS ACCOUNT OF THE VOYAGE OF THE JESUS. +SARAGASSO or SARGASSO (weed). +SCIO (island). +SELMAN (E.). +SENEGAL (river). +SEVILLE. +SHINGLETON (T), HIS PASSPORT FROM THE KING OF ALGIERS. +SIBBLE HERNINGHAM. +SKEGS (R.). +SMITH (H.). +SMITH (J.). +SMITH (N.). +SONNINGS (W.). +SOTHERICK (J.). +SOUSA (B. A. de), HIS ADVERTISEMENT TO PHILIP II. +SPARTEL (cape). +SPORADES (island). +STAFFORD (Marquis of). +STAPER (N.). +STEVENS (T.). +STREET (W.). +STUKELEY (T.), HIS VOYAGE TO BARBARY. +SUMATRA. +SWALLOW (ship). + +TAVISTOCK. +TENERIFFE. +THIN (H.). +THOMAS (J.) HIS ACCOUNT OF THE SECOND VOYAGE TO BARBARY. +THOMAS (W.), quoted. +THOMSON (T.). +TIGER (ship). +TINTAM (J.). +TOBIE (ship), CAST AWAY. +TODD (Rev. H. J.). +TOMBUTO. +TOWRSON (W.), HIS FIRST VOYAGE TO GUINEA + --HIS SECOND VOYAGE TO GUINEA + --HIS THIRD VOYAGE TO GUINEA. +TRACIE (J.). +TRINITY (ship). +TRIPOLIS. +TUNIS. +TYPTON (Master). + +UNDERWOOD (J.). +UNICORN. +UNICORN (ship). +UNTICARO (P.). + +VERDE (cape). +VERDE (islands). +VIRGIL (P.), quoted. +VOIS (T.). + +WELSH (J.), HIS VOYAGE TO BENIN + --SECOND VOYAGE. +WHITE (M.). +WHITE (W.). +WHITE (T.), HIS CAPTURE OF TWO SPANISH SHIPS. +WICKNEY (W.). +WIGHT (isle of). +WILKINS (W.). + +WILLES. HIS TRANSLATION OF THE PORTUGUESE ACCOUNTS OF CHINA + --OF JAPAN. +WILLIAMS (T.). +WILSON (H.). +WINDHAM (T,), + --His death. +WINTER (J.). +WINTER (W.). +WOODBRIDGE. +WOODFALL, HIS EDITION OF HAKLUYT. +WOODWARD (J.). +WREN (W.), HIS ACCOUNT OF FENNER'S VOYAGE TO GUINEA. +WROTH (Sir T.). + +YORKE (Sir J.). +YOUNG (J.). + +ZANTE. +ZANZIBAR. + + + + +CONTENTS TO VOL. VIII. + +I. The Life and trauailes of Pelagius borne in Wales. + +II. A Testimonie of the sending of Sighelmus, Bishop of Shirburne, by King + Alphred, vnto Saint Thomas of India in the yeare of our Lord 883, + recorded by William of Malmesburie. + +III. A Second testimonie of the foresaid Sighelmus, etc. + +IV. The trauailes of Andrew Whiteman, alias Leucander + +V. The Voyages of Swanus, the son of Earl Godwin, to Jerusalem, recorded by + William of Malmesburie. + +VI. A Voyage of three Ambassadours who in the time of Edward the Confessor, + were sent vnto Constantinople, and from thence to Ephesus, recorded by + William of Malmesburie. + +VII. The Voyage of Alured, bishop of Worcester, vnto Jerusalem. Recorded by + Roger Hoveden. + +VIII. The Voyage of Ingulphus, Abbat of Croyland, vnto Jerusalem, described + by the said Ingulphus. + +IX. Diuers of the hon. family of the Beauchamps, with Robert Curtoys sonne + of William the Conqueror, made a Voyage to Jerusalem, 1096. (From Hol. + pag. 22. vol. 2.) + +X. The Voyage of Gutuere toward Jerusalem, 1097. + +XI. The Voyage of Prince Edgar vnto Jerusalem, 1102. Recorded by William of + Malmesburie. + +XII. Mention made of one Godericus, etc. + +XIII. Mention made of one Hardine, etc. + +XIV. A fleete of Englishmen, Danes, etc. arriued at Joppa. written in the + Chronicles of Jerusalem. + +XV. The trauailes of one Athelard, recorded by Master Bale. + +XVI. The life and trauailes of one William of Tyre. + +XVII. The trauailes of Robertus Ketenensis. + +XVIII. A Voyage of certaine Englishmen vnder the conduct of Lewes King of + France vnto the Holy Land. + +XIX. The Voyage of John Lacy to Jerusalem. + +XX. The Voyage of William Mandeuile to Jerusalem. + +XXI. A great supply of money to the Holy Land by Henry II. + +XXII. A letter from Manuel the Emperour of Constantinople vnto Henrie the + second, King of England. Recorded by Roger Houeden. + +XXIII. The Life and Trauailes of Balwinus Deuonius, sometime Archbishop of + Canterbury. + +XXIV. An annotation concerning the said Baldwine, taken out of Giraldus + Cambrensis. + +XXV. A note touching Sir Frederike Tilney. + +XXVI. The trauailes of Richard Canonicus. + +XXVII. The large contribution to the succour of the Holy Land made by King + John of England. 1201. + +XXVIII. The trauailes of Hubert Walter, bishop of Salisburie. + +XXIX. The trauailes of Robert Curson. + +XXX. The voyage of Ranulph Earle of Chester and others to the Holy Land. + 1218. + +XXXI. The voyage of Henry Bohun and Saer Quincy to the Holy Land. + +XXXII. The trauailes of Ranulph Glanuile, Earle of Chester. + +XXXIII. The voyage of Petrus de Rupibus, Bishop of Winchester, to + Jerusalem. 1231. + +XXXIV. The voyage of Richard Earle of Cornewall. into Syria. + +XXXV. The voyage of William Longespee into Asia. 1248. + +XXXVI. The voyage of Prince Edward into Asia. 1170. + +XXXVII. The Trauaile of Robert Turneham. + +XXXVIII. The Life of Sir John Mandeville, written by Master Bale. + +XXXIX. The Tomb and Epitaph of Sir John Mandeville from Ortelius. + +XL. Tabula Libri Joannis Mandevil. + +XLI. Liber Joannis Mandevil de Turcia, Armenia, AEgypto, Lybia, Syria, + Arabia, Persia, Chaldaea, Tartaria, India, et infinitis insulis + civitatibus et locis. + + The English version begins. + + + +CONTENTS TO VOL. IX. + +I. Mandeville's voyage continued. + +II. Richardi Hakluyti brevis admonitio ad lectorem. + +III. Verba C. Plinii secundi. + +IV. Plinius de Scythis. + +V. Anthony Beck Bishop of Durisme made Patriarch of Hierusalem from Leland. + +VI. Itinerarium fratris Odorici. + _Sub-section_ + 1 His journey from Pera to Thana. + 2 Of the maners of the Chaldaeans and of India. + 3 How pepper is had and where it groweth. + 4 Of a strange idol &c. + 5 Of certaine trees yielding meale, hony, and poyson. + 6 Of the abundance of fishes, &c. + 7 Of the island of Sylan and of the mountain where Adam mourned for + Abel. + 8 Of Upper India, &c. + 9 Of the city Fuco. + 10 Of a monastery where many strange beastes doe live. + 11 Of the city of Cambaleth. + 12 Of the Glory of the great Can. + 13 Of certain innes or hospitals, &c. + 14 Of the four feasts which the Great Can solemnizeth. + 15 Of divers provinces and cities. + 16 Of a certaine rich man who is fed, &c. by fiftie virgins. + 17 Of the death of Senex de Monte. + 18 Of the honour and reverence done unto the great Can. + 19 Of the death of Frier Odoricus. + +VII. The voyage of the Lord John of Holland, Earl of Huntington to + Jerusalem. 1394. + +VIII. The voyage of Thomas Mowbray, duke of Norfolk to Jerusalem. 1399. + +IX. The voyage of the Bishop of Winchester to Jerusalem. 1417. + +X. A preparation of a voyage of King Henry IV. to the Holy Land, &c. + +XI. The voyage of M. John Locke to Jerusalem. + +XII. The first voyage made by M. Laurence Aldersey to Jerusalem, &c. 1581. + +XIII. The passport made by the great master of Malta to the Englishmen in + the barque Reynolds, 1582. + +XIV. Commission given by M. William Harebourne, to Richard Foster, etc. + +XV. A letter of directions to Richard Foster. + +XVI. A commandement for Chio. + +XVII. A description of the yearly voyage unto Mecca. + +XVIII. The voyage of M. Caesar Frederick into East India and beyond. + +XIX. The money and measures of Babylon, Balsara, and the Indies, written by + W. Barret. + +XX. A note of charges from Aleppo to Goa. + +XXI. A declaration of the places from whence sundry goods come. + +XXII. The times or monsons wherein ships depart in the East Indies. + +XXIII. A briefe extract specifying the daily payments by the grand Signior + to the officers of his court. + +XXIV. The Turkes chiefe officers. + +XXV. The number of souldiers attending upon the Beglerbegs, &c. + +XXVI. The Turkes yeerely revenue. + +XXVII. Ambassadors allowances. + +XXVIII. Letter from Richard Wrag to Richard Hewish. + +XXIX. A description of a voyage to Constantinople and Lyria, by Master + Edward Barton, 1595. + +XXX. The number of Turkish souldiours which were appointed to goe into + Hungary against the Christian Emperour, 1594. + + + + +CONTENTS TO VOL. X. + +I. The manner of the entring of Soliman the great Turke into Aleppo, noted + by Anthony Jenkinson. 1553. + +II. A note of the presents that were given to the grand Signior. + +III. The safe conduct given by Soliman to Anthony Jenkinson. + +IV. Letters concerning the voyage of John Newbury and Ralph Fitch to the + East. 1583. + _Sub-section_ + 1 A letter from the Queen to Zelabdin Echebar + 2 A letter from the Queen to the King of China + 3 A letter of John Newbury to Richard Hakluyt + 4 A letter from the said J. Newbury to Leonard Poore + 5 Another letter from the same to the same + 6 A letter from J. Newbury to John Eldred and William Shals + 7 A second letter from the same to the same + 8 A letter from the same to Leonard Poore + 9 A letter from Ralph Fitch to Leonard Poore + +V. The voyage of Ralph Fitch to the East. 1583-91. + +VI. The report of John Huighen van Linchoten, concerning J. Newbury and R. + Fitch's imprisonment. + +VII. The voyage of John Eldred to Tripolis in Syria. + +VIII. The second letters patents graunted by the Queenes Maiestie to the + companie of the English marchants for the Levant. 1592. + +IX. Voyage d'Outremer et retour de Jerusalem en France par la voie de terre + par Bertrandon de La Brocquiere remis en Francais moderne par Le grand + d'Aussy. + +X. A voyage made by certaine ships of Holland into the East Indies. 1595-7. + +XI. A true report of the voyage to Java performed by a fleet from Holland. + 1598. + +XII. A briefe description of a voiage before handled, in maner of a + iournall. + + + +CONTENTS TO VOL. XI. + +I. The voyage of Henry, Earl of Derby, afterwards Henry IV., to Tunis, from + P. Virgil. + +II. The same story from Froissart and Holinshead. + +III. The memorable victories of John Hawkwood, from Camden. + +IV. The Epitaph of Peter Read at Norwich. + +V. The voyage of Sir Thomas Chaloner to Alger. + +VI. The woorthy enterprise of John Foxe in delivering 266 Christians out of + captivity at Alexandria, 1577. + +VII. The copie of the certificate for John Fox. + +VIII. The Bishop of Rome, his letters in the behalfe of Iohn Fox. + +IX. The king of Spaine his letters for the placing of John Fox in the + office of gunner. + +X. The voyage made to Tripolis in Barbary in the Jesus, written by Thomas + Sanders. 1583. + +XI. The Queene's letters to the Turke for the restitution of the Jesus. + +XII. The Turkes letter to the King of Tripolis commanding restitution of + the Jesus. + +XIII. A letter of Master William Hareborne for the release of the Jesus. + +XIV. The voyage of John Evesham into Egypt. + +XV. The second voyage of Laurence Aldersey to Alexandria and Cairo. + +XVI. A letter of the English Ambassador to M. Harvie Millers. + +XVII. A letter to W. Hareborne from Alger. + +XVIII. A letter of W. Hareborne to Mustapha. + +XIX. The passport granted to Thomas Shingleton by the king of Algier. + +XX. A letter of Sir Edward Osborne to the king of Alger. + +XXI. Notes concerning the trade of Alger. + +XXII. Notes concerning the trade in Alexandria. + +XXIII. A letter of the English Ambassador to Edward Barton. + +XXIV. A commaundement obtained of the Grand Signor by W. Hareborne. + +XXV. A letter of William Hareborne to T Typton. + +XXVI. Registrum valoris navium, &c. per trirenes Argerienses ereptorum. + +XXVII. A letter to Assan Aga. + +XXVIII. The originall of the first voyage for traffique into Marocco. 1551. + +XXIX. The second voyage to Barbary. 1552. + +XXX. A voyage into Guinea and Benin. 1553. + +XXXI. A briefe description of Afrike by Richard Eden. + +XXXII. Anthonie Pinteado, his letters patents from the king of Portugal. + +XXXIII. The letter of Don Lewis to Anthonie Pinteado. + +XXXIV. The second voyage to Guinea. + +XXXV. The first voyage made by William Towrson to Guinea. + +XXXVI. The second voyage of W. Towrson to Guinea. + +XXXVII. The third voyage of W. Towrson to Guinea. + +XXXVIII. Certaine articles deliuered to Mr. John Lock. + +XXXIX. A letter of John Lock to the company of marchants adventurers for + Guinea. + +XL. The relation of William Rutter to Anthony Hickman touching a voyage to + Guinea. 1562. + +XLI. A meeting at Sir William Gerard's house. 1564. + +XLII. Relations extracted from Sir John Hawkin's voyage. + +XLIII. The voyage of George Fenner to Guinea written by Walter Wren. + +XLIV. The ambassage of Edmund Hogan to the Emperor of Morocco. 1577. + +XLV. The voyage of Thomas Stukeley into Barbary. + +XLVI. Certaine reports of the province of China learned from Portugalls + taken prisoners. + +XLVII. Of the island Japan and other isles, by R. Willes. + +XLVIII. An excellent treatise of the kingdom of China printed at Macao. + 1590. + +XLIX. A letter by Thomas Stevens to his father. + +L. A briefe relation of the kingdom of Pegu. + +LI. A voyage to the East Indies by the Cape of Buona Speranza, written by R + Hakluyt. + +LII. Certaine remembrances of an intended iourney to Brassil. 1583. + +LIII. The letters patents granted by Her Majestie for a trade to Barbarie. + 1583. + +LIV. The Ambassage of Henry Roberts to the Emperour of Marocco. 1585. + +LV. A letter from Muly Hamet to the Earl of Leicester. + +LVI. The Queenes letters to the Emperour of Marocco. + +LVII. A patent to certaine merchants of Exeter for a trade to the river of + Senega and Gambra in Guinea, 1588. + +LVIII. A voyage to Benin, 1588. Written by James Welsh. + +LIX. The voiage of John Newton and John Bird to Benin. 1588. + +LX. The second voyage of John Newton and John Bird to Benin. 1590. + +LXI. An advertisement sent to Philip II. king of Spaine from Angola by + Baltazar Almeida de Sousa. 1591. + +LXII: Confirmatio treugarum inter Eduardum quartum et Joannem secundum. + 1482. + +LXIII. The ambassage which John II. king of Portugall, sent to Edward IV. + +LXIV. A relation sent by Melchior Peloney to Nigil de Moura. 1591. + +LXV. The Voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to Guinea. + +LXVI. A briefe relation concerning the cities of Tombuto and Gago. + +LXVII. Another relation concerning the same. + +LXVIII. A briefe extract of a patent granted to Thomas Gregory, of Tanton. + +LXIX. The maner of the taking of two Spanish ships by Thomas White, 1592. + +LXX. A true report of the honourable service at sea perfourmed by Sir John + Burrough, prepared by Sir Walter Raleigh. + +LXXI. The firing and sinking of the stout and warrelike Carack called Las + Cinque Llagas, by Nicholas Downton. + +LXXII. The casting away of the Tobie, 1593. + +LXXIII. The letters of the Queene sent by Laurence Aldersey to the Emperour + of AEthiopia, 1597 + +LXXIV. The Omissions of Cales voyage. + +LXXV. Indices, viz.-- + Vol. VIII. + Vol. IX. + Vol. X. + Vol. XI. + +LXXVI. Tables of Contents, viz:-- + Vol. VIII. + Vol. IX. + Vol. X. + Vol. XI. + + +END OF VOL. XI + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS, VOYAGES, +TRAFFIQUES, AND DISCOVERIES OF THE ENGLISH NATION, VOL. 11*** + + +******* This file should be named 12693.txt or 12693.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +https://www.gutenberg.org/1/2/6/9/12693 + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + |